HI 
 

 
 
 r> 
 
 ^ "•, '^l^V O " „:+\ 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SPANISH LANGUAGE, 
 
 COPIOUS EXERCISES; 
 
 THE WHOLE RENDERED SO EASY AS TO BE INTELLIGIBLE EVEN 
 WITHOUT THE AID OF AN INSTRUCTOR. 
 
 </ 
 
 By S. WHITEHEAD, 
 
 Author of A Practical Introduction to Latin Grammar. 
 
 '* Pocos habra que nieguen la utilidad de la Gramatica, si ae 
 considera como medio para aprender alguna lengua estraiia." 
 
 Gram. Castel, 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PRINTED FOR BALDWIN, CRADOCK, AND JOY, PATERNOSTER-ROW; 
 AND BOOSEY AND SONS, OLD BROAD-STREET. 
 
 1826. 
 

 C. Baldwin, Printer, 
 New Bridge-street, London. 
 
TO THE 
 
 REV. WILLIAM BUCKLEY FOX, 
 
 WHOSE IMMENSE ERUDITION IS NOT MORE CONSPICUOUS 
 THAN HIS VIRTUES^ 
 
 THIS LITTLE WORK, 
 
 IN TESTIMONY OF A FRIENDSHIP 
 OF MORE THAN FIFTEEN YEARS DURATION, 
 
 IS MOST AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBED 
 BY 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 

 ERRATA. 
 
 
 Page 
 
 
 
 13 for 
 
 atro read 
 
 otro. 
 
 24 — 
 
 regen ■ 
 
 rigen. 
 
 60 — 
 
 vido ■ 
 
 visto. 
 
 75 — 
 
 hubiereis 
 
 hubieres, 
 
 100 — 
 
 habierau — 
 
 hubieron, 
 
 100 — 
 
 pado ~ 
 
 partido. 
 
 112 — 
 
 fuistes 
 
 fuisteis. 
 
 149 — 
 
 hicerais 
 
 hicierais. 
 
 149 — 
 
 hicieran — 
 
 hicieren. 
 
 And perhaps a few others, too slight to require pointing out. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The increasing interest attached to Spanish litera- 
 ture, and the extensive commercial relations recently 
 established with Spanish America, have rendered the 
 acquisition of the language an object of greater im- 
 portance at the present time than at any former period 
 of our history. Hence, every improvement in books 
 designed for the use of students in that language, is 
 entitled to some share of public approbation. 
 
 Whoever is thoroughly acquainted with the Spanish 
 Grammars which have at various periods been pub- 
 lished in this country will readily admit, that a new 
 one, on a plan at once compendious and simple, is a 
 great desideratum. The author of the following work 
 has no wish to speak disrespectfully of those who have 
 preceded him in the same path, but he may be allowed 
 to observe that most of them were illiterate foreigners, 
 men as ignorant of the true principles of language as 
 of good taste. Destitute of all originality and clearness 
 of conception, they either abbreviated, and in so doing 
 distorted the meaning of what has been written on the 
 
 a3 
 
Vl PREFACE. 
 
 subject by the Spanish Academicians, or they servilely 
 copied from one another, and multiplied imperfections. 
 They proceeded as if their only object were to com- 
 pile a given number of pages within a given time, no 
 matter how ill-digested their performances might be. 
 This language may appear severe, but the author con- 
 ceives himself fully justified in using it. 
 
 In this censure, however, all foreigners who have 
 written on the subject of Spanish Grammar are by no 
 means to be included. Two or three of them have 
 shown that they were sufficiently acquainted with the 
 structure of the language. But in the prosecution of 
 their labours they encountered two insurmountable 
 obstacles : they were not conversant enough with the 
 import of our auxiliary verbs, the nature and extent 
 of our moods and tenses, and the peculiar genius of 
 our language ; and they were totally ignorant of the 
 systematic mode both of execution and of arrangement 
 which a British public expects to be observed in ele- 
 mentary introductions to modern tongues. These, 
 clothed in the unwieldy costume of Priscian or Peri- 
 zonius, may be admired in Spain, but they will no 
 longer be tolerated in England. 
 
 To remedy the defects then which the author con- 
 ceives to exist in preceding introductions to the 
 Spanish language, and to compose a work which should 
 
PREFACE. VU 
 
 combine simplicity of arrangement with perspicuity of 
 manner, which should be practical rather than the- 
 oretical, has been attempted in the following pages. 
 To the definitions he has paid more than ordinary 
 attention ; and wherever any thing likely to occasion a 
 real difficulty has occurred, he has endeavoured, and 
 he trusts not without some degree of success, to render 
 the subject as intelligible as its nature would admit. 
 The Exercises, as well as the examples designed to 
 illustrate the rules, have been selected from the best 
 Castilian writers ; and as neither the peculiar manner 
 of an author, nor the necessary connection of language 
 can be fully learned from isolated and detached sen- 
 tences, narratives of considerable length have been 
 given in the Promiscuous Exercises to Syntax. 
 
 Like most of his predecessors, the author has often 
 availed himself of the assistance afforded by the Royal 
 Spanish Academy, in its celebrated grammatical 
 treatise. But in the general conduct of his work, he 
 is as little indebted to that learned body as to any 
 other authority. He admires as much as any man 
 the diligence of research, the acuteness of investi- 
 gation, and the logical accuracy displayed in that 
 treatise; but he is by no means inclined to consider 
 it of much use to any other than a well educated 
 Spaniard. It is totally inapplicable to the wants of 
 
Vlli PREFACE. 
 
 a learner, and especially of a foreign learner; and 
 its metaphysical subtilties are sometimes such as to 
 render it unintelligible even to those for whose use 
 it seems more peculiarly adapted. Some help has 
 also been derived from the Grammaire Espagnole 
 Raisonnee of Josse, a work which, though extremely 
 defective in regard to Syntax, is the best the author 
 has hitherto seen on the subject. Occasionally, 
 reference has been made to other sources. 
 
 In conclusion, if the following little work be found 
 to answer the design of the author, his humble labours 
 will be abundantly rewarded. That it contains some 
 imperfections, he is by no means disposed to deny; 
 but concerning these, he may be allowed to use, 
 with a slight variation, the words of a great critic : 
 " Lectores peritos harum rerum rogo, ut si qua in re a 
 me erratum reperirent, quod non uno loco ne factum sit 
 vereor, aut ignoscere mini, aut in viam me reducer e 
 velint ; sed ita 9 ut ego in aliis Jeci 9 hoc est } secundum 
 Ennianum illud } Erranti comiter monstrat viam." 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Page 
 
 Pronunciation 1 
 
 Accents 7 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Article 9 
 
 Noun 10 
 
 Classification of Nouns by the Spanish Aca- 
 demy « 10 
 
 Gender 13 
 
 Number . . 16 
 
 Case 16 
 
 Declension of Nouns 17 
 
 Observations on the Cases of Nouns 19 
 
 Exercise on the Articles 24 
 
 Adjective 26 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 27 
 
 Comparatives joined to Nouns, Verbs, and 
 
 Adverbs 29 
 
 Exercise on the Feminine aud Plural of Ad- 
 jectives 31 
 
 Exercise on the Degrees of Comparison. ... 33 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 The Cardinal Numbers 37 
 
 The Ordinal Ditto 38 
 
 Adjectives which when joined to Substantives 
 
 lose one or more letters . . 39 
 
 Pronoun 40 
 
 Personal 40 
 
 Observations on the Personal Pronouns .... 42 
 
 Relative Pronouns 43 
 
 Adjective Pronouns 46 
 
 Exercise on Pronouns 51 
 
 Verb 56 
 
 Moods 58 
 
 Tenses 58 
 
 Of the Terminations ra, se, and ria 63 
 
 Conjugation of Haber 69 
 
 Tener m 71 
 
 Ser and Estar 76 
 
 Observations on the Verbs Ser and Estar . . 81 
 Exercise on the Verbs Haber, Temer, Ser, 
 
 and Estar 82 
 
 First Conjugation — Amar 90 
 
 Second Conjugation — Temer 94 
 
 Third Conjugation — Partir 99 
 
 Exercises on Regular Verbs Active 104? 
 
 Changes in certain Regular Verbs 110 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs Passive Ill 
 
 Exercise on Passive Verbs . . 117 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs Reflected 119 
 
 The Irregular Verbs 123 
 
 Exercise on the Irregular Verbs 170 
 
 Verbs Defective 174 
 
CONTENTS. XI 
 
 Page 
 
 Participle 178 
 
 Some Observations on the Participle 179 
 
 Adverb . . . . . 182 
 
 Preposition 184 
 
 Conjunction 188 
 
 Interjection , . .. 188 
 
 Appendix to Etymology 189 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 Article 202 
 
 Exercise on the Rules for Articles 206 
 
 Adjective 210 
 
 Exercise on Adjectives 216 
 
 Pronoun 219 
 
 Verb 222 
 
 Concord of the Verb 222 
 
 Government of Verbs 224 
 
 Verbs Requiring Certain Prepositions 226 
 
 Exercises on Verbs 229 
 
 Verbs Passive 234 
 
 Infinitive Mood 235 
 
 Participle 237 
 
 Exercise on the Prepositions required by 
 
 Verbs Passive, &c 239 
 
 Preposition 241 
 
 Conjunction 242 
 
 Interjection 244? 
 
 Exercise on the Rules for Prepositions and 
 
 Conjunctions 241 
 
XII CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises : 
 
 I. Gil Bias and the Sick Canon 247 
 
 II. Gil Bias serves Doctor Sangrado. ..... 252 
 
 III. The same continued 255 
 
 IV. Gil Bias and the Archbishop 259 
 
 V. The same continued 263 
 
 VI. Ditto 267 
 
 VII. Ditto concluded 273 
 
 VIII. Martyrdom of Hermenigildus 279 
 
 IX. Invasion of Spain by the Saracens .... 285 
 
 X. The same continued 290 
 
 Appendix to Syntax 296 
 
SPANISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The Spanish Alphabet consists of twenty-eight 
 characters : 
 
 A, B, C, CH, D, E, F, G ? H, I, J, K, L, XX, M, N. 
 N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 1. Of Votvels. 
 
 The vowels are a, e, i 9 o, u, and sometimes y. 
 
 A is sounded like the same vowel in the English 
 words part, far. 
 
 E, like a in acre. 
 
 J, like the same vowel in tuindouo. 
 
 O, like the same vowel in the first syllable of odor. 
 
 U 9 like oo in poor, 
 
 U is silent in the syllables que, qui, gue> gui, unless 
 it admits the diaeresis. Thus agilero is pronounced 
 agooero ; but in guerra the u is not sounded. And 
 what is worthy of remark, though the g before the 
 vowels e and i is a deep aspirate, yet in such instances 
 as guerra it retains its hard sound as if the u were pro* 
 nounced, viz. that of gin the English wot A guest. 
 
 Y, as a vowel, sounds like the Spanish i. 
 
 2. Of Diphthongs and Triphthongs. 
 
 A diphthong is the union of two vowels pronounced 
 by a single emission of the voice ; as ai in dahais, 
 
Z INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Spanish diphthongs are proper ; that is, both vowels 
 are heard, but not always with equal distinctness. 
 
 These diphthongs are ai 9 ay 9 au 9 ei 9 ey 9 ea 9 eo } eu 9 
 ia > ie 9 to, iu 9 oe, oi, oy, ua 9 ue 9 ui 9 uy, no. 
 
 In ao 9 au 9 ei, ey, eu, iu 9 id, uy 9 the first vowel is more 
 distinctly heard than the second : in ai 9 ay 9 oi, oy 9 both 
 are equally sounded ; in the rest the final vowel is more 
 clearly heard. 
 
 A triphthong is the union of three vowels pronounced 
 in the same manner ; as iai in preciais. 
 
 The triphthongs are iai, iei 9 uai 9 uei, uey. 
 
 The only direction which can be given for the pro- 
 nunciation of diphthongs and triphthongs is this: Unite 
 the simple sounds, and pronounce them with so much 
 rapidity that they may appear one. After a few trials 
 the effort will be attended with little difficulty. 
 
 When there is a combination of two or three vowels 
 in the same word, and none of those vowels are accom- 
 panied by an accent, the learner may conclude that 
 they are to be sounded by one emission of the voice ; 
 but if one of the vowels be accented, it forms a syllable 
 of itself. 
 
 3. Of Consonants. 
 
 B, D, F, K, L, M, N, P, S, V,* are pronounced in 
 Spanish as in English. But K, by a late decision of 
 . the Academy, is to be dismissed from the alphabet, 
 and allowed only in some proper names of foreign ad- 
 mission. 
 
 C 
 Sounds like h before a, o 9 u. 
 
 Before the vowels, it has a sound resembling that of 
 ih in our word thanks, but somewhat more liquid. 
 
 * The Spaniards often confound the pronunciation of b and v so 
 that they cannot be distinguished from each other. This, however, 
 is a defect which the Royal Academy of Madrid condemns in a late 
 treatise. / 
 
 The natives of Andalusia, of Murcia, and perhaps of some other pro- 
 vinces, sound the final d like ih in the English word with; but this is 
 not the genuine Castilian sound. True it is that this letter, when final, 
 5s considerably softened down in pronunciation : it, seems almost to 
 expire on t\iQ Dos, Ivit it still preserves its invariable elementary 
 sound, % 
 
INTRODUCTION, 3 
 
 The true sound of c in the latter case is what we call 
 a slight lisp. 
 
 CH 
 Is sounded as in our word church, except in proper 
 names of Hebrew or Greek derivation, where it is pro- 
 nounced like h'; as in Melchisedeclu* 
 
 G, 
 
 Before a consonant, or the vowels a, o, u, has the same 
 hard sound as it has in the English words gap, got. 
 
 But before the other vowels it becomes a deep aspi- 
 rate, or rather a guttural. It is considerably deeper 
 than our h aspirated: its sound bears a strong analogy 
 to that of ch in the Scottish pronunciation of the word 
 loch.f 
 
 H 
 Is scarcely ever aspirated in Spanish. Before ue 9 and 
 between two vowels, as in huevo, almohada, there is 
 indeed an aspiration; but, as the Academy observes, 
 it is so slight that it is hardly perceptible.^ 
 
 J 
 
 Is a guttural before all the vowels. Its sound is exactly 
 that of g before the vowels e and i. 
 
 LL 
 
 Has no corresponding sound in English. That of ly 
 (very liquid) is the nearest approximation that can be 
 
 * CH has no longer the power of k except in the cases above- 
 mentioned. The Academy has suppressed the h after c before a, o, u, 
 in all words where h was not sounded, and where c alone had con- 
 sequently the power of k. Thus choro is now written coro. And for 
 eh before e, i, the same authority has substituted qu in words where 
 the sound was the same ; as querubim, for cherubim. 
 
 t " La g formando las si Fab as ge, gi, es guttural fuerte. Esta es 
 una pronunciacion particular, y propria del Castellano, porque en 
 otras lenguas la g siguendose las referidas vccales, se pronuncia de 
 diferente modo." 
 
 Spanish gutturals are of oriental origin : they were introduced by 
 the Moors during the long space of time in which the followers of 
 the prophet held the dominion of the peninsula. 
 
 % u Lafc.es seiiel de aspiracion tan tenue y delgada que nose per- 
 cibe las mas veces»" 
 
 b2 
 
4 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 given. Thus lleno is pronounced in a manner nearly 
 similar to that which it would be if written lyeno (two 
 syllables). The French word Jille is still nearer in 
 sound.* 
 
 N 
 Has likewise no corresponding sound in our language. 
 It is something similar to that of ny in English. Thus 
 senor is not much unlike the sound which senyor 
 would have if pronounced as a dissyllable. Gn in 
 the French word has almost the exact sound of the 
 Spanish n.\ 
 
 Q, 
 
 Which is always followed by u 9 has before a the same 
 sound as it has in the English word quart: before e and 
 ij qu sounds like k, as in quexas, &c. And in some 
 words of Greek or Hebrew derivation, qu is substituted 
 for ch hard ; as quimera, querubim, and is consequently 
 pronounced like k. See the pronunciation of U* 
 
 By a late decree of the Academy, qu (the u without 
 the diaeresis) is in future to be used only before e and 
 i ; as in quemo, quicio. Qua, qile, qui, quo, are to be 
 written with c ; as cual 9 cuestion, cuota. 
 
 K 
 
 Has a smooth sound, like the same consonant in the 
 English word rod, and a rough one as in the word rage. 
 R is rough at the beginning of a word, as in Roma ; 
 after /, n, s, as in Jwnra ; after b in words compounded 
 with the prepositions ab, ob, sub, as abroga ; and in 
 some other combinations, as in the second syllable of 
 prerogaliva. 
 
 Has two sounds. Before a consonant, or a vowel 
 
 * " Esla letra es expresiva de aquel sonido que se nota en las 
 voces llane, lleno, &c. el qual los Franceses distinguen con las dos 
 II precedidas de la i, que llaraan I mojada." 
 
 f '*■ Los Italianas y los Franceses tienen esta pronunciation, y la 
 explican con la gn" 
 
 $ " La x tiene un sonido guttural fuerte semejanto al de la j y de 
 la g, con todas las vocales, como en axuar, xergon. El mismo sonido 
 si bien algo menos perceptible tiene siempre esta letra en fin de 
 
INTRODUCTION. 5 
 
 marked with the circumflex accent, it is sounded as in 
 the English words exit, experience. 
 
 But when it begins a syllable, and the following 
 vowel has no circumflex, it has the same guttural sound 
 as g and /. 
 
 When x is final, its guttural sound is less sensible 
 than when it occupies another place : it assumes, too, 
 something of a liquid sound. And in some of the pro- 
 vincial dialects of Spain, x final is pronounced like ss. 
 
 Y, 
 
 When a consonant, has a sound somewhat stronger than 
 ours. 
 
 z, 
 
 Before all the vowels, and when final, has the same 
 sound as the Spanish e before c and i 7 — that is, rather 
 more liquid than th in our word thanks, — a slight lisp* 
 
 diction, como en carcax, relox. Esta letra equivale a cs, poniendo 
 sobre la vocal a quien hiere, la nota del accento cireumflexo, 6 
 siguendo consonante." — It appears, however, from a treatise lately 
 published by the Academy (whose words in the original have fre- 
 quently been quoted), that the guttural sound of x is to be discon- 
 tinued. Its place is to be supplied by j before a, o, u, and generally 
 by g before the other vowels. Thus xaban is to be written jaban ; 
 and the vowel following x is not in future to have the circumflex 
 accent. 
 
 The student will perceive that the Spanish Academy has lately 
 made many important innovations in the orthography of the lan- 
 guage, — so many indeed that foreigners will frequently be puzzled 
 by them. Whether these innovations be improvements, may reason- 
 ably be doubted. No common motives should have induced that 
 learned body to deviate from a system which has been so long re- 
 ceived both by natives and foreigners. 
 
 * ** La 3 en Castellano es de sonido uniforme con todas las vocales ; 
 pero como la c tiene la misma pronunciation que la z con la e y con 
 la i, es preciso para su diferencia en lo escrito, atender al uso y al 
 origen de las voces. La s se ha de usar antes de las vocales a, o, u t 
 en que tiene su particular pronunciation, como en zagal, zarzal. 
 Antes de las vocales e, i, no debemos usar de la s, sino quando la 
 hai en el origen de las voces, y ei uso la ha conservado, como en 
 zefi.ro, zizaua. En las voces que en singular acabau con z, como 
 paz, vez, feliz, aunque los plurales que terminan en la silaba ces, 
 pueden escribirse tambien con z, conservando la misma pronuncia- 
 tion, se acostumbrara no obstante, escribirlas con c conforme a su 
 origen ; como paces, veces,f dices." 
 
t> 
 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 
 
 
 Exercise on Pronunciation. 
 
 
 ba, 
 
 be, 
 
 bi, 
 
 bo, 
 
 bu. 
 
 ca, 
 
 cha, 
 
 da, 
 
 fa, 
 
 ce, 
 
 che, 
 
 de, 
 
 fe, 
 
 Cl, 
 
 chi, 
 
 di, 
 
 fi, 
 
 CO, 
 
 cho, 
 
 do, 
 
 fo, 
 
 cu. 
 chu, 
 du. 
 fu. 
 
 gua, 
 ha, 
 
 ge, 
 
 gue, 
 
 he, 
 
 gUi. 
 
 hi, 
 
 go, 
 ho, 
 
 g u - 
 hu. 
 
 la, 
 
 11a, 
 
 le, 
 lie, 
 
 Ik 
 
 Hi, 
 
 lo, 
 llo, 
 
 lu. 
 ilu. 
 
 ma, 
 
 me, 
 
 mi, 
 
 mo, 
 
 mu. 
 
 na, 
 
 ne, 
 
 ni, 
 
 no, 
 
 nu. 
 
 na, 
 
 ne, 
 
 ni, 
 
 fio, 
 
 fiu. 
 
 pa, 
 
 qua, 
 
 ra, 
 
 pe, 
 
 que, 
 
 re, 
 
 qui, 
 
 po, 
 
 quo. 
 
 ro, 
 
 pu. 
 ru. 
 
 sa, 
 ta, 
 
 se, 
 te, 
 
 si, 
 ti, 
 
 so, 
 to, 
 
 su. 
 tu. 
 
 va, 
 
 ve, 
 
 vi, 
 
 vo, 
 
 vu. 
 
 xa, 
 
 xe, 
 
 xi, 
 
 xo, 
 
 xu. 
 
 za> 
 
 ze, 
 
 zi, 
 
 zo, 
 
 zu. 
 
 Another, on those Letters only 'which are attended "with 
 any difficulty to English Learners. 
 
 C. 
 
 Capitan, capa, correo, camara, recuerdo, recobrar, 
 cebada, celebre, ciego, cierva, cesto, cierto, cima, 
 cecina. 
 
 CH. 
 
 Chapin, ochento, chico, chocolate, chucho, chiminea, 
 chimista, Melchisedech. 
 
 G. 
 
 Galgo, gemelos, girar, muger, region, mago, mar- 
 gen, elegir, alguno. 
 
 J. 
 Jamas, hijo, jesuita, viejo, viejecito, junto, jurar. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 7 
 
 LL. 
 
 Llanto, lleno, llara, Uuvia, caballo, polio. 
 
 N. 
 
 Senor, arariar, ensenar, mufieca, pafio, panuelo, 
 rebano. 
 
 U. 
 
 Gue, guij gue, giii. — Que, qui, que, qiii. Guitarra, 
 guerra, vergiienza, argitir. Queso, question. 
 
 X. 
 
 Examen, enxambre, sexo, xefe, relox, proximo, 
 xaque, box. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zapata, zizana, luz, feliz, zorra, zarza, capaz* 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 The accent mostly used in the Spanish is the acute 
 (' ), which serves to distinguish some words from one 
 another, and to lengthen the pronunciation of others. 
 
 The vowels a, e, 6, u, when used as prepositions 
 or conjunctions, should always be accented. 
 
 Pronouns and other words are distinguished from 
 one another by this accent ; as mi, me, from mi 3 my ; 
 tie, thou, from tu, thy ; el 9 he, from el } the, &c. 
 
 The same accent also marks the pronunciation of 
 verbs, and distinguishes the tenses : enseno, I teach ; 
 enseno, he taught ; ensenard, he will teach ; ensendra, 
 he would teach, &c. 
 
 The circumflex ( A ) is used to distinguish the soft 
 sound of x from its guttural one ; as fluxion, exactitude 
 But, as we have before observed, the academy has de- 
 creed that when x is guttural, its place shall be sup- 
 plied by g or/, and the circumflex no longer used. 
 
 The diaeresis (") is placed over u followed by e or /, 
 when the u is to be sounded in the syllables, gue, gui 9 
 que, qui ; as arguir, question. 
 
 The rules given for the accentuation of nouns are so 
 
8 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 indefinite, and liable to so many exceptions, that they 
 are of little use. The accentuation of verbs may be 
 known from the examples which will hereafter be 
 
 Spanish Grammar may now be divided into two 
 parts, Etymology and Syntax. 
 
PART L 
 
 ETYMOLOGY 
 
 Treats of words, enumerates their different species, 
 and shows their various modifications and combina- 
 tions.* 
 
 Words are significant signs of our ideas, and are by 
 grammarians denominated parts of speech. 
 
 In Spanish there are ten different species of words, 
 or parts of speech : Article, Substantive or Noun, 
 Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, Adverb, Prepo- 
 sition, Conjunction, and Interjection. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 An article is a word prefixed to nouns, or to words 
 that supply the place of nouns, sometimes to limit, and 
 sometimes to extend their signification. 
 
 In Spanish there are two articles, into, a, and el, the. 
 Both agree in gender and number with the nouns to 
 which they are joined. t 
 
 Vno is called the indefinite article, because it points 
 
 * Etymology in a more extended sense treats also of the deriva- 
 tion of words either from primitives existing in the same language, 
 or from parent words in other languages. But this part of the sub- 
 ject belongs to lexicography rather than to grammar. 
 
 f Scali^er calls the French article (le) insirtimentum otiosum gentis 
 loquacistimcs. The same sarcasm might with equal justice be ap- 
 plied to the Spanish el. In both languages this article performs the two- 
 fold and contradictory office of limiting and of extending — -of defining 
 and of rendering indefinite the signification of nouns. Thus el hornbre 
 (Vhomme) signifies both the man, and man in general. This is un- 
 doubtedly a defect, 
 
 B 5 
 
10 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 out in an indeterminate manner the thing or things, to 
 which it is joined : Un 1iombre } a man ; unis hombres, o 
 some men. 
 
 El is called the definite article, because it generally . 
 ascertains what particular thing or things are meant : " 
 El hombre, the man ; las mugeres, the women. 
 
 Lo, the neuter of el, has no plural ; and it is not 
 prefixed to nouns, (for this language has no neuter 
 ones) but to adjectives substantively used ; as lo util> 
 the useful. 
 
 N. B. The declension of the articles tvill be given Voith 
 that of the nouns. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 A noun is the name of a person or thing. 
 
 Nouns may be divided into two classes, proper and 
 common. 
 
 A noun is called proper when it is appropriated to 
 some individual person or thing; as Nero, Toledo, 
 Tajo : it is common when it may be applied to all 
 persons, or things of the same kind ; as un hombre, a 
 man ; una cmdad, a city ; un rio, a river. 
 
 Nouns are of the third person when spoken of and 
 of the second when spoken to. When the former are 
 nominatives to the verb, they consequently require that 
 verb to be in the third person also. 
 
 To nouns belong Gender, Number, and Case. 
 
 Classification qf Nouns hy the Spanish Academy. 
 
 Besides the division of nouns into proper and com- 
 mon, the Academy has admitted other distinctions 
 which, though morescholastic than useful, are here laid 
 in an abridged and altered form before the reader. 
 
 I. The primitives are those which are derived from 
 no other words, and which cannot therefore be reduced 
 to any of greater simplicity ; as cielo, tierra 9 monte 9 
 palacio. 
 
 II. The derivatives are those which are derived from 
 their primitives, and w^hich may therefore be reduced 
 to simpler words existing in the language ; as celeste^ 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 11 
 
 celestial, from cielo ; terrazgo, terreno, terrund, terrestre> 
 terraqueo, terrenal, from tierra ; montera, monteria- 
 montarfz, montesino, montariego, from monte. To de? 
 
 rivatives belong gentiles, patronymics, augment 'atives, and 
 diminutives. 
 
 1. The gentiles denote the people, nation, or country, 
 of any person or thing ; as Espanol, from Espaha ; 
 Castellano, from Cast ilia ; Toledano, from Toledo, &c. 
 These are adjectives formed from proper names. 
 
 2. The patronymics are surnames ; as Sanchez, Alva* 
 rez, Fermandez. % 
 
 3. The augmentathes increase the signification of the 
 primitives from which they are derived. This increase 
 is formed by adding certain terminations to the noun. 
 On, azo, onazo or ote, form the masculine, and ona 9 
 aza, or onaza, the feminine increase. The final vowel 
 of the primitive is generally dropped before the ter- 
 mination is added. Thus, from hombre, a man, are 
 formed hombron, hombrazo, liombronazo, a tall stout 
 man : from muger, a woman, mugerona, mugeraza, or 
 mugeronaza, a tall stout woman. Adjectives also are 
 susceptible of augmentation : Grande, great ; grandon % 
 grandate, grandazo, grandonazo, very great. 
 
 4. Of diminutives there are two sorts. The one 
 which expresses tenderness, and has ito or ico, for the 
 masculine, and it a or tea for the feminine. These 
 terminations are added to either nouns or adjectives, 
 by suppressing the final vowel of the primitive when. 
 it ends in one : Pajaro, a bird ; pajarito, a little, or a 
 pretty little bird. Casa, a house ;" casita, a little, or a 
 
 * Patronymics were originally formed from the Christian names of 
 fathers, by changing o final into ez; as from Mendo, Mendez ; from 
 Ordofio, Ordonez. Those ending in yo were similarly formed 3 asPe- 
 layo, Pelaez Payo, Paez. To those ending in any other vowel 2 was 
 added ; as JDia, Diaz; Lope, Lopez. To those ending in a conson- 
 ant was added ez; as Lain, Lainez ; Martin, Martinez. Others be- 
 came Patronymics without any change. Don Martin, Dona Vrraca, 
 Dona Sancha assumed the surname Alfonso from the proper name of 
 theix father, Alfonso the ninth of Leon. But many surnames were 
 derived from other causes— from personal qualities or defects, from 
 particular actions, and innumerable accidental circumstances. 
 
12 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 pretty little house. The other has zuelo. Mo, or eillo, 
 for the masculine, and zuela, ilia, or eilla, for the 
 feminine. Of these the first (zuelo) always, and the 
 latter (illo or eillo) generally, expresses contempt or 
 disgust. Perro> a dog ; perrillo 9 a vile little dog. 
 Muger, a woman ; mugereilla, mugerzuella, a pitiful 
 little woman. Hombre, a man ; hombrecillo, hombrezuelo, 
 a pitiful little -fellow. There are a few other diminu- 
 tives in ete, in, ejo, &c. but they are little used. And 
 here it may be proper to observe that not all the nouns 
 which have the preceding terminations are augmentative 
 and diminutive. Attention must be paid not only to 
 the termination, but also to the signification and deri- 
 vation of nouns. None can be considered as belonging 
 to either of the preceding classes, unless they can be 
 easily traced to primitives, whose signification they 
 Increase or diminish. Thus jiisilazo has the augmenta- 
 tive termination, but it is not derived from fusil, be- 
 cause it does not signify a large musket, but a musket- 
 shot. 
 
 III. The collective are those which embrace under a 
 singular term a plurality of persons or things ; as ejercitOy 
 an army ; rehano, a flock of sheep. 
 
 IV. The verbals, as their name implies, are those 
 which are derived from verbs. Every noun therefore 
 of this class may be traced to some verb which exists, 
 or which has existed, in the language : it is founded 
 on action, and though a noun, it still retains many 
 properties of the verb. From andar are derived anda- 
 dory andadura andadero, andariego ; from hacer, hace- 
 doYy hacimiento, hechura, hacedero. Those which end 
 in or denote the agent of the action ; those in on, ion, 
 ura 9 and ento 9 denote action, the effect of action, or 
 both ; and those in ble, ero, Sfc. are adjectives signifying 
 the facility or impossibility, the dignity or merit of an 
 action. 
 
 V. The compounded are those which consist of two 
 or more words ; as traspie, from the preposition tras 
 and the noun pie. This class of substantives is exceed- 
 ingly numerous in Spanish. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 13 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 Gender is the distinction of sex. 
 
 There are two genders, the masculine and the femi- 
 nine. 
 
 The masculine is applied to males ; as hombre, a man; 
 rey, a king. 
 
 The feminine is applied to females; as muger, a 
 woman ; reyna, a queen. 
 
 Gender was originally applicable only to animated 
 beings, — to those in which the distinction of sex was 
 too evident to be misunderstood. But in the Spanish, 
 as in most other languages, the application of this term 
 has absurdly been extended to objects which can have 
 no relation to sex. Thus pan, bread, is masculine, 
 and salad, health, is feminine.* 
 
 RULES FOR THE GENDER OF NOUNS, 
 
 1. By Signification. 
 
 1. Nouns which signify males, or which denote the 
 dignities, employments, professions, &c. of men, are 
 masculine. Those, on the contrary, which signify 
 females, or which denote the dignities, employments, 
 professions, &c. of women, are feminine. 
 
 2. The names of rivers are masculine. f 
 
 3. The names of winds are masculine, except Brisa 
 and Tramontana. 
 
 4. The names of the arts and sciences are feminine, 
 except dibujo and grabado. 
 
 * Besides the distinction of masculine and feminine nouns, the 
 Academy admits of two other species, epicene and common, which 
 have but one termination for both genders. The former compre- 
 hends those nouns which do not vary the article to denote the mas- 
 culines or feminines of a class : El raton, the he or she mouse; la 
 rata, the he or she rat. The latter do vary the article, and by this 
 means the gender is known at once : El testigo, the male witness ; 
 la testigf. the female witness : el homicida, the homicide, (mas.) la 
 homicida, (fern.) 
 
 t Sin embargo en Valladolid se dice la Esgueva, y en Zaragosa. 
 la Guerva a dos rios que tiene nestos nombres, por costumbre, aunque 
 no tenga atro fundamento. Gram, Castei. 
 
14? ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 5. The figures of grammar, poetry, and rhetoric, are 
 feminine, except metaplasmo, pleonasmo, and hiperbaton. 
 Hiperbole is both masculine and feminine. 
 
 6. The letters of the alphabet are feminine. 
 
 7. The names of the musical notes which compose 
 the octave are masculine. 
 
 The Spanish academy has given other rules for ascer- 
 taining the genders by signification ; but they are 
 so indefinite, and liable to so many exceptions, that 
 they are of little use. 
 
 2. By Termination. 
 
 1. Nouns ending in a are feminine. 
 
 Exceptions — Adema, albacea, almea, anagrama, 
 aneurisma, antipoda, aporisma, apotegma, axioma, 
 carisma, clima, comet a, crisma, clia, diafragma, digama, 
 dilema, diploma, dogma, drama, (and its compounds,) 
 edema, enigma, entimema, epigrama, esperma, Etna, Ja 9 
 guardacosta, guardaropa, gnardavela, idioma, largomira, 
 lema, manci, mapa, numisma, paradigma, paragua, pen- 
 iagrama, planeta, poema, prisma, problema, progim- 
 rtasma, sintoma, sistema, sojisma, tapaboca, tema, teo- 
 rema, viva. 
 
 2. Nouns in e are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Aguarchirle, alache, alsine, anagalide, 
 axe, azumbre, barbarie, base, calvicie, calle, capelardente, 
 caridtide, came, catastrqfe, ceiiidumbre, churre, clase, 
 clave, clematide, cohort e, compage, corambre, corte, cos* 
 tumbre, crasicie, creciente, crenche, cumbre, didcedumbre, 
 elatine, enante, epipdctide, esferoyde, especie, estirpe, 
 etiopide, falange, fame, fase, fe, Jievre, frente, Juente, 
 genie, liambre helice, helsine, hemionite, herrumbre, 
 hipocistide, hojaldre, hueste, incerlidnmbre, indole, ingle, 
 zntemperie, lande, landre, laringe, lande, leche, legumbre, 
 lente, lieure, liendre, lite, Have, lumbre, manseclumbre, 
 mengnante, mente, mole, molicie, muchedumbre, muerte, 
 mugre, nave, nieve, noche, nube, panace, paralaxe, parase- 
 lene, parte, paten te, peplide, pesadumbre , peste, pir amide, 
 pixide, planicie, plebe, podre, podredumbre, progenie, 
 prole, qaiete, salumbre } salve, sangre, sede, serie, servi- 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 15 
 
 dumbre, sirte, suerte, superficie, tarde, teame, techumbre, 
 temper ie, tilde, torre, trade, tripode, trope, ubre, v.r- 
 diembre, varice, velambre, xislumbre, jiride. 
 
 3. Nouns in i and y are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Diocesi, graciadei, grey, ley, metropolis 
 palmacristi, parafrasi. 
 
 4. Nouns in o are masculine. 
 Exceptions — Mano, nao. 
 
 5. Nouns in u are masculine. 
 Exceptions — Trihu. 
 
 6. Nouns in d are feminine. 
 
 Exceptions — Adalid, alamud, almud, arcuilaud, ar« 
 did, ataudj isped, huesped> laud, sud, t almud. 
 
 7. Nouns in / are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Aguamiel, cal, capital, carcel, col, de* 
 cretal, hiel, miel, piel, sal, serial, -vocal. 
 
 8. Nouns in n are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Verbals in ion, and also the following: 
 arrumazon, barbechazon, hinazon, cancion, cargazon, 
 ckrjazon, din, or crin, complexion, concion, condicion, 
 desazon, imdgen, jurisdicion, ocasion, plomazon, razon, 
 sarten, sazon, segazon, sien, sinrazon, trabazon. 
 
 9. Nouns in r are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Bezaar,Jlor, labor, segur, zoster, 
 
 10. Nouns in s are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — Anagiris, antiperistasis, apoteosis, baca~ 
 ris, bilis, colapiscis, crisis, diaper isis, diartrosis, diasis, 
 enjiteusis, epiglotis, etiies, galiopsis, hematites, hipostasis, 
 hipotesis, lis, macis, meiamorfosis, metemsicosis, rales, 
 parataxis, paralisis, parenesis, polispastos, raquitis, res, 
 selenites, sinderesis, sineresis, sintaxis teses, tisis, tos, 
 
 11. Nouns in t are masculine. 
 
 12. Nouns in x are masculine. 
 Exceptions — Salsifrax, sardonix, trox, 
 
 13. Nouns in z are masculine. 
 
 Exceptions — -Cerviz, cicatriz, codorniz, contrahaz, coz, 
 cruz, faz, haz, hez, hoz, luz, matriz, nariz, ninez, nuez, 
 paz, perdiz, pez, pomez, raiz, sobrehaz, sobrepelliz, te%, 
 vez, voz. Acid all those in ez denoting abstract qualities. 
 
 The following are of Doubtful Gender. 
 Alb aid, anatema, arte } (which in the plural is always fe- 
 
16 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 minine) cisma, canal, cutis, dole, emblema, hermafrodita, 
 hiperbole, mar, (its compounds are feminine) mdrgen, 
 nema, neuma, pringue^puente, reuma. Of these however 
 albald, cisma, canal, are generally masculine ; and 
 anatema, hiperbole, mar gen, nema and reuma, are 
 generally feminine : Orden, signifying command, is fe- 
 minine ; but when it denotes order, it is doubtful. 
 
 ^ NUMBER. 
 
 Number considers objects either as one, or as more 
 than one. Hence nouns have two numbers, the singular 
 and the plural 
 
 The singular denotes one object, as el libro, the 
 book. 
 
 The plural denotes more than one, as los libros, the 
 books. 
 
 When the singular ends in an unaccented vowel, the 
 plural is formed by the addition of s ; as carta, cartas ; 
 reyno, rey?ios. 
 
 When the singular ends in an accented vowel, in 
 ay or ey, or in a consonant, the plural is formed by the 
 addition of es ; as jabali, jabalies, rey, reyes, arbol, 
 arboles. 
 
 But nouns and adjectives ending in z change the 
 final consonant into ces in the plural; as luz, luces; 
 jelix,Jelices* 
 
 Nouns which from their very nature have no plural 
 in English, have generally none in Spanish ; as oro, 
 gold; irigo, wheat. 
 
 CASE. 
 
 Case is the relative situation of the noun. 
 Spanish nouns have four cases., the nominative, the 
 accusative, the objective, and the vocative. 
 
 * These nine nouns do not increase in the plural : Cortaplumas, 
 sacamuelaSy sacatrapas, br'mdis, Limes, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves Viernes. 
 
 The following are used only in the plural : Albricias, alicates, 
 angarillas, bofes, c a lend as, completas, despabiladeras, efemerides, exequias, 
 fasces, fauces, idus, largas, livianos, llares, maythies, modules, nonas, 
 pechugas, preces, pitches, semejas, tenezas, tinieblas trebedes. visperas, 
 viveres. 
 
 Maravcdi forms its plural in three ways : maravedis, maravedies and 
 maravadises, but the second of these forms is seldom used. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 17 
 
 The nominative is the name of a thing, or the subject 
 of the verb, as Pedro, Peter : El maestro ensena, the 
 master teaches. 
 
 The accusative is the object of an action, and is 
 always governed by an active verb ; as Ella desprecia 
 las riquezas, she despises riches. Here riquezas is in 
 the accusative,, because it is governed by the active verb 
 desprecia. 
 
 The objective case of nouns * always follows, and is 
 governed by prepositions ; as Hablare por tu hermano> 
 I will speak for thy brother. Here hermano is in the 
 objective, being governed by the preposition por. 
 
 The vocative calls or addresses ; as Pedro, O Peter. 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Singular 
 
 Norn, un libro, a book. 
 
 Ace. un libro, a book. 
 
 Obj. con un libro, with a book. 
 
 Voc. O libro, O book. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. unos libros, some books. 
 
 Ace. unos libros, some books. 
 
 Obj. con unos libros, with some books. 
 
 Voc. O libros, books. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. el libro, the book. 
 
 Ace. el libro, the book. 
 
 Obj. fdel libro, of or from the book. 
 
 Voc. O libro, book. 
 
 * The first objective case of personal pronouns is not governed by 
 a preposition, but, like the accusative, by a verb. This class of words 
 are very peculiar in their construction. See the declension of personal 
 pronouns and the observations immediately following. 
 
 t Del is a contraction of two words, the preposition de (of or from') 
 
18 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. los libros, the booh. 
 
 Ace. los libros, the boohs. 
 
 Obj. de los libros, of or from the boohs. 
 
 Voc. O libros, boohs. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. una casa, a house. 
 
 Ace. una casa, house. 
 
 Obj. a una casa, to a house. 
 
 Voc. O casa, house. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. unas casas, some houses. 
 
 Ace. unas casas, some houses. 
 
 Obj. a unas casas, to some houses. 
 
 Voc. O casas, houses. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. la casa, the house. 
 
 Ace. la casa, the house. 
 
 Obj. de la casa, of or from the house. 
 
 Voc. O casa, house. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. las casas, the houses. 
 
 Ace. las casas, the houses. 
 
 Obj. de las casas, of or from the houses. 
 
 Voc. O casas, houses. 
 
 and the article el. Al is also a contraction of 6 (to) and el. De 
 el and d el may often be found in the old Spanish writers, but the 
 open sound of the two vowels is always disagreeable. For this 
 reason the contraction has been sanctioned by the Academy. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 19 
 
 Proper names require no Article, and are thus declined : 
 
 Singular only. 
 
 Nom. Pedro, Peter. 
 
 Ace. a Pedro, Peter.* 
 
 Obj. de Pedro, of or from Peter. 
 
 Voc O Pedro, Peter. 
 
 The Neuter Article declined XJcith an Adjective substan* 
 lively used. 
 
 Singular only. 
 
 Xom. lo util, the useful. 
 Ace. lo util, the useful. 
 Obj. a lo util, to the useful. 
 
 Observations on the Cases of Nouns. 
 
 In assigning four cases to Spanish nouns, the author 
 has deviated so widely from the example of preceding 
 writers on the same subject, that he thinks it necessary 
 to state his reasons for the deviation. But before he 
 does so, some preliminary observations on the nature 
 of cases may not prove unacceptable to the learner. 
 
 Originally case had doubtless respect to the termina- 
 tion of the noun ; but Spanish nouns have no inflexions, 
 and consequently no cases in the strict sense of the 
 word. The Spaniards like most other European 
 nations, have therefore been obliged to determine the 
 case of a noun, by its position in the sentence, and to 
 express the various relations of things by certain w T ords 
 called prepositions, which are placed before nouns, and 
 which when associated with those nouns, have precisely 
 the same import as the terminations of the Latin and 
 Greek substantives. Hence, as both the noun governed 
 by the active verb, and the noun preceded by the 
 
 * To account for the use of the preposition d before the accusative, 
 see the Observations on the cases of nouns, and the Syntax of active 
 verbs. 
 
20 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 preposition have the nature., they have obtained the 
 name, of case. 
 
 If the student be unacquainted with the ancient lan- 
 guages of Rome and Greece, he will not easily compre- 
 hend what has just been said. To render the subject 
 more intelligible to him, we shall reverse the order in 
 which it has usually been treated, — we shall reason, not 
 from the ancient to the modern structure of language, 
 but vice versa. 
 
 Case, as we have before observed, is the relative 
 situation of a noun, and a noun has been defined to be 
 the name of a person or thing. Case, then, in other 
 words, is the relative situation of a person or thing. In 
 the phrase, the book of God, both book and God are 
 nouns, but they do not stand in the same relation. Book 
 is merely the name given to a thing, and it is therefore 
 in the nominative ; but God is the object of a certain 
 relation, which relation is denoted by the preposition 
 of. Now of is a Gothic noun, signifying offspring, &c. 
 If therefore we were permitted to do a little violence 
 to the structure of the language, we should turn the 
 phrase the book of God into the book offspring God, — 
 the book emanating from, or produced by, God. When 
 we say the book, and nothing more, the mind can form 
 no notion of relation, because there is no reference to 
 any other thing ; but when we say of God, we clearly 
 express one. Of God therefore constitutes a case, and 
 that case is the objective. 
 
 The same reasoning must hold good in Spanish as 
 well as in English : El libro de Dios. Dios is the ob- 
 ject of the relation expressed by de ; and de Dios is 
 therefore a case as much as the English expression of 
 God. But de has not exactly the same meaning as our 
 of: the latter, as we have shown, signifies offspring, fyc. 
 but the former implies abstraction, and is equivalent to 
 our from. El libro de Dios then may be rendered the 
 book from God, — the book in which the action of ema- 
 nating or proceeding began with God. 
 
 If we translate the phrase into Latin, we shall have a 
 still clearer notion of the nature of case. The book 
 of God is in that language liber Dei. Here the student 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 21 
 
 will perceive that there is no little word before Dei cor- 
 responding to the English of and the Spanish de. In 
 what manner then is the relation expressed ? By the 
 termination of the noun. Dens is in the nominative : 
 it signifies God only, without reference to any other 
 object ; but Dei signifies of God, and points out the 
 relation as clearly as either the English or the Spanish 
 expression. 
 
 Again: God gave the book to thejooorld (Dios dio el 
 libro al mundo.) Here are three nouns, God, booJc 7 
 "world, and all have different relations to one another. 
 The first is the a vent or doer, — the cause of the verb 
 gave, and this cause is in grammatical language termed 
 the subject or nominative of the verb. Every nominative 
 then is the person or thing which produces the verb, if 
 that verb be active. — The second of these, booh, is the 
 noun influenced by the active verb gave : it is therefore 
 the object of that action, and is in grammatical language 
 termed the accusative case. It stands in a very different 
 relation to God, the nominative : the latter is the pro* 
 ducer of the verb ; the former the receiver or endurer of 
 the influence exercised by the verb". The last of these, 
 "world, is the object of another relation expressed by the 
 preposition to. To is derived from a Gothic noun, 
 signifying end : it implies that the action of giving pro- 
 ceeding from God 9 terminated with the world. 
 
 The preceding sentence translated into Latin is Deus 
 dedit librum mundo. Librum, the accusative, to which 
 the action implied in the verb dedit passes from the 
 agent Deus, has for its nominative liber ; and mundo, the 
 term of the action, mundus. Liber signifies the book 
 merely, without necessarily involving a reference to 
 any action or relation: librum also signifies the book; 
 but its case, in other words its termination, shows that 
 it is the object of some influence exercised either by a 
 verb or a preposition. In the same manner mundus 
 signifies simply the world; but mundo, signifies to the 
 "world. 
 
 Latin nouns then have terminations, or cases, to de- 
 note their various relations ; but Spanish and English. 
 nouns have no such advantage. We have, however^ 
 
22 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 already shewn that a noun in either of the last men- 
 tioned languages, when preceded by an active verb, or 
 a preposition, may be said to form a case as certainly 
 as if it had a distinct termination to express its relative 
 situation. This being admitted, we now come to the 
 inquiry, how many cases should be assigned to Spanish 
 nouns ? 
 
 The Spanish Academy, has, in imitation of the 
 Latins, adopted six cases. These are the nominative ', 
 or subject of the verb ; the genitive which is preceded 
 by the preposition de ; the dative, which is governed by 
 the prepositions a and para ; the accusative, which is 
 the object of the verb ; the vocative, which calls or 
 addresses ; and the ablative which is governed by 
 various prepositions. But in adopting this number, 
 that learned body cannot have the same reasons as the 
 Romans, who were compelled to six by the inflections 
 of their nouns. It has multiplied cases without neces- 
 sity, and rendered the syntax of the language too corn- 
 plicated to be easily understood by students un- 
 acquainted with the Latin. As the genitive, dative, 
 and ablative cases have the same termination, and are 
 all governed by prepositions, why should they not be 
 incorporated into one ? 
 
 The example of the Academy has been followed by 
 almost every succeeding grammarian. One, however, 
 has ventured to deviate from the old beaten path : he 
 has assigned hvo cases only to Spanish nouns ; but in 
 avoiding Scylla he has fallen into Charybdis. Two cases 
 are inadequate to express the various relations of things. 
 The nominative and the vocative, though clearly dis- 
 tinct in their nature and use, are confounded together ; 
 and the same case is made the object both of active 
 verbs and of prepositions. This is the way to darken, 
 not to elucidate, a subject which, in whatever light it 
 is viewed, is surrounded with considerable difficulties. 
 
 When the author commenced his present underta- 
 king, he intended to adopt three cases only, making 
 one the object of both active verbs and prepositions. 
 But as he proceeded, and his views of the subject ex- 
 panded; he found that his objective was too compre- 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 23 
 
 hensive, — that it included too many relations to be 
 clearly understood. This he discovered more fully 
 when he came to the personal pronouns, a class of 
 words which have for the most part three terminations 
 exclusive of the vocative, and which consequently 
 require as many distinctions of case. 
 
 The four cases which the author has assigned to 
 Spanish nouns, are the nominative, the accusative, the 
 objective, and the vocative ; and the office allotted 
 to these cases will, he hopes, be found sufficiently in- 
 telligible. The nominative and the vocative are, as 
 before observed, distinct enough in their nature and 
 use to warrant a corresponding distinction of name. 
 The accusative he makes to be governed by active 
 verbs ; and to form the objective, which is governed 
 by prepositions, he has incorporated three other cases, 
 the genitive, the dative, and the ablative of the Spanish 
 grammarians. He has thus, he ventures to hope, 
 adopted a division of cases that will considerably sim- 
 plify the hitherto complicated system of syntax, and be 
 found comprehensive enough to embrace the most im- 
 portant relations of which substantives are susceptible. 
 The names which he has assigned to these cases may 
 perhaps be cavilled at ; but they are not of his inven- 
 tion. He is well aware of their absurdity; but they 
 have been sanctioned by long prescription, and he does 
 not think himself authorised to substitute others in 
 their place. 
 
 Here the reader should be warned that when the ac- 
 cusative is a reasonable being, in other words, a person. 
 it is preceded by the preposition a: Oygamos al apos- 
 iol : imitemos a los santos de Dios : Let us hear the 
 apostle : let us imitate the saints of God. But the pre- 
 position in this case is a mere expletive : it has no in- 
 fluence on the following word, and it seems to have- 
 been introduced for no other purpose than that of dis- 
 tinguishing the accusative from the nominative. The 
 Spanish order of construction is much more inverted 
 than ours ; and the two cases would often be con- 
 founded if the particle were not placed before the go- 
 verned noun, Mato a Ant eon Hercules, is by no means 
 
24? ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 an uncommon instance of inversion ; and what reader 
 unacquainted with the ancient fables concerning Her* 
 cules could point out the nominative of mato if the 
 preposition a were omitted ? When the governed noun 
 is not a reasonable being, the preposition is seldom ex- 
 pressed ; but then the order of construction is not so 
 much inverted, and the two cases are easily distin- 
 guishable. If the writer conceived that any doubt 
 could exist as to the subject and object of the verb, (and 
 such doubt would often exist when both nouns were of 
 the same number) he would consider it his duty to 
 insert the preposition before the governed noun, if even 
 that noun were not a reasonable being : ha preposition 
 rige al nomhre: los verbos regen a sus accusativos (Gram. 
 Castel.) And on the other hand when the object 
 of the verb is a person, the particle a is sometimes, nay 
 often dispensed with if the case be sufficiently distin- 
 guishable without it. — See the Syntax of Active Verbs. 
 
 Exercise on the Articles. 
 
 N.B. The gender of every noun, and the formation erf 
 the plural of nouns, may be learned from the rules before 
 given. 
 
 A man. Of a man. With a man, To a man, 
 hombre Con 
 
 Some men. Of some men. To some men. With 
 some men. A woman. Of a woman. To a woman. 
 
 muger 
 For a woman. Some women. Of some women. To 
 Para 
 
 some women. With some women. For some women. 
 A child. Of a child. To a child. From a child. 
 
 nino 
 With a child. Some children. Of some children. 
 To some children. For some children. A husband. 
 
 marido 
 A wife. Of a husband. Of a wife. To a husband. 
 
 esposa. 
 To a wife. Some husbands. Some wives. To some 
 husbands. To some wives. With some husbands. 
 With some wives. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 25 
 
 The man. The woman. Of the man. Of the woman. 
 To the man. To the woman. The men. The women. 
 Of the men. Of the women. To the men. To the 
 women. The child. The children. Of the child. Of 
 the children, /fo the child. To the children. O child. 
 O children. O man. O men. O woman. O women. 
 The husband. The wife. Of the husband. To the 
 wife. The husbands. The wives. Of the husbands. 
 To the wives. The book. The paper. The pen. 
 
 libro papql plmna 
 
 The door. The window. The city. The labourer. 
 
 pnerta veniana ciudad labrador 
 
 The physician. The books. The papers. The pens. 
 
 medico 
 The doors. Of the books. To the paper. To the pens. 
 To the door. The windows. The cities. The labourers. 
 From the pens. To the books. To the papers. With 
 the cities. For the labourers. The physicians. To 
 the physicians. The shepherd. The chamber. The 
 
 pa si or quarto 
 
 kingdom, The bishop. The poem. The table. The 
 reyno obispo poema mesa 
 
 emperor. The country. The wine. The wisdom. 
 emperador campo vino sabiduria 
 
 The king. 
 rey 
 
 The child of the man. The door of the city. The 
 window of the chamber. The cities of the kingdom. 
 The wife of the shepherd. The poems of the bishop. 
 The wisdom of the king. From the emperor to 
 the king. From the man to the woman. From 
 the husband to the wife. From the door to the 
 window. The wife to the husband. To the doors. 
 To the cities. With the tables. 
 
 From the wives to the husbands. From the windows 
 to the doors. For the pens. To the pens. The books 
 of the physicians. The wisdom of the bishops. The 
 windows and the doors of the chambers. From the 
 
 y 
 
 emperors to the kings. From the children to the men. 
 The children of the women. The wives of the labour- 
 er 
 
26 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 ers. The constancy of the kings. The rewards of the 
 
 constancia premio 
 
 men. The virtues of the bishops. The lives of the 
 
 virtud vi da 
 
 shepherds. To the physicians of the city. The la- 
 bourers of the country. 
 
 From a wife to a husband. The physicians of a 
 king. Some cities of the kingdom. Some books of the 
 physicians. A door of the chamber. The doors of a 
 chamber. Some children of the king. Some windows 
 of the chamber. The children of the shepherds. To 
 the physicians of an emperor. 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 An adjective is a word added to a noun to express its 
 quality. 
 
 The adjective, like the noun, admits the variations of 
 gender, number, and case, and it generally follows the 
 substantive with which it agrees : El xefe valoroso, the 
 valiant chief; las mugeres virtuosas, the virtuous women. 
 
 The plural of adjectives is formed like that of nouns; 
 as santo, santos, holy; holgazan, holgazanes, idle. 
 
 The feminine of adjectives is thus formed : When 
 the masculine ends in o, that o is in the feminine 
 changed into a ; as bueno, buena, good ; sabio, sabia, 
 wise; hennoso, hermosa, beautiful. When the mascu- 
 line ends in an or on, the feminine is formed by adding 
 a; holgazan, holgazana ; hampon, hampona, bold. 
 And the adjectives derived from names of countries, &c. 
 form their feminine In the same manner : Ingles, 
 Inglesa, English; Frances, Francesa, French; Ara- 
 gones, Aragonesa, Arragcnese ; Andahiz, Andaluza, 
 Andalusian, &c. But masculine adjectives of this de- 
 scription ending in a, have no change for the feminine; 
 ZsPersa, Persian; Muscovila, Russian. 
 
 Adjectives with other terminations than o, an, or on, 
 do not admit any changefor the feminine; as elhombre 
 ruin, la muger ruin ; el hombre alegre } la mnger alegre; 
 el hombre jeliz } la mngerfdiz, &c. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 27 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 Adjectives may qualify nouns either absolutely, that 
 is, voitliout relation to other objects ; or relatively, that 
 is, with relation to them. Hence arise the degrees of 
 comparison. 
 
 There are two degrees of comparison, the comparative 
 and the superlative. The unchanged form of the adjec- 
 tive is called the positive state. 
 
 The comparative degree increases or lessens the 
 quality of one object when compared with another. 
 The increase is formed by mas before the adjective, and 
 que after it ; the decrease by menos and que, and some- 
 times negatively by tan and como : El sol es mas bril- 
 lante que la tuna ; the sun is brighter than the moon : 
 La luna es menos hrillante que el sol; the moon is less 
 bright than the sun : La lima no es tan hrillante como 
 el sol ; the moon is not so bright as the sun. 
 
 The superlative increases or lessens the quality of any 
 object to the highest or lowest degree : it is formed by 
 prefixing the definite article to the comparative : El 
 mas sabio de los reyes ; the wisest of the kings: El 
 menos sabio de todos ; the least wise of all men. 
 
 The article is omitted before the comparative if it be 
 already expressed before the noun ; La muger mas in-. 
 grata, the most ungrateful woman. But if a verb inter-< 
 vene, the adjective admits the article : El hombre es el 
 mas noble de todos los animales, man is the noblest of all 
 animals. 
 
 Yvhen the highest or the lowest degree of the quality 
 is intended without immediate reference to any other 
 object, the adverb may, very, precedes the adjective. 
 Paris es una ciuclad muy hermosa^ Paris is a very beau- 
 tiful city. 
 
 Many adjectives, like those of the Latin, assume a 
 superlative termination, and consequently reject the 
 particle muy: Paris es una ciuclad hermosisima. Here 
 hermosisima has the same meaning as muy hermosa. 
 But as the learner may often be at a loss to know what 
 adjectives admit the termination isimo, his surest way 
 
 c 2 
 
28 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 will be to use mug with the positive, especially as the 
 latter mode is much more general. 
 
 If the adjectives which assume isimo end in a vowel, 
 that vowel is omitted : corto, short ; cortisimo, very 
 short : triste, sad ; tristisimp, very sad. Some change 
 their final termination before they admit isimo : 
 
 Positive. Superlative. 
 
 ri-co, ri-qi&simo. 
 larg-o 9 larg-uisimo. 
 
 qfab-le, afab-ilisimo. 
 
 Jeli-z, feli-cisimo. 
 
 The following form their superlative irregularly: 
 
 Positive. Superlative. 
 
 hueno, . honlsimo. 
 
 faerie, Jbrtisimo, 
 
 nuevo, novisimo. 
 
 sabio, sapientisimo. 
 
 sacro, sacratisimo. 
 
 Jiel, Jidelisim o . 
 
 The following form both their comparatives and 
 
 superlatives irregularly : 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 hueno, 
 
 me for-) 
 
 optimo. 
 
 malo 9 
 
 peor, 
 
 pesimo. 
 
 grande, 
 
 major, 
 
 maxima. 
 
 pequeno, 
 
 men or, 
 
 minim o. 
 
 alto, 
 
 superior, 
 
 supremo. 
 
 bajo 9 
 
 inferior, 
 
 injimo. 
 
 All these admit another superlative in isimo, and 
 they are also found compared with mas, menos, or muy. 
 The superlative indeed of all these irregular adjectives 
 is more frequently formed by muy and the positive than 
 in any other way, especially in colloquial and episto- 
 larv intercourse. The superlative termination isimo 
 will probably be sometime obsolete, — at least in con- 
 versation. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 29 
 
 Comparatives joined to Nouns, Verbs, and Adverbs, 
 
 The comparative of increase before nouns and 
 adverbs, and after verbs, is rendered by mas — que. He 
 has more prudence than you ; tiene mas prudencia que 
 vm.* We have more enemies than you; tenemos mas 
 enemigos que vm. I esteem thee more than Maria; 
 te estimo mas que a Maria, We act more prudently 
 than they; obramos mas prudentemente que ellos. 
 
 The comparative of decrease, with respect, to 
 nouns, may be rendered by menos- — que. . He has less 
 
 wisdom than ; tiene menos sabiduria que -. 
 
 We have fewer friends than ; tenemos menos amigos 
 
 que . 
 
 Not so much as, not so many as, must be rendered 
 negatively with ianto — como, and tanio must agree in 
 gender and number with the noun to which it is 
 joined. I have not so much money as you ; no tengo 
 tanto diner o como vm. Peter has not so much ambi- 
 tion as John; Pedro no tiene tanta ambicion como Juan. 
 I have not so many books as——; no tengo tantos 
 libros como — . 
 
 With respect to verbs. — Less than is expressed by 
 raenos — que; not so much as, by tanto and quanto or como t 
 You study less than we ; vm estudia menos quenosotros. 
 I do not love him so much as I esteem him ; no le 
 quiero tanto quanto (or tanto como) le estimo. 
 
 With respect to adverbs. — Less than is expressed by 
 menos — que, and so — as hy tan — como. They act less 
 prudently than you; obran menos jjrudeniemenie que 
 vm. They do not so prudently as you; no obran tan 
 prudentemente como vm. 
 
 The comparative of equality is rendered like 
 that of decrease, except the change of one or two par- 
 ticles. 
 
 As much as, as many as, before nouns, is expressed by 
 tanto (declined) and como. She has as much sweetness 
 as her sister ; ella tiene tanta dulzura como su hermana* 
 
 * See the Personal Pronouns. 
 
30 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 We have as many friends as ■ ; tenemos tantos 
 
 amigos como . 
 
 With respect to verbs. — As much as, tanio quant o or 
 como : I punish him as much as he deserves ; le castigo 
 tanto quanto (or tanto como) merece. 
 
 Not less than must be rendered negatively with 
 raenos que. You do not eat less than his brother ; vm 
 no come menos que su hermano. 
 
 With respect to adverbs.— As — as, tan — como: He 
 
 sings as well as ; canta tan bien como . Not 
 
 Jess than, no — menos — que: I do not write less cor- 
 rectly than you ; no escribo menos correctamente que 
 vm. 
 
 Some other Modes of Comparison. 
 
 The most, when joined to a verb, is expressed by 
 mas ; the least, by menos. He is the man whom I love 
 the most ; Es el hombre que mas quiero. That is the 
 woman whom I the least esteem ; esta es la mager que 
 menos estitno. 
 
 When the more is expressed in two corresponding 
 members of a sentence, and the latter is a consequence 
 of the former, the one is rendered by quanto mas, the 
 other by tanto mas : The more virtuous a man is, the 
 more happy he is; quanto mas virtuoso es el hombre, 
 tanto es masjeliz. 
 
 The more — the less, quanto mas, tanto menos : The 
 more he applies to study, the less he increases his for- 
 tune ; quanto mas se dedico at esiudio, tanto menos 
 aumenta sufortuna . 
 
 So much the more than, tanto mas que. So much the 
 less than, tanto menos que. He was so much the more 
 to blame, as he had so much the less reason to be angry 
 than you ; turn tanta mas sinrazon, que tenia tanta menos 
 razon de eivfadarse, que vm. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 31 
 
 Exercise on the Feminine and the Plural of Adjectives* 
 
 The climate is hot. The house is high. The 
 clima es caliente casa alta 
 
 houses are high. The woman is good. The women 
 
 son muger bueno 
 
 are good. The English woman is beautiful. The 
 
 her mo so 
 English women are beautiful. The soul is precious. 
 
 alma precioso 
 Souls are precious. The virtues are amiable. Idleness 
 
 virtad amable La pereza, 
 
 is contemptible. The girl is pretty. The thing is dear. 
 
 despreciable moca Undo cosa caro 
 
 The things are dear. The man is brave. The men are 
 
 bravo 
 brave. The man is happy. The woman is happy. The 
 
 feliz 
 men are happy. The women are happy. The mistress 
 
 am a 
 is rich. The mistresses are rich. The maid is idle. 
 
 rico criada holgazan 
 
 The maids are idle. The objection is artful. The 
 
 objeccion artificioso 
 objections are artful. The king is brave. The kings 
 
 rey 
 are 5rai;£. The law is good. The laws are good. The 
 
 fey 
 doubt is ridiculous. The doubts are ridiculous. The 
 cfoafo ridiculo 
 
 damsel is rich. The damsels are rich. The cause is 
 donzella causa 
 
 noble. The causes are noble. The passion is tvorthy. The 
 ?zo6fe pasion digno 
 
 * IiL the present, and in all following exercises, the learner should 
 be careful to make the adjective of the same gender and number as 
 the noun to which it is joined : The house is high ; la casa es alta, 
 not alto, because casa is a feminine noun. The houses are high : las 
 casas son alias, not alta, because casas is plural. — For the place cf 
 adjectives, see the Syntax of this part of speech. 
 
32 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 passions are worthy. The word is sacred. The words are 
 
 palabra sagrado 
 sacred. The reply is noble. The replies are noble. 
 
 respuesto 
 The body is hot. The bodies are hot. The science 
 cuerpo ciencia 
 
 is necessary. The sciences are necessary. The heart 
 
 necesario corazon 
 
 is nicked. The hearts are wicked. The productions of 
 
 walo prodaccion 
 
 the earth are precious and inexhaustible. The works of 
 
 tierra y inagotable cbra 
 
 nature are great. The boy is diligent. The boys 
 naturaleza grande nino diligente 
 
 are diligent. The prosperity of the wicked is short, 
 prosper idad malo corto 
 
 The girl is thoughtless. The girls are thoughtless. 
 
 nina descuidado 
 The son is obedient. The sons are obedient. The 
 
 hijo obediente 
 
 daughter is humble. The daughters are humble. A 
 hija humilde 
 
 friend is scarce. Friends are scarce. The woman is 
 ami go raro muger 
 
 forsaken. The women are forsaken. A Spaniard is 
 abandonado Espahol 
 
 grave. The Spaniards are grave. The Frenchman is 
 serio Frances 
 
 lively. The Frenchmen are lively. The sister is 
 alegre La hermana es 
 
 charitable. The sisters are charitable. The wine is 
 car it at iv a vino 
 
 good. The country is rich. The countries are rich, 
 hueno pais 
 
 The house is well ornamented. The houses are well 
 
 bien or n ado 
 ornamented. The door is closed. The doors are 
 
 puerta cerrado 
 closed. Prudence is a precious virtue. The maid 
 La prudencia precioso virtud criada 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 33 
 
 is English. The maids are English. Emulation is 
 
 Ingles La emulation 
 
 worthy of a noble soul. The city is populous. The 
 digno de noble alma ciudad poblado 
 
 cities are populous. 
 
 Exercise on the Degrees of Comparison. 
 
 Peter is wiser than John. He is more prudent than 
 Pedro es sabio Juan prudenie 
 
 the sister. The city of London is more populous 
 
 hermana ciudad de Londres poblado 
 
 than that of Paris. The streets of London are wider 
 
 la calle audio 
 
 than those of Madrid. Ke is more idle than I. 
 
 las El perezoso yo 
 
 Augustus was not perhaps greater than Anthony, but 
 August o no fue qiiiza Antonio pero 
 
 he was more fortunate. His sister is very amiable, but 
 
 feliz amable 
 
 mine is more affable. The greatest pleasure of life 
 la mia c fable placer la -del a 
 
 is love, t\\e greatest blessing is health, and the best 
 
 el amor gozo la salud y 
 
 consolation a true friend. The Loire is greater 
 
 consolacion verdadero ami go Loir a 
 
 than the Seine, but it is less rapid than the Rhone. 
 
 Sena rapido Rhodano 
 
 Maria is as amiable as her sister. We are as poor as 
 Maria su somos pobre 
 
 they. He was more pious and zealous than his 
 ellos piadosa y zeloso ' su 
 
 brother. We saw innocence less sheltered, and 
 
 vimos la innocencia aw par a do 
 
 crime more protected. King Alphonso put an end 
 el crimen protegido El rey Alfonso dio fin 
 
 to one of the happiest and longest reigns that Spain" 
 
 uno dichoso largo rey rt ado que la Espana 
 
 had seen. Self-love is more artful than the 
 
 habia visio El amcr-proprio artifcioso 
 
 c 5 
 
34? ETYxMOLOGY. 
 
 most artful of men. Wisdom is the most precious 
 
 h ombre La sabiduria precioso 
 
 of all gifts. Cicero was the most eloquent of all the 
 
 todo don — ' fue eloquente 
 
 Iloman orators. The streets of Bourdeaux are less 
 
 Romano orador calle Burdeos 
 
 'wide than those of Madrid. (Your house) is not so 
 
 ancho las « La casa de vm no es 
 
 high as mine. He is the most zealous friend that I have, 
 alto -la mia zeloso amigo que tengo 
 
 and the least interested man that I know. He is as 
 
 interesado conozco 
 
 learned as his elder brother. They are as rich as 
 docto mayor hermano Ellos rico 
 
 (your father). My brother is more learned than I. 
 el padre de vm* Mi 
 My cousin is less learned than I. The simplicity of 
 
 prima simplicidad 
 
 nature is more lovely than all the embellishment 
 
 la naturaleza amable aseo 
 
 of art. Slander is the most pernicious of all crimes. 
 el arte La column ia pernicioso crimen 
 
 Alexander conquered the most considerable provinces, 
 Alexandro conquisto provencia 
 
 and overturned the most powerful empires. Charity 
 
 arruino poderoso imperio La caridad 
 
 is the greatest virtue of a Christian. The style of 
 
 virtud Christ iano estilo 
 
 Fenelon is very rich, and very pleasing, but it is 
 
 rico agradable, pero 
 
 sometimes prolix : that of Bossuet is very lofty, but 
 
 algunas veces prolijo cl ■ alto 
 
 it is sometimes harsh. The men are very attentive. 
 
 aspero atento 
 
 The women are very attentive. I have as many 
 
 tengo 
 friends as he. Thou hast as many books as I. Thy 
 amigo el tienes libro yo Tu 
 
 brother has more children than I. We have more 
 tiene nino te nemos 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 35 
 
 diversions than labours. They have more than ten 
 diversion trabajo tienen diez 
 
 guineas. I have written more than ten letters to-day. 
 guinea he escrito carta hoy 
 
 Thou hast less pride than they. Thou art not so tall 
 orgullo ellos no sois alto 
 
 as I. Peter is not less old than his friend. He eats 
 Pedro mejo sic No come. 
 
 no less meat than bread. He drinks less water than 
 
 mande pan bebe agua 
 
 wine. This little room is more pleasant than mine. 
 mno Este pequeno quarto agradable el mio 
 
 This apple is better than the others. I have less 
 Est a manzana otro 
 
 money than you, but I have as much honour as you. 
 diner o vm pero honor 
 
 The Biscayans, the Andalusians, and the Catalonians, 
 
 Biscayno Andaluz Catalan 
 
 are excellent soldiers: they pass for the best, the most 
 
 excellent e sol dado pasanpor 
 
 courageous, and the most faithful of the kingdom. The 
 valeroso leal reyno 
 
 Spanish mountaineers are very strong, and almost all 
 Espanol montanes puerte cast todo 
 
 very tall. Lying is the lowest of all vices. The 
 
 La mentira bajo vicio 
 
 dog is a very faithful animal, and perhaps the most 
 
 perro feel (irr.) ■ quizd 
 
 faithful of all animals. Your sister is very amiable, 
 
 vuestra amable 
 
 and a very good woman. 
 muger 
 
 The man whom I esteem the most* The woman 
 que estimo- 
 
 whom I respect the least. The more rich a man is, the 
 
 respeto rico 
 
 more he wishes to be so. The shorter time is, the more 
 desea serlo breve el tiempo 
 
36 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 precious it is. The more rare a thing is, the more dear 
 precioso raro cosa caro 
 
 it is. The more just and beneficent a prince is, the 
 
 junto henefxo principe 
 
 more faithful are his subjects ; and the more faithful 
 
 leal vasal! o 
 
 the subject is, the more constant and secure is the 
 
 const ante seguro 
 
 happiness of the kingdom. The more populous a 
 die ha rei/no p>°bl a d° 
 
 country is, the more rich and powerful it is. The more 
 pais rico poderoso 
 
 Alexander conquered, the more he wished to conquer. 
 conquistaba, queria conquistar. 
 
 The more you cultivate the sciences, the more learned 
 
 vm cultivard ciencia docto 
 
 ycu will become. The less he labours, the more he 
 
 se hard trauaja 
 
 wishes to gain. 
 quiere ganar. 
 
 THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 uno, una 
 
 one 
 
 dos 
 
 tvoo 
 
 tres 
 
 three 
 
 quatro 
 
 four 
 
 cinco 
 
 jive 
 
 seis 
 
 six 
 
 siete 
 
 seven 
 
 ocho 
 
 eiglit 
 
 nueve 
 
 nine 
 
 diez 
 
 ten 
 
 once 
 
 eleven 
 
 doce 
 
 tzvelve 
 
 trece 
 
 thirteen 
 
 catorce 
 
 fourteen 
 
 quince 
 
 fifteen 
 
 diez y seis 
 
 sixteen 
 
 diez y siete 
 
 seventeen 
 
 diez y ocho,, 
 
 eighteen 
 
ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 diez y nueve 
 
 veinte 
 
 veinte y uno, una 
 
 veinte y dos 
 
 veinte y tres 
 
 veinte y quatro 
 
 veinte y cinco 
 
 veinte y seis 
 
 veinte y siete 
 
 veinte y ocho 
 
 veinte y nueve 
 
 treinta 
 
 treinta y uno, una 
 
 quarenta 
 
 quarenta y uno, una 
 
 cincuenta 
 
 cincuenta y uno, una 
 
 sesenta 
 
 sesenta y uno, una 
 
 setenta 
 
 setenta y uno, una 
 
 ochenta 
 
 ochenta y uno, una 
 
 noventa 
 
 noventa y uno, una 
 
 ciento 
 
 ciento y uno, una 
 
 docientos, docientas 
 
 trecientos, trecientas 
 
 nineteen 
 twenty 
 twenty-one 
 twenty-two 
 
 twenty -three 
 twenty four 
 twenty-five 
 twenty-six 
 twenty-seven 
 twenty-eight 
 twenty-nine 
 thirty 
 
 thirty-one, fyc. 
 forty 
 forty-one, fyc. 
 
 ffty-one, %d. 
 sixty 
 
 sixty-one, Sec. 
 seventy 
 
 seventy -one, SfC. 
 eighty 
 
 eighty-one, fyc. 
 ninety 
 
 ninety-one, Sfc, 
 a hundred 
 a hundred and one 
 two hundred, 
 three hundred 
 
 quatrocientos,quatrocientas t /bz£r hundred 
 
 quinfientos, quin^ientas 
 
 seiscientos, seiscientas 
 
 setecientos, setecientas 
 
 cchocientos, ochocientas 
 
 novecientos, novecientas 
 
 mil 
 
 mil y ciento 
 
 mil y docientos, docientas 
 
 dos mil 
 
 veinte mil 
 
 cien mil 
 
 Jive hundred 
 six hundred 
 seven hundred 
 eight hundred 
 nine hundred 
 a thousand 
 eleven hundred 
 twelve hundred 
 two thousand 
 twenty thousand 
 a hundred thousand 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 docientos, docientas mil two hundred thousand 
 mil] on, or cuento a million 
 
 THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Primero — a 
 segundo — a 
 tercero — a 
 quatro — a 
 quinto — a 
 sexto — a 
 septimo — a 
 octavo — a 
 
 nono — a, or noveno — a 
 decimo — a 
 undecimo — a 
 duodecimo — a 
 decimo — a tercio — a 
 decimo — a quarto — a 
 decimo — a quinto — a 
 decimo — a sexto — a 
 decimo— a septimo — a 
 decimo— a octavo — a 
 decimo — a nono — a 
 vigesimo — a 
 vigesimo — a primo — a 
 vigesimo — a segundo — a 
 vigesimo — a tercio — a 
 trigesimo — a 
 quadragesimo — a 
 quinquagesimo — a 
 sexagesimo — a 
 septuagesimo — a 
 octogesimo — a 
 nonogesimo — a 
 centesimo — a 
 docentesimo — a 
 trecentesimo — a 
 quadragentesimo — a 
 quingentesimo — a 
 sexentesimo — a 
 
 first 
 
 second 
 
 third 
 fourth 
 
 tfth 
 
 sixth 
 seventh 
 eighth 
 ninth 
 tenth 
 eleventh 
 twelfth 
 thirteenth 
 fourteenth 
 fifteenth 
 sixteenth 
 seventeenth 
 eighteenth 
 nineteenth 
 twentieth 
 twenty first 
 twenty -second 
 twenty-third, fyc. 
 thirtieth 
 fortieth 
 fiftieth 
 sixtieth 
 seventieth 
 eightieth 
 ninetieth 
 hundredth 
 two hundredth 
 three hundredth 
 four hundredth 
 five hundredth 
 six hundredth 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 39 
 
 septengentesimo — a seven hundredth 
 
 octogentesimo— a eight hundredth 
 
 nonogentesimo — a nine hundredth 
 
 milesimo — a thousandth 
 
 Adjectives "which vchen joined to Substantives lose one or 
 more Letters. 
 
 Uno, one, primero, first, tercero, third, postrero, last, 
 alguno, some, ninguno, none, bueno, good, and malo, 
 bad, lose the last vowel when they are followed by a 
 substantive of the masculine gender, and singular num- 
 ber : Un honibre, el primer hombre, &;c. But tercero 
 does not always lose it ; for el tercero dia is as general 
 as el tercer dia, and both forms of speaking are sanc- 
 tioned by the Academy. 
 
 Ciento, a hundred, loses its last syllable before nouns 
 whether masculine or feminine : Cien hombres, cien 
 mugeres. 
 
 Grande, great, loses the last syllable before a sub- 
 stantive beginning with a consonant, whenever it signi- 
 fies great in merit or in quality; but if it signifies great 
 in extent or dimension only, or if the following noun 
 begins with a vowel, it does not in general lose any of 
 those letters. Una gran muger* un gran caballero* 
 imply therefore a considerable portion of merit in 
 the woman and tfee-^agafes* on the other hand una 
 grande casa, implies greatness in dimension; but un 
 grande amigo, un grande almirante signify greatness in 
 the former sense. 
 
 Santo, holy, loses also the last syllable before a 
 proper name : San Pedro, San Francisco. Santo Do- 
 mingo, Santo Tomas, Santo Torribio, and Santo Tome, 
 are exceptions to the rule. 
 
 If the substantive to which any one of the preceding 
 adjectives belongs, be not expressed, but understood, 
 that adjective does not lose its final syllable : Uno 6 
 dos hombres i uno de esos senores. 
 
40 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 A pronoun supplies the place, and consequently 
 prevents the repetition, of a noun. 
 
 Pronouns may be divided into three classes, Personal, 
 Relative, and Adjective. 
 
 THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 
 
 Stand only for persons, or for things personified. 
 Personal pronouns admit of person, number, gender, 
 and case. 
 
 There are three persons in each number : 
 
 yo, I, is the first person ] 
 
 tu, thou, is the second person > singular. 
 
 el, he ; ella, she, is the third person J 
 
 nosotros, tve, is the first person ~\ 
 
 vosotros you, is the second person > plural, 
 
 ellos, ellas, they, is the third person J 
 
 The other accidents of pronouns, number, gender, 
 and case, are like those of nouns. 
 
 Personal Pronouns are thus declined: 
 
 
 First Person. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 Ace. 
 Obj. 
 Voc. 
 
 yo, / 
 
 me, a mi, me 
 
 me, a mi, to me 
 
 Nom. 
 Ace. 
 Obj. 
 Voc. 
 
 nosotros 4 ive 
 
 nos, a nosotros, us 
 
 nos, a nosotros, tons 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. vosotros, you 
 
 Ace. os, a vosotros, you 
 
 Obj. os, a vosotros, to you 
 
 Voc. vosotros, O you 
 
 * Nosotros and vosotros are masculine. When feminine nouns are 
 referred to, the last syllable os is changed into as; as nosotras, voso- 
 tras. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 tu, 
 
 thou 
 
 Ace. 
 
 te, 
 
 a ti, thee 
 
 Obj. 
 
 te, 
 
 a ti, to thee 
 
 Voc. 
 
 tu, 
 
 thou 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 « 
 
 Third Person Masculine, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Ace. 
 Obj. 
 Voc. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 el * he 
 
 le, a el, him 
 
 le, a el, to him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. ellos, they 
 
 Ace. los, a ellos, them 
 
 Obj. los 5 a ellos, to them 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Third Person Feminine. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. ell a, she 
 Ace. la, a ell a, for 
 Obj. le, a ella^ fo /br 
 Voc. — 
 
 Nom. el las, £Aey 
 Ace. las, a ellas, £A#« 
 Obj. les, a ellas, fo Mew? 
 Voc. 
 
 Third Person Neuter. 
 
 Singular only. 
 
 Nom. ello, it 
 Ace. lo, it 
 Obj. a ello, ifo z'£. 
 Voc. 
 
 There is another pronoun of the third person which 
 refers to the nominative of the sentence, and is generally 
 termed reciprocal; it has two cases, the accusative and 
 the objective : 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 Ace. se^ a si, himself, herself, itself themselves. 
 Obj. se, a si, to himself, herself, itself, themselves, 
 
 * Anciently when the preposition de preceded the pronouns tl, ella 
 ello, the e was omitted, and the el joined to the pronoun ; as del 
 della, dello ; but this contraction is rejected by the Academy, and 
 approved only before the article. — Query : Is not what the 
 Academy calls an article, often a true pronoun ? In the chapter on 
 demonstrative pronouns, that body when speaking of aquel observes : 
 Aquel es la (cosa, &c.) que esta remota del que hahla, y del 
 que escucha. 
 
42 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Observations on the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 When the adjective mismo, self, is joined to the pro- 
 noun se, it agrees in gender and number with the noun 
 to which it refers ; Hablan de si mismos ; they (mas) 
 speak of themselves : Se condemnan a si mismas ; they 
 [fern.) condemn themselves. 
 
 The pronouns mi, ti, si, preceded by the preposition 
 con, with, are changed into mi go, tigo, sigo, which unite 
 with the preposition : Conmigo } with me ; contigo, with 
 thee ; consigo, with him. 
 
 Nosotros and vosotros are compounded of the pro- 
 nouns nos, vos, and the plural adjective otros. Vos in 
 the accusative has lost the v. Os (not vos) castigare, 
 I will punish you. 
 
 Nos and vos are no longer used in the nominative for 
 nosotros and vosotros, except in some particular in- 
 stances. In royal ordinances, ecclesiastical mandates, 
 &c. 710s is joined to singular nouns. Tu and vos are 
 often used as terms of familiarity between husband and 
 wife, parents and children, and sometimes between 
 intimate friends. They are also used in addresses to 
 the Deity, &c. But in good society, tu, vos, vosotros, 
 are never employed. Tu especially would be con- 
 sidered insulting, as it is the term employed in speaking 
 to servants, slaves, and dogs.* 
 
 As then the second person is so seldom used, the 
 Spaniards have been obliged to call in the aid of the 
 third in addressing one another. They use listed for 
 the singular, and ustedes for the plural, of both sexes, 
 and make the following verb agree in the third person 
 w r ith one or other of these words, listed is an abbre- 
 viation of vuestra merced, — a term nearly equivalent to 
 your worship, listed is not used in writing ; but vm 
 for the singular, and vms, or vmds, for the plural. 
 When this abbreviation is followed by an adjective, that 
 adjective must always be of the same gender and 
 number as the person, or persons, to whom we speak ; 
 g Senor, estd vm bueno ? Are you well, sir ? Senora, 
 
 * Tu is generally used when kings address a subject, however 
 high in rank that subject may be. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 43 
 
 me han dicho que vm est a buena ; Madam, I have been 
 informed that you are well, g Senores, estan vms buenos ? 
 gentlemen, are you well I $ Senoras, estan vms buenos? 
 Ladies; are you well ? 
 
 As the accusative and the objective case of personal 
 pronouns are for the most part alike in both numbers, 
 they are often confounded with each other even by lite- 
 rary Spaniards. The student will, however, find little 
 difficulty in distinguishing the one from the other, 
 if he consider that whenever the translation of the 
 governed pronoun requires, or admits, the preposition 
 to, that pronoun is in the objective case : Eljuez le 
 not if 6 la seniencia ; the judge communicated to him the 
 sentence. Here le is in the objective, because it 
 admits the preposition to when translated into English. 
 But in Jthe sentence, el juez le castigo, the judge 
 punished him, le will not admit the preposition, and it 
 h therefore in the accusative. 
 
 In nouns, the objective case is always governed 
 by a preposition preceding it, but the first form of the 
 objective case of personal pronouns is never governed 
 by one. Like the accusative, it is governed by the 
 verb. The distinction, however, which has in the 
 preceding paragraph been drawn between the two 
 cases, will be sufficiently intelligible, and will prevent 
 the learner from confounding them. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 Are such as relate in general to some word or phrase 
 going before, which is thence called the antecedent. 
 They are quien 3 cual. que, and cuyo. Cual generally re- 
 quires the definite article before it ; que seldom ; quien 
 and cuyo never. 
 
 Quien relates to persons only ; cual and que to both 
 persons and things. 
 
 The Relative Pronouns are thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. quien. who. 
 Ace. a quien, whom. 
 Obj. de quien, of or from whom. 
 Yoc. — 
 
44 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 Norn, quienes, whom. 
 
 Ace. a quienes, whom. 
 
 Obj. de quienes, of or from whom. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. el cual, tuAo, which. 
 . J al cual, whom. 
 \ el cual, which. 
 Obj. del cual, of or from whom or which. 
 Voc, 
 
 Nom. los cuales, tc^o, which. 
 a f los cuales, which. 
 
 ' X a los cuales, whom. 
 Obj. de los cuales, of or from whom or "which. 
 Voc. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. la cual, tt^o, which. 
 » f la cual, which. 
 
 \ a la cual, whom. 
 Obj. a la cual, Zo tuAo^ or which. 
 Voc. 
 
 Pfurhl. 
 
 Nom. I9S cuales, to/jo, which. 
 . c rl^s cuales, which. 
 
 \ a los cuales, whom. 
 Obj. a los cuales, £0 ivAom or which. 
 Voc. 
 
 (JW, who, which, that, has no distinction of genders 
 and numbers. L 7 ^ m/ que ; a king who ; Zos hombres 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 45 
 
 que, the men who ; la espada que tenia, the sword which 
 he had ; las mugeres que Jiiei'on, the women who 
 went. 
 
 Lo que, that which,, or what, refers to something in- 
 definite and singular : Qitando no podenics lograr lo que 
 deseamos, debemos contentarnos con lo que tenemos ; when 
 we cannot obtain tvhat we want, we should be satisfied 
 with tvhat we have. 
 
 Cuyo, cuya, cuyos, cuyas, whose, of which, agrees in 
 gender and number with the noun to which it is joined: 
 g Cuyo es este libro ? whose is this book ? g Cut/as son 
 estas plumas ? whose are these pens ? This pronoun 
 evidently partakes the nature of an adjective. 
 
 Qicien is sometimes used for quienes. Thus Cervan- 
 tes : " Los prirneros con quien topamos, eran los Gim- 
 nosofistas" — " Instrumentos por quien seforman las fan- 
 tasias." But neither the authority of Cervantes, nor 
 that of the whole Spanish Academy, can justify so ma- 
 nifest a violation of concord, especially as it is opposed 
 to the general practice of the best Castilian writers. 
 
 When Relative Pronouns are used in asking questions, 
 they are termed Interrogatives : g Quien viene? who 
 comes ? In the latter case, however, they do not all 
 preserve the same meaning. 
 
 Que as a relative signifies tvho, which, that; as an in- 
 terrogative, what ; gQue tenemos? what have we? Que 
 is also used before a noun, and with the same meaning : 
 gQue hora es ? what o'clock is it ? gQueJrutos comprard 
 vm ? what fruits will you purchase ? 
 
 But when tvhat is separated by the verb to he from 
 the noun to which it belongs, it is rendered by cual 
 without the article when it relates to things, and by 
 quien when it relates to persons : ^;Cual es el merito de 
 aquel hombre? what is the merit of that man ? gCuales 
 son sus conocimientos ? what are his acquirements ? 
 g Quienes son aquellos hombres ? what are those men I 
 It also signifies who are those men I 
 
 Whose may be rendered by cuyo or de quien : Whose 
 are the books? g cuyos son los libros? whose is the 
 house ? g de quien es la casa ? 
 
46 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 Are of a mixed nature : they have the properties both 
 of pronouns and of adjectives. 
 
 Adjective pronouns may be subdivided into three 
 classes, the Possessive, the Demonstrative, and the IE- 
 definite. 
 
 1. The Possessive 
 
 Are those which relate to possession or property. Of 
 this class there are two kinds : 
 
 The Conjunctive, which are always joined to nouns; 
 as mi Uber, my book. 
 
 The Disjunctive which are never joined to the nouns, 
 and are preceded by the definite article ; as, tu casa y 
 la mia, thy house and mine. 
 
 
 Conjunctive. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 MAS. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 mio, 
 tuyo, 
 suyo, 
 nuestro, 
 
 mia, my* 
 
 tuya, thy. 
 
 suya, his, her> its, their. 
 
 nuestra, our. 
 
 vuestro, 
 
 vuestra, your. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 MAS. 
 
 PEM. 
 
 mios, 
 tuyos, 
 suyos, 
 nuestros, 
 
 mias, my. 
 
 tuyas, thy. 
 
 suyas, his 9 her, its, their 
 
 nuestras, our. 
 
 vuestros, 
 
 vuestras, your. 
 
 Mio, tuyo, suyo, with their ferninines mia, tuya, suya 9 
 lose the final syllable before a noun, and preserve it 
 when the noun precedes them : mi libro, mi madre : 
 hijo mio, madre mia. And so also in the plural : mis 
 lihros, tus cartas, sus casas. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 47 
 
 MAS. 
 
 el mio, 
 el tuyo, 
 el suyo, 
 el nuestro, 
 el vuestroj, 
 
 MAS. 
 
 los mios, 
 los tuyos, 
 los suyos, 
 los nuestros, 
 los vuestros, 
 
 Disjunctive. 
 Singular. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 la mi a, mine. 
 
 la tuya, thine. 
 
 la suya, his, hers, its, theirs* 
 
 la nuestra, ours. 
 
 la vuestra, yours. 
 
 Plural 
 
 FEM. 
 
 las mias, mine. 
 
 las tuyas, thine* 
 
 las suyas, his, hers, its, theirs. 
 
 las nuestras, ours. 
 
 las vuestras, yoursi 
 
 These pronouns are declined like nouns : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nora, el mio, mine. 
 Ace. el, or al mio, mine. 
 Obj. del mio, of or from mine. 
 Yoc. — . 
 
 Norn, 
 Ace. 
 Obj. 
 Voc. 
 
 Plural 
 
 los mios, mine, 
 
 los, or a los mios, mine. 
 
 de los mios, of or from mine. 
 
 When these pronouns refer to something indeter- 
 minate and neuter, they are joined to the neuter article : 
 Lo mio no es tuyo ; mine is not thine. 
 
 As tu, vos, and vosotros, are not used in good society. 
 neither are tuyo and vuestro. Instead of these we em- 
 ploy do vm in speaking to one person, and de vms, or 
 mias* in speaking to more than one, prefixing either 
 the definite article, or suyo to the noun, with which it is 
 
4§ ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 made to agree. Thus for vuestro hijo, your son, we 
 should say el hijo de vm, or de vms, the son of your 
 worship, &c. For Senores, vuestras camas estan pron- 
 tas, we should say, Senores, las (or sus) cant as de vms 
 estan prontas. In familiar conversation de vm, &c. may 
 be either omitted or expressed, if the noun be preceded 
 by su or sus : How is your father ? gcomo esta su padre 
 de vm? ; or ^como esta su padre? Without this fami- 
 liarity, the omission of vm would be considered im- 
 polite. 
 
 When the pronoun is disjunctive, the expression is 
 similar : Gentlemen, my coach and yours are at the 
 door ; senores, mi coche, y el de vms, estan a la puerta. 
 
 If we speak of a third person also, for whom we wish 
 to testify considerable respect, we use su merced, (sus 
 merc-edes plural) instead of su : I have seen the corregi- 
 dor, and I hope to obtain his protection ; he visto al 
 senor corregidor, y espero merecer la proteccion de su 
 merced. 
 
 In elevated style, and when we address the powers of 
 heaven, or persons high in dignity, vuestro may be used : 
 Dios, imploro vuestro amparo ; O God, I implore trry 
 assistance : Inutil sera, senor, todo vuestro poder ; all 
 3 r our power, sire, will be useless. 
 
 2. The Demonstrative 
 
 Precisely point out the persons or things to which they 
 relate. 
 
 Of this class there are only three : 
 
 • 
 
 Mas. Fern. Neat. 
 Sing, este, esta, esto, this. 
 Plur. estos, estas, these. 
 
 Sing, ese, esa, eso, that. 
 Plur. esos, esas, , those. 
 
 Sing, aquel, aquella, aquello, that. 
 Plur. aquelios, aquellas, those. 
 
 When the demonstratives este and ese precede the ad- 
 jective otro, other, they coalesce with it so as to form 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 4# 
 
 one word, but they previously drop the final vowel : 
 Estotro, estotra, estotro, this other ; estotros, estotras, 
 these others : Esotro, esoira, esotro, that other ; esotros, 
 esotras, those others. It is not so when aquel precedes 
 the same adjective : in that case both words remain un- 
 changed : Aquel otrOy a quell a oira, aquello otro y that 
 other. 
 
 The proper application of ese and aquel requires 
 some attention. Both words signify that, but with some 
 difference of meaning. Ese points out an object at a 
 moderate distance from the speaker ; aquel, one that is 
 more remote, Esie points out an object here, or ik 
 this place; ese, there, or in that place; and 
 aquel, yonder.* 
 
 . The relative use of these pronouns is the same when 
 applied to time as to space. Este denotes time present ; 
 ese, time not long past; and aquel, time considerably 
 removed from the present. 
 
 3. The Indefinite 
 
 Are so called because they express their subjects in an 
 indefinite or general manner. 
 
 Many of this class are declined like adjectives; but as 
 they do not express qualities, they cannot properly be 
 ranked under that head. 
 
 The following have no plural : 
 
 Alguien, some one, any one. 
 Kadie, no one, nobody. 
 Algo, something, any thing. 
 Nad a, nothing, not any thing. 
 
 * The definition given above differs in one respect from that of the 
 Academy : " Este sefiala y demuestra la persona 6 cosa, tanto ma* 
 terial cumo incprporea, qu,e esta cerca del que habla, 6 que el mismo 
 tiene asida : Ese la que ebta mas cerca de aquel a quien se habla, que 
 del que habla ; Aquel la que esta remota del que habia, y del que 
 escucha."— With ail deference to the authority of that learned body, 
 the use assigned to ese, however clear, is not sufficiently accurate* 
 The speaker, and the person spoken to, may be both together, and 
 vet ese would be the word used to point out an object at a moderate 
 distance from the former, and consequently from the latter. 
 
 D 
 
SO ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Cada, each, ever?/ (always joined to a noun), 
 Quienquiera, whoever, whosoever, &c. 
 QuaJquier cosa, whatever, whatsoever. 
 
 The following have no singular : 
 
 Ambos, ambas, both. 
 
 Varios, varias, several. 
 
 Entrambos, entrambas, both together. 
 
 The two following have the same termination for both 
 genders : 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 Tal, tales, such, 
 
 Qualquiera, qualesquiera, whoever, whichever, fyc. 
 
 The following have the distinctions of gender and number t 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Mas. 
 Sing, uno, 
 Plur. unos, 
 
 Sing. alguno, 
 Plur. algunos, 
 
 Sing, ninguno, 
 Plur. ningunos, 
 
 Sing, mucho, 
 Plur. much os, 
 
 Sing, to do, 
 Plur. todos, 
 
 Sing, otro, 
 Plur. otros, 
 
 Sing, uno y otro, 
 Plur. unos y otros, 
 
 Sing, ni uno ni otro, 
 plur. ni unos ni otros, 
 
 Sing, uno otro, 
 Plur. unos otros* 
 
 una, one. 
 unas, some. 
 
 alguna, some one. 
 algunas, some, any. 
 
 ninguna, no one. 
 ningunas, none, not any. 
 
 mucha, much. 
 muchas, many. \ 
 
 tod a, ") 7, 
 A i \all. 
 todas, J 
 
 otra, other. 
 otras, others. 
 
 una y otra, j^ 
 unas y otras, J 
 
 m una ni otra, 1 ..? 
 
 . 4 > neither* 
 ni unas ni otras, J 
 
 una otra, each other. 
 unas otras, one another. 
 
ETYMOLOGY, 51 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS* 
 
 1. Personal* 
 
 I love Miss Julia, but she is not fond 
 
 quiero a la Seuorita — pero no es prendado 
 
 of me. Thov. wouldst do better to attend to thyself] 
 
 harias mejor atendar a 
 
 and not to thy friends. / have told often 
 y no in ami go. he dicho muchas 
 
 thee that thou wilt always find me disposed 
 veces que hatlaras siempre dhpuesto 
 
 to serve thee. You have seen my father., and yon 
 servir Vm ha visto a mi padre, y vm 
 
 have spoken to him of me. They say much good 
 ha hablado de dicen mvcho bieti 
 
 of you, but you speak ill of them. Virtue 
 
 ha bla mala merit e La virtual 
 
 contains within itself all that can make it 
 
 tiene en qudnio puede hacer 
 
 lovely. (Idle men) are tiresome to 
 
 amable. Los hombres perezosos ra.testo a 
 
 themselves. The more / see Miss C the more 
 
 veo 
 amiable /find her. I have received letters ft om her p 
 
 hallo he recibido cartas de 
 
 and / shall write to her by the first post. If you 
 
 escribire par correi. 
 
 wish to come with me, I will give you a seat 
 qui ere a venir conmigo dare asiento 
 
 in my carriage. God sees us, calls us, and will 
 en mi cache. Dins ve t llama 
 
 judge us. All the affections which rule us are criminal. 
 juzgara Todos a feet o que figen _. ' culpable. 
 
 These w r ords comforted me much. I diverted 
 Esta palabra me conscluron mucho* * diver ii 
 
 * Though the pronouns yo, i*^ el, &c, are seldom expressed be- 
 fore the verb to wh'ch iljey are ii;uniri: r ;5 ves, the learner would do well 
 not to omit them until In* is famijiaiised with them. Yuu should be 
 Tendered, by vm, singular, zms plural, with the verb in ihe iinrd persun» 
 For the place of the persona) pronouns, see Syntax. 
 
 » 2 
 
52 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 them with a relation of my last adventure. If God 
 
 con relation mi ultimo a-ceniura Si 
 is for us, zve are enough to go against them. He 
 es para somos bastanies para ir contra 
 could not 3ive without her. Hercules confessed to me 
 
 podia vivir sin confeso 
 
 that this part of his life had tarnished his virtue, 
 
 est a parte su vida habia empanado su 
 God has granted him a happy and long reign of fifty 
 
 ha dado dichoso largo repiado 
 
 years. These wicked men. would have killed 
 anos Estos malvado h ombre le hubieran muerto 
 him. The presence of this friend comforted her. 
 
 p/esencia amigo consolo 
 
 Prosperity procures us friends, and adversity 
 
 La prosperidad prccura la adversidad 
 
 tries them. (Your brothers) are good : 
 prueba Los hermanos de vm bueno 
 
 they have given me money. Your sisters are 
 
 me kan dado diner o hermana 
 
 better : they have given me good advice. Moses 
 mejor comejo (pi.) Moyses 
 
 touched with his rod the water of the river, and 
 toco con su vara el agua rio, y 
 
 changed it into blood. You are spies, and tve 
 convertio en sangre. sois espia, y 
 
 will punish you. Generosity unites many vir- 
 castigaremos. La generosidad junta mucha vir- 
 
 tues, and gives them an heroic energy. 
 tud y da heroico energia. 
 
 2. Relative* 
 
 The house ivhich you have bought is better than 
 casa ha comprado vale mas 
 
 * In the above exercise, who raajr be rendered by que, if it imme- 
 diate! v Follow its r;rjteuedent, and if it be in the same case; as, A king, 
 who governs well, i* beloved; vn rev, que gobierna bien, es querido. In 
 other cases who is often rendered by quien or qual. Whom is gene- 
 rally translated quien, preceded by the preposition d; but que with- 
 out a preposition is also used, especially if it immediately follow 
 the antecedent. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 53 
 
 that in which I dwell. The men twain I have seen, 
 aquella en vivo a he visio 
 
 The women whom I esteem. The book which we have 
 
 muger a esiimo libra hemos 
 
 read is new. He is a man to whom I have often 
 leido est a nuevo es he 
 
 spoken. The (young man) of whom I have spoken to 
 hablado joven 
 
 you,, deserves to be encouraged. The place which he 
 
 es digno de ser alentado puesto 
 
 has obtained. The flowers which thou seest, are flow- 
 ha logrado ves son 
 
 ers whose odor is pleasing. He is a man whose mo- 
 odor suave mo- 
 
 desty is admirable. Those are oaks whose trunk is 
 destia Esias en c in a tronco 
 
 strong, and whose branches are shady. This is a vice 
 fuerte tamo jTrondoso Este vicio 
 
 which is the source of many others. The company 
 origen muchos otros compania 
 
 which had founded the city. He who despises virtue 
 
 hahiafandado ciudad desprecia 
 
 deserves no confidence. Cicero was one of those 
 no merece confianza Cicero ji fue aquellos 
 
 who were sacrificed to the vengeance of the trium- 
 
 Jueron sacrificadoi d venganza trium- 
 
 virs. They who had despised the prediction of 
 vivos habian despreciado prediccion 
 
 Mentor, lost their slaves and flocks. They who 
 
 perdieron sns esclavo y ganado 
 oppress the poor, shall be punished ; but they who 
 oprimen a pobre seran casiigados 
 love the poor, shall be rewarded. Whose is this 
 qui^ren a recompensados este 
 
 book ? Whose is this house? Whose are these books? 
 libro est a casa son 
 
 Whose are these houses ? A. virgin shall conceive and 
 
 virgen concibivd 
 
 bear a son, whose name shall be Jesus, (Let us hear) 
 parird htjo nombre sera Oygamos 
 
51? ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 the apostle, tvhose words are mysteries: (let us obey) 
 d aposiolo palabra misteria obedezcamos 
 
 the church, tvhose precepts are salutary. Who knocks 
 
 iglesia precepto saludable llama 
 
 at the door ? God, ivho is invisible, created the world 
 
 a puerta Dios — crio mundo 
 
 zvhich is visible. Who goes there? 
 — va all a 
 
 3. Adjective. 
 
 My father is there. Thy sister is virtuous. His 
 padre esid hermana es virtuoso 
 
 Cousin (has had the care) of my subsistence. Thy 
 primo ha cuidado de mantenimiento 
 
 carelessness is the only cause of thy disgrace. Our 
 descuido unico causa desgracia 
 
 house is very large. My books are numerous. Her 
 
 grande numeroso 
 
 virtue is worthy (of imitation). Your children are 
 
 digno de ser imilada hi jo 
 
 more obedient than ours. My story is long, hers is 
 
 obediente historia largo 
 
 short. Mine and thine are the source of many con- 
 corto origen mucho con* 
 
 tendons. Our friends have as much credit as yours, 
 iienda tienen credito 
 
 Their reasons are bad, and I (will not admit) their 
 
 razon malo no admit ire 
 
 excuses. My opinion is conformable to yours. These 
 disculpa — - — — cGii forme a Estos 
 
 books are theirs. His wife and mine are there. Your 
 
 muger est an alia 
 
 reasons are good ; but theirs are very bad. (Let us hear) 
 
 Oygamos 
 your opinion: theirs has already been given. Our 
 
 ha dejd si do dada 
 carriages are at the door, and yours is in the street. 
 cocke est an a puerta est It en ealle 
 
ETYMOLOGY, 55 
 
 Your labours have been great. It seems that the 
 
 trabajo han silo gr ancle parece que 
 first men (lost sight of) the laws of nature : 
 primer o perdierou de xista ley la naturalism 
 
 hence sprang our errors, our crimes, our enemies, 
 de aqui nacieron error crimen enemigo 
 
 our wars. I have paid my expences : (let them pay) 
 
 guerra he pagado gasto que paguen 
 
 theirs. Their manners differ from ours. 
 
 cosiumbre diferencian de 
 (Look at) those trees.* This man and that woman 
 Mir a arbor 
 
 are guilty. These men and those women are innocent. 
 culpa Lie innocente 
 
 Virtue and vice are contrary : this causes the 
 La virtue! y el vicio contrario causa 
 
 misery of men ; that makes them happy. That is 
 mi serin de I as hace jYliz 
 
 admirable: that is fine. These things are very dear : 
 
 hello cos a ca>'0 
 
 those are not dear. This man is my brother: that 
 
 her ma no 
 woman is my sister. These virtues are precious : those 
 
 kermana precioso 
 
 are inestimable. 
 
 Some one has inquired for me. No one lias been 
 ha pre gun l ado por ha si do 
 
 called. I have not seen any friend. All complain of 
 ilamado No he visio amigo quejau 
 
 his memory, but no one of his judgment. No one is 
 
 memoria pero juicio 
 
 free from calumny. He is a man whom no one pleases, 
 libre calumnia a agrada 
 
 and who pleases no one. The world is a stage in 
 
 mundo teatro sobre 
 
 which every one plays his part. One sows the 
 
 represent a papel siembra 
 
 * For that, nnd its plural those, the student may employ either 
 eso or atfuel. — When this and that refer to two preceding nouns, this 
 is rendered by este, and thai by aquel. 
 
56 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 seed, another gathers the fruit. Among authors there 
 
 semilla coge fruto Entre autor 
 
 are some who copy literally from one another, 
 
 hai/ - coptan lit.eralme.7ite 
 
 (Have you met with) your sister and cousin ? I 
 
 Ha top ado vm con hermcina prima 
 
 have met with neither. All love virtue. Interest, 
 
 am an la El inter es 
 
 which blinds some, enlightens others. No one deserves 
 
 ciega a aclara a merece 
 
 to be praised for his goodness if he has not strength 
 & ser alahado por bondad si no iiene Jlierza 
 to be wicked. JVkatsoever you undertake, you are 
 de ser malo vm emprenda es 
 
 sure of success. I have seen many fields, but none 
 cierto de acertar he visto campo pero 
 
 so fruitful as this. Many deceive themselves, 
 
 Jertil se enganan a si mismos 
 
 wishing to deceive others. The belligerent powers 
 qneriendo enganar beligerante potencia 
 
 are 7na?iy, and if any one of them should propose con- 
 si propnsiere con- 
 
 ditions, all will be lost. The enemy will demand 
 dicion sera per dido enemigo pedird 
 
 something as an equivalent, but, nothing (shall we grant) 
 
 equiva lenie con cederem os 
 
 to hirn, because whatever we might yield to him 
 
 cedieramos 
 (would not satisfy) his ambition. Whosoever (shall 
 
 no content aria ambicion f&A 
 
 persevere) unto the end, shall be saved. 
 severare hasta Jin sera salvado. 
 
 VERB. 
 
 A verb signifies to be, to do, or to suffer. 
 
 Spanish verbs are of four kinds, Active, Passive, 
 Neuter, and Reflected. They may also be divided into 
 liegular, Irregular, and Defective. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 57 
 
 A Verb Active expresses action, and necessarily re* 
 quires an agent and an object acted upon, which 
 object is in the accusative case ; as Amo la virtue!, I 
 love virtue. 
 
 To find whether the verb be active or neuter, ask the 
 question whom or what with the verb, and if the answer 
 makes good sense, that verb must be active: Amo, I 
 love what ? la virtue!, virtue. 
 
 A Verb Passive denotes the, receiving or the enduring 
 of an action. It always consists of more than one word, 
 and is followed by one of these propositions de or par : 
 El hombre virtuoso es querido de todos ; the virtuous 
 man is loved by all. 
 
 The verb passive reverses the situation of the agent 
 and the object when associated with the active : in 
 other repects the affirmation is the same. El hombre 
 virtuoso es querido de todos has the same meaning as 
 Todos quieren al hombre virtuoso. 
 
 A Verb Neuter expresses neither action nor the en- 
 during of one. It has the same form as the active; 
 but, unlike the latter, it does not require an object after 
 it. Thus dormir, to sleep, is neuter, because it cannot 
 be made to govern a following noun. 
 
 In common language a verb may properly be termed 
 active, which in a grammatical sense is neuter. Thus 
 correr, to run. is active in the former sense, but not in 
 the latter, because it does not admit after it a noun in 
 the accusative. The clearest distinction, perhaps, 
 which can be drawn between active and neuter verbs 
 is this : the former do not of themselves make a com- 
 plete sense : they must have some noun expressed or 
 understood in which their influence terminates ; but 
 the latter contain a perfect meaning within themselves, 
 and are not necessarily connected with any other noun 
 than the subject which produces them. 
 
 A Verb Reflected is active, but its action is generally 
 reflected back on the agent which produces it : El 
 hombre se matd, the man slew himself It is also fre- 
 quently used in a passive sense. 
 
 Verbs are called Regular when they have the same 
 radical letters, and the same terminations, as (hose 
 
 d 5 
 
SS ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 which will be given for a model. Those, on the con- 
 trary, are Irregular which deviate, in conjugation, from 
 the models alluded to. And those are Defective which 
 want certain tenses or persons. 
 
 Two verbs, haber, to have, and ser, to be, are also 
 called Auxiliary, because they help to conjugate the 
 others. 
 
 To verbs belong Mood, Tense, Number, and 
 Fehson. 
 
 moods. 
 
 Mood, or mode, is the manner in which the verb is 
 employed. 
 
 Spanish verbs have four moods, which are four dif- 
 ferent manners of expressing being, doing, and suffer- 
 ing. They are the Indicative, the Imperative, the 
 Subjunctive, and the Infinitive. 
 
 The Indicative either declares a thing absolutely, as, 
 Yo amo 9 I love ; or it asks a question, as, Que quiere 
 vm f What do you wish? 
 
 The Imperative commands, exhorts, entreats, &c« 
 Dame ese libra, Give me that book. 
 
 The Subjunctive performs the offices of both the 
 Potential and Subjunctive in English. In the former 
 case it is generally dependent on another v erb fallowing ; 
 in the latter, on a verb and conjunction preceding. 
 The sentence, quisiera que vmie*e, exemplifies both 
 parts of the subject; quisiera (Pot.) I could wish, que 
 viniese (Sub.) that he might come.* 
 
 The Infinitive expresses being, action, suffering, &c. 
 in a general and an unlimited manner, without any dis- 
 tinction of number and person $ as tenter, to fear. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 Tense is the distinction of time. 
 The three grand divisions of time are, Present, Past, 
 and Future; but, for the sake of greater accuracy, six 
 
 * The Subjunctive generally represents an action, &e. as depend- 
 ing on same motive, wish, supposition, condition, &c. ; but when pre- 
 ceded by certain exjunctions, it merely asserts or declares, like the 
 -D&dicalive. See the Syntax fcf Conjunctions, 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 59 
 
 tenses, or variations of time^ have been introduced into 
 the conjugation of Spanish as well as of English verbs. 
 Of these, three denote imperfect or unfinished action ; 
 and three, that which is -perfect or finished. 
 
 The three tenses which denote imperfect action, thai 
 is, action begun, going on, and consequently not ended, 
 are the Present, the Preterimperfect, and the Future- 
 imperfect. The three which denote perfect action are, 
 the Preterperfect, Preterpluperfect, and the Future- 
 perfect. 
 
 1. Tenses of the Indicative. 
 
 The Present tense represents an action as now pass- 
 ing, or a state as now existing; as, Yo escribo, I write, 
 do write, or am writing • Yo soy, I am. 
 
 Historians and poets, to give greater animation to 
 their style, frequently relate past actions in this tense. 
 General customs also, and truths which are ever the 
 same, are commonly expressed in it. 
 
 The Preterimperfect represents past unfinished ac- 
 tion ; and it implies a reference to some other action or 
 time co-existent with it : Yo escribia, I was writing— 
 when ? caando mi hermano llego, when my brother 
 arrived. 
 
 This tense also denotes what was customary; the 
 existence of good or bad qualities, &c. Yo iba a la 
 comedia el ano ultimo dns veces cada semana ; last year 
 I went to the play twice a week. Nero era un tirano ; 
 Nero 9s&8 a tyrant. 
 
 The Preterperfect has two forms, both which denote 
 finished action. The former refers to something done 
 at some time past, or at a time unconnected with the 
 present: Yo vi al re?/, I saw the king. The latter, on 
 the contrary, refers to something Lately done, or done 
 at least at a time connected with the present : Yo he 
 escrito, I have ivritten* 
 
 The former division of this tense is that of historic 
 narration, and some grammarians have termed it the 
 historic preterit. It differs from the preterimperfect 
 in more respect? than that of the action being finished 
 or unfinished : Yo amaba, implies an extended^ yo ame, 
 a limited portion of time. 
 
60 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 The latter division of this tense generally denotes 
 that the action is of more recent occurrence than it 
 would be if expressed in the former. He visto al rey 
 implies therefore greater proximity to the present time 
 than vi alreij-* But this is not always the case. The 
 latter phrase may refer to an action which took place 
 no longer since than yesterday: Ayer vi al rey ; and 
 the former to one which took place fifty years ago. 
 The distinction, however, which has been drawn is not 
 even in this case destroyed. Vi al rey implies that no 
 portion of the time in which the action passed, now 
 remains unexpired ; but lie visto al rey, though it should 
 refer to an event which happened many years ago, has 
 still a relation to the present time. It may mean, I 
 have seen the king some time in my life, and of that life 
 some portion must necessarily remain. 
 
 From the preceding observations then it follows, that 
 when we use the first preterperfect, we relate an 
 action which happened at a time completely past ; that 
 when we use the second we relate one done at a time 
 of which some portion still remains. 
 
 The Preterpluperfect represents a past action as 
 fully completed at or before the commencement of an- 
 other past action, or the arrival of some past time : Yo 
 habia cenado cuando entro, I had sapped when he en- 
 tered. 
 
 This tense admits two auxiliaries, habia and hube 9 
 —the former the preterimperfect, the latter the preter- 
 perfect of the auxiliary verb hater. The inquisitive 
 student will naturally inquire whether there be any 
 shade of difference between habia and huoewhen joined 
 with the participle. The latter is seldom joined with 
 one. It is sometimes used when the second action 
 rapidly succeeds the one on which it depends : Cuando 
 los hube a todos yido, no me 'admire de verlos juntos ; 
 when I had heard them all, I was not surprised to see 
 them together. It is always preceded by some adverb 
 
 * " Dividese este tiempo(e! preleriio-perfecto) en preterito prcx* 
 lino y remoto. Proximo cs el que dcnola mayor proximidad de Ja 
 accion, que signifies ya pasada ; y remoto es el que la deno'ta menor, 
 6 que ha mas tiempo que pas6 la. accion. Yo vi al rey denota que 
 ha mas tiempo que ie vi que cuando se dice, Hevteiuulrey," — Gram* 
 CasteL 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 61 
 
 of time ; as cuando, despues que, iuego que, asi que, no 
 bien, &c. In other cases habia is employed with the 
 participle. 
 
 The Future-imperfect is used when we mean to say 
 that an action, or event, will hereafter he passing and 
 consequently not ended ; as Querre siempre a Dios, 
 I shall always love God. It is often used in conjunc- 
 tion with another future action or time : Esteremos 
 felices cuando vm llegue, we shall he happy when you 
 arrive. 
 
 This tense corresponds to the preterimperfect. Both 
 denote progressive action, and hoth have the same 
 relation, expressed or understood, to other actions, or 
 periods of time. Cenabamos alas ocho ; we were supping 
 at eight o'clock: Cenaremos a las ocho ; we shall be 
 supping at eight o'clock. Cenabamos cuando vmllego ; 
 we were supping when you arrived : Cenaremos cuando 
 vm llegue ; we shall be supping when you arrive. 
 Queriamos siempre a Dies; we always loved God: 
 Querremos siempre & Dins ; we shall always love God. 
 
 The Future-perfect intimates that the action or event 
 will be fully accomplished at or before another future 
 action or time: Habremos cenado cuando vm llegue / 
 we shall have supped when you arrive. 
 
 This tense bears a striking resemblance to the preter- 
 pluperfeet : both denote the completion of action at or 
 before a certain time, or the commencement of another 
 action. Habiamos cenado a las ocho ; we had supped 
 at eight. Habremos cenado a las ocho ; we shall have 
 tupped at eight. Habiamos cenado cuando entr 6 $ we 
 had supped when he entered. Habremos cenado cuando 
 entra, we shall have supped when he enters. 
 
 2. Imperative. 
 
 Strictly speaking this mood has but one person sin- 
 gular and plural. Every command, exhortation, en- 
 treaty, &c. must be addressed to the second person, 
 Grammarians, however, have admitted two persons in 
 the singular, and three in the plural ; but the third per- 
 son singular, and the first and third persons plural, are 
 borrowed from the Present tense of the Subjunctive, 
 
62 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Though the only tense assigned to the Imperative 
 is that of the Present, yet it has often a relation to 
 Future time: Ve ahora ; go now: Ve manana ; go 
 to-morrow. 
 
 The second person of this tense cannot be used with 
 a verb preceded by a negative : the Present of the Sub- 
 junctive is therefore used : No vayais ; do not go (ye 
 may not go). 
 
 3. Tenses of the Subjunctive. 
 
 The Subjunctive has six tenses, but the time to which 
 the first three refer can be ascertained only from the 
 governing verb. Thus, when we use the Present tense, 
 and say : Tiene vniy mal seiuhlaide ; iemo que este 
 wialo ; esfe expresses present time; but in the sentence, 
 Ha comido tanto que temo que este ma/o 9 the same verb 
 evidently refers to the future. 
 
 In the same manner the Preterimperfect of this 
 mood represents contingent action as past, present, or 
 future ; the Preterperfect contingent action which is 
 alreidu pa>t, or which will he past at some specified 
 future time, or at the commencement of some future 
 action. But the Preterplupei feet and the two Future 
 tenses preserve the same relation to time as they do in 
 the Indicarive : the first always refers to time past ; the 
 two last to time future. 
 
 The names then which have been assigned to the 
 Present, the Preterimperfect, and the Preterperfect of 
 this mood, will be of little use towards ascertaining the 
 time denoted by these tenses. That time must, as 
 before observed, be determined from the governing 
 verb. But if any one of these tenses be not preceded 
 by a verb and a conjunction, it is in what English 
 grammarians term the potential mood, and the time 
 signified by it can be discovered only from the meaning 
 of the sentence in which it is found. Where any 
 doubt could exist as to the time implied in the verb, 
 that verb is usually accompanied by an adverb of time ', 
 which clearly determines the matter. I would go 
 to-day: ina hoy. I would go to-morrcw : iria maniva* 
 And here the student will perceive that the corres- 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 63 
 
 ponding tenses in English are quite as indefinite as 
 those in Spanish. Indeed the verbs of no language are 
 80 complicated in their structure and use as our own. 
 
 The two Future tenses of the Subjunctive represent 
 contingent action as yet to take place, with the same 
 relation to each other as the corresponding tenses of 
 the Indicative ; that is, the Future imperfect represents 
 the action as yet to happen either with or without re- 
 pect to the precise time xsken ; and the Future-perfect, 
 the completion of one action at or before the com- 
 mencement of another. 
 
 As the Future-imperfect represents a contingent 
 action as going on at some future period, and as we 
 have seen the Present often does the same, the latter 
 may in many instances be used for the former. The same 
 relation exists between the Preierperfect and the Future- 
 perfect. But if the verb be preceded by the conjunc- 
 tion m, neither the Present nor the Preterperfect can 
 be substituted for the corresponding future. 
 
 Of the Terminations ra, se, and ria. 
 
 These terminations are found in the preterimperfect 
 of the subjunctive, and in that tense compounded, the 
 preterpluperfe-ct. The thorough comprehension and 
 the proper application of these is beyond doubt the 
 most difficult part of Spanish grammar: it is the 
 stumbling block of foreigners, and not unfrequently 
 of Spaniards themselves. And to an Englishman the 
 difficulty is considerably increased by the complicated, 
 and often indefinite nature of our corresponding auxi- 
 liaries, — auxiliaries to which no English grammarian 
 has ever yet done adequate justice, and which no 
 foreignei ever yet understood. In whatever obscurity 
 the subject of these subjunctive inflexions may appear 
 enveloped to the student, he may be assured that they 
 are much less obscure than the little words which he 
 daily uses, and with the meaning of which he supposes 
 himself to be well acquainted. When he considers this, 
 he will not wonder that in the Spanish grammars 
 hitherto published (nearly all of which have been com- 
 posed by foreigners) a subject in itself of sufficient 
 
64 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 difficulty should he rendered still more so by the un- 
 intelligible manner in which it has been treated. 
 
 Of these terminations "se is more especially sub- 
 junctive : it can never begin a sentence, and it is 
 almost always governed by some preceding verb or 
 conjunction. Kia is purely potential, and is never 
 governed by any preceding word : it may therefore 
 begin a sentence. It a is both subjunctive and potential, 
 and is so extended in its application that it may often 
 be substituted for either of the former. 
 
 The English signs corresponding to these termina- 
 tions are should, might, and would* But here the 
 learner must be careful not to confound should when 
 subjunctive or potential, with the same word signifying 
 duty or obligation. You should go, meaning, you 
 ought to go, is rendered by deber with the latter verb 
 in the infinitive. And when would emphatically denotes 
 inclination, it may be rendered by querer with an in- 
 finitive. 
 
 It must not be supposed that these terminations 
 invariably require the corresponding signs in English. 
 Verbs ending in ra or se, especially when they are 
 preceded by the conjunction si, frequently admit no 
 sign whatever when translated into our language. The 
 following observations will explain the relation existing 
 between these signs and those terminations ; and will 
 enable the student both how and when to employ 
 both. 
 
 The two first terminations ra and se, each of which 
 admits the auxiliaries should and might, are employed 
 whenever the verb is preceded by any governing con- 
 junction ; sino, si, antique, hieic que, dado que, &c. or 
 by an interjection expressing desire.f Si yo amdra, 
 (6 amuse) las riqueras ; if I loved riches. Oxald fuera 
 (dfeese) cierto I would to heaven it were certain! . After 
 
 * Sometimes also, but very seldom, could seems to be implied in 
 the verb : Antes que otro respondiese ; before any other could reply. 
 
 f " Cuandu la oracion del tieiiipo imperfecta de suhjunctivu em- 
 picza por aUunaconjimcion condicional, si,siuo, aunque.bien que, dado 
 que, etc. 6 por interjection quesigniiuiue aeseo, se puede usar de la 
 primera 6 tcrcera tenuinacioii," (ra 6 se.)-- -Gram. Casts 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 65 
 
 si and aunque, however, the termination ra is much 
 more frequent than se; but after the other conjunctions 
 tiE is more usual than ra, as will soon be shown. 
 
 On the other hand ria, and ra when exercising the 
 potential power of ria, are used when the verb is not 
 governed by any preceding conjunction,* when the 
 •auxiliary would, and sometimes should, is required : 
 Leeria (6 leer a) todo el din si— I would read all the day 
 if — Bueno Juera (6 seria) si — it vooidd be well if — El 
 numero de los pobres no serian (pfueran) tan grande si— 
 the number of poor would not he so great if— No me 
 tuviera yo por Jamoso caballero si— I should not consider 
 myself a famous cavalier if-— Ria generally requires 
 would, and ra, should ; but should is used in the first 
 person only of both numbers. Should in the second 
 and third persons is not a sign corresponding to the 
 Spanish subjunctive, unless it be preceded by some 
 governing word : in these persons it implies duty or 
 obligation, and must, as before observed, be rendered 
 by deber. 
 
 These subjunctive inflexions will be rendered clearer 
 perhaps to the learner when he considers that many 
 conditional propositions in English consist of two 
 members, of which one is subjunctive, the other poten- 
 tial ; the former when translated into Spanish requires 
 the termination ra or se ; the latter in most instances 
 BIA. Si fuer a diligente, seria reconrpensado ; if he 
 were diligent, he would be rewarded. Here si fvera is 
 the subjunctive, and seria the potential, in English, 
 The order in which the sentence stands may be in- 
 verted, but the distinction between the members will 
 be the same ; and when the sentence consists of several 
 members, the same relation is naintained between them. 
 Seria recompensado, y todos le estimarian, si estudiera 
 con mas attencion, y fuese mas amante de la verdad ; 
 he would be rewarded, and all would esteem him, if he 
 studied with more attention, and if he were a greater 
 lover of truth. 
 
 * U Cuando la oracion del tiempo iraperfecto de qne hablamos 
 erapieza sin conjancion condicional, puede usarse de la primera 6 
 segunda terminacion/' (ra 6 ria).— Ibid. 
 

 66 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 But when the sentence does not admit this distinc- 
 tion of moods, the subjunctive is still governed by some 
 preceding verb or conjunction. When the governing 
 verb signifies to wish, to command, to fear, &c. the 
 termination se is more usual than ka : El rey mando 
 que viniese ; the king commanded that he should come. 
 When it happens, as in this, and in many other 
 examples, that the governed verb is necessarily depend- 
 ent on the one preceding, and is expressed in Eng- 
 lish by the infinitive, se is generally used: El rey 
 mando que viniese ; the king commanded him to come* 
 Benalcio hacienda que Danteo cantase ; Benalcio engag- 
 ing Danteo to sing (that Danteo should sing), Dijo 
 que callasen ; he told them to he silent. Mi madre 
 queria que le escribiese ; my mother wished me to write 
 to her. 
 
 W 7 hen the governing verb is decir, or any other of 
 similar import, either se or kia may be used, but not 
 in the same sense. El rey dijo que el embajador 
 viniese, means that the ambassador had the king's per- 
 mission, or even command, to come ; but el rey dijo que 
 el embajador vendria (the king said that the ambassa- 
 dor would come) is merely an assurance on the part of 
 the former, implying at the same time inclination on 
 the part of the latter. 
 
 Se is oftener used than ka after cnando, antes que, 
 donde, cuanto, el que, &c. when contingency is implied. 
 Antes que el duque respondiese ; before the duke could 
 answer. Querria que la Jbrtuna me qfrcciese presto 
 alguna ocasion donde me hiciese emperador ; I wish for- 
 tune might soon offer me an opportunity in which 
 / should be made an emperor. Le dije que tomase en 
 mi huerta todo lo que (o quanta) quisie.se ; I told him to 
 take in my garden all that he might xvish. Haria lo que 
 quuiese ; I would do whatever 1 might wish. 
 
 Ea is elegantly employed after interrogative pro- 
 nouns, or other words denoting exclamation, surprise, 
 &c. $ Quien lo crryera ? g quien lo imaginera ? who 
 tvould believe it ? who would imagine it ? / Dichoso yo si 
 el exceso de mi dolor me hithiera quitado la vida ! happy 
 I if the excess of my grief had taken away my life! 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 67 
 
 Of these terminations then ha, as the student must 
 have observed, is the most extensively applicable. As 
 we have before said, it may often be substituted for 
 either of the others :* Si yo amnra (6 amase) las 
 riqueras, procurara (6 procurctria) adquirarlas z if I 
 loved riches, I should, or would endeavour to acquire 
 them. But in cases where inclination is absolutely 
 expressed, ra cannot be substituted for ria. 'i hus if 
 in the sense of whether admits the latter only ; and 
 when the verb by which the subjunctive is governed 
 promises, assures, &c. the same termination is the only 
 one that can be admitted. I asked him if (whether) 
 his father would come : le preguntS si su padre veudria. 
 He promised me that he would come : me promeiio que 
 vendria. I assured thee that he ivould go out : te asse- 
 gure que saldria.f 
 
 But though se may be used for ra in many 
 cases cf subjunctive construction, let the student 
 bear in mind, that it can never be used for ria. We 
 may properly say : si leyeras, 6 leyeses, buenos Ubros, 
 (after si, as before observed, the former termination is 
 more usual) serias, 6 fueras mas instruido ; but we can 
 never say, si leerias buenos libros,Jlieses mas instruido* 
 
 4p Tenses qf the Infinitive. 
 
 The Present tense of this mood has also a relation to 
 future and to past time ; that is, it represents an action 
 as present now, or present at a certain rime past, or at 
 a certain time to come. That time is to be ascertained 
 from the governing verb : Le veo correr, I see him run ; 
 le oi cantor, I heard him sing; le vere baylar, I shall 
 see him dance. 
 
 * n La primera terminacion ra se acnmoda facilmente a servir por 
 alguna de las otras dus, ria y sf. Pues lo mismo es decir : El 
 tiempo pudiera ser mejor, que, El tiempo pod ria ssr m^jor : y con igual 
 propriedad se dice : yo hict que viniese, 6 yo hict que viniera." (But 
 here the student will please to observe that viniese is mr.re usual than 
 viniern.) " Pero las teriuinaciones srguuda y tercera (ria y sf.) son 
 entre si tan opuestas, que no puede la una suhstitnir a la otra ; y asi 
 en lugar de : yo querria ir a Sevilla, no se puede deeir : yo quisiese 
 ir a Sevilla. "—Gram. Custel. 
 
 t Though ra may be substituted for p.ia when equivalent to the 
 English potential, yet the latter termination is more frequently 
 used. 
 
6$ ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 The Perfect, on the contrary, represents an action as 
 past in relation to the verb which governs it, whether 
 that governing verb denote present, past, or future 
 time. Creo haberle visto, I believe I have seen him ; 
 Creia haberle vkto, I believed I had seen him ; si me 
 acordare haberle visto, if I should (hereafter) remem- 
 ber to have seen him. 
 
 The Present participle denotes time present in re- 
 ference to the verb which accompanies it, or on which 
 it is dependent. When joined to any tense of the verb 
 est dry it renders the action, &c. more emphatic, and in 
 this respect it exactly corresponds to our participle 
 associated with the verb to be. Estd escribiendo, he is 
 writing ; est aba escribiendo, he teas writing. 
 
 The Perfect participle denotes finished action in 
 relation to present,, past, or future time, according to 
 the time implied in the verb with which it is associated : 
 Habia escriio, I had written ; He escrito, I have written ; 
 habre esc?'ito, I shall have written. La carta habia sido 
 escrita, ha sido escrita, or habrd sido escrita ; the letter 
 had been written, has been written, or will have been 
 written.* 
 
 The Compound Perfect participle denotes action 
 finished at the time of another action present, past, or 
 future: Habiendo escrito la carta, jmrtio ; having 
 written the letter, he departed. 
 
 NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 
 
 Verbs, like nouns, have two Numbers, the singular 
 and the plural. 
 
 The verb is singular when it has but one individual 
 person or thing for its nominative ; as yo, tu 9 el, &c. It 
 is plural when its nominative consists of more than one 
 person or thing; as nosoiros, vosotros, ellos, &c. 
 
 Each number has three Persons : 
 
 Sing. 1 . vo arao, / love. 
 
 2. tu a mas, thou lovest. 
 
 3. el am a, he loves. 
 
 * See the Participle, and the observations immediately following. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 69 
 
 Plur. 1. nosotros atnamps, we love. 
 
 2. vosotros amais, you love. 
 
 3. ellos anian, they love. 
 
 Conjugation is the change of a verb throughout Its 
 Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons. 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliary haber to have* 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 Sing, yo he, I have. 
 
 tii has, thou hast.. 
 el ha, he has. 
 Plur. nosotros nemos, we have. 
 vosotros habeis, you have. 
 ellos han, they have. 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, yo habia, I had. 
 
 tii habias, thou hadst. 
 
 el habia, he had. 
 Plur. nosotros habiamos, tve had. 
 
 vosotros habiais, you had. 
 
 ellos habian, they had. 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 Sing, yo hiibe, I had. 
 
 tu hubiste, thou hadst, 
 
 el hiibo, he had. 
 Plur. nosotros hubimos, we had. 
 
 vosotros hubisteis, you had. 
 
 ellos hubieron, they had. 
 
 Future imperfect, 
 
 Sing, yo habre, I shall or will have. 
 
 tii habras, thou shalt or wilt have. 
 
 el habra, he shall or will have. 
 Plur. nosotros habremos, we shall or will have* 
 
 vosotros habreis, you shall or will have. 
 
 ellos habran, they shall or will have. 
 
 * In conjugating the following verbs the accent has been placed 
 over every syllable on which a stress of the voice is required* This 
 has been done to assist the learner in pronouncing them. 
 
70 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood.* 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, yo haya, / may have. 
 
 tii hay as, thou mayst have. 
 
 el haya, he may have. 
 Plur. nosotros hayamos, we may have. 
 
 vo.oa'os hayais, you may have. 
 
 ellos hayan, they may have. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que, that 
 Sing. ( hub! era, ^ 
 
 yo-* or > I should or might have. 
 (hubiese, J 
 i hubieras,^) 
 tu< or \thou shouldst or mighist have. 
 
 {h ub i eras, ^| 
 or > 
 hubieses, J 
 r hubiera, 1 
 elJ or v 
 L hubiese, j 
 
 he should or misfit have. 
 
 Plur. r hubieramos," 
 nosocros< or >ive should or might have. 
 
 I hub 
 
 lesemos 
 
 >we sh 
 
 r hubierais, ^ 
 
 vosotros^ or \you should or might have. 
 I hubieseis, J 
 
 < hubieran, \ 
 ellos 1 or >th 
 Lhubiesen, f 
 
 ey should or might have. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect* 
 
 Sing, yo habria, / would or should have. 
 tii habrias, thou xvouldst have. 
 el habria, he would have. 
 
 *The auxiliaries in English corresponding to the Spanish subjunc- 
 tives are generally expressed, but they are frequently omitted : Que 
 yo haya, ttn*t I have, a? well as, that I may have: Que yo kukiere or 
 habits?, that. I had, as well as, that I should or might have. The posi- 
 tive or contingent sense of the sentence will be the on)^' guide wrhicit 
 the learner can follow in translating. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 71 
 
 Plur. nosotros habriamos, we would or should have. 
 vosdtros habriais, you would have. 
 elJos habrian, they would have. 
 
 Future-imperfect. 
 
 si, if 
 Sing, yo hubiere, I should have. 
 
 tu hubieres, thou shouldst have. 
 
 el hubiere, he should have. 
 Plur. nosotros lmbieremos, we should have. 
 
 vosdtros hubiereis, you should have. 
 
 ell os hubieren, they should have* 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Haber, to have. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 Habi en do, having. 
 
 Conjugation of the verb tener, to have, or to possess. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing, ten go, I have. 
 
 tienes, thou hast. 
 
 liene, he has. 
 Plur. tenemos, we have. 
 
 teneis, you have. 
 
 tienen, they have. 
 
 2. Preterimperfecl. 
 
 Sing, tenia, I had. 
 
 tenias, thou hadst. 
 
 tenia, he had. 
 Plur. teniamos, we had. 
 
 teniais, you had. 
 
 tenian, they had. 
 
n 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 3. First Preterpcrfect. 
 
 Sing, tuve, I had. 
 
 tuviste, thou kadst. 
 
 tiivo, he had. 
 Plur. tuvimos, xve had. 
 
 tuvisteis, you had. 
 
 tuvieron, they had. 
 
 4. Second Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, he tenido, I have had. 
 
 has tenido, thou hast had. 
 
 ha tenido, he has had. 
 Plur. hem os tenido, we have had. 
 
 habeis tenido, you have had. 
 
 han tenido, they have had. 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect, 
 
 Si?2g. hiibe, or habia, tenido, / had had. 
 
 hubiste, or habias, tenido, thou hadst had. 
 
 hiibo, or hab-ia, tenido, he had had. 
 Plur. hubimos, or habiamos, tenido, we had had. 
 
 hubisteis, or habiais, tenido, you had had. 
 
 hubieron, or habian, tenido, they had had. 
 
 6. Future-imperfect. 
 
 Sing* tend re, I shall or will have. 
 
 tendras, thou shalt or wilt have. 
 
 tendra, he shall or will have. 
 Plur. tendremos, we shall or will have. 
 
 tendreis, you shall or will have. 
 
 tend ran, they shall or wilt have. 
 
 7. Future-perfect. 
 
 Sing, hat re tenido, / shall have had. 
 
 habras tenido, thou wilt have had. 
 
 liabra tenido, he will have had. 
 Plur. habremos tenido, we shall have had. 
 
 fiabreis tenido, you will have had. 
 
 habran tenido, they will have had. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 73 
 
 8. Imperative Mood, 
 
 Sing, ten, have thou. 
 
 tenga, let him nave. 
 Plur. tengamos, let us have. 
 
 tened, have you. 
 
 tengan, let them have. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. , Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, tenga, I may have. 
 
 tengas, ihou mayst have. 
 
 tenga, he may have. 
 Plur. tengamos, yoe may have. 
 
 tengais, you may have. 
 
 tengan, they may have. 
 
 10. First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, tuviera,^ 
 
 or > I should or might have. 
 tuviese, j 
 tuvieras,! 
 
 or > thou shouldst or might st have. 
 tuvieses, j 
 tuviera, \ 
 
 or > he should or might have- 
 tuviese, J 
 Plur. tuvieramos,^ 
 
 or > tee should or might have. 
 
 tuviesemos, J 
 tuvierais," 1 ! 
 
 or > you should or might have. 
 tuvieseis, J 
 tuvieran,^ 
 
 or > they should or might have. 
 tuviesen, J 
 
 11. Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Si?ig. tendria, I would or should have. 
 tendrias, ihou tvouldst have. 
 tendria, he vcould have. 
 
 E 
 
V* ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Plur. tendriamos, we would or should have. 
 tendriais, you would have. 
 tendrian, they would have. 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, haya tenido, I may have had. 
 
 hayas tenido, thou mayst have had. 
 
 haya tenido, he may have had. 
 Plur. hayamos tenido, we may have had. 
 
 hayais tenido, you may have had. 
 
 hayan tenido, they may have had. 
 
 IS. First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, hubiera,"^ 
 
 or > tenido, I should or might have had. 
 hubiese, J 
 hubieras,"| 
 
 or > tenido, thou shouldst or mightst have 
 hubieses,J had. 
 
 hubiera, ") 
 
 or > tenido, he should or might have had. 
 hubiese, J 
 Plur. hubieramos, 1 
 
 or > tenido, we should or might have 
 
 huhiesemos, ) had. 
 
 hubierais,^ 
 
 or > tenido, you should or might have had. 
 hubieseis, J 
 hubieran, 1 
 
 or > tenido, they should or might have had. 
 . hubiesen, J 
 
 14. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing* habria tenido, / would or should have had. 
 
 habrias tenido, thou xvoiddst have had. 
 
 habria tenido, he woidd have had, 
 Plur. habriamos tenido, we would or should have had* 
 
 hal>riais tenido, you would have had. 
 
 habrian tenido, they would have had. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 75 
 
 15. Future Imperfect. 
 
 si, jf, 
 Sing, tuviere, I should have. 
 
 tuvieres, thou shouldst have. 
 
 tuviere, he should have. 
 Plur. tuvieremos, we should have. 
 
 tuviereis, you should have. 
 
 tuvieren, they should have. 
 
 16. Future Perfect. 
 
 Sing, hubiere tenido, I should have had. 
 
 hubiereis tenido, thou shouldst have had. 
 
 hubiere tenido, he should have had. 
 Plur. hubieremos tenido, we should have had. 
 
 hubiereis tenido, you should have had. 
 
 hubieren tenido, they should have had. 
 
 17. Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Tener, to have. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Haber tenido, to have had. 
 
 participles. 
 
 Present. 
 Teniendo, having. 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 Tenido, had. 
 
 Compound Perfect. 
 
 Habiendo tenido, having had. 
 
 Both haber and tener signify to have, but in different 
 senses. The former is auxiliary, and is joined with the 
 participles of verbs to form their compound tenses : the 
 latter is active, and a principal verb signifying to have 
 or to possess. 
 
 e2 
 
76 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Formerly, however, haber was often used as an active, 
 and tener as an auxiliary verb. Tenemos escrito ; tene- 
 mos ya dsterminado are found in very good writers. But 
 this mode of construction is not to be imitated. 
 
 Conjugation of the Verbs ser and estar. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing. soy,orestoy, lam. 
 
 eres, or estas, thou art. 
 
 es, or est a, he is. 
 Plur. sdmos, or estamos, we are. 
 
 sois, or estais, you are. 
 
 son, or estan, they are. 
 
 2. Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, era, or estaba, I was. 
 
 eras, or estabas, thou wast. 
 
 era, or estaba, he was. 
 Plur. eramos, or estabamos, we were. 
 
 erais, or estabais, you were. 
 
 eran, or estaban, they were. 
 
 3. First Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, ful, or estuve, / was. 
 
 fuiste, or estuviste, thou wast. 
 
 fue, or estuvo, he was. 
 Plur. fuimos, or estuvimos, we were. 
 
 fuisteis, or estuvisteis, you were. 
 
 fueron, or estuvieron, they were. 
 
 4. Second Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, he sido, or estado, I have been. 
 
 has sido, or estado, thou hast been. 
 
 ha sido, or estado, he has been. 
 Plur. hemos sido, or estado, we have been. 
 
 habeis sido, or estado, you have been. 
 
 han sido, or estado, they have been. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 77 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect. 
 
 ie, 1 
 
 r >sido, 
 )ia,J 
 
 iste,^ 
 
 r >sido. 
 
 ias, J 
 
 >sido, 
 
 1, J 
 
 Mmos, ""J 
 or >sido, 
 
 biamos,J 
 
 eis,^| 
 
 ysido, 
 
 s, J 
 
 Sing, hube, 
 
 or J» sido, or estado, I had been. 
 habia, _ 
 hubiste, 
 
 or ^sido. or estado, thou hadst been. 
 habias, 
 hubo, 
 
 or ^sido, or estado, he had been. 
 habia, 
 Plur. hubimos, 
 
 or estado, we had been. 
 habiaraos, 
 hubisteis,' 
 
 or )*sido, or estado, you had been. 
 habiais, 
 hubieron,! 
 
 or > sido, or estado, they had been. 
 habian, J 
 
 6. Future Imperfect. 
 
 Sing, sere, or estare, I shall or will be. 
 
 seras, or estaras, thou shalt or wilt be* 
 
 sera, or estara, he shall or will be. 
 Plur. seremos, or estaremos, we shall or will be* 
 
 sereis, or estareis, you shall or will be. 
 
 seran, of estaran, they shall or will be. 
 
 7. Future Perfect. 
 
 Sing, habre sido, or estado, / shall have been. 
 
 habras sido, or estado, thou wilt have been. 
 
 habra sido, or estado, he will have been. 
 Plur. habremos sido, or estado, we shall have been. 
 
 habreis sido, or estado, you will have been. 
 
 habran sido, or estado, they will have been. 
 
 8. Imperative Mood. 
 
 Sing* se, or esta, be thou. 
 
 sea, or este, let him be. 
 
78 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Plur. seamos, or estemos, let us be. 
 sed, or estad, be you. 
 sean, or esten, let them be. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing* sea, or este, I may be. 
 
 seas, or estes, thou mayst be. 
 
 sea, or este, he may be. 
 Plur. seamos, or estemos, tve may be. 
 
 seais, or esteis, you may be. 
 
 sean, or esten, they may be. 
 
 10. First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 
 Sing, fuera, estuviera,"* 
 
 or or > I should or might be. % 
 
 fuese, estuviese, J 
 
 fueras, estuvieras, 1 
 
 or or > thou shouldst or might st be. 
 
 fueses, estuvieses, J 
 
 fuera, estuviera, "j 
 
 or or >he should or might be. 
 
 fuese, estuviese, J 
 
 Plur. fueramos, estuvieremos,^ 
 
 or or >ive should or might be. 
 
 fuesemos, estuviesemos, J 
 
 fuerais, estuvierais, ^1 
 
 or or \you shoidd or might be. 
 
 fueseis, estuvieseis, J 
 
 fueran, estuvieran, ^ 
 
 or or (they should or might be. 
 
 fuesen, estuviesen,J 
 
 Also, that I ivere, and sometimes, like the indicative, that I was. 
 See the Syntax of Conjunctions, 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 79 
 
 11. Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, seria, or estaria, / would or should be. 
 
 serias, or estarias, thou wouldst be. 
 
 seria, or estaria, he would be. 
 Plur. seriamos, or estariamos, we would or should be. 
 
 seriais, or estariais, you Would be. 
 
 serian, or estarian, they would be. 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, haya sido, or estado, I may have been. 
 
 hayas sido, or estado, thou mayst have been. 
 
 haya sido, or estado, he may have been. 
 Plur. hayamos sido, or estado, we may have been. 
 
 hayais sido, or estado, you may have been. 
 
 hayan sido, or estado, they may have been. 
 
 13. First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, hubiera,'! 
 
 or >sido, or estado, I should or might have 
 hubiese,J been. 
 
 hubieras, \ 
 
 or Vsido, or estado, thou shouldst or mightst 
 habieses, J have been. 
 
 hubiera, \ 
 
 or Vsido, or estado, he should or might 
 hubiese, ) have been. 
 
 Plur. hubieramos, ' 
 
 or Vsido, or estado, we should or might 
 
 hubiesemos, } have been. 
 
 hubierais, 
 
 ds, ) 
 
 Vsido, 
 
 3S.J 
 
 Lerais, I 
 
 or Vsido, or estado, you shoul 
 
 ieseis, J have be 
 
 or Vsido, or estado, you should or might 
 
 hubieselsjj have been, 
 hubieran,^ 
 
 or >sido. or estado, they should or might 
 
 hubiesen, J have been. 
 
30 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 14. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, habria sido, or estado, / would or should have been. 
 
 habrias sido, or estado, thou wouldst have been. 
 
 habria sido, or estado, he would have been. 
 Plur. habriamos sido, or estado, we woidd or should 
 
 have been, 
 
 habriais sido, or estado, you would have been. 
 
 habrian sido, or estado. they would have been. 
 
 15. Future Imperfect. 
 
 Sing, fuere, or estuviere, / should be. 
 
 fueres, or estuvieres, thou shouldst be. 
 
 fuere, or estuviere, he should be. 
 Plur. fueremos, or estuvieremos, we should be. 
 
 fuereis, or estuviereis, you should be. 
 
 fueren, or estuvieren, they should be. 
 
 16. Future Perfect. 
 
 si, if, 
 
 Sing, hubiere sido, or estado, I should have been. 
 
 hubieres sido, or estado, thou shouldst have been. 
 
 hubiere sido, or estado, he should have been. 
 Plur. hubieremos sido, or estado, we should have been. 
 
 hubiereis sido, or estado, you should have been. 
 
 hubieren sido, or estado, they should have been. 
 
 17. Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Ser, or estar, to be. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Haber sido, or estado, to have been. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 Siendo, or estando, being. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 81 
 
 Perfect. 
 Sido, or estado, been* 
 
 Compound Perfect. 
 Habiendo sido, or estado, hating been. 
 
 Observations on the Verbs ser and estar. 
 
 The verb to be is by no means to be translated into 
 Spanish by ser and estar indifferently. The signifi- 
 cation of these two verbs is often widely different. 
 
 The most general observation that can be made to 
 assist the students in their application is this : ser de- 
 notes whatever is permanent, estar whatever is tern* 
 porary in duration. 
 
 Hence ser is employed when we speak of general 
 and everlasting truths, and of the qualities of the mind ; 
 estar when we speak of emotions, or of transitory 
 states of feeling. Somos mortales, we are mortal : sois 
 prudentes, you are prudent. Estas triste, thou art 
 sad : esta' alegre, he is merry. 
 
 The natural qualities of the body, its permanent 
 beauties or defects, are expressed by ser ; its physical 
 or accidental changes by estar. El hombre es alto ; 
 the man is tall : la muger es hermosa, the woman is 
 beautiful. El niiio esta' frio, the child is cold : Estu- 
 vimos cojos la semana pasada, we were lame last week. 
 
 The natural qualities of substances are expressed by 
 ser; the chemical and mechanical changes of sub- 
 stances by estar. El yelo es frio, ice is cold. El 
 plomo esta" derretido, the lead is melted. 
 
 Ser is used in speaking of the employments, dig- 
 nities, and professions of men ; of the materials of which 
 bodies are composed ; of the possession and destination 
 of things, &e. Ser rey, general^ juez, zapatero, to be 
 a king, general, judge, shoemaker: El vestido es de 
 patio, the suit is of cloth : La corona es del rey, the 
 crown is the king's. 
 
 e5 
 
32 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Ser is employed in the conjugation of passive verbs : 
 Es querido, he is loved : Eramos instruidos, we were 
 instructed. 
 
 In general propositions ser connects the two terms, 
 the major and the minor ; El temor de Dios es el prin- 
 cipio de la sabiduria ; the fear of God is the beginning 
 of* wisdom : Todo cuerpo es divisible, all matter is di- 
 visible, 
 
 Estar is used to express locality ; Esta' en casa, he 
 is in the house : Estoy en Florencia, I am in Florence. 
 
 Estar before adverbial phrases, &c. denotes tran- 
 sitory modes of action, states of fashion, &c. Esta' de 
 priesa, he is in haste : Esta' de modo 9 he is in the 
 fashion. 
 '' Lastly estar and not ser is employed in conjunc- 
 tion with the present participles of verbs: Estoy 
 escribiendo, I am writing. 
 
 But in some instances ser and estar may be in- 
 differently used. We may say with equal propriety; 
 ser, 6 estar del mismo parecer ; to be of the same 
 opinion : ser Corregidor, 6 estar de Corregidor en 
 Madrid; to be Corregidor of Madrid.* But even in 
 these instances estar could not properly be used if 
 that opinion and this office were necessarily of long con- 
 tinuance. Opinions are often transient, and Corre- 
 gidors often changed. 
 
 Some adjectives vary their meaning according as they 
 are joined to ser or estar. Ser bueno is understood 
 of the natural disposition, and signifies to be good ; 
 estar bueno, to be in good health : ser malo, to be 
 wicked ; estar malo, to be in bad health ; ser vivo, to 
 be lively ; estar vivo, to be alive. 
 
 Exercise on the Verbs haeer, tener, ser, and estar. 
 
 .1. I have a book. Thou hast books. He has 
 libro 
 
 eloquence. We have friends. You have enemies. 
 
 eloquencia. amigo enemigo. 
 
 * In the second example the verb estar must be followed by de : 
 estar Corregidor, estar Alcalde, &c. are not Spanish. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 83 
 
 They have pens. Death is inevitable. He is taller 
 
 plutna La muerte — alto 
 
 than I. Customs are not the same in all coun- 
 
 Las costumbres mismo en tocfo re- 
 
 tries. A poor singer is not a bishop. He is now in 
 gion pobre cantor obispo ekora en 
 
 France. The Turks are idle, but the English are 
 
 Francia Turco holgazan pero Ingles 
 
 industrious. She is the wife of an officer who is now 
 industrioso " muger oficial 
 
 with the army. When madmen are not raving, they 
 con ejerciio Cnando los loco furioso 
 
 are not objects of fear. 
 
 objeto el temor 
 
 2. I had money. Thou hast riches. The man had 
 
 dinero riquezas 
 fortitude. We had books. You had watches. They 
 
 fortaleza relox 
 
 had swords. He tjoas the most graceful of all men. I 
 
 espadin ayroso 
 
 tvas then sorrowful. He was always in good 
 
 entonces triste siempre de bueno 
 
 humour. The Lyceum at Athens tvas the public 
 
 humor Liceo en Atenas publico 
 school. We ivere the most numerous of those 
 
 escuela numeroso los 
 assembled in the place. 
 juntados en lugar 
 
 3. Thou wast greatly pleased with the poem. We 
 
 macho contento de poema^ 
 
 had fine weather yesterdav. Your cousin had a rich 
 bueno tiempo aijer primo rico 
 
 present. My mother had (considerable uneasiness) 
 present e pesadumbre 
 
 last week : she tvas very sorrowful : we had pity 
 la semana pasada triste lastima 
 
 on her, I tvas there last week. 
 de alia 
 
84? ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 4. I have seen the book. Thou hast suffered. He 
 
 visto sufrido 
 
 has loved. We have written. You have lived. They 
 
 amado escrito vivido 
 
 have heard. I have had considerable uneasiness. I 
 
 oido 
 have been very ill. Thou hast had three masters, and 
 
 tres maestro 
 hast been well instructed. They have had much money, 
 bien instruido mucko diner o 
 
 and they have been very lavish. My neighbour has 
 
 prodigo vecino 
 
 been very ill. Admiral Nelson and the brave Sidney 
 
 El almirante y bravo 
 
 Smith have been very active, and constantly victo* 
 activo constantemente victo- 
 
 rious in the last war. 
 rioso en ultimo guerra 
 
 5. I had had the reward of diligence, and thy 
 
 premio de diligencia, y 
 brother had received that of memory. The tutor had 
 hermano recibido el memoria ayo 
 
 observed the progress of the pupil. They had chastised 
 vbservado progreso pnpilo castigado 
 
 the boy. The judge had pronounced the sentence. 
 d mozo juez pronunciado sentencia 
 
 My master had been satisfied with me. I had been very 
 
 contento 
 diligent and attentive. Your brothers and sisters 
 diligente atento hermano hermana 
 
 had been studious : they had had many praises. We 
 
 estudioso mucho elogio 
 
 had been rash. They had been timid. We had had 
 
 temerario timido 
 
 good motives. 
 motivo 
 
 6. To-morrow I shall be busy. We shall always 
 Mariana occupado siempre 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 85 
 
 be diligent. You will have friends. He will be punctual. 
 
 dilige?itcs amigo puntual 
 
 The English will always he good sailors. The French 
 Ingles mariner o Frances 
 
 MoiU never perhaps he so powerful as we. He will always 
 
 jamas quiza poderoso 
 
 be idle, but she mil always be industrious. We shall 
 
 holgazan industrioso 
 
 always have the poor. The soldiers will have great 
 
 pobre. soldado grande 
 
 booty. He will be there at one o'clock. 
 lot in, alia a la una 
 
 7. I shall have had friends. Thou unit have been happy, 
 
 feliz 
 He will have had the letters. The enemies will not have 
 
 carta enemigo 
 
 been victorious. He will have been loved. The 
 
 victorioso am ado 
 
 sailors will have been conquered. We shall have had 
 marinero vencido 
 
 many misfortunes. Their lives will have been long and 
 
 desdicha vida largo 
 
 useful. The war will have been bloody. 
 util guerra sangrienio 
 
 8. Have patience, my friend. Be always courteous, 
 
 paciencia amigo Cortes 
 
 my son. Hate the reward, my brethren. Let us be 
 
 hijo premio hermano 
 
 ready at eight o'clock. Let us always be ready. Let 
 front os a las ocho siempre 
 
 us have courage. Let him be merciful. Let him have 
 
 cor age misericordioso 
 
 the things. Let him be there at the time. Be always 
 
 cos a a tiempo 
 
 generous, my sisters. Be civil, my daughters, when 
 
 hermana civil hija cuando 
 
 you arrive at the house. Let them have patience. Let 
 
 llegais a casa 
 
 them be more prudent. 
 
 prudenie 
 
86 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 9. That I may have riches. That he may be generous. 
 Que generoso 
 
 That we may not he ambitious. Although we may not 
 
 ambicioso Aunque 
 be avaricious. That he may have servants. That our 
 
 avaro criado 
 
 enemies may have no partisans, and that we may be 
 enemigo no partidario 
 
 victorious. Although our troops have excellent officers. 
 victorioso tropa excellent e qficial 
 
 That we may all be friends of our king, and of our 
 
 amigo rey 
 
 country. That we may be cheerful to-morrow. Provided 
 patria alegre manana Contalque 
 
 the English be faithful to the laws. 
 Ingles jiel ley. 
 
 10. That I might be always generous. That thou 
 mightest have friends. That he should be there at the 
 
 alia d 
 hour. Although the count were lavish. That their 
 Jiora conde prodigo 
 
 children might be virtuous. That we should have 
 nino mrtuoso 
 
 money. Although they voere dissolute. That we shoidd 
 dinero dissoluto 
 
 lem. London to-morrow. That the women should be 
 
 en Londres manana muger 
 
 charitable. That the kingdom should not be in danger. 
 caritativo reyno no en peligro 
 
 If I should have the book. If we should be there at 
 Si libro d 
 
 four o'clock. If we should have riches. If they should 
 las cuatro riquezas 
 
 be seen. That the traitors might be arrested. That the 
 
 vistos traidor arrest ados 
 
 thing might be observed. 
 cosa observada 
 
 11. I should have friends, If I were (10) virtuous. 
 
 amigo virtuoso 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 87 
 
 Thou wouldst be great if . We should have lost 
 
 grande per dido 
 
 the battle if the general (had not been) prudent. 
 
 batalla no hubiera est ado prudente 
 
 If we had (10) ten thousand men, not one soldier of the 
 
 sold ado 
 enemy woidd be alive to-morrow. You would have 
 enemigo manana 
 
 more scholars if you were (10) more instructed. Their 
 
 discipulo instruido 
 
 father would be more happy, if he were (10) less 
 padre Jeliz 
 
 avaricious. The man would be more happy, if he 
 avaro 
 were (10) less ambitious. You would not be sick, if you 
 
 ambieioso malo 
 
 were (10) more prudent. Who would have believed 
 
 creido 
 that the war would have continued ten years ? Your 
 
 guerra durado 
 
 children would not be so ignorant, if they were (10) more 
 nino ignorante 
 
 studious. They woidd be more active if they were (10) 
 studioso activo 
 
 younger. 
 joven 
 
 12. Though I may have had. Your sister is very 
 Aunque 
 cheerful, though she has been so long ill. The 
 alegre tanto tiempo malo 
 
 number of the wise and the good is little, though 
 
 sabio virtuoso reducido 
 
 they have always been esteemed. Though we have had 
 
 siempre estimados 
 so much money, we are poor. Though they have had 
 
 dinero pobre 
 
 so many books, they are ignorant. Though you have 
 
 libro 
 been long ignorant, you will not be diligent. 
 
 diligente 
 
88 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 12. If the sun had not been so scorching. If they 
 sol ardiente 
 
 had been more religious. If we had had more wisdom. 
 religioso sabiduria 
 
 If we had been more artful. Though they had had 
 
 artificioso 
 so many friends. Though the bishop had always been 
 
 obispo 
 loyal. 
 leal. 
 
 14. The works of Voltaire would have been more 
 
 obra 
 
 admired, if they had (10) contained a philosophy 
 admiradas contenido filosojia 
 
 more enlightened and religious. The works of Rousseau 
 
 sabio ■ 
 
 Would have been less dangerous, and they would not 
 
 peligroso 
 have caused so much mischief, if they had been (13) 
 
 causado mal 
 
 more moral. If your husband were (10) less violent 
 moral marido violento 
 
 and jealous, you would be (11) more happy ; and if he 
 
 zeloso 
 had always been (13) virtuous, he would have been 
 esteemed by all. The effects of the revolution would 
 estimado de efecto revolucion 
 
 not have been so great in France, if the depravity of 
 grande en Francia depravacion de 
 
 manners had not been (13) so shameful, if li- 
 
 las costumbres vergonzoso la li- 
 
 centiousness had been (13) less favoured, and if 
 cencia favorecido 
 
 irreligion had been (13) less general. Who would 
 
 ever have believed that a man so cruel as Robespierre 
 
 jamas creido que ■ * ■ ■ 
 
 could have existed ? 
 exist ido 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 89 
 
 15. If I should have money. If thou shoiddst have 
 patience. He will be rewarded, if he shoidd have 
 paciencia recompensado 
 
 merit. If England should be conquered. If the 
 merito la Inglaterra conquistada 
 
 enemy should have the imprudence. If we should have 
 enemigo imprudencia 
 
 supped (at eight o'clock). If they shoidd he there at 
 cenado a las ocho alia 
 
 the hour appointed. 
 hora destinada 
 
 16. If I should have been there. If thou shoiddst 
 have had the reward. If we should have been loved. 
 
 premio amados 
 
 If they should have had the letters. If all the men 
 
 carta todos hombre 
 
 should have been idle. If the daughters of the king 
 
 holgazan hija rey 
 
 should have been in the city. If their virtues should 
 
 en ciudad viriud 
 
 have been rewarded. When time and the world 
 premiadas Cuando el tiempo mundo 
 
 shall have been. 
 
 17. To have money. To be tall, little, fat, lean. 
 
 alto pequeno gordo flaco 
 To be sorrowful, cheerful, sick. To have been indis- 
 
 triste alegre malo 
 
 posed. To have been always occupied. Being then 
 
 siempre ocupado 
 fearful. Having many things. Having had sons 
 temeroso cosa hijo 
 
 virtuous and well instructed. Having been alwavs in 
 virtuoso bien instruido en 
 
 London. 
 Londres 
 
90 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS ACTIVE.* 
 
 Spanish verbs have three conjugations, which may 
 be known from the termination of the Infinitive Mood. 
 The first conjugation ends in ar> as amar, to love. 
 The second ends in er, as temer, to fear. 
 
 The third ends in ir, as partir, to divide. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Amar, to love. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing, amo, I love, am loving, or do love* 
 
 amas, thou lovest, &c. 
 
 ama, he loves. 
 Plur. amamos, tve love. 
 
 amais, you love. 
 
 aman, they love. 
 
 2. Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, amaba, / loved, or was loving. 
 
 amabas, thou tvast loving* 
 
 amaba, he was loving. 
 Plur. amabamos, tve xvere loving. 
 
 amabais, you were loving. 
 
 amaban, they were loving. 
 
 3. First Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, ame, / loved. 
 
 amaste, thou lovedst. 
 
 amo, he loved. 
 Plur. amamos, tve loved. 
 
 amasteis, you loved. 
 
 amaron, they loved. 
 
 * Verbs Neuter are similarly conjugated ; but they do not admit 
 a passive voice like Actives. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 91 
 
 4% Second Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, he amado, / have loved. 
 
 has amado, thou hast loved. 
 
 ha amado, he has loved. 
 Plur. hemos amado, we have loved. 
 
 habeis amado, you have loved. 
 
 han amado, they have loved. 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, hube, or habia, amado, I had loved. 
 
 hubiste, or habias, amado, thou hadst loved, 
 
 hubo, or habia, amado, he had loved. 
 Plur. hubimos, or habiamos, amado, we had loved. 
 
 hubisteis, or habiais, amado, you had loved. 
 
 hubieron, or habian, amado, they had loved. 
 
 6. Future-imperfect. 
 
 Sing, amare, I shall or mil love. 
 
 amaras, thou shalt or wilt love. 
 
 amara, he shall or will love. 
 Plur. amaremos, we shall or mil love. 
 
 amareis, you shall or will love. 
 
 amaran, they shall or xvill love. 
 
 7. Future-perfect. 
 
 Sing, habre amado, / shall have loved. 
 
 habras amado, thou wilt have loved. 
 
 habra amado, he will have loved. 
 Plur. habremos amado, we shall have loved. 
 
 habreis amado, you will have loved. 
 
 habran amado, they will have loved. 
 
 8. Imperative Mood. 
 
 Sing, ama, love thou. 
 
 ame, let him love. 
 Plur. amemos, let us love. 
 
 amad, love you. 
 
 amen, let them love* 
 
92 
 
 ETYMOLOGY 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, ame, / may love, or I love. 
 
 ames, thou mayst love. 
 
 ame, he may love. 
 Plur. amemos, we may love. 
 
 ameis, you may love. 
 
 amen, they may love. 
 
 10. First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, amara, or amase, I should or might love, or I loved* 
 
 amaras, or amases, thou shouldst or mightst love. 
 
 amara, or amase, he should or might love. 
 Plur* amaramos, or amasemos, tve should or might love* 
 
 amarais, or amaseis, you should or might love. 
 
 amaran, or amasen, they should or might love. 
 
 11. Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, amaria, / would or shoidd love. 
 
 amarias, thou wouldst love. 
 
 am aria, he would love. 
 Plur. amarlamos, voe would or should love. 
 
 amarlais, you would love. 
 
 amarian, they would love. 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, haya amado, / have loved, or may have loved. 
 
 hayas amado, thou mayst have loved. 
 
 haya amado, he may have loved. 
 Plur. hayamos amado, we may have loved. 
 
 hayais amado, you may have loved. 
 
 hayan amado, they may have loved. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 93 
 
 13. First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sinn, hubiera/ 
 
 era,"l 
 
 r > amado, / should or might have loved, or, 
 
 ese, J / Aaa? Zoverf. 
 
 )iera,^ 
 
 >r > amado, fte should or might have loved. 
 
 Diese, J 
 
 or 
 hubi 
 hubieras,"* 
 
 or > amado, thou shouldst or mightst have 
 hubieses, J loved. 
 
 hubiera,^ 
 
 or 
 hubi 
 Plur. hubieramos,*\ 
 
 or > amado, xve should or might have 
 
 hubiesemos, J loved. 
 
 hubierais, "^ 
 
 or > amado, you should or might have 
 hubieseis, J loved. 
 
 hubieran,! 
 
 or > am ado, they should or might have 
 hubiesen, J loved. 
 
 14<. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, habrla amado, I /would or should have loved. 
 
 habrlas amado, thou wouldst have loved. 
 
 habrla amado, he would have loved. 
 Plur. habriamos amado, we would or should have loved. 
 
 habriais amado, you would have loved. 
 
 habrlan amado, they would have loved. 
 
 15. Future Imperfect. 
 
 si, ^ if, 
 Sing, amare, I shoidd love. 
 
 amares, thou shouldst love* 
 
 amare, he should love* 
 Plur. amaremos, we should lore. 
 
 amareis, you should love. 
 
 amaren, they should love. 
 
94 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 16. Future Perfect. 
 
 Si?ig. hubiere amado, I should have loved. 
 
 hubieres amado, thou shouldst have hied. 
 
 hubiere amado, he should have loved. 
 Plur. hubiere mos amado, we shoidd have loved. 
 
 hubiereis amado, you should have loved. 
 
 hubieren amado, they should have loved. 
 
 17. Infinitive Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 amar, to love. 
 
 Perfect, 
 haber amado, to have loved. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present, 
 amandoj loving. 
 
 Perfect. 
 amado, loved. 
 
 Compound Perfect, 
 habiendo amado, having loved. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Temer, to fear. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing, temo, I fear, do fear, or am fearing. 
 
 t ernes, thou fear est. 
 
 teme, he fears. 
 Plur. tememos, we fear. 
 
 temeis, you fear. 
 
 tern en, they fear. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 95 
 
 2. Preterlmperfect. 
 
 Sing, temia, I feared, did fear, or was fearing. 
 
 temias, thou wast fearing* 
 
 temia., he was fearing. 
 Plur. temiamos, we were fearing. 
 
 temiais, you were fearing. 
 
 temian, they were fearing. 
 
 S. First Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, temi, I feared. 
 
 temiste, thou fear edst. 
 
 temid, he feared. 
 Plur. temimos, we feared. 
 
 temisteis, you feared. 
 
 temieran, they feared. 
 
 4. Second Preterperfect, 
 
 Sing, he temido, I have feared. 
 
 has temido, thou hast feared. 
 
 ha temido, he has feared. 
 Plur. hemos temido, we have feared. 
 
 habeis temido, you have feared. 
 
 han temido, they have feared. 
 
 Sing, hube, \ 
 or > 
 habia, j 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect. 
 temido, I had feared. 
 
 hubiste,^ 
 
 or > temido, thou hadst feared. 
 habias, J 
 hubo, 1 
 
 or > temido, he had feared. 
 habia, J 
 
96 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Plur. hubimos, \ 
 
 or > temido, we had feared*. 
 habiamos, ) 
 hubisteis,"^ 
 
 or > temido, you had feared. 
 habiais, J 
 hubieron,*^ 
 
 or > temido, they had feared. 
 habian. J 
 
 6. Future Imperfect. 
 
 Sing, temere, I shall or will fear. 
 
 temeras, thou shalt or wilt fear. 
 
 temera, he shall or will fear, 
 Plur. temeremos, we shall or will fear. 
 
 temereis, you shall or will fear. 
 
 temeran, they shall or will fear. 
 
 7. Future Perfect. 
 
 Sing, habre temido, I shall have feared. 
 
 habras temido, thou wilt have feared. 
 
 habra temido, he will have feared. 
 Plur. habremos temido, we shall have feared. 
 
 habreis temido, you will have feared. 
 
 habran temido, they will have feared. 
 
 8. Imperative Mood. 
 
 Sing, teme, fear thou. 
 
 tema, let him fear. 
 Plur. temamos, let us fear. 
 
 temed, fear you. 
 
 teman, let them fear. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, tema., / may fear, or I fear. 
 
 temas, thou may st fear. 
 
 tema, he may fear. 
 Plur. temamos, we may fear. 
 
 temais, you may fear. 
 
 tcrnan, they may fear. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 97 
 
 10. First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, temiera, 1 
 
 or > I should or might fear 3 or I feared. 
 temiese, J 
 temieras, ^ 
 
 or ftJioit shouldst or might st fear. 
 tenodeses, j 
 temiera, ^| 
 
 or }-he should or might fear. 
 temiese, J 
 Plur. temieramos,! 
 
 or >we should or might fear. 
 
 temiesemos, J 
 temieraisj ^ 
 
 or \y ou should or might fear. 
 
 temieseis, J 
 temieraiijS 
 
 or \ihey should or might fear. 
 temiesen, J 
 
 11. Second Pretei perfect. 
 
 Sing, temeria, I would or should fear. 
 
 temerias, thou wouldstfear. 
 
 temeria, he would fear. 
 Plur. temeriamos, we would or should fear. 
 
 temeriais, you would, fear. 
 
 temerian, they would fear. 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, haya temido, I may have, feared, or have feared. 
 
 hayas temido, thou mayst have feared. 
 
 haya temido he may have feared. 
 Plur. hayamos temido, we may have feared. 
 
 hayais temido, you may have feared. 
 
 hayan temido, they may have feared. 
 v 
 
98 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 13. First Preterpluperfect 
 que, that, 
 Sing, hubiera, 
 
 iera \ 
 
 7 I temido, / should or might havejeared, 
 
 hubiesej or had feared. 
 
 3 
 
 hubieras,^ . ,, j7 
 7 I temido, th 
 
 hubi&esj 
 
 v temido, thou shoulcht or misjitst 
 or > 7 ^ 7 & 
 
 hubiera,"* 
 
 or > temido, he should or might have feared. 
 hubiese, J 
 Plur. hubieramos, 1 
 
 or >• temido, ive should or might have 
 
 hubiesemos, J feared. 
 
 hubierais, ) 
 
 or > temido, you should or might have 
 hubieseis, f feared. 
 
 hubieran,"") 
 
 or > temido. they should or might have 
 hubiesen, J feared. 
 
 14*. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, habria temido, I would or shoidd have feared. 
 
 habrias temido, thou voouldst have feared. 
 
 habria temido, he would have feared. 
 Plur. habriamos temido, we would or should have feared, 
 
 habriais temido, you would have feared. 
 
 habrian temido, they would have feared. 
 
 15. Future Imperfect. 
 
 si, if 
 Sing, temiere, I shoidd fear* 
 
 temiereSj, thou shoiddslfear. ■ 
 
 temiere, he should fear. 
 Plur. temieremos, we should fear. 
 
 temiereis, you shoidd fear. 
 
 temieren, they should fear. 
 
 16. Future Perfect. 
 
 si, if 
 Sing, hubiere temido, I shoidd have feared. 
 
 hubieres temido, thou slioiddst have feared, 
 hubiere temido ? he shoidd have feared* 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 99 
 
 Plur. hubieremos temido, we should have feared. 
 hubiereis temido, you should havejeared. 
 hubieren temido, they should have feared. 
 
 17. Infinitive MoccL 
 Present Tense. 
 Temer, to fear. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Haber temido,, to have feared. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Temiendoj, fearing. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Temido, feared. 
 
 Compound Perfect. 
 Habiendo temido, having feared. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION 
 
 Partir, to divide. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing, par to, / divide* do divide, am dividing, 
 
 partes, thou dividest. 
 
 parte* he divides. 
 Plur. partimos, we divide. 
 
 partis, you divide. 
 
 par ten, they divide. 
 
 2. Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, partia, / divided, did divide, or was dividing, 
 
 partias, thou wast dividing. 
 
 partia, he was dividing. 
 Plur. partiamos, we were dividing. 
 
 partiais, you ivere dividing. 
 
 partian, they were dividing. 
 ■f2 
 
100 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 S. First Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, parti, I divided 
 
 partiste, thou dividest. 
 
 partio, he divided. 
 Plur. partimos, tve divided. 
 
 partisteis, you divided. 
 
 partieron, they divided. 
 
 4. Second Preterfect. 
 
 Sing, he partido, / have divided. 
 
 has partido, thou hast divided. 
 
 ha partido, he lias divided. 
 Plur. hemos partido, tve have divided. 
 
 habeis partido, you have divided, 
 
 han partido, they have divided. 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect. 
 Sing, hiihe, *| 
 
 or > partido, / had divided. 
 habia, J 
 hubiste, ) 
 
 or > partido, thou hadsi divided. 
 habias, J 
 hiibo, "^ 
 
 or > partido, he had divided. 
 habia, J 
 Plur. hubimos, \ 
 
 or > partido, tve had divided 
 habiamos, ) 
 hubisteisn 
 
 or > partido, you had divided. 
 
 habiais, 
 habieran, 
 
 or 
 habian, 
 
 pad o, they had divided. 
 
 6. Future Imperfect. 
 
 Sing, partire, I shall or will divide. 
 
 partiras, thou shalt or wilt divide, 
 
 partira, he shall or will divide. 
 Plur. partiremos, tve shall or will divide. 
 
 partireis, you shall or will divide. 
 
 partiran, they shall or will divide 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 101 
 
 7. Future Perfect. 
 
 Sing. Iiabre partido, / shall have divided. 
 
 habras partido, thou wilt have divided. 
 
 habra partido, he will have divided. 
 Plur. habreruos partido, we shall have divided. 
 
 habreis partido, you will have divided. 
 
 habran partido, they will have divided. 
 
 8. Imperative Mood. 
 
 Sing, parte, divide thou. 
 
 parta, let him divide. 
 Plur. partamos, let us divide. 
 
 partid, divide you. 
 
 par tan ? let them divide. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, parta, I may divide, or I divide. 
 
 partas, thou mayst divide, 
 
 parta, he may divide. 
 Plur. partamos, we may divide. 
 
 partais, you may divide. 
 
 partan, they may divide. 
 
 10. First Preterimperfect 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, partiera, 
 
 or ^ I should or might divide, or I divided, 
 partiese, 
 partieras, 
 
 } 
 
 rtieras, "| 
 
 or >thou should, 
 irtieses, J 
 
 st or mightsi divide*. 
 partieses, J 
 partiera, "i 
 
 or >he should or might divide. 
 partiese, J 
 Plur. partieramos s ^ 
 
 or ywe should or might divide. 
 
 partiesemos ? J 
 . partieraisA 
 
 or Vyou should or might divide* 
 
 partieseis,J 
 
102 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 par tieran, "^ 
 
 or (they should or might divide. 
 partiesen, J 
 
 11. Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, partiria, / tvould or should divide. 
 
 parti rias, thou wouldst divide. 
 
 partiria, he tvould divide. 
 Plur. partiriamos, ive would or should divide* 
 
 partiriais, you tvould divide. 
 
 partirian, they would divide. 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing* haya partido, I may have divided, or have divided. 
 
 hay as partido, thou mayst have divided* 
 ■ haya partido, he may have divided. 
 Plur. hayamos partido, tve may have divided. 
 
 hayais partido, you may have divided. 
 
 hayan partido, they may have divided. 
 
 IS. First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que, that) 
 
 Sins, hubiera,! ^ -, T 7 77 • 7 , L -t- 
 
 6 ? I partido, I should or might have di~ 
 
 or 
 huhies 
 
 \ 1 partido, I should or might h 
 
 j vided. or I divided. 
 
 ese, J 
 
 9 V Partido, thou shouldst or might st have 
 
 9 J 
 
 . ., f divided. 
 
 hubieses, 
 
 hubiera,"j 
 
 or > partido, he should or might have divided. 
 
 hubiese, J 
 
 Plur. hubieramos, ^ * A -, J7 • ij.7„.„ 
 
 9 I partido, tve should or might have 
 
 i , ., [ divided. 
 
 nuoiesemos, J 
 
 9 \ partido, you should or might have 
 
 , , <■, . [ divided. 
 
 hubieseis, J 
 
 9 V partido, they should or might have 
 
 )iesen, J 
 
 divided. 
 hubiesen, 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 103 
 
 14?. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, habria partido, I would or should have divided. 
 
 habrias partido, thou tvouldst have divided. 
 
 habria partido, he would have divided. 
 Plur. habriaaaos partido, we would or should have 
 
 divided. 
 
 habriais partido, you would have divided. 
 
 habrian partido, they would have divided. 
 
 15. Future Imperfect, 
 
 si, if, 
 Sing, partiere, I should divide. 
 
 partieres, thou shouldst divide. 
 
 partiere, he should divide. 
 Plur. partieremos, we should divide. 
 
 partiereis, you should divide. 
 
 partieren ? they should divide. 
 
 16. Future Perfect. 
 
 si, if, 
 
 Sing, hubiere partido, I should have divided. 
 
 hubieres partido, thou shouldst have divided, 
 
 hubiere partido^ he should have divided. 
 Plur. hubieremos partido, we should have divided. 
 
 hubiereis partido, you should have divided. 
 
 hubieren partido, they should have divided. 
 
 17. Infinitive Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Partir, to divide. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Haber partido, to have divided. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Partiendo, dividing. 
 
104- ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Partido, divided. 
 
 Compound Perfect. 
 Habiendo partido, having divided. 
 
 Exercises on Regular Verbs Active. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 (1.) I love. Thou adorest. Pie accuses. We 
 
 amar adorar accusar 
 
 finish. You speak. They call. (2.) I was fasting. 
 
 acabar hablar llamar ayanar 
 
 Thou didst sup. He deceived. We did increase. 
 
 cenar enganar aumentar 
 
 You were praising. Thej^ forget always. (3.) (I did 
 
 alabar olvidar siempre 
 
 not know.) Thou enquiredst. Pie sent. We 
 
 ignorar preguntar enviar 
 
 consulted. You refused. They succoured.—- (4.) 
 consultar rehusar amparar 
 
 I have attained. Thou hast studied. He has bought* 
 lograr esiudiar comprar 
 
 We have spent. You have assured. They have 
 gastar assegurar 
 
 moderated, (5.) I had related. Thou hatlst 
 
 moderar contar 
 
 blamed. Pie had deserted. We had warned. You 
 
 wit up era r desert ar avisar 
 
 had taken. They had robbed. (6.) I shall command. 
 
 tomar robar mandar 
 
 Thou wilt slay. He will call. Yv r e will borrow. You 
 matar amprar 
 
 shall appeal. They will drag. (7.) I shall have 
 
 apelar arrasirar 
 
 left. Thou wilt have affronted. He will have 
 dejqr ctfrentar 
 
ETYMOLOGY 105 
 
 ventured. We shall have frightened. You will have 
 cvcenturar amedrentar 
 
 prepared. They will have tied. (8.) Whip thou. 
 
 preparar atar azotar 
 
 Let him accuse. Let us assist. Dance you. Let 
 accusar ayudar hailar 
 
 them sup. (9.) That may dance. That thou 
 
 danzar 
 mayst cure. That he may accommodate. That we 
 curar acomodar 
 
 may disarm. That you may reconcile, That they 
 
 des a m i a r rec one ilia r 
 
 may (take away). — —(10.) That I might love. Though 
 
 guitar antique 
 
 thou shouldst imagine. If he might dine. If we 
 imaginar si yantar 
 
 might (carry off). That they should pierce. (11.) 
 
 llevar horadar 
 
 I would (pour in). Thou wouldst confirm. He would 
 
 echar con fir mar. 
 
 throw. We should (pull down). You would insist. 
 arrojar derribar porfiar 
 
 They would call. (12.) That I may have frightened. 
 
 llamar espantar 
 
 That thou mayst have condemned. That he may have 
 
 condenar 
 sung. That we may have procured. That you may 
 cantar procurar 
 
 have sheared. That they may have studied. (13.) 
 
 esquilar 
 That I might have advised. That thou shouldst have 
 
 aconsejar 
 spoken. Though he should have tormented. If we 
 liablar atormentar 
 
 might have loved. That you should have desired, 
 
 desear 
 Though they should have refused. :14.) I should 
 
 have respected. Thou wouldst have painted. He 
 respetar piniar 
 
 f5 
 
106 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 would have used. We should have esteemed. You 
 
 asar estimar 
 
 would have treated. They would have implored.——- 
 
 tratar implorar 
 
 (15.) If I should love. If thou shouldst speak. If he should 
 afford. If we should threaten. If you should speak. 
 prestar amenazar 
 
 If they should pardon. (16.) If I should have 
 
 perdonar 
 hoped. If thou shouldst have revealed. If he should 
 esperar revel ar 
 
 have continued. If we should have inspired. If you 
 
 continuar inspirar 
 
 should have regulated. If they should have founded. 
 reglar Jiindar 
 
 ■ (17.) To have observed. Governing. Proclaimed* 
 
 observat dominar proclamar 
 Having entered. 
 entrar 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 (1.) I sell. Thou attackest. He drinks. We sweep. 
 
 vender acometer beber barrer 
 
 You correspond. They eat.— — (2.) I did accede. 
 
 corresponder comer acceder 
 
 Thou wast daring. The king was breaking. We were 
 
 at r ever rey romper 
 
 yielding. You did drink. The soldiers surprised. 
 
 ceder soldado sorprehender 
 
 (3.) I promised. Thou soldest. The queen did run. 
 prometer reyne correr 
 
 We hid. You owed. The things proceeded. 
 
 esconder debet procedet 
 
 (4s) I have reproved. Thou hast burned. The 
 
 rep reh ender a rdet 
 
 prince hast succeeded. We have woven. You have 
 principe suceder iejet 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 107 
 
 answered. They have swallowed. (5.) I had pros- 
 
 responder sorbet pros- 
 
 trated. Thou hadst offended The princess had sold. 
 tenter qfender primesa 
 
 We had undertaken. You had feared. They had 
 
 enprender temer 
 
 assaulted. — —(6.) I shall sow. Thou wilt intercede 
 arremeter coser intercede 
 
 He will eat. He shall destroy. You will corrupt. 
 percler corromper 
 
 They will offend.* (7.) I shall have destroyed. 
 
 Thou wilt have attacked. He will have drunk. We 
 shall have proceeded. You will have reproved. They 
 
 will have succeeded.- (8.) Break thou. Let him 
 
 dare. -Let us correspond. Sweep you. Let 
 
 them fear. (9.) That I may owe. That thou 
 
 mayst pretend. That he may interfere. That we may 
 
 pretender meter 
 
 depend. That you may owe. That they may burn. 
 depend er 
 
 (10.) That I might weave. Though thou shouldst 
 
 offend. If he might fear. That we might undertake. 
 That you might ran. Though they should break. ' 
 (11.) I would approach. Thou wouldst hide. He 
 would swallow. We should reprove. You would suc- 
 ceed. They would owe. (12.) That I may have 
 
 dared. Though thou hast eaten. If he has under- 
 taken. Provided we have sold. Though you have 
 con ted que 
 
 promised. That they have woven. {13.) That I 
 
 should have approached. That thou mighst have 
 surprised. That he might have burned. Though we 
 should have answered. If you had reproved. If they 
 
 had succeeded.* (14.) I should have served. Thou 
 
 wouldst have feared. The general would have as- 
 saulted. We should have proceeded. You would 
 
 have broken. They would have burned. (15.) If I 
 
 should cough. If thou shouldst offend. If he should 
 
 toser 
 succeed. If we should commit. If you should grant. 
 cometer conceder 
 
108 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 If they should drink. (16.) If I should have 
 
 merited. If thou shouldst have eaten. If he should 
 
 merecer 
 
 have hid. If we should have swept. If you should 
 
 haveowed. If they should have granted. 17. To have 
 
 destroyed. To have run. Answering. Undertaken. 
 Having obeyed. Having subdued. 
 obedecer someter 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 (1.) I beat down. Thou openest. He adds. We 
 abatir abrir anadir 
 
 stun. You fight. The waters boil. (2.) I did 
 
 aturdir combatir agua bullir 
 
 compress. Thou wast confounding. He consumed. 
 
 comprimir coiifundir consumir 
 
 We eluded. You beat down. They were adding. 
 
 eludir 
 
 (3.) I erected. Thou didst consume. He wrote. 
 
 eregir escribir* 
 
 We dropped. You opened. They stunned.— (4.) 
 
 escurrir 
 I have fenced. Thou hast fought. The king has 
 
 esgrlmir reij 
 
 exhibited. We have confounded. You have expressed. 
 exhibir exprimir 
 
 The men have feigned. (5.) I had eluded. Thou 
 
 fingir 
 hadst melted. The dog had yelped. We had felled. 
 fundir perro gahir penchir 
 
 You had fought. The waters had boiled. (6.) I shall 
 
 print. Thou wilt sink. The thief will elude. We shall 
 imprimir hundir ladron 
 
 (pour in). You shall write. The women shall 
 injundir muger 
 
 (bring forth). (7.) I shall have written. Thou wilt 
 
 parir 
 
 * Escribir has an irregular participle, escriio. And so also have 
 verbs in brir. Seethe Irregular Verbs, 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 109 
 
 have nourished. He will have feigned. We shall have 
 uutrir 
 
 departed. You will have dropped. The prince will 
 partir pfincipe 
 
 have united. (8.) Permit thou. Let him compress. 
 
 unir pemdtir 
 
 Let us presume. Fence you. Let the wicked suffer. 
 presumir malo siifrir 
 
 (9.) That I may write. Though thou mayst erect. 
 
 aunque 
 
 Though the soldier may fight. That we may exhibit. 
 
 sold a do 
 Provided you print. Though the armies may depart. 
 con tal que ejercito 
 
 (10.) That I might prohibit. Though thou 
 
 prohibit 
 shouldst suffer. If he might presume. That we should 
 
 si 
 polish. If you wrote. If love should presume, and 
 pulir el amor 
 
 the laws should prohibit. (11.) I should restrain. 
 
 ley restrifiir 
 
 Thou wouldst write. The lion would roar. We would 
 
 I eon rugir 
 
 feign. You would require. The emperors would 
 
 exigir empetadot 
 
 prohibit. — — (12.) Though I have directed. Though 
 
 dirigir 
 thou hast omitted. That he may have lived. That 
 
 omitir vivir 
 
 we have suffered. Though the allies may have fought. 
 
 alia do 
 
 (13.) That I might have applied. Though thou 
 
 acuclir 
 shouldst have feigned. Though the hog had grunted, 
 
 puerco grunir 
 If we had required. Though you might have departed. 
 That they should have omitted.— — (14.) I should have 
 written. Thou wouldst have polished. The noise 
 
 ruido 
 would have stunned. We should have sunk. You 
 
110 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 would have erected. They would have oraitted. 1 
 
 (15.) If I should ascend. If thou shouldst discover. 
 subir descubrir 
 
 If he should cover. If we should apply. If you 
 cubrir 
 
 should require. If they should fence. (16.) If I 
 
 should have cousumed. If thou shouldst have omitted. 
 If he should have presumed. If we have supplied. If 
 
 suplir 
 you have concurred. If the authors should have re- 
 concurrir re~ 
 
 sided. (17.) To have printed.* To have subsisted. 
 
 sidir subsist it 
 
 Warping. Dividing. Divided. Having subdived. 
 urdir dividir subdividir. 
 
 Changes in certain Regular Verbs, 
 
 Some verbs are susceptible of slight variations both 
 in their radical letters, and in their terminations; but 
 as these variations are made for no other purpose than 
 of preserving in other tenses the pronunciation of the 
 infinitive, the Academy does not consider them as 
 irregular. Thus, 
 
 Verbs ending in car change c into qu when that c 
 would be followed by e. This happens in the first 
 person singular of the First Preterperfect Indicative, in 
 the third person singular and plural and the first person 
 plural of the Imperative^ and in all the persons of the 
 Subjunctive Present: Buscar, to seek; busque, I sought ; 
 busque, let him seek ; busquen, let them seek, &c. 
 
 Verbs in gar take a u after g when that g would be 
 followed by <?, and this happens in the same persons as 
 the substitution of qu fore: Pagar, to pay ; pagne, I 
 paid, &c. 
 
 Verbs in ceretnd. cir change the c into z before a and 
 o.f This happens in the first person singular of the 
 Indicative Present, in the third person singular and 
 
 * See impvimir in the Irregular Verbs, 
 
 t Delinquir changes qu into c in the same cases. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. Ill 
 
 plural and the first person plural of the Imperative, and 
 in all the persons of the Subjunctive Present: Veneer, 
 to conquer; venzo, I conquer; venza, let him conquer; 
 venzan, let them conquer, &c. Resarcir, to repair ; 
 resarzo, I repair, &c. 
 
 Verbs inger change g into j before a and o 9 and this 
 happens in the same persons and tenses as the pre- 
 ceding : Escoger, to choose ; escojo, I choose, &q. ■ 
 
 Verbs in eer change i into y in the third person sin- 
 gular and plural of the First Preterperfect Indicative, 
 in the First and Second Preterimperfect Subjunctive, 
 in the Future Imperfect of the same mood, and in the 
 Present Participle: Creer, to believe; crei, T believed; 
 creijo, he believed ; creyeron, they believed, &c. 
 
 Verbs in uir 9 when the u and i are not in the same 
 syllable, change i into y in the same tenses as those in 
 eer> and also in the three persons singular, and the 
 third person plural of the Indicative Present, in the 
 two persons singular, and the first and third persons 
 plural of the Imperative, and in all the persons of the 
 Subjunctive Present : Atriouir, to attribute ; atribuyo, 
 I attribute ; atribuyes, thou attributes!; atribuye-, he 
 attributes, &c. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS PASSIVE. 
 
 A Verb Passive is conjugated by adding the perfect 
 participle to the auxiliary ser through all the changes of 
 Mood, Tense, Number, and Person, in the following 
 manner : 
 
 Ser amado, to he loved. 
 
 Indicative Mood* 
 
 1. Present Tense. 
 
 Sing* soy amaclo, I am loved, 
 
 eres amado, thou art loved. 
 
 es amado, he is loved. 
 Plur. somos am ados, tee are loved. 
 
 sois am ad os, you are loved. 
 
 son amados, they are loved. 
 
112 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 2. Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, era amado, I was loved. 
 
 eras amado, thou toast loved. 
 
 era amado, he was loved. 
 Plur. eramos amados, we tvere loved. 
 
 erais amados, you were loved. 
 
 eran amados, they were loved. 
 
 3. First Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, fui amado, I was loved. 
 
 fuiste amado, thou wast loved. 
 
 fue amado, he ivas loved. 
 Plur. fuimos amados, we were loved. 
 
 fuistes amados, you were loved. 
 
 fueron amados, they were loved. 
 
 4. Second Preterperfect. 
 
 Sing, he sido amado, / have been loved. 
 
 has sido amado,, thou hast been loved. 
 
 ha sido amado, he has been loved. 
 Plur. hemos sido amados, we have been loved. 
 
 habeis sido amados, you have been loved. 
 
 ban sido amados, they have been loved. 
 
 5. Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, hube, ~\ 
 
 or >sido amado, / had been loved. 
 habia, J 
 hubiste, 1 
 
 or >sido amado, thou hadst been loved. 
 habias, J 
 hubo, "j 
 
 or f sido amado, he had been loved. 
 habia, . 
 Plur. hubimos, 
 
 or J^sido amados, we had been loved. 
 habiamos, 
 
 j- 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 113 
 
 hubisteis,^ 
 
 or Ssido amados, you had been loved, 
 
 habiais, J 
 hubieron,^j 
 
 or > siclo amados, they had been loved. 
 
 habian, J 
 
 6. Future Imperfect, 
 
 Sing, sere amado, I shall or will be loved. 
 
 seras amado, thou shall or wilt be loved. 
 
 sera amado. he shall or will be loved. 
 ~Plur. seremos amados, toe shall or will be loved. 
 
 sereis amados, you shall or will be loved. 
 
 seran amados, they shall or ivill be loved. 
 
 7. Future Perfect. 
 
 Sing, habre sido amado, / shall have been loved. 
 
 habras sido amado, thou wilt have been loved* 
 
 habra sido amado, he ivill have been loved, 
 Plar. habremos sido amados, we shall have been loved, 
 
 habreis sido amados, you ivill have been loved. 
 
 habran sido amados^ they ivill have been loved, 
 
 8. Imperative Mood, 
 
 Sing, se amado, he thou loved. 
 
 sea amado, let him be loved. 
 Plur, seamos amados, let us le loved, 
 
 sed amados, be you loved, 
 
 sean amados, let them be loved. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 9. Present Tense. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, sea amado, I may be loved, or am loved. 
 
 seas amado, thou mayst be loved. 
 
 sea amado, he may be loved. 
 Plur. seamos amados, we may be loved. 
 
 seals amados , you may be loved. 
 
 sean amados, they may be loved. 
 
114 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 10. First Preterlmperfect. 
 
 que, that. 
 Sing, fuera, 
 or 
 fuese, 
 fueras, 
 
 or 
 fueses 
 
 era,! 
 
 ?r > amado, / should or might: be loved.* 
 
 ese, J 
 
 eras, 1 
 
 or Vamado, thou sliouldst or mightst be loved, 
 
 eses, J 
 
 fuera, \ 
 
 or V amado, he should or might be loved, 
 fuese, J 
 Plur. fueramos,^ 
 
 or > amados, we should or might be loved. 
 fuesemos,J 
 fuerais,! 
 
 or > amados, you should or might be loved, 
 fueseis, ) 
 fueran,S 
 
 or > amados, they should or might be loved, 
 fuesen, J 
 
 11. Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, seria am ado, / would or shoidd be loved, 
 
 serias amado, thou wouldst be loved. 
 
 seria amado, he would be loved, 
 Plur, seriamos amados, we would or should beloved. 
 
 seriais amados, you would be loved. 
 
 serian amados, they would be loved, 
 
 12. Preterperfect. 
 que, that. 
 Sing, haya sido amado, I may have been loved, or I have 
 
 been loved, 
 hayas sido amado, thou mayst have been loved, 
 haya sido amado, he may have been loved, 
 Plur. hay am os sido amados, we may have been loved. 
 hayais sido amados, you may have been loved. 
 hayan sido amados, they may have been loved, 
 
 * Also that I were loved, and sometimes that I was loved See 
 
 Syntax of Conjunctions. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 113 
 
 13. First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que, that, 
 Sing, hubiera, "J 
 
 or Vsido amado., / should or might have been 
 hubiese, ) loved, or I had been loved. 
 
 hubieras, "| 
 
 or >sido amado, thou shouldst or mightst 
 
 hubieses, J have been loved. 
 
 hubiera, ~) 
 
 or > sido amado, he should or might have been 
 hubiese, J loved. 
 
 Plur. hubieramos,^ 
 
 or >sido amados, me should or might 
 
 hubiesemos, J have been loved* 
 
 hubierais,^ 
 
 or >sido amados, you should or might have 
 hubieseis, J been loved. 
 
 hubieran, "\ 
 
 or V sido amados, they should or might have 
 
 hubiesen, J been loved. 
 
 14. Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 Sing, liabria sido amado, / mould or should have been 
 
 loved. 
 habrias sido amado, thou mouldst have been loved: 
 habria sido amado, he mould have been loved. 
 Plur. habria mos sido amados, we mould or should have 
 
 been loved. 
 habriais sido amados, you mould have been loved. 
 habrian sido amados, they moidd have been loved. 
 
 15. Future Imperfect. 
 
 si, if 
 Sing, fuere amado, I should be loved. 
 
 fueres amado, thou shouldst be loved. 
 
 fuere amado, he should be loved. 
 Plur. fueremos amados, we should be loved. 
 
 fuereis amados, you shoidd be loved. 
 
 fueren amados, they should be loved. 
 
116 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 16. Future Perfect, 
 
 si, if. 
 Sing, hubiere sido amado, / should have been loved. 
 
 hubieres sido amado, thou shouldst have been loved. 
 
 hubiere sido amado, he shoidd have been loved. 
 Plur. hubieremos sido amados, ive should have been 
 
 loved. 
 
 hubiereis sido amados, you should have been loved. 
 
 hubieren sido amados, they should have been loved, 
 
 17, Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Ser amado, to be loved. 
 
 Perfect, 
 Haber sido amado, to have been loved. 
 
 Participles. 
 Present. 
 Siendo amado^ being loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Amado, loved. 
 
 Compound Perfect. 
 Hahiendo sido amado, having been loved.* 
 
 * The Spanish language has two verbs corresponding to our verb, 
 to love. These are amar and querer : the former is generally used 
 when we speak of things, the latter, of persons. But this distinction 
 is often disregarded. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 11* 
 
 Exercise on Passive Verbs* 
 
 (1.) I am accused. Thou art finished. God is 
 acusar acabar 
 
 adored. We are called. You are deceived. The 
 adorar llamar enganar 
 
 men are deceived. (2 and 3.) I was deceived. 
 
 h ombre 
 
 Thou wast praised. The king was forgotten. We 
 
 alabar reij olvidar 
 
 were increased. You were loved. They were accused, 
 aumentar amar 
 
 (4%) I have been asked. Thou hast been sent. 
 preguntar enviar 
 
 The physician has been consulted. We have been 
 
 medico consultar 
 
 refused. You have been succoured. Those sciences 
 rehusar amparar ciencia 
 
 have been studied (5.) I had been assured. Thou 
 
 estudiar assegurar 
 
 hadst been moderated. The woman had been blamed. 
 moderar muger vituperar 
 
 We had been deserted. You had been taken. The 
 desertar tomar 
 
 houses had been robbed. (6.) 1 shall be slain. 
 
 casa robar matar 
 
 Thou wilt be asked. The army will be commanded. 
 
 ejerciio mandar 
 
 We will be called. You shall be dragged. The things 
 
 arrastrar cosa 
 
 will be borrowed. (7.) 1 shall have been left. Thou 
 
 amprar dejar 
 
 wilt have been affronted. The palace will have been 
 
 qfrentar palacio 
 
 * The participle is to be declined like an adjective, and to agree- 
 in gender and number with the noun or pronoun to which it belongs : 
 The man is loved ; el hembre es querido : The woman is loved; la 
 muger es querida : The men are loved ; los hombres son queridos: The 
 women are loved j las mv.geres son queridas. 
 
118 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 bought. We shall have been frightened. You will 
 comprar amedrentar 
 
 have been prepared. The things will have been bought. 
 preparar 
 (8.) Be thou tied. Let him be accused. Let us 
 atar 
 be assisted, Let them be sent.—- — (9.) That I may be 
 
 ayndar 
 succoured. Though thou mayst be left. Though the 
 
 aim que 
 princess be warned. That we may be cured. Though 
 2)rincesa avisar curar 
 
 yon be accommodated. That the soldiers may be 
 acomodar soldado 
 
 disarmed. (10.) That I might be reconciled. 
 
 desarmar reconcilia r. 
 
 Though thou wert imagined. If life were taken 
 
 imaginar si la vicla guitar 
 
 away. That we should be sold. That you should be 
 
 vender 
 attacked. Though the queen and her daughters w T ere 
 a comet er reyna y hija 
 
 attacked. — — (11.) I should have been answered. 
 
 responder 
 Thou wouldst have been surprised. The house would 
 
 sorprehender casa 
 
 have been sold. We should have been feared. You 
 
 temer 
 would have been assaulted. The cities would have 
 arremeter ciudad 
 
 been burned. (12.) That I may have been con- 
 
 arder ven- 
 
 quered. Though thou hast been concealed. Though 
 cer esconder 
 
 the woman has been protected. If we have been 
 
 proteger 
 stunned. If you have been nourished. Though the 
 aiurdir nutrir 
 
 letters may have been consumed. That the books may 
 carta consuruir libro 
 
 have been burned.- (13/) Though I should have been 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 119 
 
 permitted. If thou hadst been exhibited. Provided the 
 permit ir exhibir con tal que 
 
 church had been erected. That we might have been 
 iglesia erigir 
 
 sunk. Though you should have been added. If the 
 hundir anadir 
 
 women had been prohibited. — —(14.) I would have 
 
 prokibir 
 been called. Thou wouldst have been called. The 
 
 llaraar 
 man and the woman would have been united. We 
 
 unir 
 should have been taken. You would have been 
 
 tomar 
 suffered. They would have been rewarded. — — (15.) 
 
 premiar 
 If I should be doubted. If thou shouldst be treated. 
 
 dudar tratar 
 
 If she should be offended. If we should be sent. If 
 
 qfender 
 you should be required. If the husbands should be 
 exiger mar i do 
 
 restrained. If the wives should be directed. {16,) 
 
 restrinir dirigir 
 
 If I should have been corrupted. If thou shouldst have 
 
 corrcmper 
 been loved. If she should have been forgotten. If we 
 should have been rewarded. If you should have been 
 permitted. If the queens should have been feared. 
 
 (17.) To be conquered. To be abandoned. To 
 
 abandonar 
 have been admired. To have been united. Being 
 
 admirar 
 rewarded. Restrained. Having been required. Hav- 
 ing been directed. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS REFLECTED. 
 
 Verbs reflected are conjugated by prefixing to the 
 active verb the accusative cases of the personal pro- 
 nouns. They admit haber only as an auxiliary in the 
 formation of their compound tenses. 
 
120 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Sing* me alabo, I praise myself. 
 
 te alabas, thou praisest thyself. 
 
 se alaba, he praises himself. 
 Plur. nos alabamos, tve praise ourselves. 
 
 os alabais, you praise yourselves. 
 
 se alaban, they praise themselves. 
 
 Preteriaiperfect. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 me alababa. nos alababamos. 
 
 te alababas. os alababais. 
 
 se alababa. se alababam 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 me alabe. nos alabamos. 
 
 te alabaste. os alabasteis. 
 
 se alabo. se alabaron. 
 
 Second Preterperfect. 
 
 me he alabado. nos hemos alabado, 
 
 te has alabado. os habeis alabado. 
 
 se ha alabado. se han alabado. 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 rhube, "^ fhubimos, 1 
 
 me< or >alabado. nos^ or >alabado* 
 
 Lhabia,J thabiamos, J 
 
 c hubiste,"^ C hubisteis, 1 
 
 te I or >alabado. os^ or >alabado. 
 
 Lhabias, J Lhabiais, J 
 
 C hubo, "\ C hubieron, "* 
 
 se< or >alabado, se<^ or >alabado. 
 
 V.habia ; J Lhabian, J 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 121 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 me alabare. nos alabaremos. 
 
 te alabaras. os alabareis. 
 
 se alabara. se alabaran. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 me habre alabado. nos habremos alabado. 
 
 te habras alabado. os habreis alabado. 
 
 se habra alabado. se habran alabado. 
 
 1 
 
 mpei 
 
 -ativ 
 
 e Mood. 
 
 alabate. 
 alabase. 
 
 
 
 alabemonos. 
 
 alabaos. 
 
 alabense. 
 
 £ 
 
 kibju 
 
 nctii 
 
 :e Mood. 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 me alabe. 
 te alabes. 
 se alabe. 
 
 
 
 nos alabemos. 
 os alabeis. 
 se alaben. 
 
 First Pi 
 
 :etei 
 
 •imperfect. 
 
 que 
 ( alabara, 
 ae< or 
 ( alabase. 
 ( alabaras, 
 
 
 
 que 
 f alabaramos, 
 
 
 
 nos < or 
 
 (.alabasemos. 
 r alabarais, 
 
 e < or 
 ( alabases. 
 ( alabara, 
 
 ;e-< or 
 { alabase. 
 
 
 
 os < or 
 Lalabaseis. 
 r alabaran, 
 
 
 
 se 2 or 
 
 Lai abas en. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 me alabaria. 
 te alabarias. 
 se alabaria. 
 
 
 
 nos alabariamos 
 os alabariais. 
 se alabarian. 
 
122 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 que que 
 
 me haya alabado. nos hayamos alabado, 
 
 te hayas alabado, os hayais alabado. 
 
 se haya alabado. se hayan alabado. 
 
 First Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que que 
 
 rhubiera, \ rhubieramos, 1 
 
 me< or > alabado. nos-^ or > alabado. 
 
 Lhubiese, J Ihubiesemos, j 
 
 r hubieras, "j r hubierais, "^ 
 
 < or > alabado. os*/ or f alabado. 
 
 t hubieses, J I hubieseis, J 
 
 rhubiera,"^ rhubieran,"^ 
 
 2 or > alabado. sel or > alabado. 
 
 vjwbiese, J Lhubiesen, J 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 me habria alabado. nos habriamos alabado. 
 te habrias alabado. os habriais alabado. 
 se habria aiabado. se habrian alabado. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 si si 
 
 me alabare. nos alabaremos. 
 
 te alabares. os alabareis. 
 
 se alabare. se alabaren. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 si si 
 
 me hubiere alabado. nos hubieremos alabado. 
 
 te hubieres alabado. os hubiereis alabado, 
 
 se hubiere alabado. se hubieren alabado. 
 
 te 
 
 se 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 123 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Alabarse. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Haberse alabado. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 Alabandose. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Alabado. 
 
 Compound Perfect* 
 Habiendose alabado. 
 
 ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS 
 
 Alphabetically arranged) and, when requisite conjugated 
 in the Tenses and Persons in ivhich their Irregularity 
 is visible, 
 
 A. 
 
 Aba stecer, to furnish provisions. 
 
 The irregularity of this verb, and of all those 
 ending in ecer, ocer, and acer, consists in ad* 
 d mitting xbefore c in the first person singular of the 
 Indicative present^ in the third person singular, and 
 the first and third persons plural of the Imperative, 
 and in all the persons of the Subjunctive present, 
 But to this ride cocer, hacer, torcer, and thei? 
 compounds, are exceptions, which icill be found con- 
 jugated in their proper places. 
 g 2 
 
124 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. abastezco. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. abastezcamos. 
 3. abastezca. 3. abastezcan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 1. abastezca. 1. abastezcamos. 
 
 2. abastezcas. 2. abastezcais. 
 
 3. abastezca. 3. abastezcan. 
 
 All the other tenses and persons of this Verb are 
 regularly conjugated, — that is, like Temer. 
 
 Aborrecer, to hate. See Abastecer. 
 
 Abrir, to open, is irregular in its perfect participle only, 
 
 abierto. 
 Absolver, to absolve. 
 
 This verb changes the radical o into ue in the fol- 
 lowing tenses and jwsons ; 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sino nla r. Plural. 
 
 1. absueivo, 
 
 2. absue]ves» 
 
 3. absuelve. 3. absuelven. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2. absuelve. 
 
 3. absuelva* 3. absuelvan. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 12/> 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. absuelva. 
 
 2. absuelvas. 
 
 3. absuelva. 3. absuelvan. 
 
 The other tenses and persons are regular, ex- 
 cept the perfect participle absuelto. 
 
 Abstraer, to abstract. See Traer. 
 Aeaecer, to happen. See Abastecer, 
 
 AcERTAR, to guess. 
 
 This verb admits i before the radical e but in the 
 following tenses and persons only. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. acierto. 
 
 2. aciertas. 
 
 3. aeierta. 3. aciertan. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2. aeierta. 
 
 3. acierte. 3. acierten. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. acierte. 
 
 2. acierfces. 
 
 3. acierte. 3. acierten 
 
 The other tenses^ S$c. are regular. 
 
 Acordar, to agree. 
 
 This verb changes the radical o into ue in the 
 same tenses and persons as the preceding verb 
 Acertar. 
 
126 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 1. acuerdo. 
 
 2. acuerdas. 
 
 3. acuerda. 3. acuerdan. 
 
 Imperative Mood* 
 % acuerda. 
 3. acuerde. 3. acuerden. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood* 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. acuerde. 
 
 2. acuerdes. 
 
 3. acuerde. 3. acuerden. 
 
 27*£ other tenses, fyc. are regular* 
 
 Acordarse, to remember. 1 a \ j 
 Acostarse, to lie^ down, j See Acordar ' 
 Aorecentar, /o increase. 1 q a 
 
 Adestrar, fo rew^r dexterous. J ^ Acertar. 
 Adherir, fo adhere. 
 
 This verb in certain persons admits an i before the 
 radical e, and in some other persons that e is changed 
 into i. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singidar. Plural. 
 
 1. adhiero. 
 
 2. adhieres. 
 
 3. adhiere. 3. adhieren. 
 
 * Acordar has the same irregularity as Absolver ; but as these two 
 verbs are of different conjugations, and as the latter has an irregular 
 perfect participle, it has been judged expedient to conjugate both. 
 Were this not the case, the learner might inconsiderately suppose 
 that all verbs susceptible of the same radical change are conjugated 
 in the same manner, and he might consequently assign to ail the 
 same terminations. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 12T 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 3. adhirio. 3. adhirieron. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. adhiramos, 
 
 2. adhiere. 
 
 3. adhiera. 3. adhieran. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. adhiera. 1. adhiramos. 
 
 2. adhieras. 2. adhirais. 
 
 3. adhiera. 3. adhieran. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. adhiriera, or adhiriese. 
 
 2. adhirieras, or adhirieses. 
 
 3. adhiriera, or adhiriese. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. adhirierarnos, or adhiriesemos. 
 
 2. adhirierais, or adhirieseis. 
 
 3. adhirieran, or adhiriesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. adhiriere. 1. adhirieremos. 
 
 2. adhirieres. 2. adhiriereis. 
 
 3. adhiriere. 3. adhirieren. 
 
 The other tenses, fyc, are regular. 
 
 Adolecer, to sicken. \ « ., 
 
 Adormecer, to become drowsy. 5 b6e Abastecer * 
 Adquerir, to acquire. 1 A , t . 
 Advevtlr, to advert. } &* Adhenr. 
 
Alentar,,f ^o«m^. ( ^ Acertar 
 
 128 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 f Agorar, to augur. See Acordar. 
 Agradecer, to thank. See Abastecer. 
 A hi tar, to overload the stomach. 
 
 This verb has an irregular participle^ ahito, but 
 ah it ado is also used. 
 
 Alentarse, to breathe, f ' 
 Almorzar, to breakfast. See Acordar. 
 Amanecer* to dawn. See Defective Verbs. 
 Amentar, to throve a dart. See Acertar. 
 Amolar, to tvhet. See Acordar. 
 Amortecerse, to faint. See Abastecer. 
 Andak, to go. 
 
 This verb is irregular in thejirst Preterperfcct of 
 
 the Indicative, in the first Preterimperfect, and the 
 
 Future Imperfect of the Subjunctive, 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. anduve. 
 
 ]. 
 
 an du vim os. 
 
 2. anduviste. 
 
 2. 
 
 anduvisteis. 
 
 3. anduvo. 
 
 3. 
 
 anduvieron, 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. anduviera, or anduviese. 
 
 2. anduvieraSj or anduvieses. 
 
 3. anduviera, or anduviese. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 !. anduvieramos, or anduviescmos. 
 
 2. anduvierais, or anduvieseis. 
 
 3. anduvieran, or anduviesen. 
 
 t Verbs mth this mark are seldom used. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 129 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. arduviere. 1. anduvieremos. 
 
 2. anduvieres. 2. anduviereis. 
 S. anduviere. 3. anduvieren. 
 
 In the other tenses this verb is conjugated like Amar. 
 
 Anochecer, to grow dark. See the Defective Verbs. 
 
 Anteponer, to prefer. See Poner. 
 
 Antever, to foresee. See Ver. 
 
 Apacentar, to feed (cattle). See Acertar.- 
 
 Aparecer, to appear. See Abastecer. 
 
 Apercibir, to provide. See Pedir. 
 
 Apetecer, to long for. See Abastecer. 
 
 Aporcar, to cover "with earthy 
 
 Aportar, to arrive in port. > See Acordar. 
 
 Apostar, to lay a wager. J 
 
 Apretar, to tighten. See Acer tar. 
 
 Aprobar, to approve. See Acordar. 
 
 Arbolecer, to grow up to a tree. See Abastecer. 
 
 Arrecirse, to grow numb with cold. See Pedir. 
 
 Arrendar, to hire. See Acer tar. 
 
 Arrepentirse, to repent. See Adherir. 
 
 Asentar, to sit down. See Acertar. 
 
 Asentir, to assent. See Adherir. 
 
 Asserrar, to saw. 1 A 
 A . :. , 7 • > See Acertar. 
 Asestar, to take aim. J 
 
 fAsnt, to take root. 
 
 This verb is irregular only in the first person sin- 
 gular of the Indicative present, in the third person 
 singular, and the first and third persons plural of the 
 Imperative, and in all the persons of the Subjunctive 
 present. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 ] . asgo. 
 
 G 5 
 
130 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. asgamos. 
 
 3. asga. 3. asgan, 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. asga. I. asgamos. 
 
 2. asgas. 2. asgais. 
 
 3. asga. 3. asgan. 
 
 In the other tenses and persons it is conjugated 
 like Partir. 
 
 Asolar, to raze. ^ 
 
 Asoldar^ to keep troops in pay. >See Acordar. 
 
 Asonar, to harmonise sounds. J 
 
 Atendei% to attend. See Tender. 
 
 Atenerse, to stand to. See the conjugation of Tenet. 
 
 Atentar, to attempt. See Acertar. 
 
 t Aterecerse, to grove stiff \viih cold. See Abastecer. 
 
 Aterrar, to cast dotvn to the earth. \ c . 
 
 Atestar,* to fill. S bee Acertar ' 
 
 Atormecerse, to grow stupid. See Abastecer. 
 
 Atraer, to attract. See Traer. 
 
 Atravesar, to cross. See Acertar. 
 
 f Atronar, to thunder, (def.) See Acordar. 
 
 Avenir, to happen. l SeeVen ^ 
 
 Avemrse, to agree. J 
 
 Aventar, to fan. I Sft , Acertar . 
 
 Aventarse, to be ajraid. f 
 
 Avergonzar, to shame. 7 A d 
 
 Avergonzarse, to oe ashamed. J 
 
 * Atestar, to attest, is regular. 
 
Bendecir, to bless. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 131 
 
 B. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singula r. Plura L 
 
 2. bendigo. 
 
 2. bendices. 
 
 3. bendice. 3 bendicen. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. bendije, (bendixe) 1. bendijimos. 
 
 2. bendijiste. 2. bendijisteis. 
 
 3. bendijo. 3. bendijeron, 
 
 Imp era five Mood. 
 
 1. bendigamos. 
 
 2. bendice. 
 
 3. bendiga. 3. bendigan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. bendiga. * 1. bendigamos. 
 
 2. bendigas. 2. bendigais. 
 
 3. bendiga. 3. bendigan. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing. 1. bendijera, or bendijese, 
 
 2. bendijeras ? or bendijeses. 
 
 3. bendijera, or bendiyese. 
 Plur. 1. bendijeramos, or bendijiesemos. 
 
 2. bendijerais, or bendijeseis. 
 
 3. bendijeran, or bendijesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. bendijere. 1. bendijeremos. 
 
 2. bendijeres. 2. bendijereis. 
 
 3. bendijere. 3. bendijeren, 
 
132 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Perfect Participle. , 
 
 Bendecido, or bendito. 
 
 The other tenses are regular. 
 
 Bregar, to contend. See Acertar. 
 
 C. 
 
 Caber, to contain. 
 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 quepo. 
 
 Pirst Preterperfect. 
 
 1; 
 
 3. 
 
 cupe. 
 
 cupiste. 
 
 cupo. 
 
 1. cupimos. 
 
 2. cupisteis. 
 
 3. cupieron. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 eabre. 
 
 cabras. 
 
 cabra. 
 
 1. cabremos. 
 
 2. cabreis. 
 
 3. cabran. 
 
 hnperative Mood. 
 
 1. quepamos 
 
 3. 
 
 quepa. 
 
 3. quepan* 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present* 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 quepa. 
 
 quepas. 
 
 quepa. 
 
 1. quepamos 
 2 quepais. 
 3. quepan. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 133 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 Sing, 1. cupiera, or cupiese. 
 
 2. cupieras, or cupieses. 
 
 3. cupiera, or cupiese. 
 Plur. 1. cupieramos, or cupiesemos. 
 
 2. cupierais, or cupieseis. 
 
 3. cupieran, or cupiesen. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1- cabria, 1. cabriamos. 
 
 2. cabrias. 2. cabriais. 
 
 3. cabria. 3. cabrian. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. cupiere. 1. cupieremos. 
 
 2. cupieres. 2. cupiereis. 
 S. cupiere. 3. cupieren. 
 
 The other parts of the verb are regular. 
 
 Caer, to fall 
 1. caigo. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. caigamos. 
 
 3. caiga. 3. caigan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. caiga. 1. caigamos. 
 
 2. caigas. 2. caigais. 
 
 3. caiga. 3. caigan. 
 
 This verb is regular in the other parts* 
 
134 ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 Calentar, to 'warm. See Acertar. 
 
 Canecer, to grotv grey, 1 Abastecer 
 
 Carecer, to want. J * ee ADastecei - 
 
 Cegar, to blind. See Acertar. 
 
 Cefiir, to gird. 1 T . ,. 
 
 Cenirse, to be girt. J See Pedin 
 
 Cerner, to sift See Tender. 
 
 Cerrar, to shut. 1 c a 
 
 Cimentar, to lay foundations. J bee Acertar - 
 
 Cocer, to cook. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 cuezo.* 
 cueces. 
 cuece. 
 
 3. cuecen 
 
 2, 
 3. 
 
 cuece. 
 cueza. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 S. cuezan. 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 i. 
 
 2. 
 3, 
 
 cueza. 
 
 cuezas. 
 
 cueza. 
 
 Present. 
 
 3. cuezan. 
 
 This verb has the same irregularity as Absolver, and 
 is therefore conjugated in the same manner ; but as the z 
 is substituted for the c before a and o final, and as the 
 o radical is changed into ue in the preceding tenses and 
 persons^ the conjugation of these might have presented 
 some difficulty to the inexperienced learner. Some other 
 verbs similarly formed will, for the same reason^ be re* 
 ferred, not to Absolver, but to the one before us. 
 
 * The 2 before a and o constitutes no irregularity : its insertion 
 has been accounted for. See " Changes in Certain Regular Verbs" 
 
ETYxMOLOGY. 135 
 
 Colar, to strain. See Acordar. 
 Colegir, to collect. See Pedir. 
 
 N. B. It changes g into j before a and o. See 
 u Changes in Certain Regular Verbs." 
 Colgar, to hang up. See Acordar. 
 fComedir, to refect. 1 ^ p ^ 
 
 Comedirse, to grow moderate.} 
 Comenzar, to commence. See Acertar. 
 Compadecerse to pity. 1 Abastecei , 
 
 Comparecer, to appear, J 
 Competir, to contend. See Pedir. 
 Compeler, to compel, is irregular only in its perfect 
 
 participle, compulse Compelido is also 
 
 used, but less frequently. 
 Complacer, to please. See Abastecer. 
 Componer, to compose. See Poner. 
 Comprobar, to corroborate. See Acordar. 
 Concebir, to conceive. See Pedir. 
 Concertar, to agree. See Acertar. 
 Concluir, to conclude, is irregular only in its perfect 
 
 participle, concluso : it has also concluido. 
 Concordar, to agree. 
 
 Condescended to condescend. See Tender. 
 Condoler, to condole. See Absolver. 
 Conducir, to conduce: 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 1. conduzco. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. conduje, (conduxe). 1. condujimos. 
 
 2. condujiste. 2. condujisteis. 
 
 3. condujo. 3. condujeron. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 I. conduzcamos. 
 
 3. conduzca. 3. conduzcan. 
 
136 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. conduzca. 
 
 2. conduzcas. 
 
 3. conduzca. 
 
 C 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. conduzcamos. 
 
 2. conduzcais. 
 
 3. conduzcan. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 condujera, 
 
 l.-l or 
 
 condujese. 
 
 rcondujeras, 
 
 %l or 
 
 Lcondujeses, 
 
 {condujera, 
 or 
 condujese. 
 
 rcondujeramos, 
 ].< or 
 
 Lcondujesemos. 
 C condujerais, 
 
 2 J or 
 
 Lcondujeseis. 
 rcondujeran, 
 
 3 J or 
 
 Lcondujesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. condujere. 1. condujeremos. 
 
 2. condujeres. 2. condujereis. 
 2. condujere. 3. condujeren. 
 
 All the other tenses, fyc. are regular, 
 
 Conferir, to confer. See Adherir. 
 
 Confesar, to confess. See Acertar. 
 
 Confundir, to confound, is irregular only in its perfect 
 
 participle confuso : it has also one regit' 
 larly formed, confundido. 
 Conmover, to rouse. See Absolver. 
 Conocer, to knoxv. See Abastecer. 
 Conseguir, to obtain. See Pedir, and Seguir. 
 Consentir, to consent. See Adherir. 
 Consolar, to console. See Acordar. 
 Consonar, to agree in tone. See Acordar. 
 Constrenir, to constrain. See Pedir. 
 Contar, to relate. See Acordar. 
 Contender, to contend. See Tender. 
 Contener, to contain. See Tener after Haber the 
 
 auxiliary. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 137 
 
 Contradecir, to contradict. See Decir. But it varies 
 from Decir in the second person singular 
 of the Imperative. We say contradice, 
 contradict thou, not con trad i. 
 Contrahacer, to counterfeit. See Hacer. 
 Contraer, to contract. See Traer. 
 Contravenir, to oppose. See Venir. 
 Controverter, to controvert. See Adherir. 
 Convalecer, to be recovering. See Abastecer. 
 Convencer, to convince, is irregular only in its perfect 
 participle, convicto. It has also con- 
 vencido. 
 Con venir, to agree. See Venir. 
 
 Convertir, to convert. See Adherir. It has also two 
 perfect participles, converso and conver- 
 tido. 
 Corregir, to correct. See Pedir. 
 Costar, to cost. See Acordar. 
 Crecer, to grotv. See Abastecer. 
 Cubrir, to cover, is irregular only in its participle 
 perfect, cubierto. 
 
 D. 
 Dar, to give. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 It doy. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. di. 1. dimos. 
 
 2. diste. 2. disteis. 
 
 3. did. 3. dieron. . 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. diera, or diese. 1. dieramos, or diesamos. 
 
 2. dieras, or dieses. 2. dierais, or dieseis. 
 
 3. diera, or diese. 3. dieran, or diesen. 
 
138 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. diere. 1. dieremos. 
 
 2. dieres. 2. diereis. 
 
 3. diere. 3. dieren. 
 
 Decaer, to decay. See Caer. 
 
 Decentar, to begin a repast. See Acertar. 
 
 Decir, to say. 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. digo. 
 
 2. dices. 
 
 
 3, dice. 
 
 3. dicen. 
 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. dije, (dixe). L dijimos. 
 
 2. dijiste. 2. dijisteis. 
 
 3. dijo. 3. dijeron. 
 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. dire. 
 
 1. diremos. 
 
 2. diras. 
 
 2. direis. 
 
 3. dira. 
 
 3. diran. 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2. di. 
 
 1. digamos. 
 
 3. diga. 
 
 3. digan. 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. diga. 
 
 2. digas. 
 
 3. diga. 
 
 1. digamos 
 
 2. digais. 
 
 3. digan. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 139 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. dijera, or dijese. 1. dijeramos, or dijesemos. 
 
 2. dijeras, or dijeses. 2. dijerais, or dijeseis, 
 
 3. dijera, or dijese. 3. dijeran, or dijesen. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 diria. 
 
 1. diriamos. 
 
 2. 
 
 dirias. 
 
 1. diriais. 
 
 8. 
 
 diria. 
 
 3. dirian. 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 dijere. 
 
 1. dijerernos 
 
 2, 
 
 dijeres. 
 
 2, dijereis. 
 
 3. 
 
 dijere. 
 
 3, dijeren. 
 
 Participles, 
 Present. 
 Dicie do. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Dicho. 
 
 The other parts of this verb are regular. 
 
 Deducir, to deduce. See Conducir. 
 
 Defender, to defend. See Tender. 
 
 Deferir, to defer. See Adherir. 
 
 Degollar, to behead. See Acordar. 
 
 Demoler, to demolish. See Absolver. 
 
 Demostrar, to demonstrate. See Acordar. 
 
 Denegar, to refuse. See Acertar. 
 
 Denostar, to revile. See Acordar. 
 
 Deponer, to depose. See Poner. 
 
 Derrengar, to break the bach. See Acertar. 
 
 Derretir, to melt. See Pedir. 
 
 Desabastecer, to cut off provisions. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desacertar, to mistake. See Acertar. 
 
 Desacordar, to be discordant. See Acordar. 
 
 Desadormecer, to awake. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desalentar, to discourage. See Acertar. 
 
 Desaparecer, to disappear. See Abastecer. 
 
140 ETYxMOLOGY. 
 
 Desapretar, to loosen. See Acertar. 
 
 Desaprobar, to disapprove. See Acordar. 
 
 Desasosegar, to disquiet. See Acertar. 
 
 Desatender, to neglect. See Tender. 
 
 Desatentar, to perplex. See Acertar. 
 
 Besatravesar, to remove obstacles. See Acertar. 
 
 Desavenir, to disagree. See Venir. 
 
 Descaecer, to droop. See Abastecer. 
 
 Descender, to descend. See Tender. 
 
 Descenir, to ungird. See Pedir. 
 
 jDesimentar., to sap the foundation. See Acertar. 
 
 Descolgar, to take down. \ q \ j 
 
 Descollar, to be taller. J 
 
 Descomedirse, to become rude. See Pedir. 
 
 Descomponer, to discompose. See Poner. 
 
 jDesconcertar, to disconcert. See Acertar. 
 
 Desconsentir, to dissent. See Adherir. 
 
 Desconocer, to disown. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desconsolar, to afflict. \ c A , 
 
 Descontar, to discount. J bee Acordar - 
 
 Descubrir, to discover, is irregidar only in its perfect 
 
 participle, descubierto. 
 Desdecir, to retract. See Decir. But the second 
 person singular of the Imperative is 
 desdice, not desdi. 
 Desempedrar, to unpave. \ ~ . 
 Desencerrar, to release. J ee ° 
 Desengrosar, to diminish. See Acordar. 
 Desentender, to feign ignorance. See Tender. 
 Desenterrar, to take up a corpse. See Acertar. 
 Desentorpecer, to rouse. See Abastecer. 
 Desenvolver, to unroll. See Absolver. 
 Deservir, to disoblige. See Pedir. 
 
 es a ec^r, i f( . - ne g ee Abastecer. 
 Desnaqttecerse, J i 
 Desfiocar, to ravel out. See Acordar. 
 Desfogarse, to give vent to passion. Idem. 
 Desguarnecer, to untrim. See Abastecer. 
 Deshacer, to undo. See Hacer. 
 Deshelar, to thaw. See Acertar. 
 Desherrar, to unshoe horses. Idem. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 141 
 
 Desleir, to dilute. See. Pedir. 
 
 Deslucir, to tarnish. See Abastecer.* 
 
 Desmembrar, to dismember. See Acertar. 
 
 Desmentir, to give the lie. See Adhfcrir. 
 
 Desobedecer, to disobey. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desolar, to desolate. ~\ 
 
 Desollar, to play. >See Acordar. 
 
 Desovar, to spawn. J 
 
 Despedir, to dismiss. ~> ~ p ,., 
 
 Despedirse, to take leave, j 
 
 Despedrar, to unpave. 1 
 
 Despernar, to cut off legs. > See Acertar. 
 
 Despertar, to awake, j 
 
 The last of these has two perfect participles. 
 
 despierto and despertado. 
 
 Desplacer^ to displease. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desplegar to unfold. See Acertar. 
 
 Despoblar, to depopulate. See Acordar. 
 
 Destenir, to discolour. See Pedir. 
 
 Desterrar, to exile. See Acertar. 
 
 Destorcer, to untwist. See Cocer. 
 
 Destrocar, to re-exchange. See Acordar. 
 
 Desvanecerse, to vanish away. See Abastecer. 
 
 Desvergonzarse ? to become impudent. See Acordar. 
 
 Detener, to detain. See Tener. 
 
 f Detraer, to detract. See Traer. 
 
 Devolver, to restore. See Absolver. 
 
 Dezmai% to tithe. See Acertar. 
 
 Diferir, to differ. ~\ X A „ 
 
 w . J . . W . ■ > See Adherir. 
 
 Digenr, to digest, j 
 
 Discordar, to disagree. See Acordar. 
 
 Disolver, to dissolve. See Absolver. 
 
 Disponer, to dispose. See Poner. 
 
 Distraer, to distract. See Traer. 
 
 Divertir, to divert. See Adherir. 
 
 * Here the learner will observe that though Abastecer and Deslucir 
 agree in the irregularity of admitting s before c in certain tenses and 
 persons, .yet they are of different conjugations, and consequently re- 
 quire a corresponding difference of termination. The same must be 
 observed with respect to other verbs of the third conjugation which 
 will be referred to Abastecer ) as Enlucir, &c t 
 
14:2 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Doler, to ache. See Absolver. 
 DoRxMiR, to sleep. 
 
 This verb changes the radical o into ue and 
 sometimes into u. 
 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Singula* 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 duermo. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 duermes. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 duerme. 
 
 3. duermen. 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 3. 
 
 durmid. 
 
 3. durmieron. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. durmamos. 
 
 2, 
 
 duerme. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 duenna. 
 
 3. duerman. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present, 
 
 I. 
 
 duerma. 
 
 1. durmamos. 
 
 2. 
 
 duermas. 
 
 2. durmais. 
 
 3. 
 
 duerma. 
 
 3. duerman. 
 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 
 f durmiera, 
 
 f durmieramos, 
 
 i.< 
 
 \ or 
 
 iJ or 
 
 
 Ldurmiese. 
 
 L durmiesemos. 
 
 
 r durmieras 
 
 , fdurmierais, 
 
 2.< 
 
 I or 
 
 2 J or 
 
 
 I durmieses 
 
 Ldurmiesen. 
 
 
 r durmiera, 
 
 rdurmieran, 
 
 3.< 
 
 ■ or 
 
 3 J or 
 
 
 tdurraiese. 
 
 Ldurmiesen. 
 
ETYxMOLOGY. 143 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. durmiere. 1. durmieremos. 
 
 2. durmieres. 2. durmiereis. 
 
 3. durmiere. 3. durmieren. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present, 
 durmiendo. 
 
 The other te?ises, &x. are regular. 
 
 E. 
 
 Elegir, to choose. See Pedir. 
 
 The learner mil observe that before a and o the 
 radical g is changed into j, to preserve the pronun- 
 ciation of the Infinitive; but this is no irregularity* 
 See " Changes in Certain Regular Verbs." Elegir 
 has two perfect participles, electo and elegido. 
 
 Embestir, to assail. See Pedir. 
 
 Embravecerse, to become furious.') « », , 
 
 Embrutecerse,, to become brutal. J - 
 
 Emendar, to amend. "\ 
 
 Empedrar , to pave. U A 
 
 Empegar, to patch, f 
 
 Empezar, to begin. J 
 
 Emnlumecer, to become fledged. \ c A , . 
 
 ts i_ j '7 s~ u€C xioastecer. 
 
 Emprobecer, to impoverish. j 
 
 Emporcar, to soil. See Acordar. 
 
 -f Encaballecer, to become hairy. ~) 
 
 Eneallecer, to grove callous. 
 
 Encalvecer, to groiu bald. }»See Abasteeer. 
 
 Encanecer, to become gray vciih age. J 
 
 Encarecer, to become dearer. — 
 
 Encender, to light. See Tender. 
 
 Encensar, to cense. 1 
 
 Encerrar, to shut up. > See Acertar, 
 
 Encomendar, to recommend* J 
 
114 ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 Encontrar, to find. 1 a A , 
 Encordar, to string.! See Acord * r - 
 Encrudecerse, to become raw. 1 A , 
 Encmelecer, to render cruel. S See Abastecer - 
 Encubertar, to cover with a cloth. See Acertar. 
 Encubrir, to conceal, is irregular only in its perfect par- 
 ticiple* encubierto. 
 Endentecer, to cut the teeth. ~) 
 Endurecer, to harden. 
 
 Enflaquecer, to grow lean. ySee Abastecer. 
 
 Enfurecerse, to become furious. 
 Engrandecer, to aggrandise. 
 Engreirse, to grow vain. See Pedir. 
 Engrosar, to engross. See Acordar. 
 Enloquecer, to become mad. 
 Enlucir,* to whiten. 
 •^Enraocecer, to grow young, 
 Enmohecerse, to grow mouldy. 
 
 Enmudecer, to become dumb. 
 
 t? , 7 7 7 \See Abastecer. 
 
 Ennegrecer^ to blacken. 
 
 Ennoblecer, to ennoble. 
 
 fEnnudecer, to grow knotty. 
 
 Enrarecer, to become scarce. 
 
 Enriquecer, to enrich. 
 
 Enrodar, to break on the wheel. See Acordar, 
 
 Ensangrentar, to stain with blood. See Acertar. 
 
 Ensoberbecerse, to grow haughty. \ Q A] 
 
 Entallecer, to sprout. ^ J bee ADastecer - 
 
 Entender, to understand. See Tender. 
 
 Enternecer, to soften. See Abastecer. 
 
 Enterrar, to bury. See Acertar. 
 
 Entomecer, to swell ) 
 
 Entontecerse, to become foolish. >See Abastecer. 
 
 Entorpecerse, to become idle. J 
 
 jEntrelucir, to shine faintly. See Abastecer, and the 
 
 note to Deslucir. 
 
 Entreoir, to hear indistinctly. See Oir. 
 
 Entretener, to entertain. See Tener. 
 
 Entristecer, to sadden. See Abastecer. 
 
 * See the note to Deslucir. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 147 
 
 Errar, to err. See Acertar. 
 
 The irregular persons of this verb commence 
 sometimes ivith h, as hierro, I err ; and sometimes 
 ivith y, as yerro. Perhaps the latter is the prefer- 
 able form ; but in that case the rule falls to the 
 ground ; for the verb does not admit i before the 
 radical e. Y has been substituted for hi. from the 
 simularity of sound. 
 t Escalentar, to heat, j ^ Acertar _ 
 Escarmentar, to reform. J 
 Escarncer, to scoff \ See Abastecei , 
 
 fEselarecer, to entigkten. j 
 Escocer, to smart. See Cocer. 
 
 Escribir, to write, is irregular only in the perfect parti- 
 ciple escrito. 
 Esforzar, to enforce. See Acordar. 
 Establecer, to establish. See Abastecer. 
 Estar, to be. See its Conjugation. 
 Estregai% to scour. See Acer car. 
 Estremecerse, to shudder. See Abastecer. 
 Estrenir, to bind. See Peclir. 
 
 Excluir, to exclude, is irregular only in its perfect parti- 
 ciple excluso : it has also excluido. 
 Expedir, to expedite. See Pedir. 
 
 Expel ir, to expel, is irregular only in its -perfect parti- 
 ciple expulso : it has also expelido. 
 Exponer, to expose. See Poner. 
 Expresar. to express, has an irregular participle expreso; 
 
 and a regular one, expresado. 
 Extender, to extend. See Tender. 
 Extinguir, to extinguish, has two participle*. — the one 
 regular, extinguido ; the other irregular, 
 extinct o. 
 Extraer, to extract. See Traer. 
 
 F. 
 
 Fallecer, to die. "% 
 
 Favorecer, to favour. > See Abastecer. 
 Fenecer, to terminate. J 
 
 Fijai\ to fix, has two participles; — regular, fijado; 
 irregular, fijo. 
 
 K 2 
 
1&8 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Fortalecer, to fortify. See Abastecer. 
 Forzar, to force. See Acordar. 
 Fregar, to scrub. See Acertar. 
 Freir, to fry. See Pedir. 
 
 This verb has also an irregular perfect participle ', 
 frito. Freido is sometimes used. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gemir, to bewail. See Pedir. 
 Gobernar, to govern. See Acertar. 
 Guarnecer, to garnish. See Abastecer. 
 
 H. 
 
 Haber, to have. See its Conjugation. 
 Hacer, to make, or to do. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. ha^o. 
 
 a 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. hiee. 1. hicimos. 
 
 2. hiciste. 2. hicisteis. 
 
 3. hizo. 3. hicieron. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. hare. 1. haremos. 
 
 2. haras. 2. hareis. 
 
 3. hara. 3. haran. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. hagamos. 
 
 2. haz. 
 
 3. haga. 3. hagan. 
 
>See Abastecer. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 1 15 
 
 Entristecerse, to become sad. 
 
 Entullecer, to become crippled. 
 
 Entumecer, \ to sxxldL 
 
 Entumecerse, ) 
 
 Envejecer, to grovo old. 
 
 Enverdecer, to grow green. 
 
 Envester, to invest. See Pedir. 
 
 Envolver, to involve. See Absolve r. 
 
 Enxugar, to dry, is irregular only in its perfect par- 
 ticiple enxuto. It has also enxugado. 
 
 Equivaler, to be equivalent. See Valer. 
 
 Erguir, to raise. 
 
 This verb has the same irregularity as pedir, but 
 its orthography in the irregular tenses and persons 
 varies so much that it requires a separate conjuga- 
 tion* 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. hiergo, or yergo. 
 
 2. hiergues, or yergues. 
 
 3. hiergue, or yergue. 3. hierguen, or yerguen. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 3. hirguio, or irguio. 3. hirguieron, or irguieron. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1 . hirgamos, or irgamos* 
 
 2. hiergue, or yergue. 
 
 3. hierga, or yerga. 3. hiergan, or yergan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 1. hierg'a, or yerga. 1. hirgamos, or irgamos. 
 
 2. hiergas, or yergas. 2. hirgais, or Irgais. 
 
 3. hierga, or yerga. 3. hiergan, or yergan. 
 
 H 
 
146 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 Singula?'. 
 
 .. r hirguiera, or hirguiese. 
 
 * t irguiera, or irquiese. 
 
 9 f hirquieras, or hirguieses. 
 
 * (Jrguieras, or irguieses. 
 hirguiera, or hirguiese. 
 
 ■{! 
 
 Plural. 
 
 , j hirguieramos, or hirguiesemos. 
 
 * ^ irguieramos, or irguiesemos. 
 q f bifguieraisj or hirguieseis. 
 
 J * \ irguierais, or irguieseis. 
 « X hirguieran, or hirguiesen. 
 C irguieran, or irguiesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 -1. hirguiere, or irguiere. 
 
 2. hirguieres, or irguieres. 
 
 3. hirguiere, or irguiere. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. hirguieremos, or irguieremos. 
 
 2. hirguiereis, or irguiereis. 
 
 3. hirguieren, or irguieren. 
 
 Participle. 
 Present. 
 Hirguiendo, or irguiendo. 
 
 The other icnses } 8jc. are regular. 
 

 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 
 Judical iv e Mood. 
 
 Singular* 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural 
 
 1. voy. 
 
 2. vas. 
 
 3. va. 
 
 1. vamps. 
 
 2. vais. 
 
 3. van. 
 
 
 Preterim perfect, 
 
 1. iba. 
 
 2. ibas. 
 
 3. iba. 
 
 1. ibamos. 
 
 2. ibais. 
 
 3. iban. 
 
 
 First Preterperfeet. 
 
 1. fui. 
 
 2. fuiste. 
 
 3. fue. 
 
 1. faimos. 
 
 2. fuisteis. 
 
 3. fueron. 
 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. ire. 
 
 2. Iras. 
 
 3. ira. 
 
 1. iremos. 
 
 2. ireis. 
 
 3. iran. 
 
 
 Imp era tiv e Mo o d. 
 
 2. ve. 
 
 3. vaya. 
 
 1. vavamos. 
 
 2. id.* 
 
 3. vayan. 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 1. vaya. 
 
 2. vayas. 
 
 3. vaya. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. vayamos. 
 
 2. vayais. 
 
 3. vayan. 
 
 151 
 
 First Preterimperfect, 
 
 1. fuere, or fuese. 1. fueramos, or fuesemos. 
 
 2. fueras, or fueses, 2. fuerais, or fueseis. 
 
 3. fuera, or fuese. 3. fueran. or fuesen. 
 
152 
 
 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 
 Singula 
 
 r. Plural. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 iria. 
 
 irias. 
 
 iria. 
 
 1. iriamos. 
 
 2. iriais. 
 
 3. irian. 
 
 3. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 fueres. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 L fueremos 
 
 2. fuereis. 
 
 3. fueren. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 Yendo. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Ido. 
 
 Jugar, to play. See Acordar. 
 
 To preserve the sound of the Infinitive, this verb 
 always admits u between the g and e ; as juegue, 
 juegues, juegue, &c. But this constitutes no ir- 
 regularity. See " Changes in Certain Regular 
 Verbs." 
 Jan tar, to join, has an irregular perfect participle 
 junto, and a regular one, juntado. 
 
 L. 
 
 Lucir, to shine. See Abastecer, and the note to Desluciiv 
 
 LL. 
 
 Llover, to rain. See Defective Verbs. 
 
 The perfect participle of this verb is regular 9 
 Uovido. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 149 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. haga. 1. hagamos. 
 
 2. hagas. 2. hagais. 
 
 3. haga. 3. hagan. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 /hiciera, ( hicieramos, 
 
 or l.< or 
 Lhieiese. ( hiciesemos. 
 
 rhicieras, l hicerais, 
 
 2 J or 2.1 or 
 Ijiicieses. C hicieseis. 
 
 r hiciera, r hicieran, 
 
 3.< or 3.^ or 
 Lhieiese. Lhiciesen. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. haria. 1. hariamos. 
 
 2. harias. 2. hariais. 
 
 3. haria. 3. harian. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. hiciere. 1. hicieremos. 
 
 2. hicieres. 2. hiciereis. 
 
 3. hiciere. 3. hicieran. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Hecho. 
 
 37*e other parts of this verb are regular. 
 
 Hartar, to satiate, is regular except in its perfect partici- 
 ple harto ; but hartado is also used. 
 Heder, to stink. See Tender. 
 
150 • ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Helar, to freeze. See Acertar. 
 
 Hender, to cleave. See Tender. 
 
 Herir, to wound. See Adherir. 
 
 Herrar, to shoe horses. See Acertar, 
 
 Hervir, io boil. See Adherir. 
 
 Holgar, to repose. ) ., » 3 
 ti if \ ' i 7 VSee Acerdar. 
 
 Hollar, to trample. J 
 
 Humedecer, to moisten. See Abastecer. 
 
 Im pedir, to impede. See Pedir. 
 
 Imponer, to impose. See Poner. 
 
 Imprimir, to print, is irregular in Us perfect participle 
 
 only, impreso. 
 Incluir, to include, has two participles, mcluso, irregular, 
 
 and incluido, regular. 
 Incurrir, to incur, has also two perfect participles, 
 
 incurso, irregular, and incurrido ; regular. 
 Indisponer, to indispose. See Poner. 
 Inducir, to induce. See Conducir. 
 Inferir, io infer. See Adherir. 
 Infernar, to curse. See Acertar. 
 Insertar, to insert, is irregular in its perfect participle 
 
 only, inserto ; it has also insertado. 
 Intervenir, to intervene. See Venir. 
 Introducir, to introduce. See Conducir. 
 Invernar, to winter. See Acertar. 
 Invertir, to invert. See Adherir. 
 
 This verb has also an irregular participle, in- 
 verso ; and a regular one, invertido. 
 Investir, to invest. See Pedir. 
 Injerir, to graft. See Adherir. 
 
 This verb has tivo participles perfect, injerido, 
 regular ; and injerto, irregular. 
 Ir, to go. 
 
 This verb is one of the most irregular in the 
 Spanish language. Its conjugation in the simple 
 tenses will therefore be given entire* 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 155 
 
 Pedir, to demands 
 
 This verb changes the radical e into i in the fol- 
 lowing tenses and persons : 
 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 pido. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 pides. 
 
 
 3, 
 
 pide. 
 
 3. piden. 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 a 
 
 pidio. 
 
 3. pidieron. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. pidamos. 
 
 0, 
 
 pide. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 pida. 
 
 3. pidan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 1. 
 
 pida. 
 
 1. pidamos. 
 
 2. 
 
 pidas. 
 
 2. pi dais. 
 
 % 
 
 pida. 
 
 3. pidan. 
 
 
 First Preterimperfect 
 
 
 rpidiera, 
 
 rpidieramos 
 
 I. 
 
 1 .°r 
 
 l.< or 
 
 
 Lpidiese. 
 
 Lpidiesemos, 
 
 
 f pidieras, 
 
 f pidierais. 
 
 2, 
 
 < or 
 
 % \ or 
 
 
 Lpidieses. 
 
 \ pidieseis. 
 
 
 f pidiera, 
 
 rpidieran, 
 
 3, 
 
 < or 
 
 3. J or 
 
 
 Lpidiese. 
 
 Lpidiesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 i. 
 
 pidiere. 
 
 1. pidieremos. 
 
 2. 
 
 pi die res. 
 
 2. pidiereis. 
 
 3. 
 
 pidiere. 
 
 3. pidieren. 
 
156 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 Pidiendo. 
 
 All the oilier parts are regular. 
 
 Pegar, to pitch. 1 g . . 
 
 Pensar, CUiri. J *** Acertar ' 
 
 Perder, /o lose. See Tender. 
 
 Perecer, to perish. See Abastecer. 
 
 Perfeccionar, to perfect, has two participles, perfect*) 
 
 and perfeccionado. 
 Perniquebrar, to break legs. See Acertar. 
 Perseguir, to pursue. See Pedir and Seguir. 
 Pertenecer, to pertain. See Abastecer. 
 Perverter, to pervert. See Adherir. 
 Plegar, to fold. See Acertar. 
 Poblar, to people. See Acordar. 
 Poder,* to be able : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 1. puedo. 
 
 2. puedes. 
 
 3. puede. 3. pueden. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. pude. 1. pudimos, 
 
 2. pudiste. 2. pudisteis. 
 
 3. pudo. 3. pudieron. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 3. podre. 1. podremos. 
 
 2. podras. 2. podreis. 
 
 3. podra. 3. podran. 
 
 * Poder cannot from its very nature admit an Imperative. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 153 
 
 M. 
 
 f Magrecer, to pine. See Abastecer. 
 
 Maldecir, to curse. See Bendecir. 
 
 Manifestar, to manifest. See Acertar. 
 
 Mantener, to maintain. See Tener. 
 
 Marchitar, to fade, has two participles, marchito and 
 
 marcliitado. 
 Medir, to measure. See Pedir. 
 Mentar, to mention. See Acertar, 
 Mentir, to lie. See Adherir. 
 Merecer, to merit. See Abastecer. 
 Merendar, to take an afternoon's repast. See Acertar. 
 Mohecerse, to grow mouldy. See Abastecer. ^ 
 
 Moler, to grind. See Absolver. 
 
 The perfect participle of this verb is regular, 
 molido. 
 Morder, to bite. See Absolver. 
 Morir, to die, is conjugated like Dormir, except that its 
 
 participle perfect is irregular, muertc 
 Mostrar, to show. See Acordar. 
 Mover, to move. See Absolver. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nacer, to be born. See Abastecer. 
 Negar, to deny. See Acertar. 
 Negrecer, to grow black. See Abastecer, 
 Neyar, to snow. See Defective Verbs. 
 
 O. 
 
 Obedecer, to obeu. 1 n K , 
 
 rvu™ ,™ \, * / 7 J- See Abastecer. 
 
 Obscurecer, to darken, j 
 
 Obtener, to obtain. See Tener. 
 
 Ofrecer, to offer. See Abastecer. 
 
 Oir, to hear. 
 
 This verb admits g after i in the t following tenses 
 
 and persons ; 
 
 h 5 
 
154 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 It oigo. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. oigamos. 
 
 3. oiga. S. oigan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 !•' °iga. 1. oigamos. 
 
 2. oigas. 2. oigais. 
 
 3. oiga. 3. oigan. 
 
 T%e other parts of this verb are regular.* 
 
 Oler, fo smell. See Absolver. 
 
 The irregular persons of this verb begin uoith h, as 
 huelo, hueles, huele, &c. 
 Omitir, to omit, is irregular in its perfect participle only, 
 
 omiso : it has also omitido; 
 Opener, to oppose. See Poner. 
 
 Oprinair, to oppress, is irregular in its perfect participle 
 only, opreso : it has also oprimido. 
 
 Pacer, to graze. *\ 
 
 Padecer, to suffer. [ c * , . 
 
 t> 4 >See libastecer. 
 
 Parecer, to seem. 
 
 Parecerse, to resemble 
 
 ./ 
 
 * The Participle present is written oisndo, or oyendo, but the latter 
 form more frequently. And indeed many writers substitute y for i 
 in all the tenses of oir ; as oygo, oygamos, &c. In the orthography 
 of this and of all other verbs, we have fallowed the late decisions of 
 the Academy. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 159 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. pondria. 1. pondriamos. 
 
 2. pondrias. 2. pondriais, 
 
 3. pondria. 3. pondrian. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. pusiere. 1. pusieremos. 
 
 2. pusieres. 2. pusiereis. 
 
 3. pusiere. 3. pusieren. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Puesto. 
 
 T%£ other persons, fyc. are regular. 
 
 Predecir, to predict. See Decir. 
 
 Preferir, to prefer. See Adherir. 
 
 Prender, to seize, has tvco participles, preso, irregular, 
 and prendido, regular. 
 
 Prep oner, to place before. See Poner. 
 
 Prescribir, to prescribe, is irregular in its perfect partici- 
 ple only, prescrito : it has also prescribido. 
 
 Presenth.% to perceive beforehand. See Adherir. 
 
 Pre&uponer, to presuppose. See Poner. 
 
 Prevalecer, to prevail. See Abastecer. 
 
 Prevenir, to prevent. See Venir. 
 
 Prever, to foresee. See Ver. 
 
 Probar, to prove. See Acordar. 
 
 Producir, to produce. See Conducir. 
 
 Profer, to utter. See Adherir. 
 
 Prornover, to move. See Absolver. 
 
 Proponer, to propose. See Poner. 
 
 Proscribir, to proscribe, is irregular in its perfect parti* 
 ciple only, proscrito. 
 
 Proseguir, to prosecute. See Pedir and Seguir. 
 
160 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Proveer, to provide, is irregular in its perfect parti- 
 ciple only, provisto : it has also proveido, 
 regular. 
 
 Provenir, to originate. See Venir. 
 
 Quebrar, to break. See Acer tar. 
 Querer, to tvish or to love. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 quiero. 
 
 2. quieres. 
 
 3. quiere. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3. quieren. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. quise. I. quisimos, 
 
 2. quisiste. 2. quisisteis. 
 
 3. quiso. 3. quisieron. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. querre. 
 
 2. querras. 
 
 3. querra. 
 
 2. quiere. 
 
 3. quiera. 
 
 1. querremos. 
 
 2. querreis. 
 
 3. querran. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 3. quieran. 
 
 1. quiera. 
 
 2. qui eras. 
 
 3. quiera- 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 quierarr. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 157 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. pueda. 
 
 2. puedas. 
 
 3. pueda. 3. puedan. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 fpudiera, rpudieramos, 
 
 I.< or 1.1 or 
 
 Lpudiese. Lpudiesemos. 
 
 fpudieras, rpudierais, 
 
 2.1 or 2.1 or 
 
 Lpudieses. tpudieseis. 
 
 rpudiera, rpudieran, 
 
 3 J or 3.1 or 
 
 Lpudiese. Lpudiesen. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. podria. 1. podriamos. 
 
 2. podrias. 2. podriais. 
 
 3. podria. 3. podrian. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. pudiere. J. pudieremos. 
 
 % pudieres. 2. pudiereis. 
 
 3. pudiere. 3. pudiefen. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present. 
 Pudiendo. 
 
 The other parts are regular. 
 
$ 
 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 >NEB 
 
 i, to place. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 - 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 pongo. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 puse. 
 
 pusiste. 
 
 puso. 
 
 1. pusimos. 
 
 2. pusisteis. 
 
 3. pusieron. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 pondre. 
 pond r as. 
 pondra. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. pondremos. 
 
 2. pondreis. 
 
 3. pondran. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 pon. 
 ponga. 
 
 1. pongamos. 
 3. pongan. 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 S. 
 
 ponga. 
 
 pongas. 
 
 ponga. 
 
 Present. / 
 
 1. pongamos. 
 
 2. pongais. 
 
 3. pongan. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 
 rpusiera, 
 
 rpusieramos, 
 
 IU or l.J or 
 
 Lpusiese Lpusiesemos. 
 
 r pusieras, r pusierais, 
 
 2.< or 2.1 or 
 
 Lpusieses. tpusieseis. 
 
 rpusiera, f pusieran, 
 
 3J 'or 3.4 or 
 
 L pusiese. (, pusiesen. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 163 
 
 Reverdecer, to groiv again. See Abastecer. 
 
 Reverter, to return. See Tender. 
 
 Revestir, to re-invest. See Pedir. 
 
 Re volar, to fly again. ") c A , 
 
 5 j j b \. & ee Acordar. 
 
 Kevolcarse, to tvauow. j 
 
 Revolver, to revolve. See Absolver. 
 
 Rodar, to roll. 1 K j 
 t»„ . > See Acordar. 
 
 Kogar, to pray. J 
 
 Romper, to break, is irregular in its perfect participle 
 only, roto : it has also rompido. 
 
 Saber, to Jcnotv, 
 
 S. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singtdar. Plural. 
 
 1. se. 
 
 First Preterperfect. 
 i« supe. 1. supimos. 
 
 2. supiste. 2. supisteis. 
 
 3. supo. 3. supieron. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 I- sabre. 1. sabremos. 
 
 2. sabras. 2. sabreis. 
 
 3. sabra. 3. sabran. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. sepamos. 
 
 S. sepa. 3. S epan. 
 
 S u bju nctive Mo o d. 
 
 Present. 
 *• se P&« 1. sepamos. 
 
 2. sepas. 2. sepais. 
 
 3* se P a - 3. sepan. 
 
162 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Reforzar, to re-inforce. See Acordar. 
 
 Regar, to mater. See Acertar. 
 
 Regir, to rule. See Pedir. 
 
 Regoldar, to belch. See Acordar. 
 
 Rehacer, to do again. See Hacer. 
 
 Reir, to laugh. See Pedir. 
 
 Relucir, to shine. See Abastecer, and the note to 
 
 Deslucir. 
 
 Remanecer, to remain. See Abastecer. 
 
 Remendar, to mend. See Acertar. 
 
 Remorder, to bitefre quently. 1 c », j 
 
 Remover, to remove. f 
 
 Renacer, to be reproduced. See Abastecer. 
 
 Rendir, to render. 7 c p r 
 
 Rendirse, to surrender one's-self. § 
 
 Renegar, to abjure. See Acertar. 
 
 Renovar, to renetv. See Acordar. 
 
 Renir, to quarrel. 1 c -n -,. 
 D . • s . > See Pedir. 
 
 Repetir, to repeat. J 
 
 Replegar, to fall bach. See Acertar. 
 
 Reponer, to replace. See Poner. 
 
 Reprobar, to reprove. See Acordar. 
 
 Reproducer, to reproduce. See Conducir. 
 
 Requebrar, to cajole. See Acertar. 
 
 Requerir, to require 1 g Mhev ^ 
 
 Resentirse, to resent, j 
 
 Rescontar, to balance accounts. 1 g Acordar 
 
 Resollar, to breathe. 5 
 
 Resolver, to resolve. See Absolver. 
 
 Resonar, to resound. See Acordar. 
 
 Restablecer, to re-establish. See Abastecer. 
 
 Retemblar, to vibrate. See Acertar. 
 
 Retenir, to retain. See Tenir. 
 
 Re tent ar, to threaten a relapse. See Acertar. 
 
 Retenir, to dye again. See Pedir. 
 
 Retorcer, to twist. See Cocer. 
 
 Retraer, to retract. "\ 
 
 Retraerse, to take refuge. >See Traer. 
 
 Retrotraer, to bring bach. J 
 
 Reventar, to burst. See Acertar. 
 
 Rever, to revievo. See Ver. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 167 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 1. traigamos, 
 
 
 3. traiga, 
 
 
 3. traigan. 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 1. traiga. 
 
 
 1. traigamos, 
 
 
 2. traigas. 
 
 
 2. traigais. 
 
 
 3. traiga. 
 
 
 3. traigan. 
 
 
 
 First 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 
 r trajera, 
 
 
 1 trajerarnos, 
 
 1.1 
 
 or 
 
 
 1 . < or 
 
 
 Ltrajese. 
 
 
 { trajesemos. 
 
 
 r trajeras, 
 
 
 f trajerais, 
 
 2.< 
 
 ' or 
 
 
 2 J or 
 
 
 ttrajeses. 
 
 
 Ltrajeseis. 
 
 i 
 
 r trajera, 
 
 
 t trajeran, 
 
 3. 
 
 I or 
 
 * 
 
 3J or 
 
 
 Ltrajese. 
 
 
 Ltrajesen. 
 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. trajere. 1. trajeremos. 
 
 2. trajeres. 2. trajereis. 
 
 3. trajere. 3. trajeren. 
 
 The oilier parts of the verb are regidar, 
 
 Transcender, to transcend. l~ T , 
 
 Trascender, to discover. J bee m * aeT - 
 
 Trascolar, to pierce. 1 c . 1 
 rr 3 ± j? ± l^otfe Acordar. 
 
 Trascordarse, to forget, j 
 
 Trasegar, to decant. See Acertar. 
 
 Trasonar, to dream. See Acordar. 
 
 Trasponer, to transpose. See Poner. 
 
 Trocar, to barter. See Acordar. 
 
 This verb changes c into qu before e, but this is 
 
 no irregularity, See " Changes in Certain Regular 
 
 Verbs." 
 
168 etymology^ 
 
 Tronar, to thunder. See Defective Verbs, 
 Tropezar, to stumble. See Acertar. 
 
 V. 
 
 Valer, to be worth. See Salir/ 
 
 Here the learner tvill again observe that though 
 salir, and valer, have the same irregularities, they 
 are of different conjugations, and consequently re~ 
 quire a corresponding difference of inflexion. The 
 second person singular of the Imperative of valer, 
 is vale, but o/'salir, sal. 
 
 Venir, to come. 
 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 vengo. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 vienes. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 viene. 
 
 3. vienen. 
 First Preterperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 vine. 
 
 1. vinimos. 
 
 2. 
 
 viniste. 
 
 2. vinisteis. 
 
 3. 
 
 vino. 
 
 3. vinieron. 
 Future Imperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 vendre. 
 
 1. vendremos 
 
 2. 
 
 vendras. 
 
 2. vendreis. 
 
 3. 
 
 vendra. 
 
 3. vendran. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 1. vengamos. 
 
 2. 
 
 ven. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 venga. 
 
 3. vengan. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 1. 
 
 venga. 
 
 1. vengamos. 
 
 2. 
 
 ven gas. 
 
 2. vengais. 
 
 3. 
 
 venga. 
 
 3. vengan. 
 

 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3, 
 
 saiga. 1. salgamos. 
 saigas. 2. salgais. 
 saiga. 3. salgan. 
 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3, 
 
 saldria. 1. saldriamos 
 saldrias. 2. saldriais. 
 saldria. 3. saldrian. 
 
 165 
 
 The other parts of this verb are regularly formed. 
 
 Satisfacer, to satisfy. See Hacer. 
 
 The second person singular of the Imperative 
 is satisfaz, or satisface. 
 
 Seducir, to seduce. See Conducir. 
 Segar, to reap. See Acertar. 
 Seguir, to follow. See Pedir. 
 
 This verb and its compounds , lose the u bejorc a 
 or o. Thus we say, sigo, (not siguo) I follow ; 
 siga, [not sigua) let him follow, fyc. 
 
 | em t brar '^ f)s ee Acertar. 
 bentarse, to sit. J 
 
 Sentir, to feel. See Adherir. 
 
 Serrar, to saw. See Acertar. 
 
 Ser, to be. See its conjugation. 
 
 Servir, to serve. See Pedir. 
 
 Sobreponer. to place over. See Poner. 
 
 Sobresalir, to surpass. See Salir. 
 
 Sobrevenir to happen. See Poner. 
 
 Soldar, to solder. 1 . , 
 
 Soltar, to release. J SeeAcordar - 
 
 fSolver, to solve. See Absolver. 
 
 Sonar, to sound. | «,. . • , _ 
 
 Sonar, to dream. f* ee Ac01dar - 
 
 Sonreirse, to smile. See Pedir. 
 
166 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Sosegar, to repose. 1 s Acertar# 
 
 Sosegarse, to grow tranquil, j 
 
 Sostener, to sustain. See Tener. 
 
 Soterrar, to bury. See Acertar. 
 
 Substraer, to subtract. See Traer. 
 
 Sugerir, to suggest. See Adherir. 
 
 Suponer, to suppose. See Poner. 
 
 Suprimir, to suppress, is irregular in its perfect parti- 
 ciple only, supreso ; it has also one re* 
 gularly formed \ suprimido. 
 
 T. 
 
 Temblar, to tremble. See Acertar. 
 Tender, to spread out. 
 
 This verb and its compounds admit i before the 
 radical e in the same tenses and persons as acertar ; 
 but as tender and acertar are of different conjuga- 
 tions^ the learner will observe that they require a 
 corresponding difference of termination. Thus in 
 the Indicative Present, acierto, aciertas, acierta, 
 tiendo, tiendes, tiende, &c. 
 
 Tener, to have. See its conjugation. 
 Tenir, to dye. See Pedir. 
 Tentar, to attempt. See Acertar. 
 Torcer, to twist. See Cocer. 
 Tostar, to toast. See Acordar. 
 Traducir, to translate. See Conducir. 
 
 Traer, to bring. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. traigo. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. traje (traxe). I. trajimos. 
 
 2. trajiste. 2. trajisteis. 
 
 3. trajd. 3. trajeron. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 169 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 I vinieramos, 
 
 lm \ or 
 
 { viniesemos. 
 
 rvinierais. 
 2.1 or 
 
 Lvinieseis. 
 
 rvimeran, 
 3.1 or 
 
 Lviniesen, 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. vendria. 1. vendriamos. 
 
 2. vendrias. 2. vendriais. 
 
 3. vendria. 3. vendrian. 
 
 fviniera, 
 lJ or 
 
 Lviniese. 
 r vinieras, 
 lJ or 
 
 l.vinieses, 
 fviniera, 
 3 J or 
 
 Lviniese. 
 
 T. viniere. 
 
 2. vinieres. 
 
 3. viniere. 
 
 Future Imperfect 
 
 1 
 2 
 9. 
 
 vinieremos. 
 viniereis. 
 
 vinieren. 
 
 Participle. 
 Present. 
 Viniendo. 
 The other parts of the verb are regularly fm 
 Ver,* to see. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present, 
 
 1. veo. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 veia, or via. 
 veias, or vias 
 veia, or via. 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 1. veiamos; or viamosi 
 
 2. veiais, or viais. 
 
 3. veian, or vian. 
 
 *The irregularity of ^ is very slight: it consist* only fa, v 
 taming the e before sorne of the persons and tense?, 
 
170 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 1. veamos. 
 
 3- vea. S. vean. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 !• vea. l. veamos. 
 
 2. veas. 2. veais. 
 
 3. vea. 3. vean. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Visto. 
 
 ■T&£ other parts of the verb are regular* 
 
 Verter, to shed. See Tender. 
 Vestir, to clothe. See Pedir. 
 
 \°o\czr!°t{iverset. } See Acordar - 
 
 Volver, to return . ~) . , , 
 xr*a~~J*~ ^ 7 > r See Absolver. 
 V olverse, to become. J 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zaherir, to upbraid. See Adherir. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.* 
 
 (1.) I hate. Thou absolvest. I guess. Thou 
 
 aborrecer absolver acertar 
 
 approvest. I breakfast. Thou warnest. He increases, 
 
 aprobar ahnorzar advertir acreceniar 
 
 * Though in many of the following verbs few of the tenses, &x\ are 
 irregular, yet the exercise will be extended to them all. This mode 
 will oblige the learner to refer constantly to the preceding conjuga- 
 tions, to discover which tenses are irregular, and whieh are not so ; 
 and it will show him in what the irregularity of each verb consists. 
 And as the greater number of the irregular participles are not used in 
 forming the compound tenses, he will do well before he proceeds any 
 farther, to read carefully over the section on Participles. And 
 \*hen the verb ends m car, gar, &c. let him refer to "Changes in 
 Certain Re^dar Verbs?' 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 171 
 
 He acquires. He agrees. We go. We appear. 
 
 adquerir acordar ir aparecer 
 
 You walk. They wager. They hire. They assent. 
 
 andar apostar arrendar aseniir 
 
 I move. Thou contendest. He blesses. I sift. Thou 
 
 mover competir bendecir cerner 
 
 fannest. He collects. We awake. You discolour. 
 event ar colegir despertar destenir 
 
 They disobey. They unroll. (2.) I was drying. 
 
 desobedecer desenvoher enxugar 
 
 Thou wast erring. He was dismissing. We were 
 
 errar despedir 
 
 disposing. You were assailing. They were entertaining. 
 disponer embestir entreiener 
 
 I was impoverishing. Thou wast lighting. He was 
 
 emprobecer encendar 
 
 burying. We were hearing. You were laughing. 
 enterrjar oir reir 
 
 They were ruling. (3.) I retracted. Thou didst 
 
 regir retraer 
 
 breathe. He did twist. We came. You saw. They 
 resollar torcer venir ver 
 
 reproved. I resolved. Thou broughtest. He 
 •reprobar resolver truer 
 
 conducted. We proposed. You introduced. They 
 conducir proponer introducir 
 
 fryed. (4.) I have played. Thou hast seen. He has 
 Jreir jugar 
 
 proscribed. We have cursed. You have oppressed, 
 proscribir maldecir oprimir 
 
 They have concealed.— (5.) I had elected. Thou 
 
 encubrir elegir 
 
 hadst dissolved. He had undone. We had predicted. 
 
 disolver deshacer predecir 
 
 You had perfected. They had placed before. — -(6.) 
 
 perfeccionar preponer 
 
 I shall be able. Thou wilt place. He will go. We 
 
 poder poner 
 
 shall walk. You will promote. They will scrub. I 
 andar promover fregar 
 
 i2 
 
172 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 shall smart. Thou wilt presuppose. He will lose. 
 
 escocer presuponer perder 
 
 We shall go out. You will sustain. They will make. 
 
 salir sostener hacer 
 
 (7.) I shall have provided. Thou wilt have 
 
 proveer 
 grafted. He will have inserted. We shall have joined. 
 injerir insertar juntar 
 
 "You will have exposed. They will have fixed. (8.) 
 
 exponer fij ar 
 
 Have thou. Let him suffer. Let him expose. 
 iener padecer exponer 
 
 Satisfy thou. Let him prevail. Stain thou. Let him 
 satisfacer prevalecer tenir 
 
 recommend. Let him flay. Let him invest. Let us 
 encomendar desollar envestir 
 
 untwist. Let us wrap. Let us enrich. Let them 
 destorcer envolver enriquecer 
 
 oppose. Let them boil. Let them manifest. — — (9.) 
 oponer hervir manifestar 
 
 That I may utter. Though thoumayst play. Though 
 
 prqferir aunque jugar 
 
 he may prevent. That we may prevail. Though you 
 
 prevenir prevalecer 
 
 produce. Though they fold. Though I may think. 
 producir plegar pensar 
 
 Though thou mayst invert. Though he may prosecute. 
 invertir proseguir 
 
 T hw e may come. Though you may translate. That 
 venir tradacir 
 
 they may shed. (10.) That I might go out. Though he 
 
 verier salir 
 
 should return. Though he retained. That we might bring 
 volver retener retro- 
 
 back- That you might surpass. That they might cajole. 
 traer sobresalir requebrar 
 
 Though I saw. Though thou didst repeat. Though 
 
 rer repetir 
 
 he replaced. That we should transpose. That you 
 reponer trasponer 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 173 
 
 might refer. That they might demand. (11.) I 
 
 referir pedi'r 
 
 would have. Thou wouldst rest. He would obtain. 
 tener holgar obtener 
 
 We should make again. You would yield. They would 
 
 rehacer rendir 
 
 bite. I would prevent. Thou wouldst smell. He would 
 morder oler 
 
 entertain. We would go out. You would obtain. They 
 entretener 
 
 would place. (12.) Though I have discovered. That 
 
 poner descubrir 
 
 thou mayst have deposed. Though he has concluded. 
 
 deponer concluir 
 
 That we may have foreseen. Though you have 
 antever 
 
 written. Thattheymay have preferred. (13.) Though 
 
 escribir. anteponer 
 
 I had foreseen. Though thou mightst have confounded. 
 
 confundir 
 That he should have retracted. Though we had said. 
 desdecirse decir 
 
 That you might have compelled. Though they should 
 compel er 
 
 have blessed. (14.) I would have cursed. Thou 
 
 bendecir maldecir 
 
 wouldst have broken. He would have expressed. We 
 
 romper expresar 
 
 should have converted. You would have excluded* 
 converter excluir 
 
 They would have joined. (15.) If I should review. 
 
 Juntar rever 
 
 If thou shouldst require. If he should recline. If we 
 
 requerir recostar 
 
 should remove. If you should abjure. If they should 
 
 remover renegar 
 
 barter. If I should overset. If thou shouldst (become 
 trocar volcar 
 
 tranquil). If he should subtract. If we should twist. 
 sosegarse substraer forcer 
 
174< ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 If you should indispose. If they should unfold. 
 
 indisponer desplegar 
 
 (16.) If I should have satisfied. If thou shouldst have 
 
 satisfacer 
 returned. If he should have suppressed. If we should 
 volver suprimir 
 
 have seized. If you should have satiated. If they 
 prouder hartar 
 
 should have died. (17.) To have excluded. To 
 
 morir excluir 
 
 have manifested. To have released. To have 
 
 manifest ar soltar 
 
 extinguished. Coming. Cursing. Supposing. 
 extinguir venir suponer 
 
 Spreading out. Guessing. Having resolved. Having 
 tender aceriar resolver 
 
 fryed. Having provided. 
 jfreir proveer 
 
 VERBS DEFECTIVE. 
 
 Of these, the following, which are conjugated in the 
 third person singular only, are generally, though im- 
 properly, termed Impersonal. 
 
 Amanecer, to grotv light, or to damn.* 
 
 Indicative. Present, amanece, it grows light, &c. 
 Freterimp. amanecia. 
 First Preierp. amanecio. 
 Second Preterp. ha amanecido. 
 Pretetphip. hubo, or habia amanecido. 
 FuL Imp. amanecera. 
 Fat. Per. hafara amanecido. 
 
 * Amanecer and anochecer are sometimes employed with all the 
 persons ; and in these cases they may be considered as denoting the 
 situation of their subject at dawn or at evening : Amanecimos en Lon- 
 dres ; we were in London at break of day : Anochecimos en el lugar ; 
 Night closed upon us in the village. The former verb may some- 
 times be translated to go to sleep, to lie down ; and the latter by to 
 awake, to rise zip. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 175 
 
 Imperative. amanezca. 
 
 Subjunct. Present, amanezca. 
 
 First Preterimp. amaneciera, or amaneciese. 
 Second Preterimp. amaneceria. 
 Preterp. hay a amanecido. 
 First Preterplup. hubiera^ 
 
 or >amanecido. 
 hubiese, J 
 Second Preterplup. habria amanecido* 
 Fat. Imp. amaneciere. 
 Fut. Per, hubiere amanecido. 
 Infinitive. Present, amanecer. 
 
 Perfect, haber amanecido. 
 Participles. Present, amaneciendo. 
 Perfect, amanecido. 
 Com. Per. habiendo amanecido. 
 
 Anochecer, to grovo dark, is similarly conjugated. 
 
 Nevar, to snow. 
 
 Indicative. Present, nieva, it snotvs. 
 
 Preterimp. nevaba. 
 
 First Preterp. nevo. 
 
 Second Preterp. ha nevado. 
 
 Preterplup. hubo, or habia nevado. 
 
 Fut. Imp. nevara. 
 
 FuU Per. habra nevado* 
 Imperative. nieve. 
 
 Subjunctive. Present, nieve. 
 
 First Preterimp. nevara, or nevase. 
 
 Second Preterimp. nevaria, 
 
 Preterper. haya nevado. 
 
 First Preterplup. hubiera,"* 
 
 or > nevado. 
 hubiese. J 
 
 Second Preterplup. habria nevado. 
 
 Fut. Imp. nevare. 
 
 Fut. Per. hubiere nevado. 
 Infinitive. Present, nevar. 
 
 Perfect, haber nevado. 
 
176 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Participles. Present, nevando. 
 Perfect, nevado. 
 Comp. Per. habiendo nevado. 
 
 Helar, to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner. 
 Tkonar, to thunder. 
 
 Indicative. Present, trueno, it thunders, 
 
 Preterimp. tronaba. 
 
 First Preterp. trono. 
 
 Second Preterp. ha tronado. 
 
 Preterplup. hubo, or habia tronado* 
 
 Fid. Imp. tronara. 
 
 Fut. Per. habra tronado. 
 Imperative. truene. 
 
 Subjunctive. Present, truene. 
 
 First Preterimp. tronara, or tronase. 
 
 Second Preterimp. tronaria. 
 
 Preierper. haya tronado. 
 
 First Preterplup. hubiera, ) 
 
 or Mronado> 
 hubiese, j 
 
 Second Preterplup. habria tronado. 
 
 Fut. Imp. tronare. 
 
 Fut. Per. hubiere tronado. 
 Infinitive. Present, tronar. 
 
 Perfect, haber tronado. 
 Participles. Present, tronando. 
 
 Perfect, tronado. 
 
 Comp. Per. habiendo tronado. 
 
 Llover, to rain, is conjugated in the same manner, 
 but as it is of a different conjugation, its inflexions are 
 also different. See Absoher. 
 
 Escarchar, to freeze ; ghaxizar, to hail ; lloviz- 
 nar, to mizzle ; and relampaguear, to lighten; are 
 all regular, and conjugated like the third person sin- 
 gular of Amar. 
 
 Haber, when impersonal, signifies to be. 
 Indicative. Present. hay 3 there is, or there are. 
 
ETYMOLOGY, 177 
 
 Indicative. Preterimp. habia, f there was, or 
 
 First Preterper. hubo, \ there mere. 
 
 Sec. Preterper. ha habido, {fa™^* 
 
 Freterplup. hubo,"! ^^ ^ /md 
 
 habia, J 
 
 Fid- Imp. habra, there mil be. 
 
 -n j. tj ^ u > -u w i S there will have 
 Fut. Per. habra habido, -< 7 
 
 And so on throughout the verb. 
 
 Hacer, when impersonal, signifies to be. 
 
 Indicative. Present, hace, it is. 
 
 Preterimp. hacia, it was. 
 
 First Preterp. hizo, it was. 
 
 Sec. Preterp. ha hecho, it has been. 
 
 Preterplup. h ub , ^ 
 
 or > hecho, it had been. 
 habia, J 
 Fut. Imp. hara, ft will he. 
 Fut. Per. habra hecho, it mil have been. 
 
 And so on throughout the verb. 
 
 Some personal verbs are frequently conjugated im- 
 personally. 
 
 The following are employed only in the annexed 
 persons and tenses : 
 
 Placer, to please. 
 
 Indicative, Present r Sd per. sing, place^ it pleases. 
 
 Preterimp. — — placia,! ., , 7 
 
 77- . & ± i > iv pleased. 
 
 Jb irst Preterp. ■ plugo, j l 
 
 Subjunctive. Present, — pfegue, it may please. 
 
 First Preterimp. — pluguiera, 1 itmight 
 
 pluguiese, J please* 
 
 Fut. Imp. =—— - pluguiere, it should please. 
 
 The four last persons are used in these instances 
 
 only : Pleguc, pluguiera, or pluguiese a Dios ; would to 
 
 God : Si me pluguiere , if it should please me, 
 
 10 
 
i 73 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Podrir, to rot. 
 
 Imperative. Sec. Per. Plur' podrid, rot you. 
 
 Subju. Sec. Preterimp. 3d Per. Sing, podriria, { hetvould 
 
 Infinitive, Present, podrir, to rot. 
 Participle, Perfect, podrido, rotted. 
 
 Soler, to he accustomed. 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. suelo. 1. solemos. 
 
 2. sueles. 2. soleis. 
 8. suele. 3. suelen. 
 
 Preterirnperfect. 
 
 1. solia. 1. soliamos. 
 
 2. solias. 2. soliais. 
 
 3. solia. 3. solian. 
 
 Yager,, to lie. 
 
 This verb is used only in the third person singular 
 and plural of the Indicative present, yace and yacen, 
 which are generally inscribed on tomb-stones. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The Participle is a certain form of the verb,, and de- 
 rives its name from its participating not only the pro- 
 perties of a verb, but also those of an adjective. It has 
 the properties of the verb because it expresses action, 
 passion, being, &c.; and those of an adjective, because, 
 like that part of speech, it often agrees with the noun 
 to which it belongs in gender and number. 
 
 Spanish verbs have three Participles, the Present, 
 the Perfect, and the Compound Perfect. 
 
 The Present has an active signification, and ends in 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 179 
 
 ando or iendo according as the verb from which it is 
 derived is of the first, or of the second and third con* 
 jugations : amando, loving ; temiendo, fearing ; pat* 
 tiendoy dividing. 
 
 The Perfect has an active or a passive signification 
 according as it joined with haber or ser ; and if regular 
 it ends in ado for the first, and ido for the second and 
 third conjugations: amado, lived; temido, feared ; par- 
 tido, divided. 
 
 The Compound Perfect has also an active or a passive 
 signification according to the auxiliary with which it is 
 associated: Habiendo amado (active) having loved; 
 habiendo sido amado (passive) having been loved. 
 
 Some verbs, as the student will have observed, have 
 two perfect Participles, one regular, the other irregular; 
 as from maldecir are formed maldecido paid maldito. 
 The regular Participles are employed with the auxili- 
 aries to form the compound tenses of active and pas- 
 sive verbs ; but the irregulars, which are a species of 
 verbal adjectives, are never so employed. These four, 
 however, preso, proserito, provisto and roto are often 
 thus associated. Thus we say, 
 
 ha prendido, or ha preso. 
 
 ha prescribido, or ha prescrito. 
 
 ha proveido, or ha provisto. 
 
 ha rompido, or ha roto. 
 
 Roto is even more frequently compounded than the 
 regular Participle rompido ; injerio, opreso, and supreso 
 are also thus used, but not so frequently as the four 
 preceding. 
 
 Some Observations on the Participle. 
 
 The part of speech which we have denominated tl 
 present Participle, the Spanish Academy terms the 
 gerund ; and for Present Participles that learned body 
 admits another species of words which were formerly 
 indeed of that description, but which, through the 
 lapse of time, have lost the most essential of their 
 original properties. Like the gerund, they are derived 
 
^80 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 from verbs. Those of the first conjugation end in 
 ante ; as amante, loving; those of the second or third 
 in ente, as corriente, running ; oyente, hearing. But a 
 great number of Spanish verbs have dropped this class 
 of words ; and of those which are still used exceedingly 
 few preserve the regimen of their verbs. Even the 
 Academy acknowledges that many of them, for the 
 reason just stated, ought not to be considered as Par- 
 ticiples, but as a sort of verbal Adjectives, and some- 
 times of Substantives.* As Adjectives they express 
 qualities ; and as they are derived from verbs, they 
 retain some of their original properties. If those only, 
 as the Academy contends, are to be admitted as Par- 
 ticiples which preserve the regimen of their verbs, why 
 class them as a separate part of speech ? — The follow- 
 ing have certainly in many instances the nature of Par- 
 ticiples, and in those instances we have no objection to 
 call them by that name: obediente, participiante, seme-' 
 mute, fiaciente, habiante (almost obsolete) teniente when 
 joined with lugar, obstante^ perteneciente, corres- 
 pondiente* tocanie, est ante, and habitante. 
 
 The disuse then of the original Present Participle 
 has paved the way for the introduction of the gerund.f 
 CThe latter has been slowly, but securely gaining 
 ground ; and very probably it will at no very distant 
 period entirely supersede the former. As the gerund 
 therefore performs the office, it may properly admit the 
 name of Present Participle. 
 
 % " No se pueden formar participios depresente usuales en todos los 
 verbos ni tocios los que pueden formarse, se deben considerar corao 
 tales, par no conserver el regimen de sus verbos, y haber pasado a 
 ser unos adjetivos verbales, que tambien sueien usarse corao nombres 
 
 substantives." "H03- son rnuy pocos los participios de presente, 
 
 crue conservan este regimen." — Gram. Castel. 
 
 f " La misma frequencia con que per el uso han ido pasando estos 
 participios a ser ya adjetivos verbales, ya adjetivos substantivados, 
 les ba quitado verosimilmente el regimen de sus verbos : y tambien 
 el mucho uso que se bace en nuestra lengua del gerundio, que muchas 
 veces es su equivalente, y ademas es palabra mas sonora que el 
 participio, en especial, que el de la terceraconjugacion, y muchas de 
 ia segunda, en que por necesidad concurren muchas ii y ee t que son 
 letras de menos sonoridad y variaciun que las que componen los 
 vocables de los gerimdios."— Gram. Castel. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 181 
 
 Whether Participles signify time or not, has long 
 been a subject of controversy to grammarians. It is a 
 subject on which no prudent man will speak without dif- 
 fidence when he considers that it is one on which the 
 most acute have disagreed. But as the author will not 
 shrink from expressing his opinion on any point which 
 may throw light on any part of his present undertaking, 
 he ventures to submit a few brief observations on this 
 point to the reader. 
 
 Every action is necessarily progressive : it has a 
 beginning, a proceeding, and an end. Every action 
 therefore necessarily embraces a portion of time either 
 more or less extended. But Participles express action 
 as well as the verbs from which they are derived. The 
 former consequently signif}^ time as well as the latter. 
 
 On the other hand, verbs have in their simple tenses 
 a variety of inflections to denote the time of their re- 
 spective actions ; but Participles when actively used 
 have but one unvaried termination. Thus amando de- 
 notes present action, but action, present ?iotv, at some 
 time past, or at some time to come, according to the 
 time denoted by the verb with which it is connected : 
 Estoy amando, I am loving ; estaba amando, I was 
 loving; estare amando, I shall be loving. And with 
 respect to the Perfect Participle the same analogy pre- 
 vails : Soy amado, I am loved ; era amado, I was loved ; 
 sere amado, I shall be loved, &c. 
 
 From what has been said then, it appears that Par- 
 ticiples imply time absolutely, because they express 
 action, and action necessarily implies time ; but it also 
 appears that they have no variety of inflection to de- 
 note the different relations of time, and that conse- 
 quently per se they have no tenses in the strict sense of 
 the word. The time in which the action of the Parti- 
 ciple takes place, can be determined only from some 
 verb to which it is joined, or with which it is connected. 
 The Present Participle always expresses action co» 
 existent with the accompanying verb ; but the Perfect 
 is not so definite. It sometimes, as its name imports, 
 denotes ^finished action ; as la carta es escrita, the letter 
 is written ; but it often signifies progressive action,-— 
 
182 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 action begun, going on, and consequently not ended ; 
 as el hombre es amado, the man is loved. The latter 
 expression as evidently denotes that the action of loving 
 is at the present time endured by the man, as the 
 former does that the action of writing is entirely past. 
 Again, el hombre era amado, the man was loved: that 
 is, the same action was endured by the man at the time 
 denoted by the verb era — in other words, it was then 
 present. Lastly, el hombre sera amado, the man will be 
 loved — the man will endure the action of loving at 
 some future time implied in the verb sera ; the passion 
 of loving will then be present to him. 
 
 To pursue this subject further, would exceed the 
 limits which the author has prescribed to himself, and 
 would be useless to the generality of students. To 
 those who are capable of understanding such subjects, 
 what has been said may prove of some service ; it may 
 furnish matter for much reflection. 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 An Adverb is a word added to verbs, to adjectives, 
 and sometimes to other adverbs, to express the various 
 relations of place, time, order, manner, or quality, 
 quantity, comparison, affirmation, negation, &c. 
 
 1. Of place ; as aqui, acd, ahi 9 alii acidld, cerca, 
 donde, dentro,fuera, delante, detras, encima, debajo. 
 
 2. Of time; as hoy, ayer, manana,ahora, luego 3 tarde, 
 iemprano 9 presto, pronio^ siempre, nunca, jamas, ya, 
 mientras. 
 
 3. Of order; as primer -amente, idiimamente, sucesiva- 
 mente, antes, despues. 
 
 4<. Of manner, or quality; as pnideiHemente, elegante- 
 mente, const antemente, Men, mal, asi, pronto, apriesa. 
 presto, bajo, alto. 
 
 5. Of quantity ; as mucho, poco } demasiado, lasiante, 
 harto, muy, tan, tanto, quanto. 
 
 6. Of comparison ; as mas, menos, mejor, muy. 
 
 7. Of affirmation ; as si, ciertarnente, verdaderamente, 
 indubitablemente. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 183 
 
 S. Of negation ; as no, ni, nada, jamas, nunca, 
 tampoco. 
 
 Jamas and nunca have the same meaning, and they 
 may be indifferently used for each other : Jamas le 
 hablare, nunca le hablare ; I will never speak to him. 
 Jamas vi tal cosa, nunca vi tal cosa ; I never saw such a 
 thing. Sometimes nunca and jamas are joined to- 
 gether, to give more energy to the negation ; nunca 
 jamas lo hare ! never, never will I do it ! 
 
 But when jamas is joined to siempre, always, ever, it 
 ceases to have a negative meaning : it then also means 
 ever, and when thus associated it renders the affirma- 
 tion much more forcible : For siempre jamas me 
 acordare de ti 9 I shall ever, ever remember thee 1 
 
 No, no, not, is not always negative : it is often re- 
 dundant : Mejor es la virtud que no las riquezas, virtue 
 is better than riches. 
 
 Two negatives do not destroy each other in Spanish j 
 on the contrary, they deny with greater force : No he 
 visto a nadie, I have seen no one : No hay ninguno, 
 there is no one. And here it must be observed that, 
 when the double negation is used, no must precede, 
 and the other negative must follow, the verb. If any 
 other negation than no precede the verb, no is sup- 
 pressed : Jamas oi voz mas liarmoniosa, I never heard 
 a more harmonious voice : Nada quiero, I wish for 
 nothing. We may properly say, jamas ie hablare, or 
 no ie hablare jamas; I will never speak to thee: 
 nadie ie quiere, or no ie quiere nadie ; no one loves 
 thee ; but we cannot change the position of these nega- 
 tions without violating the language. No nadie ie 
 quiere, or nadie no ie quiere, would not be Spanish. 
 
 Mas, menos, and muy, have the peculiarity of quali- 
 fying nouns, as well as the other parts of speech with 
 which the adverb is usually associated: El es mas 
 hombre que su hermano, he is more a man than his 
 brother. La hija es menos muger que su madre, the 
 daughter is less a woman than her mother. Muy sig- 
 nifies much, or very much ; El es muy hombre, he is very 
 much the man. 
 
184? ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 May is also used in several idiomatical expressions : 
 Muy amigo mio, my very true friend; soy uuy de vm 9 
 or soy muy al servicio de vm ; I am very much yours, 
 or, I am very much at your service. Muy de veras, 
 very seriously ; muy de mala gana, with a very bad 
 grace ; muy de priesa, in very great haste ; muy de 
 onanana, very early. 
 
 PREPOSITION. 
 
 A Preposition is placed before nouns, pronouns, 
 and verbs in the infinitive mood, to connect them with 
 other words, and to show the relation between them. 
 
 The following are the principal Spanish prepositions: 
 a, ante, con, contra, de, desde, en, entre, hacia, hasta, 
 para, por, segun, sin, sobre, tras. These are used both 
 alone and in composition, except desde, hasta, hdcia, 
 por, and segun, which are seldom, if ever, compounded. 
 Prepositions have generally the same meaning in com- 
 position as out of it : Anteponer, to place before ; that 
 is, to prefer : Sobreponer, to place over, &c. 
 
 A thorough acquaintance with the precise import of 
 the Prepositions is a very necessary, but a very difficult 
 attainment. The following observations on those wnich 
 are most generally used, will be useful to the student. 
 
 A, to. 
 
 i 
 
 A, before a noun or verb, denotes that the action or 
 relation produced by some preceding word terminates 
 in that noun or verb : Voy a Londres, I am going to 
 London : Voy a estudiar, I am going to study. 
 
 De, of ox from, 
 
 Is often the reverse of a. Before nouns it signifies the 
 beginning of some action or relation: Vengo de Francia, 
 I come from France : El libro de Juan, the book from 
 John, — the book abstracted or brought from John, and 
 which may therefore be said to belong to him. 
 
 Before verbs in the Infinitive it sometimes preserves 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 185 
 
 the same meaning, as the infinitive has the nature of a 
 verbal noun ; but oftener still it has no meaning at all 
 when thus associated. 
 
 Ante, before, 
 
 Both in and out of composition, expresses precedency 
 of place, time, situation, or action : Anteceder, to go be- 
 fore: Ant ever, to foresee. Ante should not be con- 
 founded with anti, against, the orthography of which 
 is frequently the same. 
 
 Contra, against, 
 
 Both in and out of composition, signifies opposition or 
 contrariety ; Contradecir, to speak against : Contra las 
 leyes, against the laws. 
 
 Con, ivith, 
 
 Has the same meaning both in and out of composi- 
 tion: it denotes union in action, passion, state, or locality? 
 Concurrir, to concur (literally, to run together) : Con- 
 venir, to agree (literally, to come together) : Conde- 
 scender, to condescend (literally, to descend together). 
 All these imply other beings than the subject of the 
 verb : Convengo, I agree with whom ? The mean- 
 ing is imperfect until the ellipsis be supplied. 
 
 When con is not compounded, and is placed before 
 nouns and verbs, it denotes the means, the instrument, 
 the manner, or the exercise of any thing : Obro con pru- 
 dencia, he acted with prudence : Con estudiar se 
 alcanza la sabiduria, with studying knowledge is ob- 
 tained. Here the intelligent student will perceive that 
 though con is very differently associated, its character 
 of union is invariably preserved. 
 
 Sin, ivithout, 
 
 Is the reverse of con : it denotes absence or privation : 
 Trabaja sin comer, he labours without eating : Ire sin 
 dinero, I shall go without money. 
 
186 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 En, in, 
 
 Before nouns, implies the place, time, or state in 'which 
 any thing exists, or takes place : En la iglesia, in the 
 church : En elmes de Agusto, in the month of August: 
 En lastima, in sorrow. 
 
 Before verbs it has generally the same meaning. It 
 can only be used before verbs in the Infinitive, and 
 they, as we have before observed, have the nature of 
 nouns : Se ocupa en leer, en hablar, he is occupied in 
 reading, in speaking. 
 
 Far a, for, 
 
 Denotes, like a, the termination of an action or a re- 
 lation in the following noun or verb ; but it differs from 
 a in this point : a denotes simply the termination, and 
 nothing more; but para denotes also the end, design^ 
 or effect of some preceding action or relation : it also 
 points out the person or thing to which the action, &c. 
 Is directed. Like the other prepositions, it originally 
 applied to space, but it is now applicable to time and 
 other relations : Trabajo para descansar, I labour that 
 I may rest (I labour in order to rest). It often denotes 
 proximity : Estoy para partir, I am about to depart. 
 
 POR 
 
 Is generally equivalent to our hy : El mundo Jue 
 hecho por Dios, the world was made by God. 
 
 But when it denotes the end for which a thing is 
 done, &c. it is equivalent to ouv jbr : Lo dare por cien 
 doblones, I will sell it for a hundred doubloons : Asisto 
 por mi companero % I attend for my companion : Doy mi 
 vestido por el tayo, I exchange my dress for thine. 
 
 The other Prepositions, with the exception of those 
 which are inseparable, will present no difficulty to the 
 learner. He will bear in mind that all l^d originally a 
 relation to place, as is apparent from thir etymology 
 as well as from their use ; and he will perceive, that 
 even in their present complicated and metaphysical 
 state, their primary relation is partially preserved. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 187 
 
 The following are called Inseparable Prepositions, 
 because they are never found alone : 
 
 Ab, or abs, from, &c. ; as abstraigo, I draw from ; 
 that is, I abstract or separate. 
 
 De, des, di, dis ; from, asunder, &c. ; as distraigo, I 
 draw asunder. 
 
 E, BK,fro?n, out of, &c, ; as emanar, to flow from) 
 to emanate : expurgar, to cleanse from. 
 
 Em sometimes signifies m, but it generally strengthens 
 the meaning of the simple verb ; as empegar, 
 to pitch. 
 
 Im, in, sometimes signify in ; as imponer, to place in; 
 but generally they imply privation or nega- 
 tion ; as inhabilitar, to render unable. 
 
 Inter, among, between, &e. ; as iniervenir, to come 
 between ; that is, to intervene. 
 
 Ob, on account of, by means of, &c. ; as obtenir, to ac- 
 quire by certain means. Ob, with a verb of 
 motion, signifies against, &c. ; as opponer 
 (ofi-poner), to place against; that is, to op* 
 pose. 
 
 Per, through ; as perseguir, to follow through ; that is, 
 to pursue with some fixed purpose through 
 all opposition. 
 
 Tos, behind, after, &c. ; as posponer, to place behind,. 
 to postpone. 
 
 Pre, before ; as preocupdr, to occupy before. Some- 
 times it adds energy to the verb, and may be 
 rendered by over ; as predominar, to rule 
 over, to exercise a powerful sway. 
 
 Re, again, bach, &c. ; as recargar, to load again ; re? 
 ferir, to bear Z>ac&. 
 
 Son, under, apart, &c. ; as sonreirse, to laugh under 
 or apart ; that is, unobserved. 
 
 Sus, su, sos, before, above, &c. ; as suponer, to place 
 before; that is, to conceive before any certain 
 knowledge : suspender, to hang z/p or a&ot^ .• 
 that is, to be in a state of uncertainty: sos- 
 Jewer, to hold wp or aoot^ ; that is, to sup- 
 port : suscitar, to raise up. 
 
188 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Sub, subs, under, afterwards, &c; as subarrendar, to 
 
 hire afterwards. 
 Super, above, over ; as superabundar, to superabound, 
 
 to abound with any thing above what is 
 
 necessary. 
 Trans, through, beyond, &c. ; transporter ; to send 
 
 beyond sea. 
 
 CONJUNCTION. 
 
 A Conjunction connects sentences and words. 
 
 Both conjunctions and prepositions connect words, 
 but the latter never connect sentences, and the former 
 have no government, except over verbs in the Sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 The following are the principal conjunctions : y, e, 
 o, u, ni, que, si, porque, puesque, pueitoque } mas,pero^ 
 para que, qfin de que, &c. 
 
 E is only used before nouns beginning with i or hi; 
 and u before those with o. The former is in this 
 case substituted for y, and the latter for 6. 
 
 The Spanish Academy has classed Conjunctions into 
 copulative, disjunctive, adversative, conditional, casal, 
 continuative 9 comparative, and final ; but such a division 
 is more scholastic than useful, and is besides very 
 defective. 
 
 INTERJECTION. 
 
 An Interjection is a sudden exclamation, expressing 
 some emotion or passion of the mind, The following 
 are of this class : ah I ay ! o ! ha ! he I ola J to J 
 chito ! to ! ta ! 
 
 Interjections are scarcely deserving the name of 
 words : they are mere expressions of passion, and are 
 common to us with the brutes. 
 
189 
 
 APPENDIX TO ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 AM 
 
 deviations of Words 
 
 used in Writing. 
 
 A. A. 
 
 Autores, 
 
 authors. 
 
 A s . 
 A. C. 
 
 Arrobas, 
 
 Ano Christiano, 
 
 a weight of 2a pounds* 
 Christian year. 
 
 Adm or . 
 
 Administrador. 
 
 administrator. 
 
 Agto. 
 Am°. 
 
 Agosto, 
 Araigo, 
 
 August. 
 friend. 
 
 Ant°. 
 
 Antonio, 
 
 Anthony. 
 
 App co . 
 Art°. 
 
 Apostolico, 
 Articulo, 
 
 apostolic, 
 article. 
 
 ArzbP . 
 B. 
 
 Arzabispo, 
 Beato, 
 
 archbishop, 
 blessed. 
 
 b. 
 
 Vuelta, 
 
 turn over. 
 
 B r . 
 
 Bachiller, 
 
 bachelor. 
 
 B. L. M. 
 
 Beso las manos. 
 
 I kiss the hands. 
 
 B. L. P. 
 
 B mo , P e . 
 
 C. M. B. 
 
 Beso los pies, 
 Beatisimo padre, 
 Cuyos manos beso. 
 
 I kiss the feet. 
 most blessed father, 
 iv hose hands I kiss. 
 
 C P. B. 
 
 Cuj'os pies beso, 
 
 xi'hosefeet I kiss. 
 
 Cam ra . 
 
 Camara, 
 
 clumber. 
 
 Cap. 
 Cap n . 
 Capp 11 . 
 Col. 
 
 Capitulo, 
 Capitan. 
 Capellan, 
 Coluna, 
 
 chapter 
 captain, 
 chaplain, 
 column. 
 
 Comis . 
 
 Comisario, 
 
 commissary. 
 
 Comp a . 
 
 Cons°. 
 
 Car* e . 
 
 Compania, 
 
 Consejo, 
 Carriente, 
 
 company. 
 
 council. 
 
 current. 
 
 D n . 
 
 Don, 
 
 
 D a ,D. 
 
 Dona, 
 
 
 D^ 
 
 Doctor, 
 
 doctor. 
 
 D. D. 
 
 Doctores, 
 
 doctors. 
 
 D\ 
 
 Dios, 
 
 God. 
 
190 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 Dho. 
 
 Dicho, dicha, 
 
 said. 
 
 Dro. 
 
 Derecho, 
 
 right, duty. 
 
 Diz re . 
 
 Diciembre, 
 
 December. 
 
 Dom°. 
 
 Domingo, 
 
 Sunday. 
 
 Ecc°. 
 
 Ecclesiastico, 
 
 ecclesiastic. 
 
 En°. 
 
 Enero, 
 
 January. 
 
 Ex m0 . 
 
 Excelentisimo. 
 
 most excellent. 
 
 Ex cia . 
 
 Excelencia. 
 
 excellency. 
 
 Fho. 
 Fha. 
 
 Fecho, 
 Fecha, 
 
 > dated. 
 
 Feb°. 
 
 Febrero, 
 
 February. 
 
 FoR 
 
 Folio, 
 
 folio. 
 
 Fr. 
 
 Fray, 
 
 a friar. 
 
 Fran co . 
 
 Francisco, 
 
 Francis. 
 
 Frnz. 
 
 Fernandez. 
 
 
 Gde. 
 Gue. 
 
 J>Guarde, 
 , Que Dios guarde, 
 
 preserve. 
 
 Q. D. G, 
 
 whom God preserve* 
 
 Gra. 
 
 Gracia, 
 
 grace. 
 
 Gen*. 
 
 General, 
 
 general. 
 
 ■Igla. 
 
 Iglesia, 
 
 church. 
 
 UK 
 
 Ilustre, 
 
 illustrious. 
 
 HI**. 
 
 Iiustrisimo, 
 
 most illustrious. 
 
 Inq or . 
 
 Inquisidor, 
 
 inquisitor. 
 
 Jhs. 
 
 Jesus, 
 
 Jesus. 
 
 Jf. 
 Jph. 
 
 > Josef, 
 
 Joseph. 
 
 Jn°. 
 Jn. 
 
 | Juan, 
 
 John. 
 
 Lib. 
 
 Libro, 
 
 book. 
 
 Lib 8 . 
 
 Libras, 
 
 pounds. 
 
 Lin. 
 
 Linea, 
 
 line. 
 
 Liz°. 
 
 Licenciado, 
 
 licentiate. 
 
 M. P. S. 
 
 Muy poderoso senor, very powerful lord. 
 
 M e . 
 
 Madre, 
 
 mother. 
 
 M r . 
 
 Monsieur, 
 
 monsieur. 
 
 M er . 
 
 Mayor, 
 
 eldest. 
 
 M s . A s . 
 
 Much os anos, 
 
 many years. 
 
 Mag d . 
 
 Magestad, 
 
 majesty. 
 
 Man 1 . 
 
 Manuel, 
 
 Emanuel. 
 
 May mo . 
 
 Mayordomo, 
 
 steward. 
 

 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Mig 1 . 
 
 Miguel, 
 
 Michael. 
 
 Minro. 
 
 Ministro, 
 
 minister. 
 
 Mrd. 
 
 Merced, 
 
 grace, worship. 
 
 Mfn. 
 
 Martin, 
 
 Martin. 
 
 Mfnz. 
 
 Martinez, 
 
 
 Mro. 
 
 Maestro, 
 
 master. 
 
 Mrs. 
 
 Maravedis, 
 
 
 MS. 
 
 Manuscrito, 
 
 manuscript. 
 
 MSS. 
 
 Manuscritos, 
 
 manuscripts. 
 
 N. S. 
 
 Nuestro Seiior, 
 
 Our Lord. 
 
 N. S™. 
 
 Nuestra Senora, 
 
 Our Lady. 
 
 Nro. 
 
 Nuestro, 
 
 our. 
 
 Nov re . 
 9 re . 
 
 > Noviembre, 
 
 November. 
 
 Obpo. 
 Oct re . 
 8 re . 
 
 Obispo, 
 
 bishop* 
 
 > Octobre, 
 
 October. 
 
 On*. 
 
 Onzas, 
 
 ounces. 
 
 Ofn. 
 
 Orden, 
 
 order. 
 
 P.D. 
 
 Posdata, 
 
 postscript. 
 
 P a . 
 
 Para, 
 
 for. 
 
 P*. 
 
 Padre, 
 
 father. 
 
 P°. 
 
 Pedro, 
 
 Peter. 
 
 P'. 
 
 Por, 
 
 for, or by. 
 
 pta 
 
 Plata, 
 
 silver, or plate. 
 
 pte] 
 
 Parte, 
 
 part. 
 
 pto 
 
 Puerto, 
 
 po?"t. 
 
 P%. 
 
 Pagina, 
 
 page. 
 
 Pp co . 
 
 Publico, 
 
 public. 
 
 Pfnl. 
 
 Principal, 
 
 principal. 
 
 Pro~r. 
 
 Procurador, 
 
 solicitor, proctor 
 
 Prov. 
 
 Provisos 
 
 vicar -general. 
 
 Q e . 
 
 Que, 
 
 that. 
 
 Q do . 
 
 Quando, 
 
 when. 
 
 Q». 
 
 Quien, 
 
 who. 
 
 Q 1 *. 
 
 Quanto, 
 
 how much. 
 
 R*. R 1 ^. 
 
 Real, reales, 
 
 royal. 
 
 R*. 
 
 Reales, 
 
 reals. 
 
 Rev mo . 
 
 Reverendisimo, 
 
 most reverend* 
 
 R*>. 
 
 Reverendo, 
 
 reverend* 
 
 191 
 
192 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 : to 
 
 R vi . 
 
 Recibi, 
 
 I received, 
 
 S. 
 
 San, santo, 
 
 saint* 
 
 S a . 
 
 San, 
 Santo, 
 
 > saint. 
 
 S. M. 
 
 Su majestad, 
 
 his majesty. 
 
 S. S d . 
 
 Su santitad, 
 
 his holiness. 
 
 
 J- Senor, 
 
 sir, or Mr. 
 
 Seb n . 
 
 Sebatian, 
 
 Sebastian. 
 
 S ria . 
 
 7 
 
 
 Secret a . 
 
 > Secretaria, 
 
 secretaryship. 
 
 Secret lia 
 
 J 
 
 
 Secret . 
 
 i 
 
 
 S rio . 
 
 >Secretario, 
 
 secretary. 
 
 Secret 1 ' 10 , 
 
 J 
 
 
 Se re . 
 
 7 re. 
 
 J- Setiembre, 
 Serenisimo, 
 
 September. 
 
 S mo . 
 
 most serene. 
 
 Serv°. 
 
 Servicio, 
 
 service. 
 
 Serv or . 
 
 Servidor, 
 
 servant. 
 
 Sig te . 
 
 Siguiente, 
 
 following. 
 
 SS m °. P« 
 
 , Santisimo padre, 
 
 most holy father. 
 
 SS no . 
 
 Escribano, 
 
 notary. 
 
 S. S. s. 
 
 Su seguro servidor, 
 
 your faithful servant. 
 
 Sup ca . 
 
 Suplica, 
 
 e n t rea ty, pet itim . 
 
 Supte. 
 
 Suplicante, 
 
 petitioner. 
 
 Super te . 
 
 Superintendente, 
 
 superintendant. 
 
 Ten**. 
 
 Teniente, 
 
 lieutenant. 
 
 Tom. 
 
 To mo, 
 
 volume. 
 
 Tpo. 
 V 
 
 Tiempo, 
 
 time. 
 
 
 }- Venerable, 
 
 venerable. 
 
 Ven e . 
 
 J 
 
 
 V. A. 
 
 Vuestra alteza, 
 
 your highness. 
 
 V. B d . 
 
 Vuestra beatitud, 
 
 your blessedness. 
 
 V. E* 
 
 Vuestra exeelencia, 
 
 your excellency. 
 
 V. G. 
 
 Verbi gracia, 
 
 for example. 
 
 * In conversation, Vuestra excelencia is pronounced vecelencia ; 
 and vuestra. senoria, vuesehoria. This contraction semetiraes takes 
 place in writing. 
 
Vm. 
 
 Vmd. 
 
 Vms. 
 V. P. 
 
 V. s.* 
 
 V. s. 
 
 V. s. s. s 
 
 V. S.I* 
 
 V". 
 Vol. 
 
 Vfo. 
 
 X m0 . 
 Xptiano. 
 Xpto. 
 Xptobal. 
 
 rVue 
 
 ^ c 
 LUst 
 
 ETYMOLOGY- 
 
 ' Vuestra merced, 1 
 
 or > your Ivor ship. 
 
 sted, J 
 
 Ustedes, your worships* 
 
 Vuestra paternidad, your paternity* 
 f Vuestra seiioria, 
 J or 
 LUsia, 
 Vuestra santidad, 
 Vuestras senorias, 
 f Vuestra seiioria ii 
 X ustrisima, 
 
 193 
 
 1 
 
 your lordship. 
 
 your holiness, 
 your lordships. 
 
 Vellon, 
 
 Volumen, 
 
 Vuestro, 
 
 Diezmo, 
 
 Cristiano, 
 
 Cristo, 
 
 Cristobal, 
 
 K s your grace. 
 
 bullion, 
 volume, 
 your, 
 tithe. 
 
 ■Christian. 
 Christ. 
 Christopher. 
 
 Some of the most usual Christian Names which are not 
 exactly alike in Spanish and English. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abrahan, Abraham. 
 Absalon, Absalom. 
 A dan, Adam. 
 Adolfo, Adolphus. 
 Alano, Alan. 
 Alberto, Albert. 
 Alexandro, Alexander. 
 Alfredo, Alfred. 
 Alfonso, Alphonso. 
 Ambrosio, Ambrose. 
 Andres, Andrew. 
 AnselmOj Anselm. 
 
 Of Men, 
 
 Antonio, Anthony. 
 Archibalo, Archibald. 
 Arnaldo, Arnold. 
 Arturo, Arthur. 
 A tanas i o , At ha nasius, 
 Agustin, Austin. 
 
 B. 
 
 Balduino, Baldwin. 
 Bautista, Baptist 
 Bernabe, Barnaby. 
 Bartolome, Bartholomew. 
 Basilio, Basil. 
 
 See the Note to the preceding page. 
 K 
 
19* 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 Benito, Ben-net, or Benedict. 
 Bernardo, Bernard* 
 Betel, Bethel. 
 Bias, Blase. 
 Bonifacio, Boniface. 
 Brian 6, Brian* 
 
 C. 
 
 Cesar, Ctesar. 
 Cecilio, Cecil. 
 Carlos, Charles. 
 Cristoval, Christopher* 
 Claudio, Claudius. 
 Clemente, Clement. 
 Conrado, Conrad. 
 Constantino, Constaniine. 
 Cornel io, Cornelius. 
 Cipriano, Cyprian. 
 Cirilo, Cyril. 
 
 D. 
 
 Demetrio, Demetrius. 
 Diego, or Jayme, James. 
 Dionisio, Dionysius. 
 Domingo, Dominic. 
 
 E. 
 
 Edgaro, Edgar. 
 Edrnondo, Edmund. 
 Eduardo, Edward. 
 Eduin, Edwin. 
 Eleazaro, Eleazar. 
 Eldret, Eldrecl. 
 Eliseo, Elisha. 
 Erasmo, Erasmus. 
 Ernesto, Ernest. 
 Esteban, Stephen. 
 Etelbert, Eihelhert. 
 Etelredo, Ethel-red. 
 
 Eteluardo, Ethelivard. 
 Evano, Evan. 
 Everardo, Everard. 
 Eugenio, Eugene. 
 Eusebio, Eusebius. 
 Eustacio, Eustace. 
 Ezequiel, Ezekiel. 
 
 F. 
 
 Felipe, Philip. 
 Fernando, Ferdinand. 
 Francisco, Francis. 
 Frederico, Frederic. 
 Fulquio, Fatvkes. 
 
 Gaspar, Jaspar. 
 Geraldo, Gerrard. 
 Gervasio, Gervase. 
 Gedonio, Gideon. 
 Gilberto, Gilbert. 
 Gil, Giles. 
 Godardo, Goddard. 
 Godefredo, Godfrey. 
 Gregorio, Gregory. 
 Guido, Guy. 
 Guillermo, William. 
 
 H. 
 
 Haroldo, Harold. 
 Henrique. Henry. 
 Heberto, Herbert. 
 Hilario, Hilary. 
 Huberto* Hubert. 
 Hugo, Hugh. 
 
 I. 
 
 Jsaias^ Esaias. 
 Juan, John. 
 Jorge, George 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 195 
 
 Joscelino, Joscelinc. 
 Jose, or Josef, Joseph. 
 Judas, Jade. 
 Juliano, Julian. 
 Julio, Julius* 
 Justo, Justus. 
 
 K. 
 Kenelmo, Kenelm. 
 
 L. 
 
 Lamberto, Lambert. 
 Lancelote, Lancelot. 
 Lazaro, Lazarus. 
 Leolino, Leoline. 
 Leonardo, Leonard. 
 Leopoldo, Leopold. 
 Lorenzo, Laurence. 
 Luis, Lewis. 
 Lucio, Lucius. 
 Lucas, Luke. 
 
 M. 
 
 Marco, Mark. 
 Marmaduco, Mqrmaduke. 
 Manuel, Emanuel. 
 Martin, Martin. 
 Mateo, Matthew. 
 Matias, Matthias. 
 Mauricio, Maurice. 
 Maximiliano, Maximilian. 
 Miguel, Michael. 
 Moyses, Moses. 
 
 N. 
 
 Nadal, Noel. 
 Natan, Nathan. 
 Natanael, Nathaniel. 
 Nehemias, Nehemiah. 
 Nicolas, Nicholas. 
 
 O. 
 
 Olivero, Oliver. 
 Osmondo, Osmund. 
 Osualdo, Oswald. 
 Oionio, Otho. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pasqual, Pascal } Cyril. 
 Pablo, Paul. 
 Patricio, Patrick. 
 Peregrino, Peregrine. 
 Pedro, Peter. 
 
 Quintino, Qiieniin. 
 
 R. 
 
 Randolfo, Randolph. 
 
 Rafael, Raphael. 
 
 Raymondo, 1 ^ , 
 
 t> J > Raymond, 
 
 Kay in on, 3 ^ 
 
 Reynaldo, Reynold. 
 
 Ricardo, Richard, 
 
 Roberto, Robert. 
 
 Rodrigo, Roderic. 
 
 Rogerio, Roger. 
 
 Rolando, Rowland. 
 
 Ruperto > Rupert. 
 
 & 
 
 Salomon, Solomon. 
 Sanson, Samson. 
 Sebastian o, Sebastian. 
 Sigismundo, Sigismund* 
 Siivestre, Silvester. 
 
 Teobaldo, Theobald. 
 Teod or 0, The: Sure. 
 
 K 2 
 
193 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 Teodosio, Theodosius. 
 Teodorico, Thcodoric. 
 Teofilo, Theophilus. 
 Tom as, Thomas. 
 Timoteo, Timothy. 
 Tito, Titus. 
 
 V. 
 
 Urbano, Urban. 
 
 Valentino, Valentine. 
 Valeriano, Valerian. 
 Vicente, Vincent. 
 
 Zacarias, Zachary. 
 Zaqueo, Zaccheus. 
 Zadoc, Zadoh 
 Zedequias, Zedehah. 
 
 % Of Women. 
 
 Agnes, or Lies, Agnes. 
 Ana, Anne. 
 Antonia, Antoinette, 
 Arab el a, Arabella. 
 
 B. 
 
 Benita, Benedict a. 
 Berta, Bertha. 
 Blanca, Blanche. 
 Brigida, Bridget* 
 
 Feliciana, Felicia. 
 Felicia, Phillis. 
 Felipa, Philippa. 
 Florencia, Florence. 
 Fortuna, Fortune. 
 Francisca, Frances. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gertrudis. Gertrude. 
 Gracia, Grace. 
 
 Carolina, Caroline. 
 Catalina, Catharine. 
 Clara, Clara, Clarissa. 
 Constanza, Constance. 
 
 D. 
 
 Debora, Deborah. 
 Dorotea, Dorothy. 
 
 E. 
 
 Eleonora, Eleanor. 
 Elena, Helen. 
 Ester, Esther. 
 Eva, Eve. 
 Eunicia, Eunice. 
 
 H. 
 
 Helena, Helen. 
 
 Isabel, Isabella, Elisabeth. 
 
 Juana, Jane. 
 
 Judit, Judith. 
 
 Juliana, Julia , Julianne. 
 
 L. 
 
 Luisa, Louisa. 
 Lucia, Lucy. 
 Lucrecia, Lucntia. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 197 
 
 M. 
 
 Magdalena, Magdalen . 
 Margarita, Margaret, 
 Marta, Martha. 
 Maria, Maria, Mary. 
 Matilda, Matilda, 
 
 P. 
 
 Paciencia, Patience. 
 Prudencia, Prudence, 
 
 R. 
 
 Raquel, Rachel. 
 
 Rebeca, Rebecca. 
 Rosamunda, Rosamond. 
 Rosa, Rose. 
 Ruda. Ruth. 
 
 Sara, Sarah. 
 Sofia, Sophia. 
 Susana, Susanna. 
 
 T. 
 
 Temper ancia, Temperance, 
 Teresa, Theresa. 
 
 Some of the most common Names of Countries, Cities } 
 
 Rivers, fyc. 
 
 A. Bahia de Sligo, Sligo Bay, 
 
 Baleico, Baltic, 
 Barberisco, o Berberisco, 
 
 Barbary [a native of) 
 Baviera, Bavaria. 
 Bavaro, Bavarian. 
 Bela Isla, Belleisle. 
 Bengal a, Bengal. 
 Berberfa, Barbary. 
 Bizcaya, Biscay. 
 Borgona, Burgundy. 
 Bretana, Britany. 
 Brajas, Bruges. 
 Bruselas, Brussels. 
 Burdeos, Bordeaux. 
 
 Adrindpoli, Adrianople. . 
 Aleman, German. 
 Alemania, Germany. 
 Alpes, Alps. 
 Amberes, Antwerp. 
 Anseaticas, Hanse towns. 
 A'rabe, Arab. 
 Archipielago, Archipelago. 
 Argelino, Algerine. 
 Argel, Algiers. 
 Argentina, Strasburg. 
 * Asiatieo, Asia (a native of) 
 Asiria, Assyria. 
 Atenas, Athens. 
 Austriaeo, Austrian. 
 
 B. 
 
 Babilonia, Babylon, 
 Bahia Botanica, Botany- 
 Bay. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cabo de Buena Esperanza, 
 
 Cape of Good Hope. 
 Cartago, Carthage. 
 Catalima, Catalonia. 
 
198 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 Castilla (la Nueva), Castile 
 (Net»). 
 
 Castilla (la Vieja), Castile 
 [Old). 
 
 Cefalonia, Cephalonia. 
 
 Ceilan, Ceylon. 
 
 Cerdena, Sardinia. 
 
 C ester, Chester* 
 
 Chile, Chili. 
 
 Constantinopla, Constanti- 
 nople, 
 
 Copenhaga, oCopenhague, 
 Copenhagen. 
 
 Corinto., Corinth. 
 
 Corcega, Corsica. 
 
 Cortina, Corunna. 
 
 D. 
 
 Danubio, Danube. 
 DardaneloSj Dardanelles. 
 Delfinado, Dauphiny. 
 Dinamarca, Denmark. 
 Dinamarques, Dane. 
 Dresda, Dresden. 
 Dunas, The Downs. 
 Dunkerque, Dunkirk. 
 
 Edinburgo, Edinburgh. 
 E'feso, Ephesus. 
 Egipto, Egypt. 
 Escalda, Scheldt. 
 Escania, Scandinavia. 
 Escocia, Scotland. 
 Escoces, Scotchman. 
 Esmirna, Smyrna. 
 Espaiia, Spain. 
 Estados Unidos, America 
 
 (the United States of). 
 Europa, Europe. 
 
 F. 
 
 Filadelfia, Philadelphia. 
 Finlanda, Fi?iland. 
 Flandes, Flanders. 
 Florencia, Florence. 
 Francforte del Oyder, 
 
 Frankfort upon Oder. 
 Francforte del Maino, 
 
 Frankfort upon Maine. 
 Francia, France. 
 Frigia, Phrygia. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gales, Wales. 
 Gascuna, Gascony. 
 Galia, Gaul. 
 Gante, Ghent. 
 Garnesey, Guernsey. 
 Genova, Genoa. 
 Ginebra, Geneva. 
 Gran- Bre tana, Great Bri- 
 tain. 
 Grecia, Greece. 
 Groenlandia, Greenland. 
 
 H. 
 
 Haga, Hague. 
 Hamburgo, Hamburgh. 
 Havana, Havannah. 
 Henao, Hainault. 
 Holanda, Holland. 
 Holandes, Dutchman. 
 Hungria, Hungary. 
 Hungaro, Hungarian. 
 
 Indias Orientates, East 
 
 Indies. 
 Indias Occidentales, West 
 
 Indies. 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 199 
 
 Inglaterra, England. 
 Ingles, Englishman. 
 Jonia, Ionia, 
 Wanda, Ireland. 
 Irlandes, Irishman. 
 Isla de Francia, Isle of 
 
 France. 
 Isla de Reunion, Mauritius. 
 Jutlandia, Jutland. 
 
 L. 
 
 La Sublime Puerte, The 
 
 Sublime Porte. 
 Leida, Ley den. 
 Lenguadoc, Languedoc. 
 Levante, Levant. 
 Liorna, oLivorna, Leghorn , 
 Lipsia, Leipsic. 
 Lisboa, Lisbon. 
 Loir a, Loire. 
 Lombardia, Lombardy. 
 Londres, London. 
 Lusacia, Lusatia. 
 Leon, Lyons. 
 
 M. 
 Madera, Madeira. 
 Maguncia, Mentz. 
 
 Malages, Malaga (a native 
 
 of) 
 
 Mallorca, Majorca. 
 
 Maltes, Maltese. 
 
 Mancha, Channel. 
 
 Mar Adriatico, Adriatic 
 Gulph. 
 
 Mar Bermejo, Red Sea. 
 
 Mar Caspio, Caspian Sea. 
 
 Mar del Sud, South Sea. 
 
 Mar Jonio, Ionian Sea. 
 
 Mar MediterraneOj Medi- 
 terranean. 
 
 Ma* Negro, Black Sea. 
 Mar Pacifico. 
 Marruecos, Morocco. 
 Mar Septentrional, North 
 
 Sea. 
 Martinica, Martinico. 
 Menorca, Minorca. 
 
 X. 
 Napoles, Naples. 
 Niza, Nice. 
 Xilo, Nile* 
 
 Normandia, Normandy. 
 Norvega, Norway* 
 Nueva York, New York. 
 
 O. 
 
 Cues Frisia, West Fries- 
 land. 
 Ouesminster, Westminster. 
 
 P. 
 
 Paises-Bajos, Belgium, or 
 
 Loiv Countries. 
 Palatinado, Palatinate. 
 Petersburgo, Petersburg. 
 Picardia, Picardy. 
 Piemonte, Piedmont. 
 Pirineos, Pyrenees. 
 Polonia, Poland. 
 Portugues, Portuguese. 
 Provenza, Provence. 
 
 Q. 
 Quebeca, Quebec. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rin, Rhine. 
 Rodano, Rhone. 
 Rodas, Rhodes. 
 
200 
 
 APPENDIX TO ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 lloma, Rome. 
 Rusia, Russia. 
 Huso, Russian. 
 
 S. 
 
 Saboya, Savoy. 
 Saxonia, Saxony. 
 Sena, Seine. 
 Se villa, Seville. 
 Sicelia, Sicily. 
 Stokolmo, Stockholm. 
 Suevia, Suabia. 
 Suecia, Sweden. 
 Sueco, Swede. 
 Suizo. Swiss. 
 Suiza, 6 Helvecia, Switzer- 
 land. 
 Sunda, Sound. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tajo, Tagtis. 
 
 Tartaria, Tartary. 
 Tamisis, Thames. 
 Tebas, Thebes. 
 Terceras, Azores. 
 Tierra Nueva, Newfound- 
 land. 
 Tunez, Tunis. 
 Turco, Turk. 
 Turquia, Turkey. 
 Toscana, Tuscany. 
 
 V. & U. 
 
 Venecia, Venice. 
 Viena, Vienna. 
 Ukrania, Ukraine. 
 Upsalia, Upsal. 
 Utreque, Utrecht. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zelanda, Zealand. 
 
PART II, 
 
 SYNTAX 
 
 Is the proper construction of words in a sentence. 
 
 A sentence is an assemblage of words forming a 
 complete sense. 
 
 Sentences are of two kinds, simple and compound, 
 
 A simple sentence contains but one subject, or no- 
 minative, and one finite verb : La vida es buena, life is 
 good. 
 
 A compound sentence consists of two or more sim- 
 ple sentences connected together : La vida es buena, 
 y la muerte es terrible, life is good, and death is ter- 
 rible. 
 
 The principal parts of a simple sentence are the 
 subject, the attribute, and the object. 
 
 The subject is the nominative, or thing chiefly spoken 
 oF; the attribute is the verb, or the action affirmed or 
 denied of the subject; and the object is the thing 
 affected by the action : Ella desprecia las riquezas, she 
 despises riches. Here ella is the nominative or subject ; 
 desprecia, the attribute or thing affirmed; and las 
 riquezas, the object, or thing affected by the action of 
 the verb desprecia. 
 
 Syntax principally consists of two parts, Concord 
 and Government. 
 
 Concord shows the agreement which certain words 
 have with one another, in gender, number, case, or 
 person. 
 
 Government is that power which one word has over 
 another in directing its case or mood. 
 
 k 5 
 
202 SYNTAX. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule I. 
 
 The article agrees in gender and number with the 
 noun to which it is prefixed: 
 
 El hombre, the man. 
 Las mugeres, the women. 
 Lo atil, the useful. 
 Un hombre, a man. 
 Una muger, a woman. 
 
 Note. — Feminine nouns beginning with a or ha accented require 
 the masculine article in the singular : El area, el dguila, un dve, un 
 dla. This is done to avoid the open sound of the two a's : la agua, 
 la ahna, would not be tolerated in a language so sonorous as the 
 Spanish. But as in the plural the two vowels cannot come in con- 
 tact, the exception is no longer applicable : las dguilas, las albas. 
 Nouns requiring this violation of concord are exceedingly few : 
 those already mentioned are almost all. 
 
 II. 
 
 Nouns taken in a definite sense, require the definite 
 article in Spanish, as in English : 
 
 El alitor, the author. 
 Las casas, the houses. 
 
 III. 
 
 Nouns taken in an indefinite sense, require, in both 
 languages; the corresponding article : 
 
 Un libro, a book. 
 Una cosa, a thing. 
 
SYNTAX. 203 
 
 IV. 
 
 The definite article is prefixed to nouns used in their 
 most extended sense : 
 
 El vicio, vice. 
 La virtudy virtue. 
 
 Note, — When the noun is preceded by a preposition, both which 
 are equivalent to an adverb, the article is omitted : Con paciencia, 
 patiently. And the article is also often omitted before a noun pre- 
 ceded by an adjective and a preposition, if that noon would require 
 no article in English : Digno de imitation ; Ageno tte verdad. 
 
 V. 
 
 The definite article is generally prefixed to the 
 names of countries., mountains, rivers^ winds; and 
 seasons : 
 
 La Inglaterra, England. 
 El ParnasO) Parnassus. 
 El Tajo, the Tagus. 
 
 Note 1. — Countries which have the same name as their capital cities 
 do not admit the article : as Kapoles, Corfu. 
 
 2. Countries preceded by a preposition do not in general admit 
 the article : El veyno de Inglaterra ; estd en Espana, But countries 
 personified require the article even when they are preceded by a 
 preposition; El mteresdela Inglaterra, the interest of England; that 
 is, of the people of England. 
 
 S. Some distant countries require the article under all circum- 
 stances: Llego del Japan, del Peru, de la China. 
 
 4. The insertion of the article before the preceding proper names, 
 can only be accounted for by the ellipsis of some common noun : El 
 monte Pamaso : el rio Tajo, &c» Proper names are surely sufficiently 
 distinct without the application of the article. The office of this 
 word is to give to common nouns the nature of proper ones, to dis- 
 tinguish one object from an infinite number of the same kind ; and to 
 render that object an individual. 
 
204 SYNTAX. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Seaor, sefwra, seuorito, sehorita* with their plurals, 
 require the definite Article, unless they are in the 
 vocative, or preceded by an adjective pronoun : 
 
 El senor del Campo. 
 La se nor a Villegas. 
 
 VII. 
 
 Common names denoting the dignities, professions, 
 and employments of men, are preceded by the definite 
 article : 
 
 El rey Carlos, King Charles. 
 El doctor Fel^ Doctor Fell. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 The hour of the day is preceded by the same article: 
 
 La una, one o'clock. 
 Lasoc/iOy eight o'clock. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Nouns of measure, weight, &c. when preceded by the 
 indefinite article in English, require the definite in Spa- 
 nish: 
 
 Cinco duros la vara, five dollars a yard. 
 Dos reales la libra, two rials a pound. 
 
 Note.— If only one yard, pound, &e. were sold , the indefinite article 
 ivould be used : Vendio una libra por dos reales : he sold one pound for 
 two reals. And when par is used, the article is omitted : Dos reales 
 por libra* This is equivalent to our mercantile form of expression, 
 
 pei* pound. 
 
 * Senoriio and senorita are diminutives, and applied to young 
 people. 
 
SYNTAX. 205 
 
 X. 
 
 The article is usually repeated before every noun ; 
 always if the nouns be of different genders : 
 
 La verdad y la honra, truth and honour. 
 
 La virtud y el vicio, virtue and vice. 
 
 Los liombresy las mugeres, the men and women. 
 
 XI. 
 
 Nouns in opposition do not admit the article : 
 Londres, capital de Inglaterra, y residencia del 
 
 sober ano; London, the capital of England, and the 
 
 residence of the sovereign. 
 
 XII. 
 
 Proper names of persons, cities, towns, and months, 
 do not admit the article ; but the days of the week are 
 seldom found without it : 
 
 Socrates, Socrates. 
 Londres, London. 
 El Lunes, Monday. 
 
 Note. — A very few cities are found with the article : La Coruna ; 
 el Fevrol ; and some persons; as el Petrarca. But in these cases 
 some common name is understood before the proper one : la c'wdad 
 Coruna ; el lugar Ferrol ; el alitor Petrarca, 
 
 XIII. 
 
 No article is used before nouns signifying a part of 
 the whole.* 
 
 Dame vino, give me some wine. 
 Como came, I eat flesh. 
 Note* — Some may, however, be expressed by algunoin the singular, 
 and algunos, or unos, in the plural ; but not so frequently in the sin- 
 gular : Comprarc unos libros, I will buy some books. 
 
 * That is, before nouns which are not, like those included under 
 the fourth rule, taken in their most extended signification. The 
 English word some is very often equivalent to the Spanish partitive, 
 but it is not always expressed : Dificuliades, peligros, lazos le amwia- 
 zan % 9 difficulties, dangers, snares, threaten him, 
 
206 SYNTAX. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 No article is used before adjectives, whether ordinal 
 or numeral, when they are preceded by the noun to 
 which they belong. 
 
 Carlos Primero, Charles the First. 
 Capitulo decimo, chapter the tenth. 
 
 XV. 
 
 No article is used in the titles of books, the heads of 
 chapters, paragraphs, &c. unless the noun be the sub- 
 ject of a verb, or the object of a verb or a preposition : 
 
 Gramatica Castella?ia, a Spanish grammar. 
 Discurso preliminary a preliminary discourse. 
 
 Note 1. — When a verb connects two nouns, the latter of which de- 
 notes the country, dignity, profession, &c. of the former, the indefi- 
 nite article is suppressed : Soy Ingles : Es obispo : Era medico. 
 
 2. The same article is also suppressed before cien, mil, as cien horn- 
 bres; after que, tal, &c. expressing surprise, que lastima! what a pity ! 
 after como if the noun has no necessary connection with other words 
 following: Obro como hombre; he acted like a man. 
 
 Exercise on the Rales for the Articles. 
 
 The kingdom of France. The king of England. 
 reyno de Francia rey Inglaterra 
 
 The province of Navarre. France, England, Spain, 
 provincia Navarra Espana 
 
 and Italy. Prussia, Germany, and Russia. I shall go 
 
 Italia Prussia 9 Alemania Rusia ir (irr.) 
 
 to Italy. Thou wilt come to England. He will 
 a *?emV(irr.) 
 
 return into Spain. Emulation is noble. Virtue is 
 solver (irr.) emulacion noble virtud 
 
 amiable. Idleness is contemptible. Bread is dear. Man is 
 amable pereza despreciable pan caro 
 
SYNTAX. 207 
 
 mortal. Prudence is a precious virtue. The brother 
 mortal prudencia preciosa hermano 
 
 and sister. The men, women, and children, are at the 
 
 hermana nino a 
 
 door. The father, mother, and children, are sick. A 
 puerta padre madre malo 
 
 man and a woman. A king and a queen. A good 
 
 reyna bueno 
 
 man is beloved by all. A good woman. A true 
 amado de todos verdadero 
 
 friend is the best gift of God. Sehor Don John is a 
 amigo don Dios Juan 
 
 brave officer. Sehora Doha Catalina is a handsome 
 bravo ojicial hermoso 
 
 woman. * Doctor Godinez is skilful. King George 
 
 habil Jorge 
 
 is generous. Faith, hope, and charity, are the three 
 
 generoso fe esperanza caridad tres 
 
 great Christian virtues. An action worthy of praises. 
 
 Cristiano action digno alabanza 
 
 The ambition of men. Purity of heart. The sim- 
 
 ambicion puridad corazon sim- 
 
 plicity and goodness of Miss R. Constancy in ad- 
 
 plicidad bondad Sehorita constancia en ad- 
 
 versity. The generosity of Miss Maria C . 
 
 versidad generosidad Sehorita Maria C , 
 
 Philosophy and religion. The works of nature. Wine 
 Jilosqfia religion obra naturaleza vino 
 
 was sold yesterday at twelve pounds a hogshead. 
 venderse aver libra media-pipa 
 
 This lace is sold at two dollars a yard. This wine 
 encaje duros vara 
 
 * Don, Dona, have no plural, and the}' must always precede the 
 baptismal name, not the surname. Senor Don, Senora Dona, Senorito 
 Don, Senorita Do?la, are the most respectful titles, and Don alone 
 holds the next rank. El Senor Don Pedro Garcia : La Sencra Dona 
 Isabel Romero : Don Diego Martinez ; Dona Maria Castro, Sec. When 
 speaking of persons of inferior rank to Don, Sec. Senor, Senora, with 
 their diminutives Senorito, Senorita, are used. These generally pre- 
 cede the surname, as el Senor Martinez ; la Senora Dorantes, 6cc. but 
 when applied to persons in still lower walks of life, they sometimes 
 pTecede the baptismal name unaccompanied by the article : Senor 
 Pedro; Senora Maria Valdez. 
 
208 SYNTAX. 
 
 costs three shillings a bottle, I will go at 
 
 €0star (irr.) tres chelines botella ir[\vr.) a 
 
 eleven o'clock. I was there at one. He came at four, 
 
 alii venir (irr.) 
 
 returned at six. We shall sup at seven. Give me 
 volver (irr.) cenar dar 
 
 some pens. We have honey. They have money. I 
 
 pluma tener miel dinero 
 
 have some books. You have wine. We sell bread. 
 
 libro pan 
 
 They sell eggs. We shall have friends. Let them 
 
 Iiitevo amigo 
 
 have corn. Paris, the capital of France, is a beautiful 
 
 trigo capital Francia 
 
 city. Happiness, the reward of virtue, is ours. 
 ciudad dicha premio 
 
 Jupiter, the son of Saturn, the husband of Juno, and 
 Jupiter hi jo Saturno marido Junon 
 
 the father of Minerva. George, the king of England. 
 
 padre Minerva Jorge rey 
 
 Charles the Second. Ferdinand the Seventh, the king 
 Carlos Segundo Fernando 
 
 of Spain. History of the Conquest of Mexico. Life 
 
 hist or i a conquista Mejico vida 
 
 of Lazarillo de Tormes. The king granted the par- 
 
 conceder per- 
 don, Death is a single moment between time and 
 don muerte solo momento entre iiempo 
 
 eternity. Interest, glory, and ambition, are com- 
 eternidad i uteres gloria ambicion com- 
 
 monly the motives of our actions. Ireland is more 
 munmente motivo accion Irlanda 
 
 populous than Scotland. Olympus and Parnassus are 
 populoso Escocia Olympo Parnaso 
 
 famous mountains. Spring, summer, autumn, and 
 Jamoso, monte primavera verano otono 
 
 winter, are the four seasons of the year. Wine 
 hivierno estacion ano vino 
 
 sells at one dollar a bottle ; butter at eighteen 
 
 vender se a duro botella manteca diezy ocho 
 
SYNTAX. 209 
 
 pence a pound, and eggs at twelve shillings a 
 penique libra huevo eschelin 
 
 hundred. How is Miss Perez ? How is your 
 ciento como Sehorita 
 
 mother ? Doctor Harvey discovered the circula- 
 madre descubrir circula- 
 
 tion of the blood. Father Isla translated the work of 
 cion sangre traducir obra 
 
 Mr. Le Sage. King John granted many privileges to 
 sehor Juan conceder privilegio a 
 
 England [personified). I shall go there at four o'clock. 
 
 ir alii 
 George the Fourth, the king of England, was crowned 
 
 coronar 
 on the 19th of July, 1821^ at one o'clock. The virtue 
 Julio virtud 
 
 and wisdom of Ulysses. Solomon, the son of David, 
 
 sabiduria hijo 
 
 was endowed with wisdom. Sunday is a day which we 
 
 dotar Domingo dia 
 
 ought to consecrate to God. Ash-Wednesday is the 
 deber consagrar miercoles de ceniza 
 
 first day of Lent. New kings, new laws. The 
 
 quaresma nuevo rey leu 
 
 world abounds in snares, difficulties, and dangers. 
 mundo abundar lazo dificultad peligro 
 
 Eiches, honours, dignities, (everything) vanishes 
 riquezas honor dignidad todo dvsaparecer 
 
 before death. Games, conversations, plays — nothing 
 d muerte juego conversation, comedia nada 
 
 diverts her. Bribes, promises, threats, all arts 
 divertir dadiva promeso amenaza todo arte 
 
 were used. 
 us arse 
 
210 SYNTAX, 
 
 ADJECTIVE.* 
 
 1, Agreement of Adjectives. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 The adjective agrees in gender and number with the 
 noun to which it belongs: 
 
 Buena memoria, a good memory. 
 Buenos hijos, good sons. 
 Buenos hijas, good daughters. 
 
 Note. — Adjectives qualifying the feminine noun nada are mascu- 
 iine ; Nada es cierto, 
 
 XVII. 
 
 Two or more nouns singular require the following 
 adjective to be plural. 
 
 La madre y la hija son virtuosas, the mother and 
 daughter are virtuous. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 Two or more nouns singular of different genders 
 require the plural adjective to be masculine : 
 
 El hermano y la hermana son caritativos, the brother 
 and sister are charitable. 
 
 El tem^lo y la casa magnificos 9 the magnificent temple 
 and house. 
 
 Note. — When the adjective precedes two or more singular nouns, it 
 generally agrees with the nearest : Elintrtpido valor y resistencia, 
 
 * The Syntax of the noun will be treated of when we come to the 
 concord of the verb with its nominative, and to the government of 
 active verbs and cf prepositions. All that the learner has now need 
 to observe respecting this part of speech is this : When two nouns 
 signifying different things come together in English, and the former 
 possesses the genitive termination s with an apostrophe, the order 
 is reversed in Spanish. Thus, instead of mans nature, the order of 
 construction is, the nature of man: la naturaleza del hombre. 
 
^SYNTAX. 211 
 
 XIX. 
 
 When an adjective belongs to two plural nouns of 
 different genders, it generally agrees with the nearer : 
 
 Los efectosy las riquezas preciosas, the valuable effects 
 and riches. 
 
 Note. — An adjective of two terminations should not qualify two 
 nouns which differ both in gender and in number : su vista, y todos 
 sus sentidos son exquisites. This construction is not uncommon ; but 
 it would be better either to use an adjective of the same termination 
 for both genders; or to repeat the adjective after each noun. Su 
 vista es exquisita, y todos sus sentidos son exquisitos. If, however, the 
 student should dislike the repetition of the adjective in this and 
 similar cases, his own judgment will readily suggest some other 
 mode of construction. 
 
 XX. 
 
 Adjectives do not agree with the titles of an indivi- 
 dual, but with the individual himself: 
 
 Su magestad estd malo, his majesty is ill. 
 
 Su excelencia estd bueno, his excellency is well. 
 
 2. Adjectives requiring Certain Prepositions.* 
 
 XXI. 
 
 Adjectives which denote plenty or want, care or ne- 
 gligence, desire or aversion, knowledge or ignorance^ 
 
 * With this part of the subject the author is least satisfied. To give 
 rules which should be so comprehensive as to embrace all adjectives, 
 that admit certain prepositions, and yet so precise as to exclude all 
 that require other prepositions, would be impossible. Language is 
 not so mechanical in its structure, nor so easily reducible to invariable 
 rules. In imitation of preceding writers, he has arranged these 
 adjectives according to their signification under general heads, but 
 he is well aware that many exceptions will be found. The gramma- 
 rian's task, however, is to classify, while to the lexicographer belongs 
 the care of minutely particularising. And here the author may be 
 permitted to observe, that no Spanish Dictionary worthy of the 
 name has yet been published in England, Such a work should con- 
 tain many important matters of which compilers have hitherto never 
 
212 SYNTAX. 
 
 worthiness or untvor thin ess, capacity or incapacity, 
 memory or doubt, innocence or guilt, fear or confidence, 
 certainty or uncertainty, joy or sorrow, jealousy, shame; 
 and in general all those which would in English require 
 the prepositions of, from, and with, are followed by the 
 preposition de : 
 
 Lleno de agita, full of water. 
 
 Descuidado de su diner o, careless of his money. 
 
 Deseoso de saber, desirous of learning. 
 
 Digno de muerte, worthy of death. 
 
 Capaz del empleo, capable of the employment. 
 
 Temeroso de nada, afraid of nothing. 
 
 Cierto de la cosa,^ certain of the thing. 
 
 Alegre de vernie, glad to see me. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 Numeral and ordinal adjectives, superlatives, rela- 
 tives, interrogates, indefinite words, and nouns used 
 in a partitive sense, are followed also by de : 
 
 Uno de ellos, one of them. 
 
 El mas sabio de los Griegos, the wisest of the Greeks. 
 i Qjrien de los hombres ? which of the men ? 
 Algunos de los oyentes, some of the hearers. 
 
 Note. — Numeral adjectives require de before nouns of dimension : 
 Dos veras de largo, two yards in length ; Treinta pies de alto, thirty 
 feet high. And adjectives signifying distance of space or time are 
 followed by the same preposition : Lejos de la ciudad. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 Adjectives whose qualities are inherent in their sub- 
 stantives (not those which are accidental) are also fol- 
 lowed by de : 
 
 dreamed. If ought not only to contain the etymology of words of 
 Phenician, Greek, Latin, Gothic, Arabic, &c. derivation, but it also 
 ought to show what adjectives precede, and what follow their nouns ; 
 what prepositions are required by adjectives and verbs ; and, above 
 all, to distinguish the words which are purely Castilian from those 
 which are used by some provincial writers. Such a work is much 
 wanted, and no ordinary difficulties shaii deter the author from exe 
 cu ting it. 
 
SYNTAX. 213 
 
 Largo de cuerpo, long of body. 
 Ligero de pics, light of foot. 
 Agndo de ingenio, acute in intellect. 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 Adjectives signifying profit or disprojit, likeness or 
 unlilceness, pleasure, submission or relation to any thing, 
 and those which would in English require the preposi- 
 tion to and sometimes for, are generally followed by the 
 preposition a ; 
 
 JJtil a la navigation, useful to navigation. 
 Provechoso a la salud y profitable to health. 
 Gustoso a todos> agreeable to all. 
 Leal a I rey } loyal to the king. 
 
 XXV. 
 
 Adjectives denoting proximity are followed by a : 
 
 Vecino al palacio, adjacent to the place. 
 Junto a la iglesia, adjoining the church. 
 Proximo a morir, near dying. 
 
 xxvr. 
 
 All adjectives ending in Lie, and requiring to in Eng- 
 lish, are followed by a : 
 
 Inaccessible al pueblo, inaccessible to the people. 
 Horrible a todos, horrible to all. 
 Abominable a los buenos, hateful to the good. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 Adjectives denoting fitness or unfitness are followed 
 by para : 
 
 Apto para el empleo, fit for the employment. 
 Idoneo para todo, fit for every thing. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 Ajectives denoting experience, knowledge, &c. and 
 those which require in English the preposition in, are 
 
214 SYNTAX. 
 
 usually followed by the corresponding Spanish prepo- 
 sition en : 
 
 Experto en medicina, experienced in medicine. 
 Perito en las leyes, learned in the laws. 
 Versado en libros 9 versed in books. 
 Constante enje } constant in faith. 
 
 XXIX. 
 
 Adjectives denoting behaviour, &c are generally 
 followed by con ; 
 
 Ingrato con los amigos, ungrateful to friends. 
 Civil con todos, civil to all. 
 
 Note. — Many of the preceding classes of adjectives admit also of 
 other prepositions than those which have been assigned them, ac- 
 cording to the sense in which they are taken. The same adjective 
 may admit a, de, en, para, and con. See the chapter an Prepositions, in 
 Etymology. See also the List in the Appendix to Syntax. 
 
 3. Place of Adjectives. 
 
 As names would be given to things before they were 
 minutely compared with one another, and consequently 
 before their qualities could be discovered, so in most 
 languages the order of nature has been preserved, and 
 adjectives have generally been made to follow the 
 nouns with, which they agree. The Spanish is one of 
 these. But whether owing to a dislike of uniformity, 
 to a regard for harmony, or any other cause, custom 
 has decreed, that many adjectives shall precede their 
 substantives : 1. When they denote a quality essential 
 to the subject ; as el duro ?narmol, the hard marble : el 
 frioyelo, the cold ice. 2. When used as epithets; as 
 el ambicioso Alexandro ; el sabio Salomon. 3. When 
 accented on the antepenult, that is on the third syllable 
 from the termination ; as intrepido gefo. Hence the 
 superlatives in isimo are generally prefixed, as atro- 
 cisima maldad. 
 
 Nouns in the vocative are generally followed by their 
 adjectives: lector caruimo. But if the adjective be 
 
SYNTAX. 215 
 
 derived from a participle, it is more frequently followed 
 by its substantive : desocupado lector. 
 
 The irregular adjectives generally precede their 
 substantives ; and so do mucho> poco, caro, and iodo. 
 To these may be added the adjective pronouns, and 
 participles used as adjectives. Cardinal numbers pre- 
 cede their nouns ; as doce diets. Cierto, when it does 
 not mean indubitable, also precedes ; as ciertos hombres, 
 certain men. 
 
 Many other adjectives are similarly placed ; jingida 
 historia ; heroicas virtudes ; excelente razonamiento ; 
 verdadera nobleza ; particular attention ; ridicula idea; 
 discreta lisonja ; generosos pechos ; importuno hablista ; 
 rigurosa observancia ; contrario dictamen ; curiosa ob~ 
 servacion ; satirica representation ; agradable mezcla ; 
 ingeniosa invention ; hermosos lazos ; faraoso caballero ; 
 profunda erudition ; el sabio critico ; semejantes discur- 
 sos ; honrada muger ; valientes palas ; diversas suertes ; 
 conveniente rocio ; sosegado espiritu ; liquidas perlas ; 
 perpetuo descubridor ; infinita bondad ; ignor ante pueblo ; 
 dulces aguas ; claros rios ; ocultas venas ; alios arboles ; 
 nativas fuentes ; artificiosa pintura ; ricos pastores / 
 alegres campos ; celebres maestros ; facil cosa ; larga 
 relation ; general aplauso ; perjudicial entretenimiento ; 
 extraordinarios cosas ; perversos libros ; lisonjero elogio ; 
 dificil empresa ; esfupendas e inumerables comedias ; 
 indiscreto auior ; ilustre varon ; gloriosa memoria ; 
 antigua opinion ; primer os versos ; incomparable escritor ; 
 razonable cantidad ; blandas y suaves medicinas ; grave 
 eclesiastico ; confuso juicio ; misteriosa historia ; hu- 
 mildes pechos ; jieles relaciones ; justo aprecio ; breves; 
 terminos ; poderoso ejercito, immenso trabajo ; diferentes 
 formas ; insignes varones ; rara jigura ; valerosq horn- 
 bre ; temerosa aventura ; peligrosa aventura ; mara- 
 villoso silencio ; calarnitosos tiempos ; estravagantes 
 hazanas ; piadoso varon ; immortal hazana ; honesto 
 entretenimiento ; fabulosas cosas ; sublimes ingenios ; 
 perfect a correspondencia ; prolijo examen. All these 
 examples have been selected in perusing about fifty 
 pages of the prose works of Cervantes, Lope de Vega, 
 and Mariana. Some of the same adjectives with pre- 
 
216 SYNTAX. 
 
 cisely the same meaning, are made by the same authors 
 to folloiv their nouns : Varon illustre ; gente ignorante ; 
 censuras ocultas ; alma verdadera, fyc. 
 
 It would be easy to swell the preceding list ; but it 
 is useless. Before the student ventures to compose in 
 Spanish, he should be well acquainted with the subject 
 of construction, not from grammatical rules only, but 
 also from his own reading. To most rules there are 
 exceptions. But though the position of the adjective 
 is often arbitrary, and depending on sound, harmony, 
 or even the caprice of the writer, rather than on any 
 fixed data, yet the directions before given will be 
 found useful. 
 
 Before we dismiss this subject it is necessary to ob- 
 serve that a few adjectives vary their signification with 
 their place : Buena vida, a luxurious life ; vida buena, 
 a virtuous life ; papeles varios, papers on various sub- 
 jects; varios papeles, sundry papers ; habitation nueva* 
 a dwelling newly built ; nueva habitation, a new dwell- 
 ing ; mortal herido, a dangerous wound ; herido mortal, 
 a mortal wound.* 
 
 ILxertise on the Rule for Adjectives. 
 
 A prudent man is worthy of imitation, the earth is 
 prudent e digno imitation tier r a 
 
 abundant in riches. An obedient son is a comfort 
 abundant ei riquezas obedient e hijo consuelo 
 
 to his parents. He is not mindful of me. James the 
 para cuidado 
 
 First was a learned and religious monarch. History 
 sabio religioso monarca historia 
 
 and Geography are useful sciences. A courage 
 
 geografia util ciencia animo 
 superior £o danger. He is ignorant of the fact. The 
 peligro ignorante hecho 
 
 * All adjectives must follow their substantives when they them- 
 selves are connected by prepositions with other words : Hombre uiil 
 para la patria ; hombre alegre de las noticius ; hombre temeroso de la muerte* 
 
 f Abundante admits en as well as de : Abundante de, or en riquezas. 
 
SYNTAX. 217 
 
 court is full of flatterers. Rich in substance, &nd 
 corte lleno ad u lad or Rico substantia 
 loaded ivith honours. His house is empty of friends. 
 colmado honor casa vacia amigo 
 
 Thou art unmindful ^benefits. Virtue is pleasant to 
 
 descuidado beneficio virtud agradable 
 the good. The divine perfections are interesting to 
 
 bueno divino perfection inter esante 
 
 man. Premature old age is the fruit of a luxurious 
 anticipado vejez fruto luxurioso 
 
 life. Nothing is so impetuous as the desires of 
 vida Nada impetuoso deseo 
 
 self-love. The love of life and the fear of death 
 
 amor-propio vida temor muerie 
 
 are natural to man. Health and power are uncertain 
 
 natural salud poder incierto 
 
 and perishable ; but glory and virtue are certain, solid, 
 
 perecedero gloria virtud cierto solido 
 
 and durable. The son and daughter are ill. The 
 
 — hi jo hija enfermo 
 
 wonderful prudence and judgment of Solomon. The 
 maravilloso prudencia lino Salomon 
 
 knowledge of political frauds and connivances is we- 
 conocimiento politico fraude connivencia ne* 
 
 cessary to him who governs. Ridiculous arguments 
 
 cesario gobernar (irr.) ridiculoso argument o 
 
 and objections. His majesty is indisposed. His ex- 
 objeccion magestad indispuesto ex- 
 
 cellency is resolved. Their lordships are buried 
 cclencia resuelto senoria enter rar (irr.) 
 
 in the church.. The husband and wife are buried. 
 
 iglesia 
 Cares are annexed to government. The English 
 cuidado annexo gobierno Ingles 
 
 language is more difficult than the German. (Idle 
 lengua difficultoso Aleman pere~ 
 
 men) are useless to society. Fortune is a capricious 
 zoso fortuna caprichoso 
 
 deity. I am joyful at the information. The woman is 
 dezdad alegre not kids muger 
 
218 . SYNTAX. 
 
 ashamed of her crime. He is jealous of his wife. 
 avergonzado del it o zeloso esposa 
 
 He is sparing in eating. The man is harsh in his 
 
 par co comida dspero 
 
 words, but exact in his payments. The woman is con- 
 palabra pero exdcto pago con- 
 
 stant in her devotions, and glad to pray. She was 
 stante devocion alegre rogar 
 
 afraid of death, and even pale xvith fear: she is 
 temeroso muerte aun palido miedo 
 
 desirous of life. The author is worthy of praises. 
 deseoso auior digno alabanza 
 
 The husband and the wife are unworthy of belief. 
 marido indigno creencia 
 
 The wall is thirty yards high, and six yards thick* 
 muro vara alto grueso 
 
 A man void of judgment. He was always carefid of 
 
 falto juicio cuidado 
 
 his money. They were capable of the employment, 
 
 dinero capaz empleo. 
 
 Men are uncertain of the consequences of their actions. 
 
 incierto consequencia accion 
 
 She was always disdainful of his favours. Some of the 
 
 desdehoso favour alguno 
 
 men, and many of the women were condemned. 
 
 mucho condemn ar 
 
 Charity is the greatest ^Christian virtues. He is fit 
 caridad Crisiiano virtud apto 
 
 for the army. You are fit for his majesty's service. 
 ejerciio idoneo servicio 
 
 Idleness is pernicious to youth. The son is like the 
 pereza pernicioso juveniud hijo semejante 
 
 father, and the daughter like the mother. He is equal 
 padre hija madre igual 
 
 to others. She is near to death. My house is adja- 
 otro cercano casa ve- 
 
 ceni to the king's palace. Your house is contiguous 
 cino rey palacio. contiguo 
 
 to mine. I live far from the noisy tumults of the 
 vivo lejos rnidoso tumidto 
 
SYNTAX. 219 
 
 city. Lemons are sour to the taste. The king is 
 cmdad Union agrio gusto 
 
 hateful to his subjects. The news is agreeable 
 
 aborrecible vasallo noticias (pi.) agradable 
 
 to the people. He lives very distant from the court. 
 
 pueblo muy distante corte 
 
 Tyrants are inaccessible to the people. 
 iirano - 
 
 PRONOUN.* 
 
 RELATIVE. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 The relatives que, quien, and cual, agree with their 
 antecedents in gender, number, and person : 
 
 El rey que golierna, the king who governs. 
 El hombre con quien venimos, the man with whom we 
 „ came. 
 
 Los hombres a quienes amais, the men whom you love. 
 El criado por el qual envie la carta, the man servant 
 by whom I sent the letter. 
 
 has dudas de las cuales (or de que) haUamos, the 
 doubts of which we speak. 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 Cuyo agrees with its antecedent in person only ; in 
 gender and number with the noun to which it belongs : 
 
 Los santos de Dios, cuyo nitmero es infiniio ; the 
 saints of God, whose number is infinite. 
 
 La iglesia, cuyos preceptos son saludables ; the church, 
 whose precepts are salutary. 
 
 * The Syntax of Personal Pronouns will be treated of when we 
 come to the Concord of the Verb with its Nominative, and to the 
 Government of Active Verbs and Prepositions. As a sufficient 
 number of Exercises on Pronouns has already been given in the 
 Etymological part of this work, none will be given in the present 
 case. The student must already be sufficiently familiarised with the 
 subject. 
 
 L 2 
 
220 SYNTAX. 
 
 El apostol, cuyas palabras son misteriosas; the 
 apostle, whose words are mysterious. 
 
 Note 1. Quien, as we have before observed, refers to persons 
 only ; cual and que to persons or to things. When the relative is in 
 the same case as the antecedent, and is not separated from it by any 
 other word, que is generally employed : La muger que me hablo, the 
 woman who spoke to me. Whom, however, is as often expressed 
 by quien as by que : La muger a quien quiero, or la muger que amo, 
 the woman whom I love. 
 
 £. The relative is often understood in English, but it is always 
 expressed in Spanish : The man I saw, el hombre que, or d quien ve. 
 
 3. The antecedent is sometimes understood in English, especially 
 in gee try ; 
 
 " Who lives to nature, rarely can be poor ; 
 Who lives to fancy, never can be rich." 
 
 The same ellipsis is to be met with in Spanish writers, and used in 
 the same sense:, in general prepositions— -Quien mas habla, menos 
 piensa; who speaks the most, thinks the least. In this, and similar 
 expressions, que could not be substituted for quien. 
 
 4. As que has no change of inflection to denote the distinction of 
 gender and number, and cual only that of number, the definite ar- 
 ticre is always prefixed to the latter, and sometimes to the former; 
 so that the gender, &c. of the relative, and consequently of the an- 
 tecedent, is at once perceived : El hombre por el cual ; la muger por la 
 cual; los hombres por los cuales ; el que me hahla j la que me habla 
 los que me hablan; las que me hablan.* 
 
 * Que, as a relative, is too much used by Spanish writers, and is 
 often confounded with que, the conjunction. This ambiguity might 
 easily be avoided by more frequently substituting another relative. 
 Though we have before quoted the following clumsy sentence from 
 the Gramatica Castellana, we again transcribe it for the purpose of 
 pointing out the word : — " La misma frequencia con que por el uso 
 nan ido pasando estos participios a ser ya adjetivos verbales, ya 
 adjetivos substantivados, les ha quitado verosimilraente el regimen 
 de sus verbos ; y tambien el mucho uso que se hace en nuestra 
 lengua del gerundio que muchas veces es su equivalente, y ademas 
 es palabra mas sonora que el participio, en especial, que el de la 
 tercera conjugation, y muchas veces de la segunda, en que por 
 necesidad concurren muchas ii y ee, que son letras de menos sono- 
 ndad y variacion que las qve componen los vocables de los ge- 
 ruadios." 
 
SYNTAX. 221 
 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 Adjective pronouns, whether possessive, demonstra- 
 tive, or indefinite, agree like adjectives in gender and 
 number with the nouns to which they are joined : 
 
 Mi casa, my house. 
 Mis casas, my houses. 
 Nuestrosjardines, our gardens. 
 Vuestras palabras, your words. 
 Est a muger, this woman. 
 Aquellos hombres, those men. 
 Algunos libros, some books. 
 Algunas cosas, some things. 
 
 Note 1. The noun with which the adjective prcnoun agrees, is 
 frequently understood. But the possessive*, when they are con- 
 junclive, are always used with the noun ; and those which are dis- 
 junctive require that the substantive be immediately preceding : Bli 
 casa y la tuya, my house and thine : Xuestros jardines y los vuestros, 
 our gardens and yours. In one case, however, the noun is not ex» 
 pressed; — when the neuter article, lo, is used, and the sense is 
 indefinite : Lo mio noestuyo, mine is not thine. 
 
 2. When the disjunctive possessive pronoun is connected with the 
 noun by a verb, the article is omitted : Este libro es mio ; Aqusl libro 
 es tuyo ; this book is mine; that book is thine. And when, in 
 English, the preposition of precedes the possessive, there is no cor- 
 responding preposition in Spanish ; and in this case the possessive 
 invariably follows the noun-: A friend of mine, un amigo mio ; one of 
 your friends, un amigo vuestro. 
 
 3. Nouns in the vocative are followed by the conjunctive pos- 
 sessive pronoun just as they are followed by adjectives : Hijo mio* 
 my son. 
 
 4. The possessive pronoun is changed into the definite article in 
 the following cases : 
 
 First, After reflected verbs : She washed her hands, ella se lam 
 las manos. 
 
222 SYNTAX. 
 
 Second. When the part of the body with which the possessive 
 agrees, is not in the nominative : He gave me his 
 hand, tl me dio la mano. He came with tears in his 
 eyes, vino con las lagrimas en los ojos. He broke her 
 head, le rompio la cabeza. 
 Third, When the part of the body is the subject of the verb to 
 ache : My head aches, me duele la cabeza. 
 In the three cases preceding, the possessive is changed into the 
 article only where the human body is concerned, and especially where 
 it is subject to some action. But the same change takes place in other 
 situations, if there can exist no ambiguity as to the person to whom 
 the article refers : Me did la bolsa, he gave me his purse. 
 
 VERB. 
 
 1 . Concord of the Verb mth its Nominative, 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 The verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
 and person* 
 
 El hombre viene, the man comes. 
 Las mugeres ca?itan 9 the women sing. 
 Yo amo, I love. 
 Vosotros vendeis, you sell. 
 
 Note.— When a pronoun is the nominative it is seldom expressed, 
 unless for the sake of emphasis, or to distinguish the persons : Yo ire 
 pero tu no irds ; I shall go, but thou shalt not go ; si yofuera rico, if 
 I were rich. In the latter case, the omission of the pronoun would 
 leave the mind in doubt as to the nominative ; for fuera, like other 
 verbs in the subjunctive, has the same termination for the first and 
 third persons singular. 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 Two or more nominatives singular, joined by the 
 conjunction y> require a verb plural : 
 
 El rey y la reyna son coronados, the king and queen 
 are crowned. 
 
SYNTAX. 223 
 
 Afltel. — When the verb precedes two nominatives singulat thus 
 
 united, it is sometimes singular : Nunca me ha sido mas necesario hi 
 mixilio v iu asistencia. But in making this verb singular, the writer 
 was probably more influenced by the great resemblance in meaning 
 of the two nouns. Had the nouns been more different in significa- 
 tion, he would have committed a gross solecism. Even as it is, the 
 construction ought not to be imitated. If both nouns are perfectly 
 synonymous, one would be sufficient : if they are not, the verb 
 should be plural. 
 
 2. If the nominatives be of different persons, the verb agrees 
 with the first rather than the second, and with the second rather than 
 the third : Yo y tu ircmos, I and thou will go : tu y el ireis, thou and 
 he shall go. In the former example iremos is the first person plural, 
 and agrees with nosotros understood ; in the latter, ireis is the second 
 person plural, and agrees with tosotros understood. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 When two or more nouns of different numbers are 
 connected by the conjunctions 6, sino, ccc. the verb 
 agrees with the last : 
 
 Que yo 6 ellos vengan, whether I or they come. 
 No solamente el padre, sino las hijas habian muerto ; 
 not only the father, but the daughters were dead. 
 
 Kate. — In the preceding sentences, and in all those of a similar 
 construction, there is an ellipsis of the verb after the first nomina- 
 tive : Que yo venga, 6 cue ellos vengan : No solamente el padre habia 
 muerto, sino las hijas habian muerto. Indeed many of the anomalies in 
 language are occasioned by elliptical forms of expression. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 A noun of multitude may have a verb either singular 
 or plural : 
 
 La gente viene, the people come. 
 La genie van, the people go. 
 
 Una tropa de soldados entrdron, a crowd of soldiers 
 entered. 
 
224? SYNTAX. 
 
 Note.— A noun of multitude is cftener formed with a singular than 
 -with a plural verb, but the best Castilian writers use both forms of 
 construction. Sometimes they assign a singular, at other times a plural 
 verb to the same noun. Little reliance is therefore to be placed on 
 the distinction which some writers on the subject have attempted to 
 draw between Collectives Definite and Indefinite, the former, ac- 
 cording to them, admitting a verb singular, and the latter a verb plu- 
 ral. If the student will take the trouble to read a few pages of 
 Cervantes, Mariana, Father Isla, kc. be will find that such a dis- 
 tinction is often purely visionary. Seme words, however, as nation, 
 pueblo, parlamento, ejercito, are never found with a plural verb. 
 
 2. Government of Verbs. 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 Active verbs govern the accusative case : 
 
 Los buenos araan la vhtud, the good love virtue. 
 Los buenos quieren a Digs, the good love God. 
 El me ensehciy he teaches me. 
 
 Note 1. When a person is the accusative, the preposition d is pre- 
 fixed to the noun ; but, as we have before observed, that preposition 
 has no government: it is only the sign of the case. It is therefore 
 often omitted when the cases are sufficiently distinct without it ; and 
 it should also be so when its insertion would occasion ambiguity : 
 Jntroduje la muger alconde, I introduced the woman to the count, 
 If a were inserted before the article prefixed to muger, how could any 
 one determine whether the count were introduced to the woman, or 
 the woman to the count? And yet such forms of expression are by- 
 no means unfrequent in celebrated Castilian authors. Whatever 
 excellencies many of these may possess, perspicuity is not always 
 amongst the number. 
 
 2. When the accusative case of a pronoun is governed by a verb 
 in the imperative, or the infinitive, or by the present participle, it 
 follows, and is united with, the word by which it is governed: 
 AmemosisA, let us love hei* : AmarhA, to love her : Amandai a, loving 
 her. In other cases it precedes the governing verb, as in the last 
 example under the above rule. When the verb is compounded, the 
 governed pronoun precedes both the auxiliary and the partieiple 
 
SYNTAX. 225 
 
 Si la hubiera amado y if I had loved her ; but it is placed between the 
 two words forming the compound perfect participle : HabiendoLA 
 amado, having loved her. 
 
 Sometimes, however, the governed pronoun may follow the verb, 
 even when that verb is not in the imperative, the infinitive, or the 
 present participle j but in such cases the verb must always be the 
 first word in the sentence : ConoscioyiE inmediatamente. he knew me 
 immediately: CegdbaLEs el interes, interest blinded them. Tbis 
 mode of construction is considered elegant. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 Many active verbs govern also these objective cases 
 of the personal pronouns me, te, le, with their plurals 
 nos 9 os, lesj and also se, which is of both numbers : 
 
 Me hallo, he spoke to me. 
 Te did algo, he gave something to thee. 
 Le escribi, I wrote to him (or to her.) 
 Ella os dijo, she told you. 
 
 Note 1. As these pronouns have the same form with the accusa- 
 tives, so they are similarly placed. See Note 2, under Rule xxxvii. 
 
 2. When a verb not in the imperative, infinitive, &c. governs two 
 pronouns, the one in the accusative and the other in the objective, 
 the former immediately precedes the verb, unless that verb be 
 reflected: Me lo dijo, he told it to me ; se la did el rey, the king 
 gave her to them. When the verb is reflected, the objective; on 
 the contrary, is placed nearer to that verb : Se me descubrw, be dis- 
 covered himself to me. Lastly, if both pronouns follow a verb in 
 the imperative, infinitive, or the present participle, the objective is 
 joined immediately to the verb : Quiero decirrxlo, I wish to tell it to 
 thee, 
 
 3. Sometimes two accusative or two objective cases are used 
 with the same verb. In these instances the one precedes, and the 
 other often, if that verb be not in the imperative, &c. follows the 
 verb. The former can admit no preposition ; the latter always re- 
 quires it : Yo te qmo a ti, perp tu no me amas a mi j I love thee, but 
 thou dost not love me : Ellos se aman A sr, they love themselves 
 Sometimes mistne k added to the latter pronoun : Me amo a an 
 
 if 5 
 
226 SYNTAX. 
 
 mismo, I love myself: Nos amamos a nosotros mismos, we love 
 mine'ves. The association, however, of mismo is unnecessary, as the 
 two simple cases must surely be sufficiently emphatic without it ; 
 and accordingly we find that it is not now so generally used in this 
 case as it formerly was. 
 
 4. Sometimes, when the verb is not in the imperative, &c. both 
 the governed pronouns precede that verb, and then the one usually 
 placed after the verb precedes even the other that always goes before 
 it : a ti te amo, I love thee. 
 
 After what has been said it is perhaps scarcely necessary to add 
 that when the yerb is in the imperative, &c. both pronouns are 
 placed after that verb, and the one preceded by the preposition in- 
 variably follows the other : AmemosLE a el, let us love him : 
 AmandosE a si, loving himself, &c. 
 
 3. Verbs Requiring Certain Prepositions.* 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 Verbs implying motionfrom a place, are followed by 
 de; to a place, by a ; and through a place by por ; 
 
 Viene de Francia, he comes from France. 
 
 Va a LondreS) he is going to London. 
 
 Anda por el campo, he is walking through the field. 
 
 Note 1. Towards is generally rendered by hacia, sometimes by 
 para, if the destination be uncertain: Part id para la ciadad, he set 
 out for the city. And here the student will perceive that the 
 English expression is exactly similar in both cases. rl He is gone 
 to the city," contains a positive and unconditional assertion : *' he 
 set out/or the city," means that the subject of the assertion intended 
 at the time of his departure to proceed to the city, but it by no 
 
 * With this part of his subject the author is as little satisfied as 
 with that of the Adjectives similarly situated. See the note to 
 Adjectives Reauiring Certain Prepositions* He will endeavour, how- 
 ever, to lessen the discouraging difficulties of both, by inserting in 
 the Appendix, a copious List of Verbs, and other words, with the 
 prepositions by which they are followed, and the nouns governed by 
 those prepositions. 
 
SYNTAX. 227 
 
 means implies that some unexpected circumstance might not divert 
 him from his design. 
 
 2. Verbs implying distance, separation, &c, are comprehended 
 under the above rule : Me alejarc de mi tierra, I shall remove from 
 my country j futron de laprision, they went from prison. 
 
 XL. 
 
 Verbs signifying plenty or tonnt, care or negligence, 
 remembrance or forgetful 'ness, praising or blaming, load- 
 ing, filling, or unloading, binding or releasing, jeering or 
 pitying, receiving, depriving, repenting, absolving, using, 
 and many others, are followed by de : 
 
 El palacio ahundaha de riquezas, the palace abounded 
 with riches. 
 
 El rey se acuerda de su amigo, the king remembers 
 his friend. 
 
 Me olvide de todo el mundo, I forgot every body. 
 
 Estaba siemnre caroado de miserias, he was always 
 loaded with misery. 
 
 Rien de los que se compadecen de ellos, they laugh at 
 those who pity them. 
 
 Note 1. Olvidar, when it is not reflected, governs an accusative. To 
 remember is also rendered by tenerd lamemoria* 
 
 2> Verbs reflected of jeering, of trusting, and distrusting, and many 
 others, also require de: Fiate de mi, rely on me. 
 
 XLI. 
 
 All verbs implying acquisition or loss, advantage or 
 disadvantage, and requiring in English the prepositions 
 to, for, or from, are followed by a: 
 
 Se convertio a Dios, he turned to God. 
 
 Embio a Madrid, he sent to Madrid. 
 
 Vote. — This rule is by far the most general of any in the Spanish 
 "Syntax : it is too general to be understood without the. aid of nume- 
 rous subdivisions. 
 
 The following are followed by d : 
 
 1. Verbs of ashing or denying, of granting or refusing ; Elreo 
 pidid perdon a! jnez, the criminal asked pardon from the 
 
228 SYNTAX. 
 
 judge : Nego eljucz perdon al reo, the judge deiied par- 
 don to the criminal. 
 
 2. Verbs of buying or selling : Ccmjrrart los libros d ml amigo, I 
 
 will buy the books from my friend : Vendio la casd d la 
 mnger, he sold the house to the woman. 
 
 3. Verbs of borrowing or lending, of owing or paying : Tomd pres- 
 
 tado el dinero al conde, he borrowed the money from the 
 count : Debio mucho al tesoro del rey, he owed ranch to 
 the king's treasury. 
 
 4. "Verbs of promising and offering: Prometio el dinero al nego- 
 
 ciante, he promised the money to the merchant; Ofrecioel 
 reyno d su primogtnito, he offered the kingdom to his eldest 
 son. 
 
 5. Verbs of giving and of taking away : Did el seual d su com" 
 
 panero, he gave the signal to his companion : Robo las 
 pedrerias a la mnger, he stole the jewels from the woman. 
 (3. Verbs of conforming, yielding, and resisting: Se acomoda al 
 juicio de otros, he conforms to the judgment of others : Se 
 opuso a las leyes del reyno, he opposed the laws of the 
 kingdom. 
 
 7. Verbs of declaring and recommending: Declarart la verdad d 
 
 todos los hombres, I will declare the truth to all men : En- 
 commendard el negocio al rey, I will recommend the business 
 to the king. 
 
 8. Verbs of questioning and answering : Pregunto al hombre, he 
 
 asked the man : Respondio d la ranger, he answered the 
 woman. 
 
 9. Verbs of pertaining and happening : Pertenece el hombre d la 
 
 tierra, man belongs to the earth : Desgracias acoutecen d los 
 hombres, misfortunes happen to men. 
 
 10. Verbs of playing and oondemning: Juega a les naipes, he is 
 
 playing at cards : El general condemno al desertor d la 
 muerte, the general condemned the deserter to. death. 
 
 11. Many other verbs which are not easily reducible to distinct 
 
 heads ; as adherir, cenirse, humiliarse, &c. 
 
 XLII. 
 
 Many verbs are found with en or con, according to 
 the meaning of the sentence : 
 
SYNTAX. 22 
 
 El mundo se divide en muckas partes, the world is 
 divided into many parts. 
 
 El se caso con la p-incesa Maria, he married the 
 princess Mary. 
 
 Note. — Verbs of behaviour, general conduct, &c. are generally fol- 
 lowed by con : Ajustarse con alguno, to settle with some one. 
 
 EXERCISE ON VERBS. 
 
 1. On the Concord of the Verb with its Nominative. 
 
 My brother and sister {are opposed) to it, but 
 
 hermano y nermann oponerse (irr.) a pero 
 
 my father and mother consent. The good are happy. 
 
 padre y madre consentir (irr.) bueno feliz 
 The wicked are wretched. The meadows are beautiful 
 
 malo infeliz prado hermoso 
 
 in Spring. Fortune and caprice govern the 
 
 en primavera Jbrtuna capricho gobernar (irr.) 
 
 world. Interest and vanity cause much unhappiness, 
 mundo interes vanidad causar mucho infelicidad 
 
 I or you ought to go. If we or they should go. A 
 
 6 deber ir si 
 
 babbler speaks when we do not hear. His virtues 
 Jiablador hablar cuando escuchar virtual 
 
 are noble. Thou and he shall perish. The man, 
 
 perecer (irr.) hombre 
 
 the woman, and I began to sing. I and he shall 
 
 muger comenzar (irr.) a cantar 
 
 relate the adventure. The parliament decreed that 
 contar aventura parlamento decretar que 
 
 the army should return. The majority opposed the 
 
 ejercito volver majoridad oponerse a 
 
 resolution. The people are looking** The people 
 resolucion pueblo mirar gente 
 
 are powerful. The nation is powerful. An infinity of 
 
 poderoso nacion injinidad 
 
 * To be rendered either by the third person of the indicative 
 present, or by estar with the present participle. 
 
230 SYNTAX. 
 
 men entered. A multitude of women followed. A 
 
 entrar multilud seguir (irr.) 
 
 crowd of children cried out. The king and the queen 
 tropa nino clamar rey reyna 
 
 are there. Demosthenes and Cicero were two great 
 
 alii Ciceron 
 
 orators. Whether he or I were there (is of no moment). 
 orador que nada es 
 
 Whether you or they should go, the king shall be 
 informed. 
 informar 
 
 2. On the Government of Verbs. 
 
 God governs the world. Riches produce 
 
 gobernar (irr.) mundo riquezas producir 
 
 envy, and discord produces quarrels* Love God, 
 
 envidia discordia contienda querer (irr.) Dios 
 
 christians. Nature makes the poet. Minos loved 
 
 cristiano naturaleza hacer (irr.) poeta 
 
 his people more than his own family. I resolved to 
 
 pueblo propio Jamilia resolver (irr.) 
 
 go to seek Senor Arias de Londoiia. We fear God. 
 ir a buscar • temer 
 
 We honour the Icing. She loves her mistress. The 
 
 honrar am a 
 
 man asked Don Quixote. He prayed the damsel, 
 pedir (irr.) rogar (irr.) donzella 
 
 We desired the innkeeper. I hated the alguaziL 
 
 desear mesonero aborrecer (irr.) — =» 
 
 We always loved the mother. They terrified 
 
 siempre madre poner (irr.) miedo 
 
 my husband. The wicked often praise the good. 
 
 marido malo muchas veces alabar 
 
 We heard the preacher. You saw the minister, 
 oir (irr.) predicador w(irr.) ministro 
 
 They reproved the servant, and praised the master. 
 
 reprehender criado alabar amo 
 
 We surprised the enemy. You conquered the 
 sosprehender enemigo veneer 
 
SYNTAX. 231 
 
 Moors. The man disarmed John. Csesar conquered 
 
 Morisco desarmar Juan 
 
 Pompey. 
 
 Pompcio. 
 
 Place of the Governed Pronouns. 
 
 I am resolved to send thee to Salamanca. The 
 
 revolver (irr.) enviar 
 
 man observing ?ne attentively, said: I wish 
 
 observar attentamente decir (irr.) querer (irr.) 
 
 to punish thee. The countess, seeing him in the gar- 
 castigar condesa ver (irr.) en jar* 
 
 den, called out. We desire to see her. Forgive them, 
 din clamar desear de perdonar 
 
 G God. Forgive him. gentlemen. Let us love her. 
 
 seh or 
 Let us separate them, I wish to help thee. You ought to 
 
 separar ayudar deber 
 
 see them. If we had seen them. If you had hated 
 
 aborrecer (irv.) 
 her* If they had J , defeated him. God sees us, calls us, 
 
 veneer llama 
 
 and will judge us. My father placed me in his 
 
 juzgar poner (irr.) a 
 
 business. He ordered me that I should follow 
 oficio ordenar segidr (irr.) 
 
 him. We put ourselves. He received us with 
 
 poner (irr.) recibir con 
 
 gladness. They told us. We spoke to them. I 
 
 alegria decir (irr.) hablar 
 
 asked him. The wife wrote to him. We told 
 preguntar muget escribir 
 
 her. What I had heard seemed to me a dream. 
 
 toque parecer (irr.) sueiio 
 
 We will punish you. He turned it (neut.) He 
 
 castigar convertir (irr.) 
 
 killed her. She saw them. They spoke to us, Give 
 watar dar (irr.) 
 
 it (n.) to the man. 
 
232 SYNTAX. 
 
 He told it (n.) to me. We gave her to them. Her 
 image presented itself to them. They will grant her 
 imagen presentarse conceder 
 
 to me. They will give her to them. I told it (n.) to 
 Iter. She granted it (n.) to them. They gave them (m.) 
 to us. Husbands, love your wives : God has given 
 
 mar i do muger 
 
 them to you. , God requires thy heart : give it to him : 
 
 requerir (irr.) corazon 
 canst thou refuse it to him ? I wish to give her to 
 poder (irr.) rehusar 
 
 them. The privilege was great : he resolved to grant 
 
 privilegio 
 it to them. He discovered himself to us. Give her 
 
 descubrirse 
 this letter, but do not give it to her before him. 
 carta pero delante de 
 
 3. On Verbs requiring certain Prepositions.* 
 
 I passed from the bitterest grief to the greatest 
 pasar amargo dolor 
 
 joy. We had passed then from the hardships of 
 alegria entonces rigor 
 
 slavery to the sweets of liberty. They have passed 
 escalvitad dulzura libertad 
 
 from death unto life. We bring wines from 
 
 muerte vida traer (irr.) vino 
 
 France to England. The child was surfeited with 
 Francia Inglaterra ahitarse 
 
 meats, Let us arm ourselves with patience. 
 manjar armarse paciencia 
 
 He filled the house with people. Remember thy 
 
 llenar casa gente acordarse (irr.) 
 
 Creator. He boasts o^ wisdom. We shall repent 
 Criador gloriarse _ sabio arrepentirse 
 
 * If the student should be at ar^ loss to determine from the 
 7iiea7iing of the verb what preposition should be employed, let him 
 turn to the List in the Appendix to Syntax. 
 
SYNTAX. 233 
 
 of our crimes. I shall remove from my country, 
 
 delito alejarse tierra 
 
 They escapecl/row prison. 1 appeaiy?om the sentence. 
 escapar prision apelar sentencia 
 
 He is recovering from sickness. We rest 
 
 convalecer (irr.) enfirmidad descansar 
 
 from labour. They disembarked from the ship. He 
 
 trabajo desembarcar nave 
 
 has degeneratedy?-o??2 his birth. He was deposed 
 
 degenerar nacimiento deponer (irr.) 
 
 from his authority. They are loaded with wheat. 
 
 autoridad car gar trigo 
 
 You ought to abstain from fruit. Rules always 
 
 deber abstenerse (irr.) fruto reglo siempre 
 want examples. I doubt not of the death of my 
 necesitar ejemplo dudar 
 
 husband. Christians, pity my youth 
 
 tnarido cristiano compadecerse (irr.) juventud 
 and my tears. Let us avail ourselves of 'the present 
 
 lagrima aprovecharse present e 
 
 time. He had changed his dress. The (worldly 
 iiempo mudar vestido mun- 
 
 niinded) will deride me. I asked the innkeeper if 
 dano burlarse preguntar mesonero si 
 
 he had any fish. The adventures of Gil Bias, says 
 
 pescado aventura decirijxx*) 
 
 Father Isla, were stolen from Spain, and adopted in 
 padre robar Espana adoptar en 
 
 France. No one is able to resist his arguments. 
 poder resistir argumento 
 Let us dedicate ourselves to God. He accustoms 
 dedicarse habituarse 
 
 himself to bear the fatigue of journeys. I prefer 
 
 sufrir fatiga Jornada preferir (irr.) 
 
 my country to the hundred cities of Crete. The 
 
 patria ciudad Creta 
 
 fortune of the wicked resembles the lightning which 
 fortuna malo semejarse relampago 
 
 precedes a (clap of thunder). He can play at cards, 
 precede r trueno poder jugar naipes 
 
234 SYNTAX. 
 
 and you can play at dice, It concerns princes to 
 
 dado importar principe 
 
 judge of their ministers. Adam was condemned to 
 juzgar ministro A dan condemnar 
 
 cultivate the ground. We belong to the 
 
 cidtivar tierra pertenecer (irr.) 
 
 earth. (Everything) seemed to her a dream. The 
 
 todo parecer (irr.) sueno 
 
 world has often been compared to a theatre. Turn 
 mundo compararse teatro convertirse 
 
 to God, my sons. He paid the debt to the executors. 
 
 hijo pagar denda albacea 
 
 He comes from Spain, and he is going to Italy. 
 venir (irr.) ir (irr.) Italia 
 
 We shall return the money to the banker. We 
 
 volver (irr.) diner o banqnero 
 
 owe much to heaven. He promised his daughter to 
 deber mucho cielo prometer hija 
 
 the count. I will abandon myself to my fate. We 
 
 conde abandonarse suerte 
 
 ought to conform to reason. He condescended 
 deber conformarse r&zon condescender (irr.) 
 
 to entreaties. He yielded to the arguments of his 
 
 ruego rendirse 
 
 friend. He burned in his desires. 
 amigo abrasarse deseo 
 
 XLIII. 
 
 VERBS PASSIVE 
 
 Require the preposition de or por before the agent : 
 
 La virtud es amada de or por todos, virtue is loved 
 by all. 
 
 El rey fue herido por su antagonist a, the king was 
 wounded by his antagonist. 
 
 Note 1. De and por cannot always be indifferently used for each 
 other. Generally when the action is of a mental nature, either de 
 or par may be employed ; but p>r oftener than de when the actor 
 
SYNTAX. 235 
 
 is a person The two examples under the rule illustrate both 
 cases. 1,_But, like many other distinctions, this is often fallacious. 
 
 2. The instrument of an action requires con before it : El la mato 
 con un martillo, he killed her with a hammer. The injury or bloio 
 occasioning death, &c. may be preceded by either de or con in the 
 singular, and a in the plural : El la mato de (or con) un puntapie, he 
 killed her with a kick ; el la mato a puntapies, he killed her with 
 kicks. 
 
 XLIV. 
 
 Verbs passive in English are frequently rendered 
 into Spanish by prefixing the pronoun se to the third 
 person singular and plural of the active voice : 
 
 Se oi/6 una voz, a voice was heard. 
 Se ama la virtud, virtue is loved. 
 
 Note 1. Here the student should be careful not to confound verbs 
 reflected with those of which the passive voice is formed in the pre- 
 ceding manner. The former are reflected through all the persons ; 
 the latter in the third person only. We cannot say Pedro se quierz 
 when we mean to assert that Peter is the endurer of the action. 
 loving ; but Pedro es querido, 
 
 2. Most active verbs may be used reflectively by adding the accu- 
 sative cases of all the personal pronouns to those verbs : Detente, 
 emigOy Gil Bias, stop, friend, Gil Bias. Here the accusative te is 
 added to detener, which is an active, not a reflected verb. Without 
 the pronoun, the action of the verb would have no object on which 
 its influence might terminate. Similar forms of expression are com- 
 mon in our own writers, and especially in our poets : 
 
 " Oh stay thee, stay thee, man of blood ! — w 
 " Oh haste thee, haste, the lady cries." 
 
 Infinitive Mood, 
 
 XLV. 
 
 One verb governs another in the infinitive, sometimes 
 without, but generally with a preposition: 
 
 Quiero estudiar, I wish to study. 
 Voy a pasearme, I am going to walk. 
 
236 SYNTAX. 
 
 XLVI. 
 
 Verbs signifying to dare, to begin, to teach, to learn, 
 to exhort, to invite, to prepare, to assist, to compel, fyc. 
 require a before the infinitive : 
 
 No me atrevo a ir al apasento del rey, I dare not go 
 to the king's apartment : 
 
 Ayudo a sembrar, he helped to sow. 
 
 ILmpezb a baylar, he began to dance. 
 
 Se preparo a partir, he prepared to depart. 
 
 Me solicito a ir, he desired me to go. 
 
 Me convido a cenar, he invited me to supper. 
 
 XL VII. 
 
 Verbs of abstaining, ceasing, depriving, mdjinishing, 
 are followed by de : 
 
 Me abstengo de beber vino, I abstain from drinking 
 wine. 
 
 Cesad, amigos, de atormentarme, cease, friends, to 
 torment me. 
 
 Me habia privado de escribir, he had debarred me 
 from writing. 
 
 Note, — Adjectives and verbs generally admit the same prepositions 
 before the following infinitive as they do before nouns. Hence, the 
 rules which have been given for them will be found useful on the 
 present subject. Thus a verb requires para before the infinitive, 
 when the effect or consequence of an action is denoted. 
 
 XLVIII. 
 
 An action just past is rendered by acabar de, and 
 one that must necessarily happen hereafter by haber de 
 or tener que, before the infinitive : 
 
 Acaba de llegar, he is just arrived. 
 Ha de escribir, he must write. 
 
 Note. — To ha ve, followed by an infinitive, is rendered by tener que; 
 
SYNTAX. 237 
 
 to be, by haber de : Teugo que escribir, I have to write ; he de escribir, 
 I am to write, or I must write : No hay que pcrder tiempo, no time is 
 to be lost. 
 
 XLIX. 
 
 The infinitive is frequently governed by r adjectives, 
 participles, and substantives: 
 
 Cansado de trabajar, tired of working. 
 Licencia tengo de ir a Londres, I have permission to 
 go to London. 
 
 Note 1. When the infinitive is governed by a noun, the preposi- 
 tion de is always required before the verb, as in the latter example. 
 
 2. The infinitive, as we have before observed, lias often the nature 
 of a verbal noun ; and it sometimes admits the definite article before 
 it : Me gusta el leer, reading pleases me j al ver d estos hombres, to 
 see these men. 
 
 L. 
 
 The infinitive in English is often rendered into 
 Spanish by a conjunction and a finite verb : 
 
 Me ordeno que le siguiese inmediatamente 9 he or- 
 dered me to follow him immediately. 
 
 Se que todo esto es verdadero, I know all this to be 
 true. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 LI. 
 
 Participles have the same government as the verbs 
 from which they are derived : 
 
 Queriendo a Dios, loving God. 
 
 Arrepintiendose de sus culpas, repenting of his 
 crimes. 
 
 LII. 
 
 The perfect participle is declined after the verb ser ; 
 but not after haber : 
 
 Elhombre es premiado, the man is rewarded. 
 
238 SYNTAX. 
 
 La muger es premiada, the woman is rewarded. 
 Los hombres son premiados, the men are rewarded. 
 Las muger es son premiada s, the women are rewarded, 
 
 Notel. The same participle is also declined after certain neuter 
 verbs, but then ser is understood : Ella parece affligida, she appears 
 afflicted, she appears to be afflicted. 
 
 2. The participle past is sometimes declined after tener, but then 
 it does not agree with the nominative of the verb, but with the noun 
 governed by the verb : Tengo escrita una carta a mi hijo t I have 
 written a letter to my son. This declension happens only when 
 there is an accusative after tener ; in other cases the participle is 
 indeclinable : Tengo escrito d mis hermanas, I have written to my 
 sisters. But the instances in which tener is used as an auxiliary are 
 xexj few, — in modern writers at least. 
 
 Anciently the perfect participle was declined in Spanish as it is- 
 now in French in such instances as the following : Las cartas que 
 hemos escritas (Les lettres que nous avons ecrites), the letters which we 
 have written; Las mugeres que han vistas (Lesfemmes qu'ils ont vues);. 
 the women whom they have seen. 
 
 3. The perfect participle is sometimes elegantly used without the 
 present participle siendo, but the latter is always understood : Tomada 
 esia resolution, me levantz, this resolution being taken, I arose ; Hecho 
 este juramento, me prepare d ir, this oath being made, I prepared 
 to go. 
 
 4. The present participle after a finite verb in English, is some- 
 times rendered into Spanish by the infinitive : Le oigo cantar, I hear 
 him singing. This form of construction is chiefly restricted to the 
 governing verbs oir and ver. 
 
 LIXL 
 
 The English present participle is often rendered by 
 the infinitive in Spanish : 
 
 The fatigue of walking, lafatiga de pasear. 
 Without seeing him, sin verle. 
 
 JSfote.— This mode ef construction is generally used when the 
 English present participle is preceded by a preposition. 
 
SYNTAX. 239 
 
 Exercise on the Prepositions required by Verbs Passive, 
 on the Infinitive Mood, and on Participles. 
 
 He is loved by all. Great men are persecuted bij 
 to do perseguir (irr.) 
 
 envy. Learning and virtue are sought by few. Caesar 
 envidia ciencia virtud buscar poco 
 
 was slain by the conspirators. Abel was slain by Cain* 
 matar conspirador — — — — 
 
 Rome was built by Romulus. God is adored by all 
 Roma fundar Romulo adorar 
 
 nations. The history of Don Quixottewas written 
 nacion — — escribir (irr.) 
 
 by Cervantes. This church was founded by the king, 
 
 iglesia rey 
 
 The house was overthrown by the wind. The criminal 
 
 casa derribqr -cento reo 
 
 was sentenced by the judge. 
 sentenciar juez 
 
 I wish to go, but he does not wish to return. We 
 querer ir (irr,) pero ro/rer (irr.) 
 
 ought to suffer with patience the evils which we are not 
 deber sufrir paciencia mat 
 
 able to avoid. We ought to jiee from vice, and 
 
 poder (irr.) evitar huir vicio 
 
 to practise virtue. Grammar teaches us to speak and 
 
 practicar gramatica ensenar hablar 
 
 to vcrite correctly. We ought to htotu ourselves* • 
 
 escribir correctamente conocer (irr.) a nos mismos 
 
 The armies begin to descend. We were compelled 
 ejercito empezar descender compel ir (in.) 
 
 to abandon the city. We were obliged to see them* 
 
 abandonar ciuclad obligar ver (irr.) 
 
 You assisted them to conquer the enemy. Help mej 
 
 ayudar veneer enemigo 
 
 my friends, to conquer myself. Fortune will, perhaps. 
 
 ami go Jbrtuna quiz a 
 
 cease to persecute me. They ceased to torment me with 
 cesar perseguir (irr.) tormentar 
 
240 SYNTAX. 
 
 their remedies. We abstain from drinking. I prepared 
 
 remedio abstener(\rr.) beber 
 
 myself to go. I exhort thee to live well. He will 
 
 exhortar vivir 
 
 learn to write. I assisted the captain to undress. 
 
 capitan desnudar. 
 
 The Asiatics remembering the dignity of Berenice, 
 
 Asiano acordarse (irr.) dignidad — ■ 
 
 and pitying her hard fate, sent her sue- 
 
 compadecerse (irr.) malo suerte envia so- 
 
 cours. The emperor considering the hard fate of the 
 
 eorro emperador consider ar 
 
 queen, and admiring her constancy, resolved to 
 
 reyna admirar constancia resolver (irr.) 
 
 send her some consolation. Profiting by the 
 
 consolacion aprovecharse 
 opportunity, I went away. Ihave just seen the king, 
 ocasion irse (irr.) ver (irr.) 
 
 and they have just heard the acclamations of the people. 
 oir (irr.) grita pueblo 
 
 We have to write. He is to go. They were to sing. 
 
 cantnr. 
 The men are fatigued. The girl is loved. The 
 fatigar ninu 
 
 wicked are hated. The good are esteemed. The 
 
 malo aborrecer (irr.) bueno estimar 
 
 woman shall be rewarded. Their virtues shall be 
 muger premiar 
 
 rewarded. The church is built. The churches have 
 
 iglesia fundar 
 been founded. The learned are honoured. The fatigue 
 
 sabio honrar 
 
 of running. The facility of writing. The labour of 
 
 correr facilidad trabajo 
 
 thinking. Without answering, he departed. Without 
 pensar (irr.) respond er partir 
 
 seeing her, I walked through the street. 
 andar (irr.) culle 
 
SYNTAX. 241 
 
 PREPOSITION.* 
 
 LIV. 
 
 Prepositions govern the objective case : 
 
 Sin ti, without thee. 
 
 Quejd de mi, he complains of me. 
 
 Con la espdda, with the sword. 
 
 "Note 1. The preposition in Spanish immediately precedes the 
 noun or pronoun which it governs. The same rule should be ob- 
 served in English. 
 
 2. Many prepositions; and words used as such 3 are Followed by 
 the preposition de : 
 
 Acerca del batallo, concerning the battle. 
 A cubierto de la tempested, under shelter from the storm, 
 Ademas de esto, besides this. 
 Al lado de ella, at or by the side of her. 
 AI rededor de la casa. around the house. 
 Antes de las ocho, before eight o'clock. 
 A pesar de esto, Twtwitkstanding this. 
 Cerca de la plaza, near the place. 
 Dehajo de la mesa, under the table. 
 ■ Delante del palacio, before the palace. 
 Dentro de la casa, within the house. 
 Despues del sermon, after the sermon. 
 Detras del caslillo, behind the castle. 
 Encima de la puena, above the door. 
 Enfrente de la casa, opposite the house. 
 
 * Of the Syntax of the adverb nothing can be said. It has no 
 government; and its position in the sentence is too variable to be 
 determined by rules. Much depends on the sound mid harmony of 
 the syllables ; much on emphasis, and the relative importance of 
 words, but more still on caprice. Generally, however^ adverbs of 
 manner, especially those in mente, follow the verb they qualify. 
 
 M 
 
242 SYNTAX. 
 
 Fuera de la ciudad, without the city. 
 
 Mas ac& de las mur alias, on this side the walls. 
 
 Mas alia, del parque, beyond the park. 
 
 3. The preposition is usually repeated before every noun : 
 Cuando vieron que el testador dejaba las mejores alajas a la seHora 
 
 Jacinta y a su nieta ; and when they saw that the testator had left 
 
 the best effects to dame Jacinta and her niece. 
 
 CONJUNCTION. 
 
 LV. 
 
 The conjunction connects like cases and moods : 
 
 Yo y tu temimos a Dios, I and thou fear God. 
 Ella *ca y viene, she goes and comes. 
 
 LVI. 
 
 Some conjunctions require the indicative, others the 
 subjunctive, mood after them: 
 
 g Porque cor re vm ? why do you run ? 
 
 Es preciso que venga, he must come. 
 
 Note, — Many conj unctions require the subjunctive where no con. 
 tingency is implied ; and where contingency is implied, the sub- 
 junctive must always be used, whatever conjunction precede. 
 
 LVII. 
 
 Dado que, Men que, con tal que, hasia que, amenos 
 que, no sea que, antes que, encaso que y sin que, sea que, 
 ojaia, and other conjunctions which imply something 
 conditional or contingent, govern the subjunctive : 
 
 Con tal que viniere, provided he should come. 
 Bten que la ambition sea un view, though ambition is 
 a vice. 
 
SYNTAX. 243 
 
 LVIII. 
 
 Que, after words implying nothing either conditional 
 or contingent) is followed by the indicative : 
 
 Se que viene, I know that he is coming. 
 Dice que vendra, he says that he will come. 
 
 LIX. 
 
 Que, after verbs implying Jit ness, necessity, command, 
 permission, desire, joy, wonder, fear, doubt, &c. after 
 impersonals, and many verbs used interrogatively or 
 negatively? is followed by the subjunctive : 
 
 Conviene que venga^ it is fit that he come. 
 Temo que vaya, I fear that he may go. 
 No ha ninguno que oiga, there is no one to hear. 
 No creo que saiga, I do not believe he will go out. 
 
 'Note 1. Que, after verbs winch are a consequence, an effect, Cxc. of 
 some preceding action, and which generally require the infinitive in 
 English, is followed by the subjunctive in Spanish : Haciendo strides 
 que callaseii, making signs for them to be silent. 
 
 2. Some conjunctions, though they usually govern the subjunc- 
 tive, admit the indicative in certain tenses if no contingency be im- 
 plied. Thus aunqv.e and bien que are, in that case, followed by the 
 preterimperfect of the indicative : Aunque suplicaba ianto, though he 
 entreated so much. 
 
 3. The best direction which can be given for the use of the indi- 
 cative or the subjunctive after que, £cc. is the positive or contingent 
 sense of the sentence. But after the conjunctions enumerated under 
 Rule lvii., the subjunctive is used if even the verb like the indica- 
 tive simply asserts: Bien que la ambition sea un vicio, though ambi- 
 tion is a vice. 
 
 M 2 
 
244 SYNTAX. 
 
 INTERJECTION. 
 
 LX. 
 
 Adjectives used as interjections require de before 
 the noun or pronoun following: 
 
 Pobre de mi padre ! my poor father ! 
 Pohre de mi ! poor me ! 
 
 Note 1« — Ay, when equivalent to icoe, is also followed by de: 
 ! Ay de mi ! woe to me! 
 
 Ncte % — The interjection ete is used only before pronouns, with 
 
 which it is united, and it requires the objective case : 
 
 Eiela que! lo ! she goes. 
 Eteme que vengo ! Id ! I come. 
 
 Exercise on the Rides for Prepositions and Conjunctions. 
 
 The hopes en which his ambition had fed, 
 
 esperanza de ambition alimentarse 
 
 were, destroyed. The soldiers were before the palace. 
 perder (irr.) soldado delante palacio 
 
 After an absence of two months, he returned. 
 despues ausencia mes volver (irr.) 
 
 Under the appearance of joy, she concealed fear. 
 bajo apariencia alegria ocidtar miedo 
 
 He came . before, me. He spoke to me about the 
 
 venir (irr.) delante hablar cerca 
 
 affair. He lived by the side of a mountain. Stay 
 nevocio vivir al lado monte quedarse 
 
 with me, my son, and you will be {under shelter) from 
 
 kijo estar a cubierto 
 
 the rain. Without thee, the world would be a desert; 
 iluvia sin mundo desiertQ 
 
SYNTAX. 2i5 
 
 xvith thee, it is supportable. We have been before the 
 con tolerable. ir (irr.) del 'ante 
 
 judge. Before nine o'clock. Flattering words insi- 
 juez antes lisonjero palabra insi- 
 
 nuate themselves like a serpent under flowers. With 
 nuarse como serpiente aebajojlor 
 
 us there is safety. Behind us there is danger, and 
 
 seguridad detras peligro 
 
 before us uncertainty. Before his death, he con- 
 delante incertidumbre antes muerie con- 
 
 fessed his crime before witnesses, hie drew from under 
 fesar (ivr.) delito delante testigo sacar debajo 
 
 the habit a purse. He saw himself compelled to 
 
 vestido bolsa verse (irr.) precisado 
 
 place me under the rod of a preceptor. Cast thy 
 
 poner (irr.) bajo ferula poner 
 
 eyes on me. How shall I be able to live mthoui 
 
 ojo en como poder (irr.) vivir sin 
 
 thee? There was no mercy for me. 
 misericordia por 
 The thing could not be discovered, because they 
 
 cosa descubrirse (irr.) porque 
 
 never carried any letters. Consider, man, thai 
 nunca llevar carta consider ar 
 
 every thing has had a beginning, and that it xuitt have 
 
 todo principio 
 
 an end. It is not (to be wondered at) that the super- 
 fn maravillarse super- 
 
 stitious ages have produced an unbelieving age. There 
 sticioso sigh prodticir (irr.) incredulo 
 
 are few who (have not exposed themselves) to 
 
 poco exponerse (irr.) 
 
 temptations. The judge ordered that the carrier should 
 tentacion juez mandar arriero 
 
 be stripped, and that in his presence two hundred 
 
 desnudar presencia 
 
 lashes should be given him. Though he slay me,, I 
 azote dar (irr.) mm que matar 
 
 will trust in him. If I have offended him, I will 
 far si qfender 
 
246 SYNTAX. 
 
 ask pardon of him. Although Homer (according 
 
 pedir (irr.) perdon Homer o segun 
 
 to) Horace, slumbers sometimes among heroes, he is 
 
 Horacio sonar algunas veces entre 
 
 yet the first of all poets. I will give you this 
 
 sin embargo poet a 
 
 picture, provided you preserve it as a testimony of 
 
 con tal que guardar como prenda 
 ray friendship. If I should live to see that day, if I 
 
 amistad vivir dia 
 
 slwidd return to your embraces. I shall believe our 
 
 volver (irr.) abrazo creer 
 
 conjugal love well rewarded. Though queen Elizabeth 
 
 - amor recompensar reyna 
 
 loved the earl of Essex, she consented- that he should 
 
 conde consenlir (irr.) 
 
 he beheaded. (TVould to God) I had been there! 
 
 degollar ojala alii 
 
 Carry this book to your brother that he may learn 
 llevar libro hermano aprender 
 
 his lesson. Send me the newspaper, that I may read 
 leccion enviar gctzeta leer 
 
 it. If I perceive thai you keep bad company, you 
 
 percebir tener malo compania 
 
 shall lose nry friendship. I doubt whether any 
 
 perder (irr.) duda r 
 
 philosopher has ever known the origin of the winds. 
 Jilosqfar conocer (irr.) origen viento 
 
 The Egyytians doubted not that certain plants were 
 
 Egiptio cierto planta 
 
 divinities. 
 divinidad. 
 
SYNTAX. 247 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 1 
 
 EXERCISE FIRST. 
 
 Gil Bias and the Sick Canon. 
 
 The good ecclesiastic (could do no more), and as 
 eclesiastico no poder (in\) mas 
 
 I presented him 2 ' a large glass of the sovereign specific 
 presentar gran vaso sober a no e&picifico 
 
 to drink^ i6 Stop,* friend Gil Bias," said he to 
 
 ami go ■ — — decir (irr.) 
 
 me, with a languid voice; "now I cannot drink 
 
 con languida voz ya poder (irr.) 
 
 more. I know that I must die^ notwithstanding the 
 
 mas coriGceriixw) dpesar de 
 
 great virtue of the water ; and I do not feel better^ 
 
 virtud dgua sentir (irr.) 
 
 though scarcely a drop of blood has been left in my 
 aunque a pen as got a sangre 
 body : 6 a clear proof that the most skilful and most 
 
 clara prueba habil 
 
 learned physician in the world, 1 is not capable of pro- 
 sabio medico mundo capctz pro- 
 
 1 The first seven of the following exercises are selected from the 
 Spanish edition of Gil Bias, on account both of the classic purity of 
 the language and of the work's containing fewer idioms than are to 
 be found in most Spanish writers. In a few instances a slight 
 
 liberty has been taken with the original.- In the English portion 
 
 of these exercises, the author has adhered as closely as possible to 
 the literal meaning. Here elegance of style would have been sadly 
 misplaced. He has not scrupled even to do some violence to the 
 structure of our language whenever he conceived that his doing so 
 would render the relation between the two languages more intelli- 
 gible to the learner. Preferences will not be made to all the rules, 
 but to those only which are deemed of most importance. Even 
 this assistance will not always be afforded. 
 
 2 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 3 Para que la bihicse 
 4 J\ote 2, Rule xliv. 5 Me es precise rnorir, 
 e Note 4, Rule xxxii. 7 Rule xxii. 
 
218 SYNTAX. 
 
 longing our l life when the fatal time arrives. Go, 
 
 longar vicla termino llegar ir(irr.) 
 
 then, and bring me here a notary, as I wish 
 pues traer (irr.) aqui cscribano que querer (irr.) 
 
 to make my will*' % Concealing the joy wliich I had 
 
 disi 'malar gem a 
 
 f fulfilling^ (as soon as possible) the commission which 
 
 complir quanta antes con common 
 
 he had just given me, 4 6i O } sir/' replied I to him, 
 
 seizor responder 
 heaving a deep sigh, " you are not so ill, through 
 dor (irr.) prqfundo suspiro vm malo por 
 
 the mercy of God." " No, no, my son, it is all 
 
 misericordia Dies no, no 
 
 over with me." 5 Persuaded that the affair (re- 
 persitadir a que cosa apa* 
 
 quired haste) I set outdriving. 1 entered 6 into the 
 rar (imperf.) pariir volar (irr.) ^enirarse en 
 house of the first notary which I met with. " Sir/' 
 casa en co ntrar (irr.) 
 
 said I to him, u my master, the licenciate, Sedillo, is 
 
 a mo licenciado — « 
 
 izoiv on the point of dyingil he wishes to declare 
 
 querer (irr.) declarar 
 his last will, and there is no time to be lost" 8 The 
 
 ultimo volant ad 
 notary was a man chubby and little, of a merry 
 hombre rechoncho pequenho alegre 
 humour, and a friend of jesting .9 " What physician 
 genio amigo bufonear que 
 
 attends him?" asked he of me. "Doctor 10 Sangrado," 
 asistir preguniar 
 
 I answered him. " God bless me!" replied he, "let us 
 responder vive Dios! 
 
 1 Note 4, Rule xxxii. 
 
 Q Hacer testamento, no possessive pronoun. 
 
 3 Note 1, Rule xlix. 4 Rule xlviii. 
 
 5 Este ya se acabo, an idiomatic al expression. 
 
 6 Note 2, Rule xiiv. 
 
 7 Esta ya para morir. 8 Note — Rule xlviii. 
 s Nole'i, Rule xlix. 1o Rule vii. 
 
SYNTAX. 24-9 
 
 go — let us go (in haste), for he is a man who has 
 
 a priesa porque 
 deprived me of the profit of many wills." Saying 
 
 guitar ganancia testamento 
 
 this, we went out together, run- 
 
 esie (neuter) salir (irr.) juntos an* 
 
 ning to arrive before the patient 
 
 dar (irr.) aceleradamente para llegar antes que enfermo 
 should fail 1 into the (last agony): and in the way I 
 
 entraren dgonia en c amino 
 
 said to the notary,. u I beseech you that, if it be 
 
 decir (irr.) suplicar a vm 
 
 necessary, you may make 
 menesier hacerQrr.) 
 
 attachment and zeal." " I promise it to thee," - he 
 Jealtad zelo prometer 
 
 replied to me, " and rely on my word," 3 When we 
 
 fia rse p a la b ra cu a n r lo 
 
 arrived at the house, we found dame Jacinta, who hadjust 
 
 I leg a r a li a II a r s e n or a — ■ 
 
 played * well her part. The notary remained alone with 
 hacer(in\)bien papel quedar solo con 
 
 the master. We were in great apprehension, the (pious 
 
 amo con tenor beata 
 
 dame) and I, lest he should die in the 
 
 deque morir (irr. silbj.) 
 
 very act of {making Ins tvffl)J We save the notary 
 mismo acto testigar 
 
 come out, 6 who smiling, said to me : " We have 
 
 sonreirse (irr.) 
 not forgotten Gil Bias:"? words which JUled me 8 xvith 
 
 chidarse palabra llenar 
 
 rejoicing ; and I (felt so grateful for) the mention 
 alborozo agradecer (irr.) tanto memoria 
 
 which my master had made of me, that I resolved 
 
 qfrecer [irr.) 
 
 1 Rale Ivii. 3 ?v<rfe 2, Rale xxxvil". 
 
 3 Note 2, Rule xl. * p, a j e xiriii. 
 
 5 Note \ } Rule xlix. 
 
 6 Vimos salir at escribano, we saw tc ccme out the notary. 
 
 7 Rule xl. ■ Idem. 
 
 M 5 
 
250 SYNTAX. 
 
 to recommend him (with a sincere heart) to God, 
 
 encomendar (irr.) muy de veras 
 
 after his death, which soon happened. 1 
 
 despues de mnerte 
 
 He had scarcely breathed 2 the last sigh, when 
 apenas exalar idtimo suspiro, cuando 
 
 the physician entered, who remained surprised and 
 
 entrar quedar cortado 
 
 motionless, notwithstanding his being accustomed to 
 mndo 7io ostante de ser acostumbrado 
 
 dispatch* (very expeditiously) his patients A With all 
 despachar quanto antes enfermo con todo 
 
 this; far 5 from attributing his death to so much water 
 esto lejos atribuir tanto agua 
 
 and to so many bleedings, he went away 7 6 saying 
 
 sangria 
 coldly that he had died because they had bled 
 
 confrialdad habermorir sangrar 
 
 him "i too little 
 poco. 
 The relatives of the deceased persuaded themselves 
 parlente difunto persuadirse 
 
 that the canon had died intestate. But little time 
 
 can on i go abiniedato 
 
 passed 8 in opening before all the will, invested with 
 
 en abrirse en pre send a de r eve stir de 
 
 the necessary formalities ; and when they saw that the 
 
 necesario formalidad . ver(irrJj 
 
 testator had left 9 the best effects to dame Jacinta and 
 testador dejar alaja senora 
 
 her niece, 10 they made a funeral oration of the 
 
 nieta hacer (irr.) funebre oracion 
 
 canon, little respectful to his memory ; apostrophising 
 poco decorosa apostrofar 
 
 1 La que zardo poco en suceder. 2 Rule xlviii. 
 
 3 Rule xlix. and also the 'Note, Rule xxii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 5 Note 1, Rule xxii. 
 
 6 Literally, tie turned his shoulders, volvio las espaldas. 
 
 7 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 8 Pero tardo poco. 
 
 9 In the original, dejala, the preterimperfect for the preterpluper- 
 fect. This substitution of the former for the latter is common in the 
 Spanish writers. 
 
 10 Note 3, Rule liv. 
 
s 
 
 SYNTAX. 251 
 
 at the same time the devotee, and giving me l some 
 a beat a dar alguno 
 
 praises, which truly I did not deserve. The 
 
 alabanza verdaderamente merecer (irr.) 
 
 licentiate, in peace be his soul, to oblige me not to for* 
 
 en paz alma para obligor 
 
 get him 3 in all my life, (expressed himself) thus in the 
 
 en vida explicar a si 
 
 part of the will which spoke of me J " Item (forasmuch as) 
 articulo hablarcon pot quanta 
 
 Gil Bias is a youth who has some smattering 
 - — ■ mozo alguno time 
 
 literature ; in order that he may -perfect himsef * and 
 liieratura 
 
 make himself a learned man, I leave him my library, 
 
 hacerse (irr.) sahio dejo libreria 
 
 with all the books and manuscripts without exception/' 
 con libro manuzcrito sin excepcion 
 
 I knew not where the boasted library could be :$ as 
 
 saber (irr.) cuanio 
 
 to the manuscripts, the most curious were all the details 
 (i curi&so auto 
 
 of a law-suit. After Iliad examined 6 my legacy with 
 
 pleyto despues que examinar legado con 
 
 greater attention than what it merited, I abandoned 
 aitencion toque abandonar 
 
 it to the relatives of the deceased. I delivered to theml 
 also the dress which I had on, and returned 
 
 iambien vestido iener d cuesias poZuer (irr.) 
 
 to take Bay own. I contented myself* that they should 
 a iomar contcniarse con que 
 
 1 Note S, Rule xxxviir. 
 
 a This and similar forms of construction require not the infinitive, 
 but the subjunctive in Spanish. 
 
 3 Coumigo. See the personal pronouns in Etymology. 
 
 4 Para que acabe de perjicic i 
 
 5 Doncie podia e&tur la tal sofiada libreria. 
 
 6 Another change of tense, the preterimperfect for the preterplu- 
 perfect. 
 
 ? Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 8 Note 2, Rme xliv. 
 
252 SYNTAX. 
 
 pay me my salary, and I tvent l to seek another 
 pagar salario irse (irr.) buscar otro 
 
 place. 
 conveniencia 
 
 EXERCISE SECOND. 
 
 Gil Bias serves Doctor Sangrado. 
 
 I resolved to go to seek* Mr. Arias cle Londona\ in 
 resoher (irr.) senor 
 
 order to choose in his register another house where to 
 para escoger en registro casa donde 
 
 serve ; but when I was very near the corner where he 
 servir estar cerca de rincon 
 
 lived, I met with Doctor z Sangrado, idiom* I had 
 
 vivir encontr 'arse con 
 not seen from the death of my master, and I ventured 5 
 
 mr muerte amo atreverse 
 
 to salute him. He knew me 6 immediately, though I 
 
 saludar conocer inmediatamenie aunque 
 
 iuasl in another dress ; and showing a particular 
 
 trage mostrar (irr.) 
 
 pleasure 8 to see me : " My son," said he to me ; " even 
 gusto hijo ah or a 
 
 novo I was thinking about iliee. 9 I ivant a servant 10 and 
 misma criado 
 
 thou art he who suits me^rcyz^rfthou 11 knowest 
 
 convenir(\i\\) contalque saber(irr.) 
 
 7w%v to read and write." " As you do not require more 
 
 leer escribir como pedir (irr.) mas 
 
 you may consider the business settled" 11 (" That being 
 
 pues 
 
 1 Note 2, Rule xli v. 2 Note 1 , Rule xxxvii. 
 
 * Rule vii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxi. 5 Rule xlvi. 
 
 6 Note °2, Rule xxxvii. — For the place of the personal pronouns, 
 few references will hereafter be made. If the student be under any 
 doubi as to their proper position, he raav consult the Rules. 
 
 7 Note 2, Rule lix. " 8 Nats 1, Rule lxix. 
 
 9 lhapensado en ti. 1o He menester un criado. ll Rule Ivii. 
 
 12 De to todopov hcchc, an idiom : give it all for done. 
 
SYNTAX. 253 
 
 the case/') he replied, "come with me, for thou art 
 
 asi replicar irse{\n\) con porque 
 
 the man whom I seek. In my house thou shalt pass the 
 
 que buscar en casa 
 
 time agreeably: 1 I will treat thee well: I will 
 
 tratar con distincion 
 
 asign thee no salary, but nothing shall be wanting to thee. 
 sehalar salario nada faltar 
 
 I will take care* to clothe thee decently ; I will teach 
 
 cuidar vestir con decencia ensenar 
 
 thee the great secret of curing 3 every kind of diseases : 
 
 segreto curar genro eiifermidad 
 
 in a word thou shaltrather be my pupil than servant/' 
 
 palabra mas discipido criado. 
 
 The plan pleased me, and I accepted the proposal of 
 ■ armar 'aceiar proposition 
 
 the doctor. — At that time Sangrado was the most 
 
 a 
 celebrated physician 4 in all Valladolid owing his 
 
 acreditado deber 
 
 reputation to a specious (manner of expression,) 
 reputation especioso loquela 
 
 supported by a certain grave appearance, and at the 
 sostener (irr.) de cierto ■ ■ ayre a 
 
 same time, (flowing like honey) together with some 
 
 meloso junto con 
 
 fortunate cures, which were celebrated more than 
 fortundado cur a celebrar 
 
 what they deserved. 
 loque merecer. (irr.) 
 
 " Look, son," said he to me one day, " I am 
 mirar dia estar 
 
 satisfied with thee ; I love thee, and 1 wish 
 content o de querer (irr.) 
 
 to make thy fortune. At this very moment, I am goings 
 hacer (irr.) Jbrtuna a hora misma 
 
 1 Lo pasards alegremente, thou shalt pass it agreeably. The same 
 mode of expression is not unfrequent among the vulgar in our own 
 country : " I will try for it" " Let us run for it." *' He carries it 
 proudly." 
 
 • Rule xl. 3 Rote 1 , Rule xlix. 4 Rule xxii. 5 Rule xli. 
 
254 SYNTAX. 
 
 to discover to thee the very soul l of the healing 
 
 descubrir (irr.) saliidable 
 
 art, which I have professed here so many years. Other 
 arte profesar tanto am otro 
 
 physicians make it to consist in the painful study of a 
 medico consistir en penoso estudio 
 
 thousand sciences, as useless as difficult. Know, 4 
 ciencia inutil clijicultoso saberse 
 
 friend, that to cure every kind of disease, no more is 
 amigo que para curat genero mat 
 
 necessary * than to bleed, and to drink water hot. This 
 
 sangrar beber agua calienie 
 
 is the great secret to cure all the infirmities in the 
 
 para enfermidad de 
 
 world. Yes ! this wonderful secret which I communi- 
 mundo maravilloso communi- 
 
 cate to thee, and which nature was unable to conceal 
 car naturaleza poder ocultar 
 
 from* my profound observations, remaining impenetrable 
 
 prqfundo observation quedarse — 
 
 io$ my brethren and companions, is reduced 6 to 
 hermano companero reducirse a 
 
 two single points — bleedings and hot water, and both 
 solo punto sangria uno y otro 
 
 In abundance. Behold, Gil Bias, thou art learned 
 en abundancia he aqui sabio 
 
 without being 1 a physician, whilst there are others for 
 Mn cuando hay otro 
 
 many years, and perhaps throughout life, without being, 
 
 quiza por todo vida 
 or ever having been, learned. ,, 
 jamas 
 
 1 pulled off my dress, and took another of my 
 desnudarse de iomar otro 
 
 -master's to appear in the costume of a physi- 
 
 amo para comparecer (irr.) en ayre 
 cian. I met with Fabricius: he(lookedat)me, 
 
 encontrarse{\n\) con Fabricio mirar 
 
 1 Lo masfino. 2 Note 2, Rule xliv. 
 
 3 No es menester mas. 4 Rule xli. 5 Rule xxvi. 
 
 6 Rule xliv. "Ruleliii. 
 
SYNTAX. 255 
 
 attentive, and surprised for some time, and afterwards 
 atento suspenso por alguno tiempo despues 
 
 broke out into a (fit of laughter) so great, that it 
 prorumpir en carcajada tan que 
 
 seemed he (was going) to burst with laughter. 
 parecer (irr.) d rebentar de risa 
 
 < s Bless me! Gil Bias," he exclaimed, " how magnU 
 vive Dios — ■ exclamar que magni- 
 
 ficently equipped thou art ! l who has metamorphosed 
 ficamente equipado quien enmascarar 
 
 thee * thus ? " " Softly, Fabricius, softly, and treat 
 
 asi pozo a poco tratar 
 
 with every respect 3 a new Hippocrates. Know 4 that I 
 
 con respeto nu&oo saber se 
 
 am substitute of Doctor Sangrado, the most famous 
 
 substitute — famoso 
 
 physician of V alladolid." 
 
 EXERCISE THIRD. 
 
 (The same continued.) 
 
 There was near our house a tennis-court, where 
 haber (imp.) cerca de casa juego de pelota donde 
 assembled daily all the idle part of the people ; 
 
 concurrir diariamente ocioso gente pueblo 
 
 among these one of those bullies and duellers by 
 
 entre ella a quel valenton perdona-vida de 
 
 profession, who raise themselves into masters, and 
 prqfesion erigirse en maestros 
 
 decide (without appeal) all the controversies which 
 decidir definite am enie duda 
 
 occur on such occasions. He was a Biscayan, and 
 ocurrir en semejante ocasion Biscay no 
 
 called himself 6 Don Rodrigo de Mondragon. He 
 
 1 How thou art magnificently equipped is the Spanish order of con- 
 struction . 
 
 2 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 3 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 * Note 2, Rule xliv. 5 Rule vii. 
 
 6 Made himself called ; se hacia llamar* 
 
256 SYNTAX. 
 
 appeared about thirty years of age J a man of ordinary 
 
 ordinario 
 
 stature, but well made iri limbs : his eyes, small 
 
 est at ur a Jlirnido de miembro ojo pequeno 
 
 and sparkling, which seemed to roll in his head, 3 
 
 centellante parecer (irr.) girar cabeza 
 
 and to threaten all those* who (looked at) him ; a nose 
 
 amenezar mirar nariz 
 
 flattened, as if stuck upon a pyramidical figure; 
 
 espatarrado como derramar sobre pyramidal figura 
 
 and whiskers, which in form of a half-moon 
 
 bigot e en forma media-luna 
 
 reached (up to) the temples. His voice was so harsh 
 
 subir hasta sienes voz aspero 
 
 and gruff, that it sufficed to hear it 4 to raise terror. 
 
 bronco bastar oir (ivr.) para cobrar — — 
 
 This blusterer raised himself into the command of 
 
 rompe-palas levantarse en mando 
 
 the tennis-court. He decided authoritatively and 
 
 juego depelota resolver (irr.) soberana y 
 
 finally 5 all the disputes which arose among the 
 
 definitivamenie disputa suscitarse entre 
 
 players. He admitted no other appeal from his 
 jugador admitir mas apelacion 
 
 decisions than the sword or the pistol : he who did not 
 sentencia espada pistola 
 
 conform to them, had an inevitable challenge 6 on the 
 conformarse 
 
 following day. Such as I have just described himl 
 siguie?ite dia tal qual pintar 
 
 neither more nor less, was Seizor 8 Don Roderic. 
 
 m mas ni menos ■ Rodrigo 
 
 Although the Don which always preceded his name 
 siempre 2> (irr.) delante de nombre 
 
 1 Parecio como de treinta alios. ° Note 4, Rule xxxii. 
 
 3 Los for aquellos. The Academy calls the former an article, but it 
 performs the office, and it should have the name, of pronoun. 
 
 4 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 s When two adjectives ending in mente succeed each other, the 
 termination is annexed only to the latter, and understood to the 
 former. 
 
 6 Tenia seguro un desafio. 7 Rule xlviii, 8 Rule vii* 
 
SYNTAX. 2.57 
 
 did not dispense with him from being 1 a plebeian. 
 
 dispensar hombte plebeyo 
 
 This man made a great impression on the heart of a 
 haccr (irr.) impresion en corazon 
 
 woman who was the owner of the tennis-court. She mas 
 mager catena ji'^go 
 
 forty years old, 2 rich, agreeable, and it was fifteen months 
 
 rico agr actable 
 since she became a widow* 3 I knew not what cGuld make 
 
 no se que 
 her in love with that man,* Certainly she was not 
 
 segur anient e 
 enamoured?* of him for his beauty. It would be without 
 enamorarse hermosura sin 
 
 doubt for that, I know not what, of which all speak, 
 duda por aquel que hablar 
 
 and which no one (knows how) to explain. (Let it be 
 
 ninguno saber (irr.) explicar sea lo 
 what it might,) the fact is that she was enamoured 6 of 
 que fuera Jieclio 
 
 that strange figure, and she determined to give him 7 
 
 figura - determinarse 
 
 her hand. When the treaty was about to bg 
 
 memo cuando i rat a do para 
 
 concluded , 8 she fell grievously ill ; and to 
 
 <concluirse caer (irr.) gravemente enfermo por 
 
 her misfortune, it fell to me 9 to be I0 her physician. 
 
 desgracia tocar ser medico 
 
 Thouglihex disease had not been 11 of itself so bad,, 
 aunque enfermedad de suyo tan maligno 
 
 my remedies cuozv'/c/ have sufficed 12 to render it dangerous. 
 remedio bastar porhacer{ivr.)peligroso 
 
 1 Dispe7isar is active. See Rule liii. 2 Tenia esta cnarenta altos. 
 
 3 Habia quince meses que estaba viuda. 
 
 4 La pudo enamorar de aquel hombre. 5 Rule xliv. 
 
 6 Idem. "- Note 4, Rule xxxii. s 
 
 * When teas about to be concluded the treaty. See Rule xliv. 
 9 Note 3, Rule xxxviii. 10 Note C Z, Rule xlix. " Rule Jvii. 
 
 12 Another change of tense, the preterimperfect for the preterpiu- 
 perfect. 
 
258 SYNTAX. 
 
 At the end of four days, I filled with 1 mourning the 
 d Jin dia llenar luto 
 
 tennis-court ; for I sent the (owner of it) whither I 
 Juego de pelota por que enviar pelotera adonde 
 
 (was in the habit of sending) 2 my patients, Don 
 
 embiaba enfermos 
 
 Roderic in the despair of having 3 lost* his mistress, not 
 
 con desperacion perder dama 
 
 content to rage and vent his fury$ against me, swore 
 contento con contra jurar 
 
 that he would run me through ivith the sword 6 the first time 
 
 vez 
 that he should see me. One of my 7 charitable neigh- 
 
 ver caritativo ve- 
 
 bours gave me notice of this oath, and advised me 
 cino dar (irr.) noticia juramento consejar 
 
 that I should notgo out of the house, that I might 
 
 salir (irr.) de casa 
 
 not encounter the man, 8 This advice filled me with 9 fear 
 
 aviso llenar miedo 
 
 and trouble. Continually I imagined to myself that 
 
 iurbacion continuamente imaginarse 
 I saw enter into the house the furious Biscayan. It 
 
 entrar en casa furioso 
 
 *)T)liged me at last to abandon medicine, and to seek 
 obligar enfin abandonar medicina buscar 
 
 a mode of delivering myself from such a panic. I 
 modo delibrarme de semejante sobresalto 
 
 again took 11 my embroidered habit ; took leave of my 
 
 bordado vestido despedirse (irr.) 
 master, who, whatever he did^ could not detain 
 amo poder (irr.) contener(irr.) 
 
 me ; and at the dawn of the following day, I (went out) of 
 a amanecer siguiente dia 
 
 1 Rule xl. - Note 1, Rule xxxvii, 
 
 3 Rule liii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 5 Con vomitar fuego y llamas ; a proverbial expression. 
 
 6 Que me pasaria de parte a parte la espada. 7 Note 2, Rule xxxu. 
 * Por no encontrarme con el hombre. 9 Rule xl. 
 
 10 Volvi a toman l2 Por mas que hizo* 
 
SYNTAX. 259 
 
 the city ; fearing always 1 to meet" Don Roderic 
 
 ciudadtemer siempre encontrar (irr.) 
 Mondragon in the road. 
 en camino 
 
 EXERCISE FOURTH. 
 
 Gil Bias and the Archbishop. 
 
 One of the first persons that I met in the 
 
 sugeto 
 streets of Granada, was 3 Senor Don Ferdinand de Leyva, 
 
 calle — — Fernando 
 
 son-in-law of the count de Polan. We both remained 
 yerno conde ■ quedar 
 
 surprised to see each other * in Grenada. " How 
 sorprendido de en que 
 
 is this, Gil Bias," said he to me, w thou in Grenada I 
 
 esto 
 
 what brings thee here?"* "Sir," said I to him, "if 
 
 senor si 
 
 you wonder to see me in this country, with much 
 
 vm admirarse de pais con 
 
 more reason will you be astonished when you know 
 mas razon maravillar cuando saber (irr.) 
 
 the cause which has obliged me to leave the service 
 causa obligdr a dejar servicia 
 
 of Don Caesar and his son/' Immediately I related 
 
 de — hijo seguidamente contar (irr.) 
 
 to him what had happened to me with Sefora^ without 6 
 
 loque pasar con sin 
 
 concealing from hiritf any thing. He laughed heartily 
 ocidtar nada reir (irr.) conftierza 
 
 at the jest, and his laughter being assuaged* he said to 
 chasco y visa sosegar 
 
 1 Rule xxi. 2 Xote 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 3 Rule vii. 4 Xos joined to ver. 
 
 5 i Que es la que aqui ie trae ? 6 Rule liii. 
 
 7 Le joined to ocidtar. 8 Note 3, Rule li-i. 
 
260 SYNTAX. 
 
 me seriously ; " friend, lamgoing to take on myself 1 this 
 
 seriamente ami go 
 business : I will write to my sister-in-law." (i No, 
 
 negocio escriijird(\n\) cuhada 
 
 no, sir," interrupted I, " I beseech you do not write to 
 
 interrumpir suplico a vm 
 
 her :« I have not departed from the house of Leyva 
 
 salir (irr.) casa 
 
 to return to it. If you please you may m 
 para volver (irr.) a gnsiar poder hacer (irr.) 
 
 another use of your interest. I beg that if any one 
 
 otro uso Javor rogar(\n\) alguno 
 
 of your friends wants a secretary or a steward, you 
 
 necesitar secretario mayor domo 
 mil recommend me."3 « With much pleasure," he 
 
 recommendar (irr.) gusto 
 
 replied : " endeavour to see mesome days hence^ 
 
 responder procvrar ver (irr.) 
 
 and perhaps I shall have then found thee a 
 
 quiza ya luscar 
 
 place. 
 conveniencia 
 
 In fact,, the first time that voe met^ he said to me : 
 efectivamente vez 
 
 " the archbishop of Grenada, my relative and friend, 
 
 arzobispo pariente 
 
 who is an excellent writer, wants a man well-informed 
 
 excelente escritor instruido 
 
 and (a good penman) to copy his ivories in a Jair hand* 6 
 y de buen pulso 
 He has composed, and every day he does compose 
 
 componer (irr.) cada dia 
 sermons, which he preaches with great applause. 
 Jiomilia predicar applauso 
 
 As I consider thee (exactly suited) for the occasion, 
 como contemplar a proposito para caso 
 
 1 Voy d tomar por mieuenta &c. 
 
 a Put escribir in the subjunctive present. See Rule lix. 
 
 3 Rule lix. * Pasados algunos diets. 
 
 5 Que 7ios vimos, e Para poner en lirnpio sus ohras. 
 
SYNTAX. 261 
 
 I have proposed thee^ and he has promised to admit 
 
 proponer (irr.) promoter admitir 
 
 thee. Go, and offer thyself (as from me) : from the 
 
 ir (irr.) presentarse de mi parte por 
 manner in which he may receive thee, thou wilt learn 
 niodo con recibir conocer 
 
 the good character which I have given him concerning 
 
 inforrne dari^vx.) 
 
 thee. 1 
 
 The situation appeared to me just such as I 
 conveniencia parecer (irr.) 
 could desire, 2 ' and so having prepared myself* the best 
 asi prepay arse lo mejor 
 
 that I could, I went one morning to present myself 
 que poder (irr.) m'anana a presentarse 
 
 to this prelate. If I ivere * to imitate those $ who write 
 
 prelado si imitar escribir 
 
 novels, I shoidd make 6 a pompous description of the 
 novela hacer (irr.) pomposo descripcion 
 
 Episcopal palace of Grenada, I should dwell 
 
 palacio ~ extenderse (irr.) 
 
 on the structure of the building, I should celebrate, 
 sobre esiructura edificio celeorar 
 
 the richnes of its furniture, I shoidd speak of its statues 
 riqueza muebles Jiablar estatua 
 
 and paintings, and I shoidd not spare the reader' the 
 
 pint ura perdonar lector 
 
 least of all the histories which are represented in them ; 
 
 h istoria represenlarse 
 
 but I shall content myself with saying* that it equals 
 
 conteniarse con decir (irr.) egualar 
 
 in magnificence the palace of our kings. 
 en magnijicencia a palacio rey 
 
 I saw in the an ti chambers a (considerable number) 
 a ntesala much idumbre 
 
 1 Co7icernhig tliee may be omitted in Spanish. 
 4 Tal como la podia desear. 3 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 4 Note, Rule xlviii. 5 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 G The termination ria, and so with the other tenses whose auxi- 
 liary is should, in the present sentence. 
 
 " Nets 1 , Rule xxxvii. 8 Rule liij, 
 
262 SYNTAX. 
 
 of ecclesiastics and others, the greater part servants of 
 
 eclesiastico otro partejamiliar 
 
 the archbishop. The liveries of the lackeys were very 
 
 arzobispo librea lacayo 
 
 rich, so that they rather appeared masters than 
 rico tanto que mas parecer (irr.) senor 
 servants: they showed themselves haughty, and 
 
 criado mo&trarse (irr.) altivo 
 
 played the part of men of consequence. To see 1 their 
 hacer (irr.) papel hombre consequencia 
 affectation, I could not do less than to laugh,* and 
 qfectacion poder (irr.) menos de reirse 
 
 to divert myself 3 with them. I said (within myself) : 
 de burl arse a mi sayo 
 
 " these people have the happiness of not feeling 4 
 
 gente J'orhina no sentir (irr.) 
 
 the yoke of servitude"* I approached a grave and fat 
 
 yugo servidumhre acercar * — gordo 
 
 personage who was at the door of the archbishop's 
 
 a puerta 
 
 cabinet, 6 to open and shut it, I asked him with 
 gabinete para abrir cerrar preguntar con 
 
 much civility if I could speak to his graced M You 
 
 cortesia si hablar 
 
 may wait," said he to me rudely, " until his grace 
 
 esperarse secamente que 
 
 goes out to hear mass, and then he will be able 
 salir(\xx.) para air (irr. )misa al paso poder(in\) 
 
 to hear you." I answered not a word : I invested 
 
 escuchar responder palabra revestirse(\rv.) 
 
 myself with patience, and endeavoured (to enter into) 
 
 de paciencia procurar trabar 
 
 conversation with some of the servants, but those 
 conversation con sirviente pero 
 
 1 Note 2, Rule xlix. * Note 2, Rule xl. s Ibid. 
 
 4 Note 1, Rule xlix. * RuLe j v . 
 
 6 Note to Adjectives in Syntax. 
 
 7 Excelenciais the title usually assigned to archbishops, and Ilus- 
 erisimo to bishops. The latter, however, is sometimes applied to 
 both. Excele?icia is also applicable to ambaassdors, ministers of 
 state, &c. 
 
SYNTAX. 263 
 
 gentlemen deigned not to answer me, and they 
 
 senor dignarse contestar 
 
 amused themselves in examining 1 me from head 
 
 entretenerse (far.) en registrar 
 
 to foot. 2 Afterwards they looked at one another, won- 
 
 despues mirarse unos a otros ad- 
 
 tiering at the liberty which I had taken of en- 
 
 rarse de libertad tener{\xv.) de mez- 
 
 gaging in conversation with them.3 
 clarme 
 
 EXERCISE FIFTH. 
 
 The same continued. 
 
 I confess that I was astonished to see myself thus 
 confesar (irr.) aturdirse a I venue asi 
 
 treated by lackeys. I had not yet recovered* from my 
 tratar porlacayo de 
 
 confusion, when the door of the cabinet was opened,* and 
 ■ — cuando abrirse 
 
 the archbishop came out. Immediately all was hushed.* 
 
 salir (irr.) inmediat anient e 
 These proud servants abandoned their insolent 
 soberbio dornestico dejar insolente 
 
 manners, and appeared with a respectful air 
 
 modo mostrarse (irr.) con respetuoso ayre 
 
 before their master. The prelate might be about sixty 
 del ante de amo prelado 
 
 nine years old J As soon as he saw me, he came 
 
 luego que rer(irr.) venirse (irr.) 
 
 to me, and asked me with much mildness what I 
 preguntar dulzura 
 
 1 Ruleliii. 
 
 * The Spanish expression is the reverse of the English : De pies a 
 tabeza, from foot to head. 
 
 3 En su conversation, instead of en conversation con ella, 
 
 * Todavia no habia vuelto. 
 
 5 When was opened the door of the cabinet, and came out the archbishop. 
 is the Spanish order of construction. 
 
 6 Quedo todo en un prof undo silencio. 
 
 7 Tendria el prelado unos sesenta y nueve affas. 
 
264< SYNTAX. 
 
 wished with hi?)!. 1 I told him that I was the person 
 
 decir (irr.) 
 recommended by * Don Ferdinand de Leyva. a Ah," 
 he exclaimed, " art thou he whom he has praised so 
 
 exclamar alabar 
 
 much to me i Thou art already admitted. I rejoice 
 tanto ya recibir alegrarse 
 
 at so valuable an acquisition. Remain (from this 
 de tan bueno hallazgo quedarse desde 
 
 moment) in the house." These words being said, 3 
 luego en casa palabra decir (irr.) 
 
 he leaned on two domestics, and having heard 4 some 
 
 apoyarse sobre escudero oir (irr.) 
 
 ecclesiastics who came to speak to him, he (went out) 
 eclesiastico llegar a hablar salir (irr.) 
 
 of the room. Scarcely was he out, when the very 
 
 sala apenas faera caando 
 
 same who a little before had despised my conversation, 
 
 poco antes despreciar 
 
 came to salute me^ and testified the greatest 
 
 venirse (irr.) para saludar testificar 
 
 joy to see me entered into the archbishop 's serviced 
 alegria de ver 
 They had heard what their master had said 1 to me, and 
 
 lo que amo 
 
 they desired with eagerness to know what employ- 
 
 desear ansia saber (irr.) em- 
 
 mentl was to hold with his grace ; but to revenge 
 pleo deber tener cerca de pero para vengarse 
 
 myself for the despite which they had done me, I 
 
 de desprecio hacer (irr.) 
 
 liadthe malice s not to satisfy their curiosity. 
 
 malicia saiisjacer (irr.) curiosidad 
 
 His grace did not delay long in returning^ and he 
 tardar mucho en volver (irr.) 
 
 1 Qitese me rfrecia. Q El recomendado del senor. 
 
 s Note 3, Rule lii. 4 Xote 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 3 When came to salute me the very same. 
 
 6 Comencal del arzobispo. 7 What had said their master. 
 
 8 Note 1, Rule xlix. * s R sle iiii. 
 
SYNTAX. 265 
 
 made me enter into his cabinet to speak to me 
 
 Jiacer (Sir.) entrar en gabinete para hablar 
 
 alone. I thought justly it was his intention to try 
 a solos pensar (irr.) bien intention tantear 
 
 my abilities : wherefore I prepared to measure all 
 
 talent o por lo que preparar para medir (irr.) 
 my words. He began with some questions on the 
 
 palabra principiar pregunta sobre 
 
 humanities. I had the luck 1 not to answer ill, and to 
 humanidades fortuna responder mal 
 
 show him % that I knew sufficiently the Greek 
 
 conocer (irr.) siificientemenie Griego 
 and Latin authors. He touched afterwards on dialec- 
 Latino autor tocar despues en la dialec- 
 
 tics, and here I expected him J He found me (a close 
 
 tica encontrar (irr.) bien 
 
 antagonist.) " It is clear," said he to me, as if 
 qferrado conocerse (irr.) como 
 
 astonished, " that thou hast had a very good education. 
 admirado tener educacion 
 
 Let us see now thy penmanship." I drew from my 
 
 ver (irr.) letra, sacar 
 
 pocket a specimen which I had brought expressly 
 bolsillo muestra llevar expresamente 
 
 for the purpose, which did not displease 4 my prelate* 
 para caso desgradar prelado 
 
 " I am glad that thou hast as good a hand," he 
 
 alegrarse de que tener (subj.) mano 
 
 exclaimed, " and still more that thou hast such 
 exclamar todavia mas 
 
 good abilities. I shall thank my nephews Don Ferdinand, 
 
 talent o Fernando 
 
 since he has provided me a servant so useful. In 
 por que proporcionar familiar uiil a la 
 
 truth he has made me a valuable present." 
 
 verdad hacer (irr.) bueno regalo 
 
 1 Note 1, Eule xlix. 2 To make him see; hacerle ver. 
 
 3 Yjustamente aqui era en dcnde yo le esperaba. 
 
 4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 5 I shall give thanks to my nephew. 
 
266 SYNTAX. 
 
 The day following his grace called me x very 
 dia siguiente bien de 
 
 early, to give me a sermon to copy* He charged me 
 m ana m a pa ra dar ho m ilia a copiar en ca rga r 
 
 much that I should do it with all possible accuracy, 
 
 vnucho hacer (irr.) lo con exactitud 
 
 which I executed w\thoii\, for getting 3 accent or point, 
 Toque executar sin olvidar acento nipunto 
 
 and which filled the prelate xmih pleasure and admira- 
 llenar prelado gusto admira- 
 
 tion.4 "Tell me, my friend, hast thou found in 
 cion ' decir (in\) ami go encontrar en 
 
 .copying any thing which may have (struck thee as 
 escribir chocar 
 
 erroneous) — any negligence in the style, or any 
 
 descuido esiilo 
 
 improper term ? Something of this might easily 
 imp fop io iermino 
 
 escape 5 in the fire of composition/' ei Ah, sir," 
 con f ue g° composicion senor 
 
 I modestly replied, " my learning is not such that 
 
 modestamente responder instruction tanto 
 
 I can assume the critic ; 6 and even if I were ca- 
 
 'poder (irr.) aim cuando ca- 
 
 pable of it, I am persuaded that the works of your grace 
 paz asegnrado obra 
 
 would not fall under my censure." He 
 
 caer (irr.) lajo censura 
 
 smiled at my reply, and said nothing ; 
 
 sonreirse (irr.) con respuesta replicar nada 
 
 but in the midst of all his piety, it appeared 
 pero en medio piedad traslucirse (irr.) 
 
 that he loved passionately his writings. 
 amor con pasion escrito 
 
 1 Me hizo llamar. 2 To give me to copy a sermon, 
 
 3 Rule liii. 
 
 4 Which filled with pleasure and admiration the prelate. The prepo- 
 sition required by lienor may be seen at Rule xl; and for the con- 
 struction of prelado, see Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 5 Es muyfacil se escape alguno de esio, 
 
 6 Meterme dcritico. 
 
SYNTAX. 2G7 
 
 I completely gained him 1 with this flattery. Every day 
 con adulation cad a 
 
 he loved me more, (so much so) that Don Ferdinand, 
 
 querer (irr.) tanto 
 
 who visited frequently* my master, assured me that 
 
 visit ar frequent emente amo asegurar 
 I had in such a manner gained his (good will,) that I 
 
 tal mo ch ganar voluntad 
 
 might consider my fortune as made.* 
 
 EXERCISE SIXTH. 
 
 (The same continued.) 
 
 The archbishop having one day repeated before 
 
 repel ir (irr,) delanie de 
 me a sermon which he was to preach in the cathe- 
 
 homilia deber predicar cate- 
 
 dral, did not content himself toith asking me in 
 dral content arse con pregurdar &* 
 
 general tohat I thought of it,* but he obliged me (to 
 ■ pero obligar a 
 
 point out) to him the passages tohich had most struck 
 decir (irr.) pa sage 
 
 me. -5 I had the (good fortune) 6 to select those with 
 
 fort una ciiarle de 
 
 which he was most satisfied, and which were his 
 
 s at i facer (irr.) 
 favourites. This made me pass in the opinion o£ 
 favorito esto hacer (irr.) pasar en concepto 
 
 his grace for one of delicate understanding, who 
 
 por delicado conociraierdo 
 
 (knew how) to distinguish the beauties of a work, 
 .safer (irr.) atinar con hermosura oora 
 
 1 Acabe de ganarle. - Sote 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 3 Que podia dar per hecha mifortuna. 
 
 4 Con is not followed by the present participle. See Rule liii,— 
 I thought of it ; qut me habia p. recido. 
 
 * Que me habian dado mas solve. u l\ote 1, Rule x-ix, 
 
 n2 
 
268 SYNTAX. 
 
 a This is," he exclaimed, " what is called taste and 
 
 exclamar Ham arse gusto 
 
 delicacy ." In short he was (so much) pleased that 
 finura en Jin quedar tan contento 
 
 he said to me with much emotion ; " Have no care: r 
 
 expresion cuidado 
 
 thy fortune is in ?py hands ^ and I will render it 
 
 procurar 
 agreeable to thee. I esteem thee, and in proof of 
 agradable estimar en prueba 
 
 this / ivish thee to be 3 my confident. 
 
 querer (irr.) confidente 
 
 On hearing* these words, I threw myself at the 
 palabra echarse 
 feet of his grace, penetrated with gratitude. 
 pie penetrado de reconocimiento 
 
 " Yes, my son," proceeded the archbishop, whose 
 
 si hijo proseguir (irr.) 
 
 discourse had been interrupted by my action ; 
 discurso interrumpirse por accion 
 
 "yes, my son, I wish to make thee the de- 
 
 hacer (irr.) de- 
 
 pository of ray most secret thoughts. Listen 
 positario secreto pensamiento escuchar 
 
 attentively to what I am going to tell thee* 
 
 atentamente ir (irr.) a decir (irr.) 
 
 I have delight in preaching, 5 and the Lord 
 gusto en predicar Senor 
 
 blesses my sermons, for they (reach the hearts of) 
 
 hendecW (irr.) herir (irr.) 
 
 sinners, 6 make them to enter w T ithin themselves, 
 
 peccador hacer (irr.) entrar dentro de 
 
 and (to have recourse) to? repentance. I have the 
 
 recur rir a penitencia 
 
 satisfaction 8 to see 9 a miser terrified with the images 
 satisj accion xer avaro espantado con imdgen 
 
 1 The subjunctive present, not the imperative. 
 q Corre de mi cuenta tufortuna. 3 I wish that thou mayst be. 
 
 * J J air. See Rule liii. 5 Rule liii. 6 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 7 Rule iv. * Note 1, Rule xlix. 9 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
SYNTAX. 269 
 
 which I present to his avarice, opening T his treasures, 
 
 presenter d codicia abrir tesoro 
 
 and distributing* them with a prodigal hand ; to wean 
 distribuir prodigo mano apartarse 
 
 a (lascivious man) from his impurities ; to drive the 
 
 lac'vco de torpezas retirarse 
 
 ambitious to the hermitage, and* to confirm 3 in her 
 ambicioso ermita en 
 
 duties * a wife, idiom a deceitful gallant caused 
 obligacion esposa engahoso galan Jiacer (irr.) 
 
 to waver. $ These conversions which are frequent, 
 
 titubear frequente 
 
 ought of themselves alone to excite me to exertion. 6 
 deber por solo excitar a trabajo 
 
 With all this I confess to thee my weakness : 
 
 con todo confesar (irr.) Jtaqueza 
 
 another reward influences me,— a reward for which 
 
 premio mover (irr.) 
 the delicacy of my virtue reproves me in vain : 
 
 delicadez mrtvd reprehender inutilrnente 
 
 this is the esteem of the public for perfect works. 7 
 
 estimacion publico a perfecto obra 
 
 I find much pleasure in being accounted a 
 
 encontrar (irr.) satisfaccion 
 
 consummate orator. 8 Now my works pass 9 for 
 hoy pasar por 
 
 energetic and delicate ; but I should not wish 
 fuerte delicado pero qiierer (irr.) 
 
 to fall into the errors of good authors, who write 
 
 caer (irr.) en fait a auior escribir 
 
 many years, and at length decay. I should wish not 
 
 ano alfin fiaquear 
 
 to lose my reputation. 
 perder reputacion 
 
 1 Rule liii. 2 Rale liii. 
 
 3 Hacerjirme. 4 jVote 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 5 Whom caused to waver a deceitful gallant, is the Spanish order of 
 construction. 
 
 6 Rule i v. 7 Ruleiv. 
 
 8 En que me tengan por un evador consumado. 
 
 9 Now pass my works. 
 
270 SYNTAX. 
 
 In this supposition, my dear Gil Bias," continued 
 supuesto amado continuar 
 
 the prelate, " I expect one thing from thy zeal : when 
 prelado esperar coia zelb cuando 
 
 thou perceivest J that my pen fails; when thou 
 
 pertibir pluma envejecerse(in\) 
 
 ohservest - that my style grows feeble, Jail not to in~ 
 noiar est Ho bajarse 
 
 form me ojit^ In this point I do not trust 4 to myself; 
 
 en punto Jiarse 
 
 my self love might blind me. This observation 
 amor propio pocier (irr.) cegar observation 
 
 requires an impartial understanding : wherefore I 
 pedir (irr.) impartial entendimiento por tanto 
 select ^ thine, which I consider . (as exactly suited 
 elegir contemplar a proposito 
 
 to the occasion,,) and from this moment / shall be 
 
 desde luego 
 
 regulated by thy opinion," 6 "Your grace is yet 
 
 todavia 
 very far from this time, thank God. 7 Besides, an 
 
 lejos tiempo ademas que 
 
 understanding like that of your grace preserves 
 
 tal como el conservarse 
 
 itself better than those of another stamp, and to 
 
 I os temple para 
 
 speak with propriety, your grace will ever be the 
 hablar con propiedad siempre 
 
 same. I consider 8 your grace like another Cardinal 
 mismo juzgar como a Cardenal 
 
 Ximenes, whose superior genius it appears 
 
 • genio parecer (irr.) 
 
 received more strength with years, instead of 9 weak- 
 recibir fuerza con los aho en lugar debili- 
 
 ening with I0 old-age" (" Let us leave) flattery, my 
 tarse con vejez dejarse de adulation 
 
 1 Rule lvii. 2 Rule lvii. 
 
 3 No dejes de adveriirmelo. 4 Note 2, Rule xl. 
 
 5 See Changes in Certain Regular Verbs in Etymology. 
 
 6 Estare a tu dictamen. ~ A Bios gracias, or gracias a Dios» 
 8 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 9 Rule Iiii. 1o Rule i\\ 
 
SYNTAX. 271 
 
 friend/' replied my master ; " I know that I 
 
 ami go responder amo saber (irr.) 
 
 may decay, and lose the sublimity of my style 
 
 poder {irr, Jdecaer perder (irr.) sublimidad estUo 
 
 from one moment to another. At the age in which 
 de instants a en edad en 
 
 I am, 1 infirmities begin to be felt, a and the 
 
 Jiallarse enfermedad principiarse a sentir (irr.) 
 infirmities of the body alter the mind. Again, I 
 
 ctterpo alferdr espiritu de nuevo 
 
 charge thee, Gil Bias, not to delay a moment* 
 
 encargar deternerse (irr.) momento 
 
 in warning 4 me when thou perceivest 5 my head 
 avisar cuando percibir cabeza 
 
 is. 6 Fear not " to use tvith me '" freedom and 
 deiilitarse temer mar franqueza 
 
 sincerity, as thy warning will be towards me a 
 sinceridad porque aviso para 
 
 proof of the love which thou bearest me. Besides, 
 prueha amor tener 
 
 thy interest is concerned in it; 9 for if I should 
 
 _ , . . P or i ue 
 
 know it was spoi^en in the city that my sermons had 
 
 saber (irr.) hablarse ciudad - — 
 
 fallen from their usual elevation, thou wouldst 
 
 decaer (irr.) ordinario elevacion 
 
 lose not only my affection, but the advantage which 
 perder solo qfecto sino a corns do 
 I have promised thee." 
 prometer 
 Here ended the exhortation ol my master to 
 aqui exhortacion amo para 
 
 hear my reply, which was reduced to 
 
 oir (irr.) respuesta reducirse (irr.) a 
 
 1 Rule lv. 
 
 2 Now (ya) begin to be felt infirmities is the proper order cf con- 
 struction. 
 
 3 Rale lix. 4 p Ui ] c Jiii. 5 s ee Xote \ page 270. 
 G Weakens my head, the verb before its nominative. 
 
 7 See Xote \ page 268. 
 
 8 Conmigo. — Usar requires de before the two following nouns. 
 
 9 Por otra parte va en ello tu inter es. 
 
272 SYNTAX. 
 
 promise what he desired. From this moment he had 
 
 dcscar desde moment o 
 
 nothing secret for me, and I became his peculiar 
 nada seer e to para 
 confident. 1 All the servants envied my lot. They 
 
 familiar enviadar suerte 
 were not ashamed to abase themselves to please 
 
 afreniarse de abaiirse 
 me. 2 Their meanness made me doubt that 
 
 bajeza (plur.) hacer (irr.) dudar 
 they were 3 Spaniards. Though I knew their 
 
 Espahol aiinque conocer (irr.) 
 Interested ideas, and their flatteries never deceived 
 interesado lisonja nunca enganar 
 
 me, I did not for this neglect to serve them. My 
 
 por cso dejar de servir 
 entreaties caused his grace to procure them em- 
 
 ojicio hacer (irr.) 
 
 ployments + To one I induced him to give a com- 
 hacer (irr.) dar com- 
 
 pany, and the means of' shining 5 in the army; another 6 
 pania ejercito 
 
 he sent to Mexico with a great appointment. 
 enviar Mejico con destino 
 
 While I was occupied in this manner in serving 
 cuando ocuparse en modo en servir 
 
 one and another^ Don Ferdinand prepared to 
 
 Fernando prepararse para 
 leave Grenada. I visited 8 this gentleman before 
 
 dejar a visitor seftor antesde 
 
 his departure, to give him thanks for the excellent 
 
 part id a para dar gracia por excelente 
 
 situation which he had procured me. st My dear 
 acomodo procurar amado 
 
 1 Vint a ser su privado. - Por tenerme contento. 
 
 s Rule lix. 4 Que S. E. les procurase empleos. 
 
 5 Conquelucir. b Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 7 Rule liii. — For one and another see the Adjective Pronouns in 
 Etymology, and Notel, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 8 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
SYNTAX. 273 
 
 Gil Bias," said he to me, "I am very glad that 
 
 alegrarse viucho 
 thou art satisfied with my uncle the archbishop." 
 
 satisfacer (irr.) de tio arzobispo 
 
 "I am most content/' I replied, "with this great 
 
 contento res-ponder con 
 
 prelate, and in truth, I ought to be so. J Besides 
 prelado verdaderamente deber ademasde 
 
 that he is a very amiable nobleman, I shall never be 
 que amahle sehor nunca 
 
 able (to be sufficiently grateful for) the favours 
 
 poder (irr.) agradecer (irr. ) bondad 
 
 which I owe him." 
 
 deber 
 
 EXERCISE SEVENTH. 
 
 (The same concluded.) 
 
 Within two months after the departure of Don Fer- 
 dinand, % and in the time that I was 
 
 tiempo encontrarse (irr.) 
 
 most favoured, we had a great (subject: of fear) in the 
 
 favor ecido susto en 
 
 palace. , The archbishop was attacked by apoplexy, 
 palacio at a car de apoplegia 
 
 but he was succoured with so prompt and efficacious 
 pero socorrer con pronto eficace 
 
 remedies, that it disappeared within very few days, 
 remedio desaparecer (irr.) a poco dia 
 
 but his head remained somewhat weak. 3 At the 
 pero cabeza quedar cdgo debit a 
 
 first sermon which he composed, I perceived it.* 
 
 componer (irr.) 
 
 Clearly my orator began to fail ; 
 
 claramente oradorempezar (irr.) a decaer (irr.) 
 
 1 See the neuter Personal Pronoun. 
 
 2 A los dos meses de haberse marchado Ben Fernando, 
 
 3 But to him remained somewhat weak the head. See Note 4, 
 Rule xxxii. 
 
 4 Lo echi de ver. 
 
 n5 
 
274 SYNTAX. 
 
 but to decide, I waited until he should preach 
 
 para decidir esperar a que predicar 
 
 another. He did so, l and it was unnecessary 
 
 hacer (in*.) menester 
 
 to wait longer. The good prelate stammered, 
 
 mas rozarse 
 
 (made repetitions,) rose to the clouds, end fell 
 
 repetir (irr.) leventarse a nube abatirse 
 
 to the very ground. His oration was diffuse, a 
 hasta suelo oracion difuso 
 
 tiresome cathedral harangue; 2 in fine, it tvas alto* 
 causa do catedrdtico arenga en fin 
 
 gether bad, 3 and without connection. 
 sin concierto 
 
 I was not (the only one) who observed it. Almost 
 solo not a lo casi 
 
 all who heard him, whispered to one another: 4 « This 
 
 oir (irr.) 
 sermon smells of the apoplexy.'' " Come," said I 
 — — — oler (irr.) a vamos 
 
 to myself, ' ' prepare to do your duty. You 
 
 prepararse para hacer deber 
 
 now see that his grace declines, and you are obliged 
 ya ver(in\) declinar obligar 
 
 to 'warn him. s both as the depository of his con- 
 ianto por depositario con* 
 
 fidence, and for fear that some one of his friends 
 fianza por temor . amigo 
 
 may anticipate you. If this circumstance should 
 
 anticipar si caso 
 
 happen 6 you very well know its consequences ; 
 
 llegar muy bien saber (irr.) consequencia 
 
 you would be left out of his will." 
 
 borrado de testamento 
 To these reflections succeeded others entirely 
 
 reflexion seguir (irr.) enteramente 
 
 1 See Note *, page 273.. 2 Arenga de catedrdtico, 
 
 3 Un sermon de mission. 4 Se decian al oido. 5 Obligado d advert irsela. 
 
 (i If should happen this circumstance. 
 
SYNTAX. 275 
 
 opposite ; for it appeared to me very dangerous 
 contraria porque parecer (irr.) expuesto 
 
 to give a warning so disagreeable to an author so 
 
 dar aviso desagradable autor 
 
 attached to his works* (On the other hand) it ap- 
 apasionado por otro parte 
 
 peared to me impossible that my liberty should 
 
 ___ lib er tad 
 
 displease him, 1 after having enjoined it to me 
 
 disgustar despues de ordenar 
 
 with such earnestness. (Let us add) to this, that I 
 
 con eficacio anadir 
 
 intended to introduce the thing tviih dexieritu 2 and 
 
 pensar (irr.) 
 
 to make him swallow the pill mildly. 
 
 hacer (irr.) tragar pildora suavemenie 
 
 In short, persuading myself that I risked mare 
 en fin persuadirse a aventurar mas 
 
 by (being silent) than by speaking 3 J resolved 
 en callar en hablar determinate 
 
 to break silence. 
 a romper sileneio 
 
 Only one thing disturbed me : I knew not Iigw 
 solo cos a inquieiar saber (irr.) 
 
 to begin the conversation. Thank heaven, the 
 
 sacar conversacion gracias al cielo 
 
 orator himself drew me irom this embarrassment by 
 orador sacar . embarazo 
 
 asking me what was said of him in 
 
 preguntar decirse (irr.) en 
 
 public,, and if his last sermon had pleased. 4 I an- 
 
 publico si ultimo gusiar res- 
 
 swered that his homilies were always admired, but 
 ponder siempre admirar 
 
 that in my opinion the last had not so much 
 
 1 That him should displease ray liberty 
 
 2 Entrurle con mafia. 3 Rule liii. 
 * If had pleased his last sermon 
 
276 SYNTAX. 
 
 moved ' the audience as the preceding. " How 
 mover (irr.) auditorio antecedenle como 
 
 is this, friend?" replied he, surprised. " Most illus- 
 amigo sobresaltado ilus- 
 
 trious lord," answered I, " the works of your grace 
 ire senor obra 
 
 are not such that any one dares to censure them, * rather 
 las antes 
 
 all praise them ; but as your grace has com- 
 
 celebrar pero como 
 
 manded me to speak to you 3 with freedom and sin- 
 
 franqueza sin- 
 
 cerity, I shall take the liberty 4 of saying* 
 ceridad tomarse libertad decir (irr.) 
 
 that your last sermon appears not to me to have 
 
 parecer (irr.) 
 the solidity of the preceding, — does your grace 
 
 solidez precedent e 
 
 think otherwise?" At these words my 
 
 pensar (irr.) de otro modo palabra 
 
 master changed colour /* and with a forced smile he 
 amo mudarse color con Jbrzado sonrisa 
 
 said to me : " Mr. Gil Bias, then this piece is not 
 
 senor conque pieza 
 
 to your taste ?" 6 U I do not say that," interrupted I 
 
 interrumpir 
 
 (in confusion) " it is excellent, although a little 
 
 todo turbado excelente antique poco 
 
 inferior to the other works of your grace." "lun- 
 
 en- 
 
 1 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 2 Que hay a quien se atreva a censurarlas. 
 
 5 Subjunctive. See Rule lix. 4 Note 1, Rule xlix. 
 s Rule xl. 
 
 6 No es del gusto de vm. The learner will here observe the change 
 of number in the second person. The archbishop does not in this 
 sentence use the pronoun generally employed hy persons of dignity 
 in addressing their servants, or those whom they wish to patronise. 
 He uses the third person singular, as though he were addressing an 
 equal. The student will perceive the sarcasm implied in this 
 change of person. 
 
SYNTAX. 277 
 
 derstand thee," replied he, " it seems to 
 
 tender (irr.) replicar parecer (irr.) 
 
 thee that I am failing ; is it not so ? To be brief, * 
 
 ir (irr.) bajar esto 
 
 thou believest that it is now time I should 
 
 creer ya tiempo 
 
 think of retiring" 2 " Never should I have 
 
 pensar (irr.) en ret ir arse jamas 
 
 spoken to your grace with such plainness, if you had 
 liablar con tanto claridad si 
 
 not expressly commanded it to me ; and since in 
 
 expresamente mandar lo pues 
 
 this I have obeyed 3 your grace, I humbly 
 esto obedecer (irr.) rendidamente 
 
 intreat you not to take amiss my boldness" \ '•' God 
 suplicar ttevar a mat atreximiento 
 
 Jbrbidii" 5 interrupted he hastily ; " God forbid 
 
 precip it ad a m enie 
 that I should blame thee for such a thing: 
 
 reprehender tal cos a 
 
 (in that case) I should be very unjust. It is not at all 
 
 en eso muy unjusto del ioclo 
 
 wrong that thou speahest 6 to me thy opinion, but thy 
 onalo decir (irr.) dictdmen 
 
 opinion appears not to me well founded. I deceived 
 
 fundado enganarse 
 myself in submitting 7 to be the tool of thy li- 
 en someterse a juguete IU 
 mited understanding." 
 mitado inteligencia 
 
 Although 1 8 xvas so agitated, I endeavoured to 
 aunque tan turbado procurar 
 
 1 Acorta de razones. 
 
 2 Pensar must be subjunctive, see Rule lix. For the construction 
 of retirarse, see Rule liii. 
 
 3 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 4 Llevar to be subjunctive. See Rule lix. 
 
 5 No lopermita Dios. 
 
 6 Decir to be subjunctive. See Rule lix, &c. 
 ' Rule liii. 8 Note 2, Rule lix. 
 
278 SYNTAX. 
 
 discover the means of mending 1 the matter ; but it is 
 buscar medio hecho pero 
 
 impossible to soothe * an irritated author, and (the 
 — sosegar irritado autor 
 
 more so) if he is accustomed to hear (nothing more) 
 mas acostumbrado ci oir (irr.) mas 
 
 than praises. " Let us not speak of the subject, my 
 
 elogios hablar asunto 
 
 son/' said he to me : " thou art yet too young to 
 hijo nino para 
 
 distinguish the true from the false. Know that 
 
 distinguir lo verdadero falso saber (irr.) 
 
 in my life I have never composed a better sermon, 
 vida nunca componer (irr.) homilia 
 
 than this which has had the misfortune 3 not to have 
 
 desgracia 
 merited thy approbation. Thank heaven, my 
 
 merecer (irr.) gracias al cielo 
 
 intellect has lost nothing yet of its vigour. In 
 
 entendimiento nada todavia vigor en 
 
 future I shall choose better confidants. I wish 
 adelante elegir confidente querer (irr.) 
 
 others more capable 4 of deciding than thou. Go," 
 
 capaz decidir ir (irr.) 
 
 he proceeded, pushing me out of his cabinet ;$ " tell 
 
 decir (irr.) 
 my treasurer to give thee 6 a hundred ducats, and 
 
 tesorero entregar (irr.) ducado 
 
 may God bless thee 1 with them. Farewell, 8 Mr. Gil 
 
 con senor 
 
 Bias ! I shall rejoice that you enjoy 9 every felicity, 
 ale gr arse lograr felicidad 
 
 with a little more taste." 
 con poco gusto 
 
 1 Note 1, Rule xlix. 2 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
 
 3 Note 1, Rule xlix. 4 Rule xlix. 
 
 5 Empajandome para que saliera de su gabinete, 
 
 6 That he may give thee. See Rule lix, &c. 
 
 7 Anda bendito de Dios. 
 
 8 Vayavm con Dios. See Note 6 , page 276. 
 
 9 Lograr, subjunctive. See Rule lix, &c. 
 
SYNTAX. 279 
 
 EXERCISE EIGHTH. 
 
 Martyrdom of ' Hermenigildus 9 A. D. 570. 1 
 
 Leovigildus, now master of all Spain, (with the) 
 Leovigildo ya dueho Espana a 
 
 exception of Malaga, and of some maritime places 
 excepcio?i ■ alguno maritima plaza 
 
 occupied by the Greeks, applied all his attention to 
 ocupado por Griego aplicar attention a 
 
 leave secure the succession of the crown in his 
 dejar assegurada succesion corona 
 
 family. He had txvo sons,* Hermenigildus and Hecaredus, 
 Jamilia Hermenigildo Recaredo 
 
 whom, before his elevation to the throne, he had by 
 antes de elevation trono en 
 
 Theodosia, sister of the saints Leander, Isidore, and 
 Teodosia hermana santos Leandro Isidoro 
 
 Fulgentius. Theodosia being dead^ he married a 
 Fulgencio morir (irr.) casar en 
 
 second time with Gosvinda, widow of king Athana- 
 
 segundas nupcias con viuda rey Aiana- 
 
 gildus; and ceding the kingdom of Seville to his 
 gildo ceder reyno Sevilla 
 
 eldest son Hermenigildus, and gave him to 
 
 primogenito Mjo dar (irr.) por 
 
 wife Ingunda, daughter of Sigibert, king of Austrasia. 
 
 muger hija Sigiberio - 
 
 Gosvinda professed with bigotiy the Arian sect, 
 prqfesar con tenacidad Arriano secta 
 
 v The three following exercises are taken from the " Compendia de 
 la Historia de EspaTta" Madrid, 1785. 
 
 As the learner must now be familiar with the principal rules of 
 construclion, scarcely any references to them will hereafter be given. 
 If he entertains any doubt as to the construction of any particular 
 part of speech, he will naturally consult its Syntax. 
 
 Whenever the collocation of Spanish words^ or the translation of 
 particular phrases, is attended with any difficulty, assistance will, as 
 iisual, be found in the notes. 
 
 2 Halldbase con dos Jdjos. 3 ^fote 3, Rule lii. 
 
280 SYNTAX. 
 
 and spared no means 1 to reduce the queen of 
 
 parareducir (in*.) reyna 
 Seville te the same profession. She used caresses, 
 mismo prqfesion usar de caricias 
 
 authority, threats, insults, and violent behaviour, " 
 autoridad amenaza ultrage malo tratamiento(plur.) 
 (even to) dragging her by ((he hair of her head), to 
 
 hasta arrastrar por los cabellos con 
 
 the scandal of majesty, and of the palace. Ingunda 
 
 escandalo mages tad palacio 
 
 always immovable * in the Catholic religion, evinced 
 siempre inmoble en Catolico ■■ convencer 
 
 the truth of what she professed, by the invincible 
 verdad lo que con invencible 
 
 patience with which she bore the much that she 
 paciencia con tolerar lo macho 
 
 suffered, constantly endeavouring to prevent its 
 
 padecer (irr.) 
 
 reaching 3 the notice of her husband, by complaint, or 
 a noticia marido por queja ni 
 
 even by her countenance ; and her greatest care 
 aim el semblante cuidado 
 
 being 4 to conquer with obedience, with sweetness, and 
 
 veneer obsequio agrada 
 
 with respect, the violence of her mother-in-law, 
 
 respeto violencia (plur.) la suegra 
 
 tvhich so nearly bordered on tyranny.?* 
 
 To make a pious husband (there is no) means 
 
 para hacer (irr.) santo marido ?iohaber 6 medio 
 
 more powerful than a virtuous wife, a truth which was 
 
 poderoso virtuoso muger 
 
 experienced by Hermenigildus. Notwithstanding the 
 experimentarse en no obstante 
 
 Arianism which he professed, what was passing in the 
 Arrianismo pasar en 
 
 1 Noperdono a medio alguno. 2 Immovable always Ingunda, 
 
 3 Poniendo todo su estudio en que no llegase. 
 
 4 And being her greatest care. 
 
 5 Que andaban tan cerca de parecer tyranias* 
 
 6 See the Defective Verbs. 
 
syntax; 281 
 
 palace not being able (to be concealed) any longer , x 
 
 jjoder (in*.) ocultarse mas tiempo 
 
 and arriving to his knowledge the violence which his 
 
 lie gar noticia 
 
 step-mother was exercising towards Ingunda, he con- 
 madrasta executar con co- 
 
 trasted the ungovernable fury of- the one with the 
 tejar arrebatado furor 
 
 silent suffering of the other; and proceeding to 
 silencioso sitfrimiento pasar d 
 
 infer the difference which (there was) in the two 
 inferir diferencia haber (def.) 
 
 religions by what he observed in the professors of 
 
 observar prqfesor 
 
 them, he concluded that could not fail to be 
 
 concluir poder (irr.) dejar de 
 
 true which produced in Ingunda a virtue so con- 
 
 verdadero inspirar en mrtud con- 
 
 stant. With this thought he wished (to be 
 
 stante pensamiento querer (irr.) 
 
 instructed) more thoroughly in the foundations of it ; 
 instruirse mas de proposito fundamento 
 
 and holding for this purpose repeated and secret con- 
 d Jin repetitido oculto con- 
 
 ferences with his uncle St. Leander, archbishop of 
 ferencia tio arzobispo 
 
 Seville, within a few days he declared himself con- 
 d poco dia declararse con- 
 
 vinced, passing from the hopeful disposition of 
 vencido pasar desde bueno disposition 
 
 (one in doubt) to the public profession of (one 
 
 dudoso publico prqfecion 
 
 freed from error). He solemnly abjured Arianism. 
 desengahado solemnemente abjurar 
 
 Leovigildus being informed* of the conversion of 
 
 informar 
 
 his son, yielded entirely the first movements of his 
 'hi jo conceder enteramente movimiento 
 
 1 Not being able to be concealed any longer what was passing in 
 the palace. 
 
 2 Informed Leovigildo. See Note 3, Rule lii. 
 
282 SYNTAX. 
 
 heart to the ebullitions of anger; but afterwards 
 
 corazon destemplanza colera despues 
 
 giving place to reason, and resolved to reduce 
 hacer (irr.) lugar razon resnelto a reducir (irr.) 
 
 Hermenigildus either by violence or gentleness, he 
 
 6 por 6 dulzura 
 
 considered that he ought to commence by the 
 juzgar deber comenzar (irr.) 
 
 means which mildness dictates, and he did not spare 
 medio suavidad dictar perdonar a 
 
 any one of (those 'which) paternal tenderness could 
 
 alguno quantos ternura poder (irr.) 
 
 suggest to him. 1 But seeing his artifices frustrated 
 sugerir mas ver (irr.) artificio hurlar 
 
 by the constancy of his son, notwithstanding that in 
 por constancia no obstante 
 
 the answers of the latter, respect was always joined * 
 
 respites t a este 
 
 to firmness, irritation returned to its place, and he 
 
 Jirmeza irritation volver (irr.) lugar 
 
 forgot that he was a father by remembering that 
 olvidarse padre por acordarse (irr.) 
 
 he was a king. He proceeded to besiege Hermeni- 
 
 rey pasar d sitiar 
 
 gildus in his own court of Seville ; and seizing on 
 mismo corte apoderarse de 
 
 the place and the prince, he commanded him to be 
 
 plaza principe mandar 
 
 confined) in a narrow prison. There he detained him 
 encerrar(\vY.) estrecho prision alii tener 
 
 all the time, and with all the rigour which appeared 
 
 rigor parecer (irr.) 
 
 to him sufficient (in order) that severity might re- 
 bastante para molestia re- 
 
 duce him vohom persuasion had not [been able) to 
 
 ducir (irr.) > poder (irr.) 
 
 subdued And when, by his mode of judging he 
 
 convencer cuando a modo entender (irr.) 
 
 1 Which could suggest to him paternal tenderness. 
 
 2 Andaba siempre el respeto inmediato. 
 
 ^ Whom had not been able to subdue persuasion. 
 
SYNTAX. 283 
 
 considered him less obstinate, from conceiving him 
 Juzgar obstinado por imaginar 
 
 more dispirited, he despatched to him a minister of his 
 
 obatido de spa char ministro 
 
 greatest confidence, to offer 1 him liberty, the crown, 
 confianza libertad corona 
 
 and the increase of his states, merely on the condition 
 
 aument o est ado solo 
 
 that he xvould return 2 to the religion which his ances- 
 
 — — proge- 
 
 tors had professed. The' generous prisoner replied^ 
 nitor generoso prisionero resvonder 
 
 that it teas to him 4 an unspeakable mortification 5 to 
 
 de inducible mortifxacion 
 see himself situated in the sad necessity 6 of being 
 
 constituido en iriste necesidad 
 disobedient to the commands of God 5 or of not com* 
 desobediente precepto Dios 6 com- 
 
 plying with the pleasure of his father; and that 
 descender (irr.) con gusto padre 
 
 (being placed) in the indispensable condition off re* 
 colocado precision re- 
 
 nouncing a perishing crown, to encircle his brows 
 nunciar caduco por cenirse sienes 
 
 with another and an indefectible diadem, he was not so 
 
 diadema 
 
 foolish as to sacrifice 7 the eternal to the perishing ; nor 
 necio lo eterno perecedero ni 
 
 did it appear to him founded in reason to aspire to a 
 
 puesto en razon aspirar 
 
 liberty of a few years, and (perhaps even) of a few 
 
 poco ana quiza 
 
 moments, which would have (for its end) a perpetual 
 instante por termino perpetuo 
 
 irredeemable slavery. 
 irredimible es davit ad 
 
 1 Who should offer (subj.). 2 Con que quisiess restituirse* 
 
 3 Replied the generous prisoner, 4 Que le servio. 
 
 5 See Note 2, Rule xlix. 
 
 6 Note 1, Rule xlix, which is also applicable to the two following 
 participles in italics. — No reference will hereafter be made to the 
 same note. 
 
 7 Que pospusiese. 
 
284 SYNTAX. 
 
 Leovigildus was of a soul naturally noble and 
 alma naturalmente ■ 
 generous, and an answer (especially in his own son) 
 respuesta y mas en hijo 
 
 in which nobleness was so joined with genero- 
 
 nobleza andar (irr.) mezclado con genero- 
 sity, could not displease him. 1 He approved it in 
 sidad poder (irr.) disonar aplaudir 
 
 his heart, and although he did not appear 
 
 corazon aunque mani/e&tarse (irr.) 
 
 at all satisfied, he showed himself less obstinate 
 
 del todo satisjecho mostrarse(in\) empehado 
 
 and so he contented himself with despatching to him 
 
 asi content arse con despachar 
 
 a second message by his brother Recaredus, assuring 
 recado por hermano asegurar 
 
 Hermenigildus that he would restore him to his 
 
 restituer 
 favour, provided only that he (Hermenigildus) should 
 gracia con que solo 
 not refuse to communicate (by the hand) of an 
 
 resistirse a comulgar por mano 
 
 Arrian priest. The pious youth replied,* that his 
 
 eclesiastico santo mancebo 
 
 religion did not permit him to treat with this dissi- 
 
 > " permitir tratar disi- 
 
 mulation the faith which he professed ; neither was 
 
 mulo Je ni 
 
 any action lawful to him which might appear 
 
 , accion licitar poder (irr. ) sonar (irr.) 
 
 that he held the same communion as the heretics. 
 
 corn-union con herege 
 
 Leovigildus tvas so incensed 3 with this resistance, which 
 
 con resistencia 
 
 he called obstinacy, (confounding obstinacy with con- 
 llamar obstinacion equivocar con- 
 
 stancy) that immediately he gave orders that on 
 
 stancia al punto or den (sing.) en 
 
 1 And could not displease him an answer, &c. 
 
 2 Replied the pious youth. 3 Indignose tanto Lsovigildo* 
 
SYNTAX. 285 
 
 the very same night, he (Hermenlgildus) should be 
 
 noche 
 beheaded in the prison. 1 Scarcely arrived (to the) 
 
 apenas llegar a 
 knowledge of the afflicted Ingunda the execution of the 
 
 noticia afligido execution 
 
 tyrannical sentence, when, without losing time, that 
 tyrano sentencia sin perder tiempo 
 
 she might not endanger in the delay her safety and 
 
 pelegrar en dilation seguridad 
 that of her son, prince Theodoric, she retired with 
 la principe Teodorico retirarsecon 
 
 him to Africa, where, a short time after, died 
 
 donde poco despues morir (irr.) 
 
 son and mother, the climate, grief, and pain, 
 
 madre clima pesadumbre dolor 
 
 conspiring against their precious lives. * 
 conspirar contrar precioso vida 
 
 EXERCISE NINTH. 
 
 Invasion of Spain by the Saracens, A. d. 71 1- 
 
 Roderic possessed the throne after the death of 
 Rodrigo ocupar trono despues de muerte 
 
 Bitiza. In the court was breathed an infected and 
 
 en corte respirarse inficionado 
 
 putrid air. The virtue of Roderic was weak, where- 
 podrido ay re virtud Jlaco con- 
 
 fore he made no resistance to the contagion. He 
 
 que hacer (irr.) resistencia 
 
 feared that if he reformed the state, he should multiply 
 temer reformar estado multiplicar 
 
 enemies, and that he should have for opposers all those 
 enemigo por contrar io 
 
 tvhorn he should not resemble : 3 a cowardice unworthy 
 
 cobardia indigno 
 
 1 Le cm*ta$en la cabeza dentro de la carcel. 
 
 2 Conspiring against their precious lives, the climate, &c. 
 
 3 A quienes nofuese semejante. 
 
286 SYNTAX. 
 
 of a royal mind. It is well to live like all when all 
 
 real animo bien vivir como 
 
 live well ; and even in this case the prince should 
 
 aim caso deber 
 
 endeavour to live belter, since in (every thing good) it 
 aspirar a porque en todo lo bueno 
 
 is his reputation to surpass the subjects. Roderic 
 
 reputation sobresalir (irr.) vasallo 
 "began x by pusillanimity, and afterwards by inclination 
 por pusilanimidad despnes par inclination 
 to follow the paths, (or rather) the deviations of his 
 & seguir(\n\) paso 6 descamino 
 
 predecessor. — He suffered himself (to be constrained) 
 predecesor dejarse arrastrar 
 
 by the same incontinence, and by the same cruelty;— 
 de incontinentia crueldad 
 
 two furies which seldom Jail to make him their prey on 
 
 Juria rara vez 
 
 tvhom they once seize. 2 ' He preserved in all their force 
 
 conservar Juerza 
 
 the infamous laws of Vitiza, and in imitation of that 
 
 infame ley • — - imitation 
 
 tyrant, he pardoned no one tvho should resist him.* In 
 iirdno perdonar en 
 
 short, he had all the vices of his predecessor, but he did 
 Jin vicio pero 
 
 not commit so many excesses, because he did not live 
 . comet er exceso porque vivir 
 
 so long. 
 ianto ano 
 
 Among the ladies of the queen (there was) one 
 entre dama reyna haber (def.) 
 
 who was called Fiorinda, known commonly by the 
 
 llamarse conocido vulgarmente por 
 
 name of Cava, which in the Arabic language is the 
 nombre Arabigo lengua lo 
 
 same as bad ivoman : and because the Moors applied 
 mismo que porque Moro aplicar 
 
 1 Comenzo Bodrigo al principio. 
 
 a Dejan de liacer preset en quien una vez seapodwan, 
 
 3 Que le hiciese reslstencia f 
 
SYNTAX. 287 
 
 without reason this injurious epithet to Florin da, some 
 sin razon injurioso epiteto alguno 
 
 historians believed with less reflection that this was 
 historiador creer reflecion 
 
 her own name. Florinda, or la Cava, was daughter of 
 
 propio o Jiija 
 
 Count Don Julian, one of the chief lords 1 of Spain, a 
 Conde ■■ ■ Espaha 
 
 lady of extraordinary beauty, which (was the more 
 dama peregrino hermosura sobresalir (irr.) 
 
 conspicuous) from being accompanied by no less 
 mas por acompanar de 
 
 extraordinary honour. She had the misfortune to 
 
 honesiidad desgracia 
 
 please the king ; but she had courage to resist his 
 agradar rey pero valor para resistirse a 
 
 continual solicitations. This repulse added fuel to 
 continuo instancia desprecio 
 
 his flame ;* and he obtained by availing himself of 
 lograr valerse de 
 
 violence, what (he was unable) to accomplish 
 
 molencia no poder (irr.) conseguir (irr.) 
 
 by gallantry or by entreaty. (There is) in heaven 
 por cortejo ni ruego haber (def.) cielo 
 
 an avenger of oppressed virtue^ and Itoderic soon 
 vengador oprimido presto 
 
 experienced this truth greatly to his cost. 
 experiment ar verdad muy cuesta 
 
 Though the unfortunate Spanish Lucretia did not 
 aunque infeliz Liter ecia 
 
 feel herself less influenced by grief than the 
 
 seniirse, (irr.) arrebatado de dolor 
 
 Roman, she was more prudent in concealing, and more 
 Romana cuerdo en disimidar 
 
 moderate in regulating the effects of her resentment* 
 moderado disponer (irr.) efecto resentamiento 
 
 She placed (in the knowledge) of the Count her 
 poner (irr.) en noticia 
 
 1 Senov de lo$ mas principales* 
 
 2 Encendio mas la pasion* 
 
288 SYNTAX. 
 
 father the violence which she had suffered, and 
 padre padecer (irr.) 
 
 she enforced the truth of her innocence with tears, 
 esforzar (irr.) razon innocencia lagrima 
 
 and with the pressing entreaties she made him, 
 
 vivo instancia hacer (irr.) 
 
 exhorting him to a revenge proportionate to the 
 exhortar despique proporcionado 
 
 magnitude of the offence. Less entreaty was 
 grandeza agravio esfuerzo 
 
 sufficient to inflame the wrath of the Count 
 
 menester para encender (irr.) colera 
 
 exceedingly irritated with an affront which he 
 sobradame?ite irritado con afrenta 
 
 considered his own as well as his daughters, 1 and from 
 reputar desde 
 
 that moment he employed all his time 2 in meditating 
 
 punto a meditar 
 
 the means of a frightful vengeance. 
 medio ruidoso venganza. 
 
 The Saracens were at that time 3 masters of Mauri- 
 
 Saraceno por tiempo dueno . 
 
 tania, whose possession gave the name of Moors to 
 
 posesion dar (irr.) nombre 
 
 its conquerors. Count Julian was at that season* 
 
 conquistador 
 governor of Ceuta, from whose vicinity, king Roderic 
 
 gobernador por inmediacion 
 
 had made him ambassador to the Saracens. 
 
 hacer (irr.) embajador cerca de 
 
 The Count availed himself of this circumstance 
 
 aprovecharse ocasion 
 
 so favourable to the designs of his revenge, and 
 
 favorable intento 
 
 meeting with the chiefs of the Moors, he offered to puts 
 avocarse con gefe 
 
 1 Como de su luja. See the note to the Adjective in Syntax. 
 - Did toda la aplicacion del descurso, 
 
 3 Were at that time the Saracens. 
 
 4 Halldbase d la sazon el Conde de Julian. 
 
 5 Les ofrecio quependria* 
 
SYNTAX. 289 
 
 in their hands all Spain, provided they should assist 
 mano como ayudar 
 
 him to (wash away) in the blood of Roderic the 
 
 a lavar sangre 
 
 dishonour of his daughter. To facilitate to them 
 dcshonra para facilitar 
 
 the enterprise, he represented to them that all the 
 
 empresa represent a r 
 
 people were disarmed, the (fortified places) 
 
 pueblo (plur.) desarmado plaza 
 
 dismantled, the subjects dissatisfied, and the king 
 desmantelado c as alio descontento 
 
 hateful to all ; so that only by (allowing them- 
 odioso de manera que solo con dejarse 
 
 selves to be seen) the conquest xxjas secure. J The 
 
 ver conquista asegurado 
 
 Moors being persuaded, and the treaty being concluded % 
 
 persuadir traiado concluir 
 
 with great secrecy, he returned immediately 3 to the 
 con secreto 
 
 court of Toledo, under pretence of transacting with 
 carte con pretexto comunicar 
 
 the king important affairs ; and being well received by 
 importante negocio bien recibir de 
 
 the court, without giving either by his words or by his 
 sin ni a laspalabra ni al 
 
 countenance the slightest sign of his hidden purpose, 
 semhlante leve serial cculto seniimiento 
 
 he knew how to feign with so much artifice, ho:v 
 
 saber (Irr.) fingir artificio 
 
 necessary his presence tvas in Africa, * that the king 
 commanded him to return without delay to his 
 in and a r volver sin detencion 
 
 embassy. On departing he asked permission 
 embajada al despedirse (irr.) pedir (irr.) licencia 
 
 1 Was secure the conquest. 
 
 2 Persuadidcs los micros, y concluida con gran tecreio el tratado. For the 
 omission of being see the Syntax of the Participle. 
 
 3 Did prontaniente la vnelta. 
 
 * Lo liectssario que era su pres:ncia en Africa. 
 O 
 
290 SYNTAX. 
 
 to take toitk him 1 his daughter Cava, (the sole) 
 para llevarse unico 
 
 motive of his journey ; pretending that her mother ivas 
 motivo viage pretentar 
 
 attached * by a mortal disorder, and desired with 
 
 de enfermedad desear con 
 
 anxiety the consolation of seeing, and of taking 
 ansia consuelo ver (irr.) despedirse (irr.) 
 
 leave of her daughter, before she paid* with the last 
 
 hija ultimo 
 
 breath the common tribute to nature. The king gave 
 aliento comun tribuio naturaleza 
 her to him 4 campassionating the cause, 'without any 
 
 compedecer (irr.) de motivo 
 suspicion $ of artifice in the proceeding of the Count, 
 
 artijicio proceder 
 
 who as soon as he arrived at Mauritania found 
 
 luego que llegar encontrar (irr.) 
 
 matured all the preparations necessary for the 
 acalado prevention necessario para 
 
 execution of his projects, 
 execucion proyecto 
 
 EXERCISE TENTH. 6 
 
 The same continued. 
 
 Don Julian advanced with five hundred men to 
 adelantarse d 
 
 occupy Heraclea, known now by the name of 
 ocupar conocer hoi/ con nombre 
 
 Gibraltar. He ivas followed by 7 a body of twelve 
 
 cuerpo 
 thousand Saracens, commanded by Tarif, an Arabian 
 mandar Arabe 
 
 1 Consigo. See the Etyro -<o~y P ersonal Pronouns. 
 
 2 Se h&llaba su madre acomei ids* 
 
 3 Antes de pagar. 4 Dioscla el rey. 
 
 5 Sin ofrecersele scspecha. 
 
 6 In this last exercise the irregular -/e*bs will no longer be marked, 
 
 7 Sio-uiole, 
 
SYNTAX. 291 
 
 general, of as much valour as prudence. The trumpet 
 
 igual valor que prudencia trompeia 
 
 of rebellion resounded on all sides ; l multitudes of the 
 
 rebelion resonar por parte enjambre 
 discontented came 2 to be incorporated under the Count. 
 malcontento venir a incorpordrse con 
 The king informed of the treason, persuaded himself 
 
 infvrmar traicion persuadirse 
 
 inconsiderately that it would be easy to stifle it 
 
 con ligereza facil escarmentar 
 
 in the beginning sending against the rebels his 
 
 principles ervoiar rebelde 
 
 nephew, Don Sancho with a body of troops tumul- 
 
 sobrino iropa tumulta" 
 
 tuously raised ; but its facility deceived him^ for 
 riamente levant ar Jhcilidad engahar porque 
 
 almost all these with their general were put (to the 
 cast ■ — pas a do ci 
 
 sword.) The Moors being masters of the field * 
 cuchillo Moros dueho campana 
 
 extended themselves throughout all Andalusia (like 
 extender se por ci 
 
 an inundation.) The (fortified places) - were 
 
 raodo de inundacion plaza 
 
 undefended, and the people being unarmed, 
 
 sin dejensa pueblo (plur.) desarmar 
 
 either place their safety in flight, or perish by the 
 6 poner la seguridad ,fuga 6 perecer a 
 
 edge of the Sarracenic sabre. The houses are delivered 
 Jilos Saraceno alfange casa eniregarse 
 
 tip 5 to pillage, the (public edifices) to the fire, and 
 
 — edificio f ue g° 
 
 the inhabitants to the sword, confusion, consternation, 
 
 persona — scores alto 
 
 and terror, Jlying to all parts. 6 In the mean time the 
 volar parte mientras tanto 
 
 1 F^esounded on all sides the trumpet, &c. 
 
 ? Came multitudes, 6:c. 
 
 s But deceived him its facility. 
 
 4 Masters of the field the Moors, &c. 
 
 5 The verb first. G Ih'ng to all parts, confusioiu^, 
 
 O 4 
 
292 SYNTAX. 
 
 Moors, animated by the successes of their arms 
 
 animar con slices o arrnas 
 
 increased every day by the reinforcements which 
 engrosarse cada dia con refnerzo 
 
 came to them from Africa ; so that it appeared that 
 venir — tanto que parccer 
 
 all Africa had passed over to Spain. 
 pasarse a 
 
 When a monarch has known how (to make himself 
 cuando monarca saber hacerse 
 
 beloved) he finds a resource against the greatest 
 
 nmar cncontrar recurso 
 
 reverses of fortune in the heart of his subjects ; but 
 rebcse fortuna corazon vasallo 
 
 as Don Roderic had made himself so hateful he 
 como aborrecible ' 
 
 found no person in whom he could place his con- 
 hallar persona en poder colocar con- 
 
 iidence. However as he touched as if with his 
 fianza sin embargo tocar como la 
 
 hand that fatal period which tvas l to decide concern- 
 ma no — — punto decidir de 
 ing ^ his crown, his states, and his life, he obliged 
 corona estado vida obligard 
 more than a thousand men to take arms, without 
 
 a tomar las annas sin 
 considering that he was arming as many enemies (as 
 advertir arraar enemigo 
 
 there were) discontented men. He placed himself at 
 como descontento ponerse d 
 
 the head of this army and marched against the Moors 
 
 f rente ejercito marchar 
 
 and the rebels. He met them near Xeres, 
 
 rebelde alcanzar cerca de 
 
 on the boder of the river Guadalete, where he gave 
 
 a or ill a rio donde 
 
 them a general and decisive battle. Don Roderic 
 . — — — decisivo bat alia 
 
 1 See Syntax of the Infinitive. 
 
 2 The preposition to be repeated before every noun. See the 
 Syntax of that part of speech. 
 
SYNTAX. 293 
 
 fought (like one who) knew that the gaining or the 
 
 pelear como quien saber 
 
 losing of all depended on that action, l but his crimes, 
 
 pero delito 
 as auxiliaries of the Moors, fought against him ; 
 
 auxiliar contra 
 
 and the time of divine vengeance had arrived. % A 
 
 tiempo divi?io venganza llegar 
 
 great part of his own army turned its arms against 
 
 parte ejerciio volver las arm as 
 
 the other, attacking it in flank in the hottest 
 
 Geometer por los costados vivo 
 
 of the fight. This made him lose all spirit, and 
 
 bat alia perder aliento 
 
 putting spurs to his horse, he endeavoured to save 
 meter espuela cabello procurar salvarse 
 
 himself by flight, having disappeared (in such a 
 
 con fuga desaparecer de 
 
 manner) that unto this day it is not certainly known 3 
 mantra hast a dia 
 
 what was the last end of his disgraceful life. It 
 
 ultimo destino desgraciado 
 
 is conjectured that he died swallowed up in the 
 
 conjecturarse morir ahogado 
 
 waves of the Guadalete, as on the banks of that 
 
 onda — por que a margen 
 
 river were found his horse, his royal mantle, his 
 
 encontrarse real manio 
 
 crown, and his boots,— sad remains of his 
 
 corona botines funesto despojo 
 
 unhappy death. In Portugal is read over a 
 desdicado muerte ■ — leerse sobre 
 
 sepulchre this epitaph : " Here lies Roderic, last 
 
 sepulchro epitqfio aqui yacer(de£.) 
 
 king of the Goths." Whatever might have been 
 
 reij Godo comoquiera que poder 
 
 1 Que estaba pendieiite de aquella action el ganarlo todo, 6 el perderU* 
 todo. For the insertion of the article before the infinitive, see the 
 Svntax of the latter. 
 
 2 But fought against him his crimes, &c. — -had arrived the time, §e. 
 
 3 Xo se sabe a puntojijo. 
 
294« SYNTAX. 
 
 the end of this monarch, he could not fail to know 
 
 fin poder dejar conocer 
 
 the avenging sword of divine justice in the bloody 
 
 ve?igudor espada justicia sangriento 
 
 accomplishment of h r s catastrophe. 
 execution catastrqfe 
 
 Roderic tvas not (the onhj one) punished, 1 because he 
 solo eastigar por que 
 
 had not been the only delinquent. His army disor- 
 solo delinquent e desor* 
 
 ganised, 2 without king, and without general, was the 
 denar cauddlo 
 
 victim of the Sarracen sabre, and all the kingdom 
 victima Saraceno alfange 
 
 remained a prey of the African. Tarif divided his 
 quedar por presa dividir 
 
 army into several bodies, which at the same time 
 
 en macho cuerpo a un 
 
 spread over all Spain. All those who made resist- 
 exiender por hacer resist* 
 
 ance xvere put to thesxvord,* and the rest remained at 
 encia pasar demas d 
 
 the will of the conqueror, more as slaves than as 
 
 arbitrio vencedor esclavo que 
 
 prisoners. The unbridled avarice of those barbarians, 
 prisionero desenfrenado codicia barbaro 
 
 inclined them to pillage (every thing). The sword 
 empehar en pillarlo todo espada 
 
 devoured, the fire consumed, famine wasted, and every 
 devorar fi ue g° consumir hambre talar 
 thing would have perished, if the same avarice of the 
 
 perecer avaricia 
 
 conqueror had not spared it. Seldom has there been 
 
 conservar lo 
 seen 4 in the world a desolation so terrible. It was a 
 man do desolation ■ 
 
 1 Was not alone Roderic the punished. 
 
 2 Let the participle precede ejercito. 
 
 3 Were put to the sword all those who made resistance. 
 
 4 Pocas veces se vio. 
 
SYNTAX. 295 
 
 deluge of miseries, which purified the land from 
 dihivio mal purificar tierra 
 
 another deluge of crimes. In less than three years 
 
 culpa de ana 
 
 Spain passed under the dominion of the Sarracens. 
 pasar a dominion 
 
 The revenge of Count Julian was more frightful 
 venganza ruidoso 
 
 perhaps than what he himself had imagined in the 
 quizd de lo que Jlgurarse 
 
 first ungovernable impulses of his anger. But having 
 
 arrebatado impulso cole r a 
 
 done treason to his religion, his country, and his king, 
 
 liacer traicion patria 
 
 he left his name to posterity laden with the execra- 
 dejar nombre posteridad cargar execra- 
 
 tion of all ages. (It is not known) whether he 
 cion siglo ignorarse si 
 
 survived the flame which he himself raised up ; and 
 sobrevivir incendio excitar 
 
 (it is not known) what was the end of his wretched 
 
 no saber se Jin infeliz 
 
 days. 
 
296 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 APPENDIX TO SYNTAX. 
 
 The following List is arranged in three columns. It 
 contains in the first the words admitting certain prepx)- 
 'nlions ; in the second, the prepositions themselves; and in 
 the thirds the ivords governed by them % % 
 
 los peligros 
 
 la suerte 
 
 alguno 
 
 aigo 
 
 alguno 
 
 otra 
 
 las gentes 
 
 todos 
 
 deseos 
 
 los amigos 
 
 la fruta 
 
 riquezas 
 
 las desgracias 
 
 la amistad 
 
 venir 
 
 alguno 
 
 tal tiempo 
 
 la disputa 
 
 la opinion de otro 
 
 todos 
 
 la casa 
 
 sagrado 
 
 otro dictamen 
 
 otros 
 
 sabios 
 
 los incautos 
 
 lo pasado 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 trabajos 
 
 genio 
 
 necio 
 
 alguno 
 
 la confianza 
 
 akuno 
 
 abalanzarse 
 
 a 
 
 abandonarse 
 
 a 
 
 abocarse 
 
 con 
 
 abochornarse 
 
 de 
 
 abogar 
 
 por 
 
 abordar (una nave) 
 
 d, con 
 
 aborrecible 
 
 a 
 
 aborrecido 
 
 de 
 
 abrasarse 
 
 en 
 
 abrirse 
 
 d 9 con 
 
 abstenerse 
 
 de 
 
 abundar 
 
 de, en 
 
 aburrido 
 
 de 
 
 abusar 
 
 de 
 
 acabar 
 
 de 
 
 acaecer 
 
 a 
 
 acaecer 
 
 en 
 
 acalorarse 
 
 en, con 
 
 acceder 
 
 a 
 
 accesible 
 
 a 
 
 acertar 
 
 a, con 
 
 acogerse 
 
 a 
 
 acomodarse 
 
 a, con 
 
 acompafiarse 
 
 con 
 
 aconsejarse 
 
 con, de 
 
 acontecer 
 
 a 
 
 acordarse 
 
 de 
 
 aco rd arse 
 
 con 
 
 acostumbrarse 
 
 a 
 
 acre 
 
 de 
 
 acreditarse 
 
 de 
 
 acred itarse 
 
 con, para, con 
 
 acreedor 
 
 a, de 
 
 acreedor 
 
 de 
 
 * Gramatica de la Lengna Castellana, Compuesta por 
 Academia Espaiiola.- — Page 332. 
 
 Real 
 

 SYNTAX 
 
 
 actuarse 
 
 de, en 
 
 Ins negocios 
 
 acusar (a alguno) 
 
 de* 
 
 algun delito 
 
 acusarse 
 
 de 
 
 las culpas 
 
 aclelantarse 
 
 a 
 
 otros 
 
 adherirse 
 
 d 
 
 otro dictamen 
 
 adolecer 
 
 de 
 
 alguna enfermedad 
 
 afterrarse 
 
 en, con 
 
 su opinion 
 
 aferrarse (una nave) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 aficionarse 
 
 d, de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 afirmarse 
 
 en 
 
 lo dicho 
 
 ageno 
 
 de 
 
 verdad 
 
 a^radable 
 
 al 
 
 paladar 
 
 agradecido 
 
 d 
 
 Ins beneficios 
 
 agraviarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 agraviarse 
 
 de 
 
 la sentencia 
 
 agregarse 
 
 d 
 
 otros 
 
 agrio 
 
 al 
 
 gusto 
 
 agudo 
 
 de 
 
 ingenio 
 
 ahitarse 
 
 de 
 
 ma nj ares 
 
 ahogarse 
 
 en 
 
 el mar 
 
 ahorcajarse 
 
 en 
 
 las espaldas 
 
 ahorrar 
 
 de 
 
 razones 
 
 no ahorrarse 
 
 con 
 
 ninguno 
 
 air arse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 ajustarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 ajustarse 
 
 a 
 
 la razon 
 
 alabarse 
 
 de 
 
 valiente 
 
 alargarse 
 
 d 
 
 la ciudad 
 
 alegrarse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 alejarse 
 
 de 
 
 su tierra 
 
 alimentarse 
 
 de, con 
 
 yerbas 
 
 alimentarse 
 
 de 
 
 esperanzas 
 
 alindar 
 
 con 
 
 otra heredad 
 
 alto 
 
 a 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 allanarse 
 
 d 
 
 lo justo 
 
 am able 
 
 de 
 
 todos 
 
 amable 
 
 de 
 
 genio 
 
 arnanceburse 
 
 con 
 
 los libros 
 
 amante 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 amafiarse 
 
 d 
 
 escribir 
 
 amoroso 
 
 con 
 
 los suyos 
 
 ampararse 
 
 de 
 
 algo, de alguna cosa 
 
 ancho 
 
 de 
 
 boca 
 
 andar 
 
 con 
 
 el tiempo 
 
 andar 
 
 de 
 
 capa 
 
 andar 
 
 en 
 o 5 
 
 pleitcs 
 
 29T 
 
298 
 
 andar 
 
 andar 
 
 angosto 
 
 anhelar 
 
 anticiparse 
 
 aovar 
 
 aparar 
 
 aparecerse 
 
 aparecerse 
 
 aparejarse 
 
 apartarse 
 
 apartarse 
 
 apasionarse 
 
 apearse 
 
 apechugar 
 
 apechugar 
 
 apedrear 
 
 apegarse 
 
 apelar 
 
 apelar 
 
 apercibirse 
 
 apercibirse 
 
 apetecible 
 
 apetecido 
 
 apiadarse 
 
 aplicarse 
 
 apoderarse 
 
 apostar 
 
 apresurarse 
 
 apresurarse 
 
 apretar 
 
 aprobarse 
 
 aprobado 
 
 aprupiado 
 
 apropiarse 
 
 apropincuarse 
 
 aprovecharse 
 
 aprovecharse 
 
 apto 
 
 apurado 
 
 aquietarse 
 
 arder 
 
 arderse 
 
 araarse 
 
 arrebozarse 
 
 arrecirse 
 
 PENDIX 
 
 TO 
 
 d 
 
 gatas 
 
 por 
 
 tierra 
 
 de 
 
 manga 
 
 a, por 
 
 mayor fortuna 
 
 d 
 
 otro 
 
 en 
 
 la ribera 
 
 en 
 
 la mano 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 en 
 
 el c ami no 
 
 para 
 
 el trabajo 
 
 de 
 
 la ocasion 
 
 a 
 
 un lado 
 
 a, de, por 
 
 alguno 
 
 de 
 
 su opinion 
 
 con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 por 
 
 los peligros 
 
 con 
 
 las palabras 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 de 
 
 la sentencia 
 
 a 
 
 otro medio 
 
 de 
 
 armas 
 
 d 9 para 
 
 la batalla 
 
 al 
 
 gusto 
 
 de, por 
 
 todos 
 
 de 
 
 los pobres 
 
 a 
 
 los estudios 
 
 de 
 
 la hacienda 
 
 a 
 
 ccrrer 
 
 a 
 
 venir 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 por 
 
 la cintura 
 
 en 
 
 alguna facultad 
 
 de 
 
 cirujano 
 
 para 
 
 el oficio 
 
 a 
 
 si 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 en 
 
 la virtud 
 
 de 
 
 la ccasion 
 
 para 
 
 el empleo 
 
 de 
 
 medios 
 
 en 
 
 la disputa 
 
 en 
 
 deseos 
 
 en 
 
 quimeras 
 
 de 
 
 paciencia 
 
 con 
 
 algo 
 
 de 
 
 frio 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 arreglarse 
 
 a 
 
 las leyes 
 
 arregostarse 
 
 d 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 arremeter 
 
 a, con, contra 
 
 el aiuro 
 
 arrepentirse 
 
 de 
 
 las culpas 
 
 arrestarse 
 
 a 
 
 todo 
 
 arribar 
 
 a 
 
 tierra 
 
 arrimarse 
 
 a 
 
 la pared 
 
 arrinconarse 
 
 en 
 
 casa 
 
 arrogarse (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 si misrao 
 
 arrojarse 
 
 a 
 
 pelear 
 
 arroparse 
 
 con 
 
 la capa 
 
 arrostar 
 
 a, con 
 
 los peligros 
 
 asarse 
 
 de 
 
 calor 
 
 ascender 
 
 & 
 
 otro empleo 
 
 asegurarse 
 
 de 
 
 su contrario 
 
 asentir 
 
 a 
 
 otro dictameu 
 
 asesorarse 
 
 con 
 
 letrados 
 
 asistir 
 
 a 
 
 los enfermos 
 
 asistir 
 
 en 
 
 tal casa 
 
 asociarse 
 
 a, con 
 
 otro 
 
 asoraarse 
 
 u,por 
 
 la ventana 
 
 as parse 
 
 a 
 
 gritos 
 
 asparse 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 aspero 
 
 al 
 
 gusto 
 
 aspero 
 
 en 
 
 las palabras 
 
 aspirar 
 
 d 
 
 mayor fortdna 
 
 atarse 
 
 a 
 
 una sola cosa 
 
 atemorizarse 
 
 de, por 
 
 algo 
 
 atender 
 
 d 
 
 la conversacion 
 
 atenerse 
 
 a 
 
 lo seguro 
 
 atento 
 
 con 
 
 sus mayores 
 
 atestiguar 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 atinar 
 
 dy con 
 
 la casa 
 
 atollarse 
 
 en 
 
 los caminos 
 
 atraer 
 
 d 
 
 si 
 
 atreverse 
 
 a 
 
 cosas grandes 
 
 atreverse 
 
 con 
 
 todos 
 
 atribuir 
 
 d 
 
 otro 
 
 atribularse 
 
 en, con 
 
 los trabajos 
 
 atropellarse 
 
 en 
 
 las acciones 
 
 atufarse 
 
 en 
 
 la conversacion 
 
 atufarse 
 
 por 
 
 poco 
 
 aunarse 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 ausentarse 
 
 de 
 
 Madrid 
 
 avecindarse 
 
 en 
 
 algun pueblo 
 
 avenirse 
 
 con 
 
 todos 
 
 299 
 
soo 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 aventajarse 
 
 d 
 
 otros 
 
 avergonzarse 
 
 a 
 
 pedir 
 
 avergonzarse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 avereguarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 aviarse 
 
 de 
 
 ropa 
 
 avocar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 si 
 
 avocarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 balancear 
 
 d 
 
 tal parte 
 
 balancear 
 
 en 
 
 la duda 
 
 balar 
 
 por 
 
 dinero 
 
 bambolear 
 
 en 
 
 la m aroma 
 
 banarse 
 
 en 
 
 agua 
 
 barar 
 
 en 
 
 tierra 
 
 barbear 
 
 con 
 
 la pared 
 
 bastardear 
 
 de 
 
 su naturaleza 
 
 bastardear 
 
 en 
 
 sus acciones 
 
 bat all ar 
 
 con 
 
 los enemigos 
 
 bajar 
 
 d 
 
 la cue.va 
 
 bajar 
 
 de 
 
 la torre 
 
 bajar 
 
 de 
 
 autoridad 
 
 bajar 
 
 hdcia 
 
 el vaile 
 
 bajo 
 
 de 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 benenco 
 
 a, para 
 
 la salud 
 
 bianco 
 
 de 
 
 cutis 
 
 blando 
 
 de 
 
 corteza 
 
 blasfemar 
 
 de 
 
 la virtud 
 
 blasonar 
 
 de 
 
 valiente 
 
 bordar (algo) 
 
 de, con 
 
 plata 
 
 bordar (algo) 
 
 al 
 
 tambor 
 
 bordar 
 
 de 
 
 pasados 
 
 bostezar 
 
 de 
 
 harabre 
 
 boto 
 
 de 
 
 punta 
 
 boy ante 
 
 en 
 
 la fortuna 
 
 braraar 
 
 de 
 
 corage 
 
 brear 
 
 d 
 
 cbasco 
 
 bregar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 brindar 
 
 con 
 
 regalos 
 
 brindar 
 
 a 
 
 la salud de alguno 
 
 bueno 
 
 de, para 
 
 comer 
 
 bufar 
 
 de 
 
 ira 
 
 bullif 
 
 en, por 
 
 todas partes 
 
 burlarse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 caber 
 
 de 
 
 pies 
 
 caber 
 
 en 
 
 la mano 
 
 caer 
 
 d 7 hacia 
 
 tal parte 
 
 caer 
 
 de 
 
 io alto 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 ( 
 
 30; 
 
 tierra, en cuenta, 
 
 caer 
 
 en < 
 
 en error, en tai tiempo, 
 en lo que se dice 
 
 caer 
 
 por 
 
 pascua 
 
 caer 
 
 sobre 
 
 los enemigos 
 
 calarse 
 
 de 
 
 agua 
 
 calentarse 
 
 a 
 
 la lumbre 
 
 calificar 
 
 de 
 
 docto 
 
 callar (la verdad) 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 callar 
 
 de, por 
 
 miedo 
 
 caluraniar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 injusto 
 
 calzarse 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 cambiar (alguna cosa) 
 
 con, por 
 
 otra 
 
 caminar 
 
 a, para 
 
 Sevilla 
 
 caminar 
 
 a 
 
 pie 
 
 caminar 
 
 por 
 
 el monte 
 
 cansarse 
 
 de, con 
 
 el trabajo 
 
 cansarse 
 
 de 
 
 pretender 
 
 cansarse 
 
 en 
 
 el carnino 
 
 capaz 
 
 de 
 
 cien arrobas 
 
 capaz 
 
 de, para 
 
 el empleo 
 
 capitular 
 
 con 
 
 el enemigo 
 
 capitular (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 mal juez 
 
 cargarse 
 
 de 
 
 razon 
 
 casa (una persona 6 cosa) con 
 
 otra 
 
 catequizar (a alguno) 
 
 para 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 causar (perjuicio) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 cautivar (a alguno) 
 
 con, po 
 
 r beneficios 
 
 cavar (la iraaginacion) 
 
 en 
 
 alguno 
 
 cavar (con la imagination) en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 cazcalear 
 
 de 
 
 una parte a otra 
 
 ceder 
 
 a 
 
 otro, a la autoridad 
 
 ceder 
 
 en 
 
 beneficio de alguno 
 
 censurar (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 mala 
 
 ceiiirse 
 
 a 
 
 lo posible 
 
 circunscribirse 
 
 a 
 
 una cosa 
 
 clamar 
 
 a 
 
 Dios 
 
 clamar 
 
 por 
 
 dinero 
 
 clamorear 
 
 por 
 
 los muertos 
 
 coartar (la facultad) 
 
 d 
 
 alguno 
 
 cobrar (dinero) 
 
 de 
 
 los deudores 
 
 colegir 
 
 de, por 
 
 los antecedentes 
 
 coligarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 columpiarse 
 
 en 
 
 el aire 
 
 combatir 
 
 con, contra el enemigo 
 
 combinar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 comedirse 
 
 en 
 
 las palabras 
 
302 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 comenzar 
 
 d 
 
 decir 
 
 comerse 
 
 de 
 
 envidia 
 
 compatible 
 
 con 
 
 lajusticia 
 
 compensar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 competir 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 complacerse 
 
 de, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 componerse 
 
 con 
 
 los deudores 
 
 componerse 
 
 de 
 
 bueno y malo 
 
 comprar (algo) 
 
 al, del 
 
 vendedor 
 
 comprehensible 
 
 al 
 
 entendimiento 
 
 comprobar (algo) 
 
 con 
 
 instrumentos 
 
 comprometerse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 comprometerse 
 
 en 
 
 jueces arbitros 
 
 comunicar (luz) 
 
 a 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 comunicar (uno) 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 concebir (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 tal modo 
 
 concebir (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 el animo 
 
 concebir (una cosa) 
 
 por 
 
 buena 
 
 conceder (algo) 
 
 d 
 
 otro 
 
 conceptuar (a alguno) 
 
 de 9 por 
 
 sabio 
 
 concertar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 concordar (la copia) 
 
 con 
 
 el original 
 
 concurrir 
 
 a 
 
 algun fin 
 
 concurrir 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 concurrir 
 
 con 
 
 otros 
 
 concurrir (muchos) 
 
 en 
 
 un dictamen 
 
 condenar (a uno) 
 
 a 
 
 galeras 
 
 condenar (a uno) 
 
 en 
 
 las costas 
 
 condescencler 
 
 a 
 
 los ruegos 
 
 condescender 
 
 con 
 
 la instancia 
 
 condolerse 
 
 . de 
 
 los trabajos 
 
 conducir (algo) 
 
 d 
 
 tal parte 
 
 conducir (una cosa) 
 
 al 
 
 bien de otro 
 
 confabularse 
 
 con 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 confederate 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 conferir (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 conferir (un negocio) 
 
 coti) entre los amigos 
 
 confesar (el delito) 
 
 al 
 
 juez 
 
 confesarse 
 
 a 
 
 Dios 
 
 confesarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 confesarse 
 
 de 
 
 sus culpas 
 
 confiar (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 una persona 
 
 confiar 
 
 €n y de 
 
 alguno 
 
 confinar (Espaila) 
 
 con 
 
 Francia 
 
 confirmarse 
 
 en 
 
 su dictamen 
 
 conformarse 
 
 con 
 
 el tiempo 
 
 conforme 
 
 dp con 
 
 su opinion 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 i 
 
 eonfrontar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 confrontar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 confundirse 
 
 de 
 
 lo que se ve 
 
 confundirse 
 
 en 
 
 sus juicios 
 
 congeniar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 congraciarse 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 congratularse 
 
 con 
 
 los SU) T OS 
 
 congratularse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 conjeturar (algo) 
 
 de r for 
 
 seilales 
 
 conmutar (algo) 
 
 con 
 
 otra cosa 
 
 conmutar (un, voto) 
 
 en 
 
 otra cosa 
 
 consagrarse 
 
 a 
 
 Dios 
 
 consentir 
 
 en 
 
 algo 
 
 consolarse 
 
 con 
 
 sus parientes 
 
 conspirar 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 conspirar 
 
 contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 conspirar 
 
 en 
 
 un intento 
 
 constar (el todo) 
 
 de 
 
 partes 
 
 con star 
 
 por 
 
 escrito 
 
 consultar 
 
 a 
 
 alguno para un em[ 
 
 consultar 
 
 con 
 
 letrados 
 
 consumado 
 
 en 
 
 una facultad 
 
 contaminarse 
 
 con 
 
 los viciosos 
 
 contaminarse 
 
 de 
 
 heregias 
 
 conteraporizar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 contender 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 contender 
 
 sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 contenerse 
 
 en 
 
 su obligacion 
 
 contestar 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
 lapregunta 
 
 contraer (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 un asunto 
 
 contrapesar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 contraponer (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 contrapuntarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 contrapuntarse 
 
 de 
 
 palabras 
 
 contravenir 
 
 a 
 
 la ley 
 
 contribuir 
 
 a 
 
 tal cosa 
 
 contribuir 
 
 con 
 
 dinero 
 
 convalecer 
 
 de 
 
 la enfermedad 
 
 convencerse 
 
 de 
 
 la razon 
 
 convenir 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 convenir 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 conversar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 conversar 
 
 en 
 
 materias de estado 
 
 convertir (la hacienda) 
 
 en 
 
 dinero 
 
 conyertirse 
 
 a 
 
 Dios 
 
 convidar (a alguno) 
 
 a 
 
 comer 
 
 convidar (a alguno) 
 
 con 
 
 dinero 
 
 303 
 
304 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 convidarse 
 
 a 
 
 los trabajos 
 
 convocar 
 
 a 
 
 junta 
 
 cooperar (con otro) 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 correrse 
 
 de 
 
 verguenza 
 
 corresponder , 
 
 a 
 
 los beneficios 
 
 corresponderse 
 
 con 
 
 los amigos 
 
 cotejar (lacopia) 
 
 con 
 
 el original 
 
 crecer 
 
 en 
 
 virtudes 
 
 crecido 
 
 de 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 creer 
 
 en 
 
 Dios 
 
 creerse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 cuadrar 
 
 con 
 
 el encargo 
 
 cuadrar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno * 
 
 cual 
 
 de 
 
 los dos 
 
 cucharetear 
 
 en 
 
 todo 
 
 cuidar (de algo) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 culpar (h uno) 
 
 de 
 
 omiso 
 
 cumplir 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 cumplir 
 
 con 
 
 su obligacion 
 
 curarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna enfermedad 
 
 curarse 
 
 en 
 
 salud 
 
 curtirse 
 
 al 
 
 aire 
 
 curtido 
 
 del 
 
 sol 
 
 chancearse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 chapuzar (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 el agua 
 
 chico 
 
 de 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 chocar 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 chocar 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 dar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 dar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 palos 
 
 dar 
 
 de 
 
 bianco 
 
 dar 
 
 en 
 
 manias 
 
 dar 
 
 por 
 
 visto 
 
 darse 
 
 a 
 
 estudiar 
 
 darse 
 
 al 
 
 diantre 
 
 darse 
 
 por 
 
 vencido 
 
 deber (diner©) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 decaer 
 
 de 
 
 su autoridad 
 
 decir (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 decir (bien) 
 
 con 
 
 una cosa 
 
 decir (bien) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 declararse 
 
 d 
 
 alguno 
 
 declararse 
 
 por 
 
 unpartido 
 
 declinar 
 
 d y hdcia 
 
 tal parte 
 
 declinar 
 
 en 
 
 bajeza 
 
 dedicar (tieinpo) 
 
 al 
 
 estudio 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 dediearse 
 
 d 
 
 la virtud 
 
 defender (a uno) 
 
 de 
 
 sus contrarios 
 
 deferir (al parecer) 
 
 de 
 
 otro 
 
 de fraud ar (algo) 
 
 de 
 
 la autoridad de otro 
 
 degenerar 
 
 de 
 
 su nacimie*nto 
 
 dejar (una man da) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 dejar 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 dejar (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 escribir 
 
 delante 
 
 de 
 
 manos de otro 
 
 delatarse 
 
 al 
 
 juez 
 
 deleitarse 
 
 con 
 
 la vista 
 
 deleitarse 
 
 en 
 
 oir 
 
 deliberar 
 
 sobre 
 
 tal cosa 
 
 dentro 
 
 de 
 
 casa 
 
 depender 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 deponer (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 su empleo 
 
 depositar (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 alguno parte 
 
 derivar 
 
 de 
 
 otra autoridad 
 
 derrenegar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 desabrirse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desabrocharse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desagradecido 
 
 a 
 
 algun beneficio 
 
 desahogarss (con alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 su pena 
 
 desapropriarse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 desavenirse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desavenirse (unos) 
 
 de 
 
 otros 
 
 desayunarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna noticia 
 
 descabezarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 descalabazarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 descansar 
 
 de 
 
 la fatiga 
 
 descantillar (algo) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 descargarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 descartarse 
 
 de 
 
 algun encargo 
 
 descender 
 
 a 
 
 los valles 
 
 descender 
 
 de 
 
 buen linage 
 
 descolgarse 
 
 de, por 
 
 la muralla 
 
 descollar 
 
 sobre 
 
 otros 
 
 descomponerse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desconfiar 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 desconocido 
 
 a 
 
 los benerlcios 
 
 descontar (aigo) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 descubrirse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 descuidarse 
 
 de, en 
 
 su obligacion 
 
 desdecir 
 
 de 
 
 su caracter 
 
 desdecirse 
 
 de 
 
 lo dicbo 
 
 desdeiiarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 desembarazarse 
 
 de 
 
 estorvos 
 
 305 
 
306 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 desembarcar 
 
 de 
 
 la nave 
 
 desembarcar 
 
 en 
 
 el puerto 
 
 desenfrenarse 
 
 en 
 
 vicios 
 
 desertar 
 
 de 
 
 las banderas 
 
 desesperar 
 
 de 
 
 la pretension 
 
 desfalcar (algo) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 desgajarse 
 
 de 
 
 los montes 
 
 deshacerse 
 
 a 
 
 trabajar 
 
 deshacerse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 deshacerse 
 
 en 
 
 llanto 
 
 desmentir 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 desmentir (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 desuudarse 
 
 de 
 
 pasiones 
 
 despedirse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 despeilarse 
 
 de 
 
 un vicio en otro 
 
 despertar 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 despertar 
 
 del 
 
 sueilo 
 
 despicarse 
 
 de 
 
 la ofensa 
 
 despoblarse 
 
 de 
 
 gente 
 
 despdsarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desprenderse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 despues 
 
 de 
 
 alguna Cosa 
 
 desquiciar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 su poder 
 
 desquitarse 
 
 de 
 
 la perdida 
 
 desterrar (a uno) 
 
 de 
 
 su patria 
 
 destrizarse 
 
 a 
 
 llorar 
 
 destrizarse 
 
 de 
 
 enfado 
 
 desvergonzarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 desviarse 
 
 del 
 
 camino 
 
 desvivirse 
 
 por 
 
 algo 
 
 detenerse 
 
 en 
 
 dificultades 
 
 determinarse 
 
 a 
 
 partir 
 
 detras 
 
 de 
 
 la iglesia 
 
 devolver (la causa) 
 
 al 
 
 juez 
 
 deferir (algo) 
 
 a, para 
 
 otro tiernpo 
 
 dignarse 
 
 de 
 
 conceder algo 
 
 dimanar (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 discernar (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 disgust arse 
 
 de, con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 disponer 
 
 de 
 
 los bienes 
 
 disponerse 
 
 a 
 
 caminar 
 
 disputar 
 
 de, soh % e 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 disentir 
 
 de 
 
 otro dictamen 
 
 distar (un pueblo) 
 
 de 
 
 otro 
 
 distinguir (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 distraerse 
 
 de, en 
 
 la conversacion 
 
 disuadir (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 dividir (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 dividir 
 
 en 
 
 partes 
 
 dividir 
 
 eutre 
 
 muchos 
 
 dividir 
 
 por 
 
 mitad 
 
 dolerse 
 
 de 
 
 los pecados 
 
 dotado 
 
 de 
 
 ciencia 
 
 dudar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 durar 
 
 hasta 
 
 el invierno 
 
 durar 
 
 por 
 
 mucbo tiempo 
 
 duro 
 
 de 
 
 corteza 
 
 echar (algo) 
 
 a, en, por 
 
 tierra 
 
 echar (olor) 
 
 de 
 
 si 
 
 elevarse 
 
 a, hasta 
 
 el cielo 
 
 elevarse 
 
 de 
 
 la tierra 
 
 embarcarse 
 
 en 
 
 negocios 
 
 embobarse 
 
 con, de, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 emboscarse 
 
 en 
 
 el monte 
 
 embutir (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 algo don 
 
 embutir (una cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 otra 
 
 enmendarse 
 
 con 
 
 la correccion 
 
 enmendarse 
 
 de, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 empaparse 
 
 en 
 
 agua 
 
 emparejar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 emparentar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 empefiarse 
 
 en 
 
 una cosa 
 
 emplearse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 enagenarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 enamorarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 enamoricarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 encajarse 
 
 en, por 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 encaramarse 
 
 en, por, sobre 
 
 ! ia pared 
 
 encararse 
 
 a, con 
 
 alguno 
 
 encargarse 
 
 de 
 
 algun negoeio 
 
 encasquetarse (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 la cabeza 
 
 encastiilarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 encenagarse 
 
 en 
 
 vicios 
 
 encenderse 
 
 en 
 
 ira 
 
 encerrarse 
 
 en 
 
 su casa 
 
 encomendarse 
 
 a 
 
 Dios 
 
 enconarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 encbarcarse 
 
 en 
 
 agua 
 
 enfermar 
 
 del 
 
 pecho 
 
 enfrascarse 
 
 en 
 
 la disputa 
 
 engolfarse 
 
 en 
 
 cosas graves 
 
 engreirse 
 
 con 
 
 la fortuna 
 
 enlazar (alguna cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 enradarse (una cosa) 
 
 con, en 
 
 otra 
 
 307 
 
308 APPENDIX TO 
 
 ensayarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 entender 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 entender 
 
 , en 
 
 sus negocios 
 
 enterarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 enterarse 
 
 en 
 
 algun negocio 
 
 entrar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 entregar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 aiguno 
 
 entremeterse 
 
 en 
 
 cosas de otro 
 
 enviar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 aiguno 
 
 equivocarse (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 equivocarse 
 
 en 
 
 algo 
 
 escaparse 
 
 de 
 
 la prision 
 
 escaparse 
 
 por 
 
 la ventuna 
 
 escamentar 
 
 de, con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 escarmentar 
 
 eu 
 
 cabeza agena 
 
 esconderse 
 
 en 
 
 aiguno parte 
 
 esconderse 
 
 de 
 
 aiguno 
 
 escaso 
 
 de 
 
 medios 
 
 escribir (cartas) 
 
 a 
 
 aiguno 
 
 esculpir 
 
 en 
 
 bronce 
 
 esmerarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 espantarse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 estampar 
 
 en 
 
 papel 
 
 estar 
 
 a 
 
 la orden de otro 
 
 estar 
 
 de 
 
 viage 
 
 estar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 estar 
 
 en 
 
 anirno de 
 
 estar 
 
 en 
 
 lo que se hace 
 
 estar 
 
 •para 
 
 salir 
 
 estar 
 
 por 
 
 aiguno 
 
 estar (alguna cosa) 
 
 for 
 
 suceder 
 
 estrecharse 
 
 con 
 
 aiguno 
 
 estrecharse 
 
 en 
 
 los gastos 
 
 estrellarse 
 
 con 
 
 aiguno 
 
 estrellarse tn } 
 
 , b, contra alguna cosa 
 
 estribar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 exceder (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 exceder (una cantidad) 
 
 en 
 
 mil reales 
 
 exceptuar (a aiguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 excluir (a aiguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte, 6 cosa 
 
 excusarse 
 
 con 
 
 aiguno 
 
 excusarse 
 
 de 
 
 hacer alguna cosa 
 
 exhortar (a aiguno) 
 
 a 
 
 tal cosa 
 
 eximir (a aiguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 exonerar (a aiguno) 
 
 de 
 
 su empleo 
 
 expeler (a aiguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 experto 
 
 en 
 
 las artes 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 SOS 
 
 extraer (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 extraviarse 
 
 de 
 
 la carrera 
 
 facil 
 
 de 
 
 digerir 
 
 fal tar 
 
 a 
 
 la palabra 
 
 faltar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 falto 
 
 de 
 
 juicio 
 
 fastidiarse 
 
 de 
 
 manjares 
 
 fatigarse 
 
 de } en, por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 favorable 
 
 a, para 
 
 alguno 
 
 favorecerse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 fiarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 iiar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 fiel 
 
 a, con 
 
 sus amigos 
 
 fijar (algo) 
 
 en 
 
 la pared 
 
 flexible 
 
 a 
 
 la razon 
 
 fluctuar 
 
 en, entre 
 
 dudas 
 
 fortificarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 fran que arse 
 
 a, con 
 
 alguno 
 
 frisar (una persona, 6 cos 
 
 a) con 
 
 otra 
 
 fuera 
 
 de 
 
 cosa 
 
 fuerte 
 
 de 
 
 condicion 
 
 fundarse 
 
 en 
 
 razon 
 
 girar (una letra) 
 
 a 
 
 cargo de otro 
 
 girar 
 
 de 
 
 una parte a otra 
 
 girar 
 
 por 
 
 tal parte 
 
 girar 
 
 sobre 
 
 una casa de comerci© 
 
 gloriarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 gordo 
 
 de 
 
 talle 
 
 gozar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 graduar (una cosa) 
 
 de 9 por 
 
 buena 
 
 grangear (la voluntad) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 guardarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno, de alguna cosa 
 
 guarecerse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna persona 6 cosa 
 
 guarecerse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 guarnecer (una cosa) 
 
 con, de 
 
 otra 
 
 guiado 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 guiarse 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 guindarse 
 
 por 
 
 la pared 
 
 gustar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 habii 
 
 en 
 
 papeles 
 
 habil 
 
 para 
 
 el empleo 
 
 habilitar (a uno) 
 
 en, para 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 habitar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 habitar 
 
 en 
 
 tal parte 
 
 habituarse 
 
 a, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 hablar 
 
 con, pot 
 
 * alguno 
 
310 APPENDIX \ 
 
 ro 
 
 hablar 
 
 de 9 en, sobre alguna cosa 
 
 hablar 
 
 en 
 
 griego 
 
 hacer 
 
 a 
 
 todo 
 
 hacer 
 
 de 
 
 valiente 
 
 hacer 
 
 para 
 
 si 
 
 hacer 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 hacerse 
 
 con 
 
 buenos libros 
 
 hallar (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 tal parte 
 
 hallarse 
 
 a, en 
 
 la fiesta 
 
 hartarse 
 
 de 
 
 comida 
 
 henchir (el cantaro) 
 
 de 
 
 agua 
 
 herir (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 la estimacion 
 
 herido 
 
 de 
 
 la injuria 
 
 hermanar (ana cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 hervir (un iugar) 
 
 de, en 
 
 gente 
 
 hincarse 
 
 de 
 
 rodillas 
 
 bocicar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 holgarse 
 
 con, de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 huir 
 
 de 
 
 alguna persona 6 cosa 
 
 humanarse 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 humanarse 
 
 con 
 
 los inferiores 
 
 humillarse 
 
 a 
 
 alguna persona 6 cosa 
 
 hundir (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 el agua 
 
 hundirse 
 
 en 
 
 un pantano 
 
 idoneo 
 
 para 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 igual 
 
 a, con 
 
 otro 
 
 igual 
 
 en 
 
 fuerzas 
 
 Igualar (una cosa) 
 
 a, con 
 
 otra 
 
 irapelir (a alguno) 
 
 de ? en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 irnbuir (a alguno) 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 impelido 
 
 de 
 
 la necesidad 
 
 impenetrable 
 
 a 
 
 los mas perspicaces 
 
 impenetrable 
 
 en 
 
 el secreto 
 
 impetrar (algo) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 implicarse 
 
 con, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 imponer (pena) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 imponerse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 importar 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 importunado 
 
 de, por 
 
 otro 
 
 importunar (a alguno;, 
 
 con 
 
 impresiones 
 
 impresionar (a alguno) 
 
 contra 
 
 otro 
 
 impresionar 
 
 de, en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 imprimir (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 el animo 
 
 impropio 
 
 de, en, para 
 
 su edad 
 
 impugnar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 impugn a do 
 
 de ? por 
 
 much os 
 
imputar (la culpa) 
 
 inaccesible 
 
 inapeable 
 
 incansable 
 
 incapaz 
 
 incesante 
 
 incidir 
 
 inciter (a alguno) 
 
 incitar (a. alguno) 
 
 inclinar (a alguno) 
 
 incluir 
 
 incompatible 
 
 incomprehensible 
 
 inconsecuente 
 
 inconstante 
 
 incorporar (una cosa) 
 
 increible 
 
 incumbir (una cosa) 
 
 incunir 
 
 indeciso 
 
 indignarse 
 
 indisponer (a uno) 
 
 inducir (a alguno) 
 
 inductivo 
 
 indultar (a alguno) 
 
 infatigable 
 
 infecto 
 
 inferior 
 
 inferior 
 
 inferir (una cosa) 
 
 inficionado 
 
 infiel 
 
 inflexible 
 
 inflexible 
 
 influir 
 
 informal' (a alguno) 
 
 infundir (animo) 
 
 ingrato 
 
 ingrato 
 
 inhabil 
 
 inhabilitar (a alguno) 
 inhibir (aljuez) 
 injerir (un arbol) 
 insensible 
 inseparable 
 insertar (una cosa) 
 iusinuar (una cosa) 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 a 
 
 los pretendientes 
 
 de 
 
 su opinion 
 
 en 
 
 el trabajo 
 
 de 
 
 remedio 
 
 en 
 
 sus tareas 
 
 en 
 
 culpa 
 
 a 
 
 su defensa 
 
 contra 
 
 otro 
 
 a 
 
 la virtud 
 
 en 
 
 el numero 
 
 con 
 
 el mando 
 
 a 
 
 los hombres 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 en 
 
 su proceder 
 
 a, con, en 
 
 otra 
 
 a, para 
 
 muchos 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 en 
 
 delitos 
 
 en 
 
 resolver 
 
 con, contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 a 
 
 pecar 
 
 de 
 
 error 
 
 de 
 
 la pena 
 
 en 
 
 el trabajo 
 
 de 
 
 heregia 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 de, por 
 
 otra 
 
 de 
 
 peste 
 
 a 
 
 su a mi go 
 
 a 
 
 la razon 
 
 en 
 
 su dictamen 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 de, sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 a, en 
 
 alguno 
 
 a 
 
 los benelicios 
 
 con 
 
 los amigos 
 
 para 
 
 el empleo 
 
 para 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 de, en 
 
 el conocimiento 
 
 en 
 
 otro 
 
 a 
 
 las injurias 
 
 de 
 
 la virtud 
 
 en 
 
 otra 
 
 § 
 
 alguna 
 
 311 
 
312 
 
 insinuarse 
 
 insipido 
 
 insistir 
 
 inspirar (alguna cosa) 
 
 instruir (a alguno) 
 
 interceder 
 
 interceder 
 
 Interesarse 
 
 interesarse 
 
 interesarse 
 
 internarse 
 
 internarse 
 
 interpoiar (unas cosas) 
 
 interponar (su autoridad 
 
 intervenir 
 
 intervenir 
 
 introducirse 
 
 introducirse 
 
 invalido 
 
 invern ar 
 
 inverti r (el caudal) 
 
 ir (de Madrid) 
 
 ir 
 
 ir 
 
 ir 
 
 ir 
 
 jactarse 
 
 jugar 
 
 jugar (tmos) 
 
 jugar (alguna cosa) 
 
 juntar (una cosa) 
 
 justificarse 
 
 juzgar 
 
 ladear (una cosa) 
 
 ladearse (alguno) 
 
 lamentarse 
 
 lanzar (algo) 
 
 largo 
 
 largo 
 
 lastimarse 
 
 lastimai^se 
 
 leer (los-pensamientos) 
 
 lejos 
 
 levantar (las manos) 
 
 levantar (alguna cosa) 
 
 levantar (alguna cosa) 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 con 
 
 al 
 en f sobre 
 a 
 de, en, sobre 
 
 con 
 
 por 
 
 con 
 
 por 
 
 en 
 
 con 
 
 en 
 
 con 
 
 con 
 
 en 
 
 por 
 
 con 
 en, por 
 de, por 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 a, hacia 
 
 contra 
 
 por 
 
 por 
 
 tras 
 
 de 
 
 a 
 
 con 
 
 con 
 
 a, con 
 
 de 
 
 de 
 
 a 
 a 
 de 
 
 a, contra 
 
 de 
 
 de 
 con, en 
 
 de 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 al 
 del 
 
 en 
 
 TO 
 
 los poderosos 
 
 gusto 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 alguno por otro 
 
 otro con alguno 
 
 alguno por otro 
 
 otro con alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 6 lugar 
 
 otras 
 
 alguno 
 
 las cosas 
 
 alguno 
 
 los que mandan 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 tal parte 
 
 otro uso 
 
 Cadiz 
 
 alguno 
 
 el camino 
 
 pan 
 
 alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 
 tal juego 
 otros 
 otra 
 otra 
 
 algun cargo 
 alguna cosa 
 
 tal parte 
 
 otro partido 
 
 la disgracia 
 
 alguno 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 manos 
 
 una piedra 
 
 aiguno 
 
 alguno 
 
 tierra 
 
 cielo 
 
 suelo 
 
 alto 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 31* 
 
 libertar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 paligro 
 
 librar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 riesgos 
 
 lidiar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 ligar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 ligero 
 
 de 
 
 pies 
 
 limitar (las facultades) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 limitado 
 
 de 
 
 talentos 
 
 lindar (una posesion) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 llevar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 llevarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna pasion 
 
 luchar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 ludir (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 malquistarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 manar (agua) 
 
 de 
 
 una fuente 
 
 inanco 
 
 de 
 
 una mano 
 
 mancomunarse 
 
 con 
 
 otros 
 
 mandar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 manifestar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 mantener (conversacion) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 inantenerse 
 
 de 
 
 yerbas 
 
 mantenerse 
 
 en 
 
 paz 
 
 maquinar 
 
 contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 maquinar 
 
 en, sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 maravillarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 mas 
 
 de 
 
 cien ducados 
 
 inatarse 
 
 por 
 
 conseguir alguna cosa 
 
 matarse 
 
 a 
 
 trabajar 
 
 rnatizar 
 
 con, de 
 
 colores 
 
 mediano 
 
 de 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 madiar 
 
 con, por 
 
 alguno 
 
 inediar 
 
 entre 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 medirse 
 
 con 
 
 sus fuerzas 
 
 medirse 
 
 en 
 
 las palabras 
 
 medrar 
 
 en 
 
 la hacienda 
 
 mejorar 
 
 de 
 
 empleo 
 
 mejorar (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 tei'cio y quinto 
 
 menor 
 
 de 
 
 edad 
 
 menos 
 
 de 
 
 cien ducados 
 
 merecer 
 
 a, con, de 
 
 alguno 
 
 mesurarse 
 
 en 
 
 las acciones 
 
 meter (dinero) 
 
 en 
 
 el cofre 
 
 meter (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 empefio 
 
 meter (una cosa) 
 
 entre 
 
 otras 
 
 metarse 
 
 a 
 
 gobernar 
 
 meters© 
 
 a 
 P 
 
 caballero 
 
314< APPENDIX 
 
 TO 
 
 meterse 
 
 con 
 
 los que mandan 
 
 meterse 
 
 en 
 
 los peligros 
 
 mezclar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 mezclarse 
 
 en 
 
 negocios 
 
 mirar (la ciudad) 
 
 a 
 
 oriente 
 
 mirar 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 mirarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 moderarse 
 
 en 
 
 las palabras 
 
 mofarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 mojar (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 agua 
 
 molerse 
 
 a 
 
 trabajar 
 
 molido 
 
 de 
 
 andar 
 
 molestar (a uno) 
 
 con 
 
 visitas 
 
 molesto 
 
 a 
 
 todos 
 
 montar 
 
 a 
 
 caballo 
 
 montar 
 
 en 
 
 mula 
 
 montar 
 
 en 
 
 colera 
 
 morar 
 
 en 
 
 poblado 
 
 morir 
 
 de 
 
 poca edad 
 
 morir 
 
 de 
 
 enfermedad 
 
 morirse 
 
 de 
 
 frio 
 
 morirse 
 
 por 
 
 lograr alguna cosa 
 
 motejar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 ignorante 
 
 motivar (la providencia) 
 
 con 
 
 razones 
 
 mo verse 
 
 de 
 
 una parta a otra 
 
 muchos 
 
 de 
 
 los presentes 
 
 mudar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 mudar 
 
 de 
 
 intento 
 
 mudarse 
 
 de 
 
 casa 
 
 murmurar 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 nacer 
 
 con 
 
 fortuna 
 
 nacer (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 nacer 
 
 en 
 
 las malvas 
 
 11 ace r 
 
 para 
 
 trabajos 
 
 nadar 
 
 en 
 
 el rio 
 
 navegar 
 
 a 
 
 Indias 
 
 negarse 
 
 a 
 
 la comunicacion 
 
 nimio 
 
 en 
 
 su proceder 
 
 ninguno 
 
 de 
 
 los presentes 
 
 nivelarse 
 
 a 
 
 lo justo 
 
 nombrar (a alguno) 
 
 para 
 
 el empleo 
 
 notar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 hablador 
 
 notificar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 obligar (a alguno) 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 obstar (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
, 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 obstinarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 obtener (alguna gracia) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 ocultar (alguna cosa) 
 
 d, de 
 
 alguno 
 
 ocuparse 
 
 en 
 
 trabajar 
 
 ofenderse 
 
 con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 ofrecer (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 ofrecerse 
 
 a 
 
 los peligros 
 
 oler (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 olvidarse 
 
 de 
 
 lo pasado 
 
 opinar 
 
 en, sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 oprimir (a alguno) 
 
 con 
 
 el poder 
 
 optar 
 
 a 
 
 los empleos 
 
 ordenarse 
 
 de 
 
 sacerdote 
 
 orillar 
 
 a 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 pactar (alguna cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 pagar 
 
 con 
 
 palabras 
 
 pagar 
 
 en 
 
 dinero 
 
 pagarse 
 
 de 
 
 buenas razones 
 
 pal ad ears e 
 
 con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 paliar (alguna cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 palido 
 
 de 
 
 semblante 
 
 parar 
 
 a 
 
 la puerta 
 
 parar 
 
 en 
 
 casa 
 
 pararse 
 
 a 
 
 descansar 
 
 pararse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 pararse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 parco 
 
 en 
 
 la comida 
 
 parecer 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 parecerse 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 participar (algo) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 participar 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 particularizarse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 particularizarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 partir 
 
 a 
 
 Italia 
 
 partir (algo) 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 partir 
 
 en 
 
 pedazos 
 
 partir 
 
 entire 
 
 enemigos 
 
 partir 
 
 por 
 
 mitad 
 
 partir 
 
 por 
 
 entero 
 
 partirse 
 
 de 
 
 Espana 
 
 pasar 
 
 a 
 
 Madrid 
 
 pasar 
 
 de 
 
 Sevilla 
 
 pasar 
 
 entre 
 
 montes 
 
 pasar 
 
 por 
 
 el camino 
 
 pasar 
 
 por> entn 
 f2 
 
 s 6rboles 
 
 315 
 
316 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 TO 
 
 pasar 
 
 por 
 
 cobarde 
 
 pasarse (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 la memoria 
 
 pasarse (la fruta) 
 
 de 
 
 madura 
 
 pasarse (alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 letras 
 
 pasearse 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 pasearse 
 
 por 
 
 el campo 
 
 pecar 
 
 contra 
 
 la ley 
 
 pecar 
 
 de 
 
 ignorante 
 
 pecar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 pecar 
 
 por 
 
 demasia 
 
 pedir (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 pedir 
 
 con 
 
 justicia 
 
 pedir 
 
 contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 pedir 
 
 de 
 
 justicia 
 
 pedir 
 
 en 
 
 justicia 
 
 pedir 
 
 por 
 
 Dios 
 
 pedir 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 pegar (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 pegar (una cosa) 
 
 con 
 
 otra 
 
 pegar 
 
 contra, en la pared 
 
 pelearse 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 peligrar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 pelotearse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 penar 
 
 en 
 
 la otra vida 
 
 penar 
 
 por 
 
 alguna persona 6 cosa 
 
 penetrar 
 
 hasta 
 
 las entrailas 
 
 penetrado 
 
 de 
 
 dolor 
 
 pensar 
 
 en } sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 perder (algo) 
 
 de 
 
 vista 
 
 perderse (alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 vista 
 
 perderse 
 
 en 
 
 el camino 
 
 perecer 
 
 de 
 
 hambre 
 
 perecerse 
 
 de 
 
 risa 
 
 perecerse 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 peregrinar 
 
 por 
 
 el mundo 
 
 perfumar 
 
 con 
 
 incienso 
 
 permanecer 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 permitir (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 permutar (una cosa) 
 
 con, por 
 
 otra 
 
 perseguido 
 
 de 
 
 enemigos 
 
 perseverar 
 
 en 
 
 algun intento 
 
 persuadir (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 persuadirse 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 persuadirse 
 
 de, por 
 
 las razones de otro 
 
 pertenecer (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 pertrecharse 
 
 de 
 
 lo necesario 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 pesado 
 
 en 
 
 la conversacion 
 
 pesarle (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 lo que ha hecho 
 
 pescar 
 
 con 
 
 red 
 
 piar 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 picar 
 
 de, en 
 
 todo 
 
 picarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 pintiparado 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 plagarse 
 
 de 
 
 granos 
 
 plantar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 plantarse 
 
 en 
 
 Cadiz 
 
 poblar 
 
 de 
 
 arboles 
 
 poblar 
 
 en 
 
 buen parage 
 
 poblarse 
 
 de 
 
 gente 
 
 ponderar (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 grande 
 
 poner (a uno) 
 
 a 
 
 oficio 
 
 poner (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 poner (a alguno) 
 
 por 
 
 corregidor 
 
 ponerse 
 
 a 
 
 escribir 
 
 porfiar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 portarse 
 
 con 
 
 decencia 
 
 posar 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 poseido 
 
 de 
 
 temor 
 
 postrado 
 
 de 
 
 la enfermedad 
 
 postrarse 
 
 a 
 
 los pies de alguno 
 
 postrarse 
 
 en 
 
 cama 
 
 postrarse 
 
 en 
 
 tierra 
 
 precedido 
 
 de 
 
 otro 
 
 preciarse 
 
 de 
 
 valiente 
 
 precipitarse 
 
 de, por 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 preterido 
 
 a 
 
 otro 
 
 preferido 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 preguntar (alguna cosa) 
 
 d 
 
 alguno 
 
 pre nd arse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 prender (las plantas) 
 
 en 
 
 la tierra 
 
 preocuparse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 prepararse 
 
 a, para 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 preponderar (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 otra 
 
 prescindir 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 presentar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 presentar (a uno) 
 
 para 
 
 una prebenda 
 
 preservar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 dailo 
 
 presidir 
 
 a 
 
 otros 
 
 presidir 
 
 en 
 
 un tribunal 
 
 presidido 
 
 de 
 
 otro 
 
 prestar (dinero) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 prestar (la dieta) 
 
 para 
 
 la salud 
 
 prestar 
 
 sobre 
 p3 
 
 prenda 
 
 317 
 
318 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 docto 
 
 la mentira 
 
 presumir de 
 
 prevalecer (la verdad) sobre 
 
 prevenir (alguna cosa) a alguno 
 
 prevenirse de lo necesario 
 
 prevenirse para un viage 
 
 primero de, entre todos 
 
 pringarse en alguna cosa 
 
 privar (a alguno) de lo suyo 
 
 privar con alguno 
 
 probar a saltar 
 
 probar de todo 
 
 proceder a la eleccion 
 
 proceder con, sin acuerdo 
 
 proceder contra alguno 
 
 proceder (una cosa) de otra 
 
 procesar (a uno) por delitos 
 
 procurar por alguno 
 
 proejar contra las olas 
 
 profesar en religion 
 
 prometer (alguna cosa) a alguno 
 
 promover (a alguno) a algun cargo 
 
 propasarse a, en alguna cosa 
 
 proponer (alguna cosa) a alguno 
 
 proponer (a alguno) en primer lugar 
 
 propocionar (a alguno) para alguna cosa 
 
 proporcionarse a las fuerzas 
 
 prolougar (el plazo) para alguna cosa 
 
 prorumpir en * lagrimas 
 
 proveer (la plaza) de viveres 
 
 proveer (el empleo) en alguno 
 
 provenir de otra cosa 
 
 provocar a ira 
 
 provocar (a alguno) con malas palabras 
 
 proximo (a alguno) a morir 
 
 pujar por alguna cosa 
 
 purgarse de sospecha 
 
 quebrantar (los huesos) a alguno 
 
 quebrar (el corazon) a alguno 
 
 quedar de asiento 
 
 quedar de pies 
 
 quedar en casa 
 
 quedar (camino) por andar 
 
 quedar por alguno 
 
 quedar por cobarde 
 
 quedar (una cosa) por mia 
 
 quedarse en el sermon 
 
 quejarse « alguno 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 quejarse 
 
 . d€ 
 
 alguno 
 
 querellarse 
 
 a, ante 
 
 eljuez 
 
 qaerellarse 
 
 de 
 
 su vecino 
 
 queraar 
 
 con 
 
 mal razones 
 
 quemarse 
 
 de 
 
 algunas palabras 
 
 quemarse 
 
 por 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 querido 
 
 de 
 
 sus amigos 
 
 quien 
 
 de 
 
 ellos 
 
 quitar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 quitar (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 quitarse 
 
 de 
 
 quimeras 
 
 rabiar 
 
 de 
 
 horabre 
 
 rabiar 
 
 j)or 
 
 comer 
 
 radicarse 
 
 en 
 
 la virtud 
 
 raer 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 rallar (las tripas) 
 
 a 
 
 cualquiera 
 
 razonar 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 rayar 
 
 con 
 
 la virtud 
 
 rebalsarse (el agua) 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 rebatir (una cantidad) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 rebajar (una cantidad) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 recaer 
 
 en 
 
 la enfermedad 
 
 recalcarse 
 
 en 
 
 lo dicho 
 
 recatarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 recavar (alguna cosa) 
 
 de, con 
 
 alguno 
 
 recetar (medicinas) 
 
 a, para 
 
 alguno 
 
 recetar 
 
 contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 recibir (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 recibir 
 
 a 
 
 cuenta 
 
 recibir (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 casa 
 
 recibirse 
 
 de 
 
 abogado 
 
 recio 
 
 de 
 
 cuerpo 
 
 reclinarse 
 
 en, sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 recluir (a algnno) 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 recobrarse 
 
 de 
 
 la enfermedad 
 
 recogerse 
 
 d 
 
 casa 
 
 recomender (alguna cosa) 
 
 alguno 
 
 recompensar (agravios) 
 
 con 
 
 beneficios 
 
 reconcentrarse (el odio) 
 
 en 
 
 el corazon 
 
 reconciliar (a uno) 
 
 con 
 
 otro 
 
 reconvenir (a alguno) 
 
 con, de, sobre alguna cosa 
 
 recostarse 
 
 en, sobre 
 
 la silla 
 
 recudir (a alguno) 
 
 con 
 
 el sueldo 
 
 redondearse 
 
 de 
 
 deudas 
 
 reducir (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 la mitad 
 
 redundar 
 
 en 
 
 beneficio 
 
 319 
 
320 
 
 reemplazar (a alguno) 
 
 referirse 
 
 refocilarse 
 
 refugiarse 
 
 reglarse 
 
 regodearse 
 
 reirse 
 
 reirse 
 
 remirarse 
 
 rendirse 
 
 renegar 
 
 repartir (alguna cosa) 
 
 representarse (alguna cosa) 
 
 resbalarse 
 
 resentirse 
 
 residir 
 
 residir 
 
 resolverse 
 
 responder 
 
 Testar (una cantidad) 
 
 restituirse 
 
 resultar (una cosa) 
 
 retirarse 
 
 retirarse 
 
 retraerse 
 
 retraerse 
 
 retroceder 
 
 reventar 
 
 reventar 
 
 revestirse 
 
 revolcarse 
 
 revolver 
 
 robar (dinero) 
 
 rodar (el carro) 
 
 rodear (a alguno) 
 
 rodear (una plaza) 
 
 rogar (alguna cosa) 
 
 romper 
 
 romper 
 
 rozarse (una cosa) 
 
 saber 
 
 saber 
 
 sacar (una cosa) 
 
 sacar 
 
 sacar 
 
 sacrificar (alguna cosa) 
 
 APPENDIX TO 
 
 su empleo 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 aiguna cosa 
 
 sagrado 
 
 lojusto 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 carcajadas 
 
 alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 la razon 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 algunos 
 
 la imaginacion 
 
 las manos 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 asiento en alguna parte 
 
 la corte 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 la pregunta 
 
 otra 
 
 su casa 
 
 otra 
 
 la soledad 
 
 mundo 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 hacia tal parte 
 
 risa 
 
 hablar 
 
 autoridad 
 
 los vicios 
 
 en 
 
 a 
 
 con 
 
 a, en 
 
 a 
 
 a, con 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 en 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 a, entre 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 de 
 
 de 
 
 en 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 
 a 
 
 del 
 a 
 de 
 a 
 de 
 por 
 de 
 
 en 
 
 contra 9 Mcia,sobre el enemigo 
 alguno 
 tierra 
 
 todas partes 
 murallas 
 alguno 
 alguno 
 alguna parte 
 las palabras 
 
 a 
 
 por 
 
 por 
 
 con> de 
 
 a 
 
 con 
 
 por 
 
 en 
 
 a 
 
 de 
 a 
 
 de 
 en 
 
 m 
 
 vino 
 trabajos 
 la plaza 
 alguna parte 
 limpio 
 Dios 
 

 SYNTAX. 
 
 
 sacrificarse 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 salir 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 salir 
 
 con 
 
 la pretencion 
 
 salir 
 
 contra 
 
 alguno 
 
 salir 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 salir 
 
 por 
 
 fiador 
 
 saitar (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 la imaginacion 
 
 saltar 
 
 de 
 
 el suelo 
 
 saitar 
 
 de 
 
 gozo 
 
 saltar 
 
 en 
 
 tierra 
 
 salvar (a alguno) 
 
 del 
 
 peligro 
 
 sanar 
 
 de 
 
 la enfermadad 
 
 satisfacer 
 
 por 
 
 las culpas 
 
 satisfacerse 
 
 de 
 
 la deuda 
 
 segregar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 segregar (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 seguirse (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 semejar 6 semejarse (una cosa) a 
 
 otra 
 
 sentarse 
 
 a 
 
 la mesa 
 
 sentarse 
 
 en 
 
 la silla 
 
 sentenciar (a uno) 
 
 a 
 
 destierro 
 
 sentirse 
 
 de 
 
 algo 
 
 separar (una cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 otra 
 
 ser (una cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 gusto de todos 
 
 ser (una cosa) 
 
 de, para 
 
 algunos 
 
 servir 
 
 de 
 
 mayordomo 
 
 servir 
 
 en 
 
 palacio 
 
 servirse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 sincerarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 sisar 
 
 de 
 
 la compra 
 
 sitiado 
 
 de 
 
 enemigos 
 
 sitiar 
 
 por 
 
 hambre 
 
 situarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 sobrellevar (los trabajos) 
 
 con 
 
 paciencia 
 
 sobrellevar (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 sus trabajos 
 
 sobrepujar (alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 autoridad 
 
 sobresalir 
 
 en 
 
 galas 
 
 sobresalir 
 
 entre 
 
 todos 
 
 sobresaltarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 sojuzgado 
 
 de 
 
 enemigos 
 
 someterse 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 sonar (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 hueca 
 
 sonar (alguna cosa) 
 
 hdcia 
 
 tal parte 
 
 sordo 
 
 a 
 
 las voces 
 
 sordo 
 
 de 
 
 un oido 
 
 sorprender (a alguno) 
 
 con 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 sorprenderle 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 321 
 
322 APPENDIX 
 
 TO 
 
 sorprendido 
 
 de 
 
 la bulla 
 
 sospechar (alguna cosa) 
 
 de 
 
 alguno 
 
 sospechoso 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 subdividir 
 
 en 
 
 partes 
 
 subir 
 
 de 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 subir 
 
 sobre 
 
 la mesa 
 
 subir 
 
 a 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 subrogar (una cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 lugar de otra 
 
 subsistir 
 
 del 
 
 auxilio ageno 
 
 subsistir 
 
 en 
 
 el dictamen 
 
 substituir 
 
 a, por 
 
 alguno 
 
 substituir (un poder) 
 
 en 
 
 alguno 
 
 substraerse 
 
 de 
 
 la obediencia 
 
 suceder (a alguno) 
 
 en 
 
 el empleo 
 
 sufrir (los trabajos) 
 
 con 
 
 paciencia 
 
 sugerir (alguna cosa) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 sugetarse 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 sumergir (alguna cosa) 
 
 en 
 
 el agua 
 
 surnirse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 sumiso 
 
 a 
 
 la voluntad 
 
 supeditado 
 
 de 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 superior 
 
 a 
 
 sus enemigos 
 
 superior 
 
 en 
 
 luces 
 
 suplicar 
 
 de 
 
 la sentencia 
 
 suplicar 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 suplir 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 surgir (la nave) 
 
 en 
 
 el puerto 
 
 surtir 
 
 de 
 
 viveres 
 
 suspenso 
 
 de 
 
 oficio 
 
 suspirar 
 
 por 
 
 el mando 
 
 sustentarse 
 
 con 
 
 yerbas 
 
 sustentarse 
 
 de 
 
 esperanzas 
 
 tachar (a alguno) 
 
 de 
 
 ligero 
 
 terablar 
 
 de 
 
 frio 
 
 temido 
 
 de 
 
 muchos 
 
 temeroso 
 
 de 
 
 muerte 
 
 temible 
 
 a 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 templarse 
 
 en 
 
 comer 
 
 tener (a uno) 
 
 por 
 
 otro 
 
 tenerse 
 
 en 
 
 pie 
 
 teiiir 
 
 de 
 
 azul 
 
 tirar 
 
 a, hdcia 
 
 tal parte 
 
 tirar 
 
 por 
 
 tal parte 
 
 tiritar 
 
 de 
 
 frio 
 
 titubear 
 
 en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 tocar (la herencia) 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
SYNTAX, 
 
 tocar en 
 
 tocado de 
 
 toraar con, en 
 
 tomar (una cosa) de 
 
 torcido de 
 
 tomar a 
 
 tornar de 
 
 trabajar en 
 
 trabajar por 
 
 trabajar por 
 
 trabar de 
 
 trabar (una cosa) con 
 
 trabar en 
 
 trabarse de 
 
 trabucarse en 
 
 traer (alguna cosa) a 
 
 traer (alguna cosa) de 
 
 traficar en 
 
 transferir (alguna cosa) a 
 
 transferase a 
 
 transflgurarse en 
 
 transformar (una cosa) con 
 
 transitar por 
 
 tianspirar por 
 
 transportar (alguna cosa) a 
 transportar (alguna cosa) de 
 
 traspasar (alguna cosa) a 
 
 traspasado de 
 transplantar (de una parte) a 
 
 tratar con 
 
 tratar de 
 
 tratar en 
 
 travesear con 
 
 triumfar de 
 
 trocar (una cosa) por 
 
 tropezar en 
 
 ultimo de 
 
 uncir (ios bueyes) at 
 
 uniformar (una cosa) a, con 
 
 unir (una cosa) s d } con 
 
 unirse en 
 
 unirse enire 
 
 uno de P entre 
 
 util a 
 
 util para 
 
 utilizarse en, con 
 
 323 
 
 alguna parte 
 enfermedad 
 manos 
 tal modo 
 cuerpo 
 alguna parte 
 alguna parte 
 alguna cosa 
 alguna cosa 
 
 otro 
 
 alguno 
 
 otra 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 palabras 
 
 las palabras 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 droga 
 
 otro tiempe 
 
 tal parte 
 
 otra cosa 
 
 otra 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 todas partes 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 alguno 
 
 dolor 
 
 otra 
 
 alguno 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 lanas 
 
 alguno 
 
 los enemigos 
 
 otra 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 todos 
 
 carro 
 
 otra 
 
 otra 
 
 coinunidad 
 
 si 
 
 muchos 
 
 la patria 
 
 tal cosa 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
324 
 
 APPENDIX TO SYNTAX. 
 
 Tacar 
 
 al 
 
 estudio 
 
 vaciarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 vaciarse 
 
 por 
 
 la boca 
 
 vacilar 
 
 en 
 
 la eleccion 
 
 vaciiar 
 
 entre 
 
 la esperanza y el timor 
 
 vacio 
 
 de 
 
 entendimento 
 
 vagar 
 
 por 
 
 el mundo 
 
 valerse 
 
 de 
 
 alguno, de alguna cosa 
 
 valuar (una cos a) 
 
 en 
 
 tal precio 
 
 vanagloriarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 vecino 
 
 al 
 
 trono 
 
 vecino 
 
 de 
 
 Antonio 
 
 velar 
 
 a 
 
 los muertos 
 
 velar 
 
 sobre 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 vencerse 
 
 a 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 vencido 
 
 de 
 
 los contrarios 
 
 venderse 
 
 a 
 
 alguno 
 
 vengarse 
 
 de 
 
 otro 
 
 venir 
 
 a, de, por 
 
 1 alguna parte 
 
 venir 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 verse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 verse 
 
 en 
 
 altura 
 
 vestir 
 
 d 
 
 la raoda 
 
 vestirse 
 
 de 
 
 pafio 
 
 vigilar 
 
 sobre 
 
 sus subditos 
 
 violentarse 
 
 d } en 
 
 alguna cosa 
 
 visible 
 
 a, para 
 
 todos 
 
 vivir 
 
 a 
 
 su gusto 
 
 vivir 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 vivir 
 
 de 
 
 limosna 
 
 vivir 
 
 por 
 
 milagro 
 
 vivir 
 
 sobre 
 
 la haz de la tierra 
 
 volar 
 
 al 
 
 cielo 
 
 volar 
 
 por 
 
 el aire 
 
 volver d 9 de, 
 
 hdcia, por tal parte 
 
 volver 
 
 por 
 
 la verdad 
 
 votar 
 
 en 
 
 el pleito 
 
 votar 
 
 por 
 
 alguno 
 
 zabullirse 6 zambullirse 
 
 en 
 
 el agua 
 
 zafarse 
 
 de 
 
 alguna persona 6 cosa 
 
 zambucarse 
 
 en 
 
 alguna parte 
 
 zampuzarse 
 
 en 
 
 agua 
 
 zapatearse 
 
 con 
 
 alguno 
 
 zozobrar 
 
 en 
 FINIS. 
 
 la tormenta 
 
 C. Baldwin, Printer; New Bridge-street, Londoa» 
 
+t 
 
 
 
 
 
 

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 003 213 030 6